Usmc MCWP 3-15-1

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com on 2011-05-19T4:03:20.
MCWP 3-15.1
Machine Guns and Machine

Gun Gunnery
U.S. Marine Corps
PCN 143 000014 00

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY

Headquarters United States Marine Corps
Washington, D.C. 20380-0001
1 September 1996
Foreword
1. PURPOSE
Marine Corps Warfighting Publication (MCWP) 3-15.1, Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gun-
nery, describes how various machine guns are maintained and employed by the U.S. Marine
Corps' machine gun crews. It also provides the principles and techniques for their use in engag-
ing and destroying enemy targets.
2. SCOPE
This reference publication is designed for machine gunners, platoon commanders, platoon ser-
geants, S-3 officers and chiefs, armorers, and ammunition technicians. It outlines a standardized
way to train Marine machine gunners through the use of gunnery tables.
3. SUPERSESSION
FMFRP 6-15, Machineguns and Machinegun Gunnery, dated 17 August 1988.
4. CHANGES
Recommendations for improving this manual are invited from commands as well as directly from
individuals. Forward suggestions, using the User Suggestion Form format, to—
Commanding General
Doctrine Division (C 42)
Marine Corps Combat Development Command
3300 Russell Road Suite 318A
Quantico, Virginia 22134-5021
5. CERTIFICATION
Reviewed and approved this date.
BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS
PAUL K. VAN RIPER

Lieutenant General, U.S. Marine Corps
Commanding General
Marine Corps Combat Development Command
Quantico, Virginia
DISTRIBUTION: 143 000014 00
_____________________________________________________________________
Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery iii
______________________________________________________________________
Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery v
_____________________________________________________________________
Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery vii
Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery
Table of Contents
Page
Chapter 1. Introduction to Machine Guns
Chapter 2. Machine Gun, Light, Squad Automatic Weapon, M249

Section 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Section 2. Disassembly and Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Section 3. Functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Section 4. Malfunctions and Stoppages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Section 5. Mounts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Section 6. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Section 7. Ammunition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Section 8. Operation and Firing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Section 9. Qualification Firing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Chapter 3. Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240G

Section 2. Disassembly, Assembly, and Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Section 9. Gun Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Section 10. Qualification Firing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Section 11. Firing with Blank Ammunition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Chapter 4. Machine Gun, Caliber .50, Browning, M2HB

Section 3. Headspace and Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Section 10. Gun Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Section 11. Qualification Firing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
viii MCWP 3-15.1
Chapter 5. Machine Gun, 40mm, MK-19 MOD 3

Section 6. Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Section 7. Ammunition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Section 9. Gun Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Chapter 6. Employment and Gunnery

Section 2. Characteristics of Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Section 3. Classes of Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Section 4. Range Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Section 5. Traversing and Elevating Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Section 6. Fire Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Section 7. Methods of Target Engagement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Section 8. Overhead Fires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Section 9. Techniques of Predetermined Fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Section 10. Final Protective Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Section 11. Range Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Section 12. Firing From Defilade Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Section 13. Machine Gunner’s Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Section 14. Antiaircraft Gunnery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Section 15. Firing Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Section 16. Wire Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Appendices
Appendix A. M60E3/M240G Firing Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Appendix B. M2 .50 Cal Firing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Appendix C. MK-19 MOD 3 Firing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Appendix D. Destruction of Machine Guns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Appendix E. Infantry Plotting Board M17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Appendix F. Adjustment of Indirect Machine Gun Fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Appendix G. Final Protective Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Appendix H. Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Appendix I. References and Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
Notes
Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE GUNS

“For their part the machine-gun units must be on the alert to seize and exploit every opportu-
nity to assist the forward movement of the rifle units, without waiting for specific orders to en-
gage a particular targe or locality.”
—FMFRP 12-2, Infantry In Battle1
“Leaders must know what the guns can do before the attack starts, what they can do while the
attack is in progress, and what they can do during reorganization and consolidation. They
must learn to seek and to recognize opportunities for employing machine guns in every phase
of the action. Finally, they must have the aggressiveness to keep everlastingly at the task of
getting the guns forward, so that when opportunity does present, they will be able to seize it.”
—FMFRP 12-2, Infantry In Battle2
Desert Storm, Kuwait

A Marine Machine Gunner Scans the Desert For Targets
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
1-2 MCWP 3-15.1
Table of Contents
1001 History 1004 Principles of Machine Gun Employment
1002 Types of Machine Guns
1003 Machine Gun Employment
List of Figures
1-1 Marine Automatic Rifleman, Operation 1-3 Heavy Machine Gun Squad in Training
Desert Shield During Operation Desert Shield
1-2 Marines From the Enlisted Instructor
Company Train New Lieutenants in the Field,
The Basic School, Quantico, Virginia
Chapter 1
Introduction to Machine Guns
1001. History “The machine gun acts by fire alone; move-

ment of this weapon has no other purpose than to
Despite their post-Civil War development, modern secure positions from which more effective fire can be
machine guns didn’t begin to exhibit their full potential delivered. Maximum usefulness is obtained only when
in battle until World War I. The effects on employ- every gun within range of the enemy is firing effec-
ment of these new weapons systems altered the doctri- tively against him.”4
nal way of waging war for both Allied and Axis
powers. Properly employed machine guns proved to be “Although machine guns lend themselves
devastating to massed infantry formations and paved more readily to the defense than to the attack, this is
the way for the creation of a whole new methodology no excuse for a failure to exact the utmost from them
of warfighting. The machine gun became the keystone in support of advancing troops. The handicaps to
of the infantry defense and a major supplier of organic their effective employment in the attack can be and
firepower in the offense. New tactics were being devel- must be overcome.”5
oped by both sides to not only exploit the effects of the
Though the weapons themselves have changed over
machine gun, but to counter the enemy’s machine gun
the years and will continue to do so, the basic consid-
employment capabilities.
erations for their employment remain constant. The
excerpts from FMFRP 12-2, listed above, serve as
The machine gun changed the face of modern warfare reminders of this fact, and the lessons contained in
just as surely as the development of aircraft and preci- them are just as applicable today as when they were
sion indirect fire artillery. The impact of this weapon first written.
can be seen not only in military writings of that
period, but in the principles of employment still in use
1002. Types of Machine Guns
today. FMFRP 12-2, Infantry in Battle, a compilation
of lessons learned from World War I, provides a Machine guns are classified as light, medium, or
wealth of knowledge concerning the employment of heavy. Classifications are determined by a combina-
machine guns. These lessons remain applicable and tion of weapon caliber, weapon system weight, crew
are still studied today, almost 70 years later. The size, and the primary type of intended target.
proper employment of machine guns has won many a
battle at the company and platoon level, and a well a. Light Machine Guns/Automatic Rifles. The
rehearsed, proficient machine gun team can some- light machine gun (LMG) classification generally
times make the difference between success and fail- includes .22 to .250 caliber (5.45mm to 6mm) auto-
ure on the battlefield. Military history is filled with matic weapons. An LMG typically weighs between 15
examples of the impact that machine guns and their and 30 pounds, complete. An LMG is normally
gunners have had in turning the tide of battle: manned by a crew of one or two individuals depend-
ing on the accessories being used. Neither a tripod nor
a spare barrel is normally used with an LMG when it
“Machine guns affect the outcome of battle by is manned by a single individual. Bullet weights for
fire power alone. Guns that have not fired have not LMGs normally range from 45 to 72 grains. They are
attacked, no matter how many times they have been optimally employed against exposed and lightly pro-
placed in position.”3 tected personnel at ranges less than 1,000 meters. In
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
1-4 MCWP 3-15.1
this category, the Marine Corps employs the squad c. Heavy Machine Guns. The heavy machine gun
automatic weapon, M249, 5.56mm. Figure 1-1 pro- (HMG) classification generally includes .50 caliber
vides an example of a Marine using an LMG. or larger (12.7mm to 15mm) automatic weapons. The
system weight of a heavy machine gun is substantial.
b. Medium Machine Guns. This medium machine In a ready to fire configuration using a ground tripod,
gun (MMG) classification generally includes .264 to an HMG without ammunition can weigh more than
.33 caliber (6.5mm to 8mm) automatic weapons. Typ- 125 pounds. An HMG is normally manned by a crew
ical MMG weights are 25 pounds or more when of four or more personnel (although a crew of three
loaded with 50 rounds of ammunition. Remaining may be sufficient if motor vehicles or draft animals
ammunition, ground tripod, spare barrel, and other are employed for transportation over distance). The
accessories can add another 25 pounds or more to the common bullet weight of an HMG is 700 grains or
overall weight of MMG systems. The MMG is gener- larger. HMGs are primarily employed against field
ally employed by a crew of three. A MMG generally fortifications, vehicles, and aircraft. They are gener-
uses bullets that weigh between 140 and 220 grains. ally effective against these types of targets at ranges
Optimally, they are employed against personnel and of 1,000 meters or greater. The machine guns from
light materials ( e.g., motor vehicles) at ranges of this category currently employed by the Marine Corps
1500 meters or less. In this category, the Marine are the caliber .50, Browning, M2HB, machine gun
Corps employs several variants of the 7.62mm, and the 40mm, MK-19 MOD 3 machine gun. Figure
M240G machine gun. Figure 1-2 show Marines train- 1-3 portrays a HMG squadron during Operation
ing with a MMG. Desert Shield.
Figure 1-1. Marine Automatic Rifleman, Operation Desert Shield.

____________________________________________________________________
Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery 1-5
1003. Machine Gun Employment 1004. Principles of Machine Gun

Employment
Properly employed, the machine gun provides a high
volume of accurate fire in support of the infantry in Maximum efficiency in the tactical employment of all
both the offense and defense. In the offense, the types of machine guns can be reached by applying the
machine gun can add firepower to the assault, but it is following principles during planning. Most tactical sit-
often best employed to suppress or neutralize the uations would benefit from the employment of all eight
objective from a base of fire. The long-range, close principles simultaneously. However, in actuality, these
defensive, and final protective fires of the machine principles are prioritized according to the tactical situa-
gun provide an integral part of the defense against tion and some may be abandoned in favor of others that
infantry attack. HMGs may also be used to destroy are more crucial. These principles are not meant to
lightly armored vehicles or as defense against slow- serve as absolutes. They are, however, sound ideas,
moving, low-flying aircraft. In addition, the machine proven in combat, that should be understood and con-
gun is used effectively in convoy security, point sidered by all personnel involved in the operation and
defense of rear area facilities, and other rear-area employment of machine guns. Chapter 6 addresses
security missions. detailed employment of today’s weapons.
Figure 1-2. Marines From the Enlisted Instructor Company Train New Lieutenants
in the Field, The Basic School, Quantico, Virginia.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
1-6 MCWP 3-15.1
a. Mutual Support. No machine gun should be position out since this leaves them vulnerable to a
placed in isolation. Machine guns should be placed flanking attack. A fire team, or perhaps even larger
where they can cover each other by fire, fires of one element, should be positioned outboard of the gun
machine gun can help defeat attacks on another position. This securely “tucks” the machine guns into
machine gun. Another reason to place guns so that the defense.
they cover each other is so one gun can fire directly at
the other position if it is overrun. In some instances, it b. Employed in Pairs. Employing machine guns
may be necessary to have other weapons (AT-4 or in pairs ensures a continuous, high volume of fire. It
M203) provide covering fire. also gives the guns the capability of efficiently engag-
ing targets of larger width or depth than one machine
An important facet of the principle of mutual support gun could effectively engage alone. Employment in
is security. Protection of machine guns should be of pairs also provides the opportunity for continued fire
primary concern. Since machine gun positions inflict from one machine gun while the other machine gun is
devastating fire upon the enemy, they will come under reloading or clearing a malfunction or stoppage.
concentrated attacks by the enemy in his attempt to
stop the attack. To provide protection and security, c. Coordination of Fire. Ensure machine gun fire
well-placed riflemen, and/or automatic riflemen are is coordinated with the fires of other machine guns
placed so they can cover approaches that the enemy and other weapons. In the defensive, the machine gun
may use to attack the guns. For example, although forms the backbone around which other infantry
machine guns should be placed on the flanks to pro- weapons are organized. The machine gun fire plan
vide defense, they should not be placed in the last must be studied by the leader, other fires are then
Figure 1-3. Heavy Machine Gun Squad in Training During Operation Desert Shield.
____________________________________________________________________
planned to complement the machine gun fire plan. form a “wall of steel” between friendly positions and
For example: the enemy.
Dead space in a machine gun’s final protective g. Cover and Concealment. Well-planned and
line (FPL) is covered by other indirect and/or well-prepared alternate and supplementary posi-
direct fire weapons. tions that provide cover and concealment for
Indirect fire planned to concentrate along the line machine guns are essential. Employ machine guns
from a covered and concealed position and do not
where the machine gun’s FPL is expected to stop
open fire until necessary. Once machine guns open
the enemy, hitting him when he seeks cover.
fire they may be located by the enemy. Once
machine gun positions are located, they become a
In the offensive, machine gun fire must be coordi- high priority target for the enemy. When tactically
nated with other weapons systems to ensure comple- feasible, employ machine guns from a defilade or
mentary or additive effects against the enemy during partial defilade position. This provides cover and
all phases, i.e.; preparation firing, final assault, con- some concealment. The use of cover and conceal-
solidation, and pursuit by fire. ment protects the guns and their crews.
d. Positioned in Defilade. If at all possible, gun
h. Economy. Machine guns fire at high rates mak-
positions should be in defilade. As previously dis-
ing excessive ammunition consumption a concern.
cussed, the enemy will quickly target gun positions,
Wasteful use of ammunition can severely jeopardize
trying to neutralize or destroy them. Placing the
the success of an operation if resupply is slowed or
machine guns in defilade provides them with some sub-
halted by enemy action, weather, terrain, and/or other
stantial cover between them and the enemy’s direct fire
factors beyond friendly control. Therefore, a detailed,
weapons. This could be essential to their survival.
accurate mission analysis plans to use only those
e. Positioned to Produce Enfilade Fire. To types and amounts of ammunition that will effec-
achieve the greatest effect from the machine gun, tively cripple or destroy the enemy. Rates of fire are
position it so that the long axis of the beaten zone used when determining a mission analysis.
coincides with the long axis of the target. This type of
To conserve ammunition, gunners can be taught to
fire, called enfilade fire, causes the maximum amount
count the length of the burst and to time the pause in
of rounds to be concentrated on the maximum amount
between bursts. Another way to conserve/regulate
of targets, significantly increasing the chances of hit-
ammunition expenditure is to employ machine guns in
ting targets. Enfilade fire is normally associated with
pairs or to use alternating fires. In alternating fires, as
flanking fire.
one machine gun finishes its burst and is about to
f. Interlocking Fire. Ensuring that fire from one pause, the other machine gun opens fire This tech-
machine gun position interlocks with the fires of other nique is known as “talking guns”. In addition to con-
machine gun positions prevents gaps through which trolling ammunition consumption, these techniques
the enemy can easily close with and attack friendly also reduce the wear and tear on a machine gun’s
positions. Machine gun fire, properly augmented operating parts and prevent overheating and damage
with obstacles and other weapons effects, should to barrels.
Chapter 2
MACHINE GUN, LIGHT, SQUAD AUTOMATIC WEAPON, M249

“Our main defense was two light machine guns, fairly close together, backup up by two heavy machine guns.
We had our riflemen all around them.
“That’s where Joe comes in. His BAR [Browning Automatic Rifle] was to see that no Koreans would sneak up
and heave a hand grenade at the machine guns....Those machine guns could lay down a field of fire that could
keep the mass of the enemy away, but you had to keep a sharp eye out for those that broke through It would
only take one or two of them to put those guns out of action....
“[Joe] was killed just before the last attack was repulsed....
“....about ten yards forward of Joe there was a dead North Korean sergeant. The fellow had a pistol in one
hand and a hand grenade in the other. He’d obviously been hit by a BAR. Joe must have gotten him just as he
was going to throw a grenade at our machine gunners.”
—Account of Cpl Joseph Vittori, USMC, Company F, 2d Battalion,
1st Marines, in Korea, September 1951. Cpl Vittori was
post-humously awarded the Congressional Medal of Honor.6
Korea, South Bank of the Soyang Gang River

A Light Machine Gun Section Moves into Firing Position.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2-2 MCWP 3-15.1
Table of Contents
Section 1. Introduction Section 6. Maintenance
2101. General Data 2601. Care and Cleaning Before, During, and After
2102. Sights Firing
2103. Safety 2602. Normal Maintenance Procedures
2104. Roles of the SAW 2603. Special Maintenance Procedures
2604. Inspection
Section 2. Disassembly and Assembly
2201. General Disassembly
2202. General Assembly Section 7. Ammunition
2203. Detailed Disassembly and Assembly 2701. Classification
2702. Identification
Section 3. Functioning 2703. Ballistic Data
2301. Feeding 2704. Ammunition Packaging
2302. Chambering 2705. Storage
2303. Locking 2706. Care, Handling, and Preservation of Ammunition
2304. Firing
2305. Unlocking
Section 8. Operation and Firing
2306. Extracting
2307. Ejecting 2801. Loading
2308. Cocking 2802. Unloading
2803. Operation of the Safety
Section 4. Malfunctions and Stoppages 2804. Firing the SAW
2401. Malfunctions 2805. Change Barrel Procedures
2402. Stoppages
2403. Immediate Action Section 9. Qualification Firing
2404. Remedial Action
2901. Fundamentals of Marksmanship
Section 5. Mounts and Accessories 2902. Position and Grip
2501. Bipod 2903. Sight Settings and BZO Procedures
2502. Spare Barrel Bag 2904. 10-Meter Firing
2503. Night Vision Sights 2905. Transition Firing
List of Figures
2-1 The SAW (Left and Right Sides) 2-15 Operating Group, Detailed Disassembled
2-4 Five Main Groups (General Assembly) 2-16 Removing the Heat Shield
2-3 Safety 2-17 Removing the Collar
2-5. Clearing Procedures 2-18 Removing the Gas Regulator
2-2. Front and Rear Sights 2-19 Barrel Group, Detail Disassembled
2-6. Removing the Operating Group 2-21 Removing the Handguard
2-7. Removing the Barrel Group 2-22 Removing the Gas Cylinder
2-8. Removing the Buttstock and Buffer Group 2-20 Replacing the Collar
2-9. Removing the Trigger Group 2-23 Removing the Bipod
2-10. Replacing the Trigger Group 2-24 Receiver Group, Detail Disassembled
2-11. Replacing the Buttstock and Buffer Group 2-25 Replacing the Gas Cylinder
2-12. Replacing the Barrel Group 2-26 Malfunctions
2-13. Replacing the Operating Group 2-27 Stoppages
2-14. Separating the Operating Group 2-28 Lowering the Bipod
____________________________________________________________________
2-29 Folding of Bipod Under the Handguard 2-47 Loading a Magazine

2-30 Spare Barrel Bag 2-48 Prone Position, Bipod-Supported
2-31 Mounting the Bracket and the Device 2-49 Firing From the Hip (Preferred Assault
2-32 Centered Reticle Pattern Fire Technique)
2-33 Reticle Aiming Point and the Target 2-50 Firing From Under the Arm
Aiming Point 2-51 Sight Picture
2-34 SAW Tool Storage 2-52 Sliding Scale on Sight
2-35 Cleaning the Gas Vent Hole 2-53 Windage and Elevation (Peep Sight)
2-36 Cleaning the Central Hole Correction Chart
2-37 Cleaning the Grooves of the Body 2-54 Zero Group Size
2-38 Cleaning the Front Interior and Internal 2-56 Grid Square Overlay
Grooves of the Gas Cylinder 2-55 Basic Machine Gun Target
2-39 Cleaning the Grooves of the Piston 2-57 Shot Group on Basic Machine Gun Target
2-40 Cleaning the Hole in the Front of the Piston 2-58 Overlay Placed Over Pasters
2-41 Cartridges for the SAW 2-59 Common Errors of Marksmanship
2-42 Cartridges in Metallic Belt 2-60 Firing Table I
2-43 Ballistic Data for 5.56mm Ammunition 2-61 Firing Table II
2-44 Condition Codes for the SAW 2-62 Single E-Type and Double E-Type
2-45 Loading Silhouette Targets
2-46 Loading an Ammunition Belt
Chapter 2
MACHINE GUN, LIGHT, SQUAD AUTOMATIC WEAPON, M249

SAW can use a 20 or 30 round M16 rifle magazine,
Section 1 but this will increase the chance of stoppages.
Introduction
The SAW can be fired from the hip, or underarm
The machine gun, light, squad automatic weapon, using assault fire techniques; however, the preferred
M249 (SAW) is a gas-operated, air-cooled, belt or method of employment is to fire from the bipod-stead-
magazine-fed, automatic weapon that fires from the ied position. The bipod gives the weapon the stability
open-bolt position (see figure 2-1). It has a maximum needed to engage targets at its maximum effective
rate of fire of 850 rounds per minute. Primarily, range. The SAW has a spare barrel to allow quick bar-
ammunition is fed into the weapon from a 200-round rel changes during employment; however, barrels
ammunition box containing a disintegrating metallic must not be interchanged with those from other SAWs
split-link belt. As an emergency means of feeding, the unless the headspace has been set for that weapon by
Figure 2-1. The SAW (Left and Right Sides).

____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2-6 MCWP 3-15.1
ordnance personnel. Each automatic rifleman and 2102. Sights

assistant automatic rifleman should have ready access
to TM 08671A-10/1A, a detailed, pocket-sized refer- The SAW has a hooded and semi-fixed front sight
ence manual for operators of the SAW. (see figure 2-2A). The rear sight assembly (see fig-
ure 2-2B) mounts on the top of the cover and feed
mechanism assembly. The elevation knob drum has
2101. General Data range settings from 300 meters to 1,000 meters.
Range changes are made on the SAW sight by rotat-
Weight of SAW: ing the elevation knob to the desired range setting.
With bipod and tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 pounds Rotation of the rear sight aperture (peep sight) is
With 200 round drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.92 pounds used for fine changes in elevation or range adjust-
ments, such as during zeroing. Each click of the peep
Measurements: sight (180-degree turn) equals a one-half-mil change
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.87 inches in elevation, which is .5 cm at 10 meters. The sight
Muzzle velocity adjusts for windage by rotating the windage knob.
Ball ammunition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,025 feet per second Each click of windage adjustment also equals a one-
Tracer ammunition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,870 feet per second
half-mil change, which is .5 cm at 10 meters. There
Rifling . . . . . . . . . Standard right hand twist one turn in 7 inches
is also a windage sliding scale marked with index
lines for centering the rear sight aperture.
Ranges:
Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,600 meters
Maximum effective 2103. Safety
Point targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 meters
Area targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,000 meters The safety (figure 2-3) is in the trigger housing. The
Grazing fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 meters safety is pushed from left to right (red ring NOT visi-
ble) to render the weapon SAFE, and the bolt cannot
Ammunition: be released to go forward. The safety is pushed from
Caliber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.56 milimeter right to left (red ring visible) to render the weapon
Types in use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ball, tracer, blank, and dummy ready to fire. The cocking handle on the right side of
Basic allowance . . . . . . . . . . . . .600 rounds per SAW, carried by the weapon is used to pull the bolt to the rear.
the automatic rifleman and
assistant automatic rifleman
Weight of full 200 round drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.92 pounds
2104. Roles of the SAW
Rates of fire: From the mid-1960s to the mid-1980s the Marine
Sustained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 rounds per minute, Corps operated with an automatic weapon at the
fired in 3 to 5 round bursts, squad/fire team level that was extremely limited. The
4 to 5 seconds between bursts
no barrel changes automatic rifleman’s weapon (the M16A1) was the
same weapon carried by the other members of the fire
Rapid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 rounds per minute, team. The automatic rifleman had no unique capabili-
fired in 6 to 8 round bursts,
2 to 3 seconds between bursts, ties or equipment except that he was given a remov-
barrel change every 2 minutes able, “clip on” bipod for his weapon. This shortfall
was remedied with the introduction of the SAW in the
Cyclic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 rounds per minute,
continuous burst, late 1980s. The Marine Corps has never had a more
barrel change every minute capable and versatile weapon at the squad level. Prior
to the fielding of the SAW, the Browning automatic
____________________________________________________________________
rifle had been the last automatic weapon used by the and provides additional flexibility to the unit leader in
Corps that provided significant fire power to the rifle terms of weapons employment options.
squad beyond the capabilities of the other small arms
carried within it. Various models of the Browning
automatic rifle were used by Marine units from World
Section 2
War I to the early 1960s. Even the much respected
Disassembly and Assembly
Browning automatic rifle, that served the Corps so
well for over 40 years, had limitations that the design
The SAW is designed for easy disassembly and assem-
of the SAW has overcome. The Browning was an
bly; the use of force is not necessary and no special
automatic rifle and it had some design limitations
tools are required. As the weapon is disassembled,
common to other rifles of its day. These included a
place the parts (in the order in which they are removed)
limited ammunition supply (only a 20 round box mag-
on a clean, flat surface. This reduces the possibility of
azine), problems with overheating during continuous
losing a part and aids in assembly, as all parts are
firing (because of a fixed barrel that could not be
replaced in reverse order. To prevent unnecessary wear,
changed by the operator), and a limited maximum
disassembly should be kept to the minimum, consistent
effective range.
with maintenance and training requirements.
Although employed as an automatic rifle by the Disassembly and assembly may be divided into two
Marine Corps, the SAW is designed like a medium categories; general and detailed. General disassembly
machine gun. As such it has design features that make involves separation of the weapon into main groups.
it a more versatile weapon, such as; it can be belt or This is also known as field stripping and is a practice
magazine fed thus providing more continuous fire that stems from past experience in combat situations.
before reloading and it has a quick change barrel fea- The intent behind designating main groups for a
ture which allows barrel changes during periods of weapon and the practice of field stripping is to allow
continuous firing without taking the weapon out of the operator to quickly break the weapon down into a
action for more than a few seconds. The SAW also set of major components that can be hastily cleaned to
has greater effective range and a higher rate of fire keep the weapon ready for action. The idea is to disas-
than any other weapon in the present rifle squad. semble the weapon just far enough to conduct basic
cleaning without having to contend with numerous
The SAW can provide a heavy volume of continuous, assemblies and parts.
accurate fire in support of offensive or defensive oper-
ations. Its presence in large numbers (e.g., nine per Detailed disassembly, for the operator, involves the
rifle platoon) at the small unit level has significantly removal of some of the component parts and assem-
increased the combat power of those units. In the past, blies from the main groups. The idea here is that,
medium machine guns were often attached to platoons when the situation and conditions permit, the opera-
or squads, more out of concern over the lack of fire tor can then take the time to more fully disassemble
power in those small units than for sound tactical rea- and thoroughly clean the weapon. Complete general
sons. The introduction of the SAW into those units and detailed disassembly is normally the expected
has changed that. The SAW provides the platoons routine in garrison after the completion of firing and/
with significant fire power against enemy personnel or field training, but this may also be conducted in a
and light equipment. Because of this, more times than field environment when necessary, to ensure the
not, the company’s machine gun section can now be proper functioning and maintenance of the weapon.
employed as a section, in a general or direct support Disassembly of the weapon beyond that described in
role, rather than attached out. The SAW’s presence, in this publication is not authorized, except by qualified
any type of unit, increases the available fire power ordnance personnel.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2-8 MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-2. Front and Rear Sights.
Figure 2-3. Safety.

____________________________________________________________________
2201. General Disassembly CAUTION

When opening the feed cover, make sure the weapon
General disassembly is the separation of the SAW is on the ground away from your face. With the weap-
into five main groups (see figure 2-4). They are the on on your shoulder, possible injury could occur if a
operating group, the barrel group, the trigger group, round goes off when the cover is raised.
the buttstock and buffer group, and the receiver group.
Raise the cover and feed mechanism assembly and

a. Clearing the Weapon. The first step in disas-
conduct the five-point safety check for brass, links,
sembly is to clear the weapon (see figure 2-5). This
or ammunition.
applies in all situations, not just after firing. The auto-
1. Check the feed pawl assembly under the feed
matic rifleman must always assume the SAW is loaded.
cover.
To clear the SAW, perform the following procedures:
2. Check the feed tray assembly.
3. Lift the feed tray assembly and inspect the
Move the safety to the FIRE position by pushing it chamber.
to the left until the red ring is visible. 4. Check the space between the bolt assembly and
With the right hand, palm up, pull the cocking han- the chamber.
dle to the rear, locking the bolt in place. 5. Insert two fingers of the left hand in the
magazine well to extract any ammunition or
While holding the resistance on the cocking handle,
brass.
move the safety to the SAFE position by pushing it
Close the cover and feed mechanism assembly and
to the right until the red ring is not visible. (The
move the safety to the FIRE position. With the right
weapon cannot be placed on safe unless the bolt is
hand, palm up, return the cocking handle to the rear
locked to the rear.)
position. Press the trigger and at the same time ease
Return and lock the cocking handle in the forward the bolt forward by manually riding the cocking
position. handle forward.
Figure 2-4. Five Main Groups (General Assembly).

2-10 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-5. Clearing Procedures.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-5. Clearing Procedures—Continued.

2-12 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
b. Removing the Operating Group. Once the To release the operating rod assembly from the
weapon is clear, general disassembly begins by positioning grooves inside the receiver, hold the
removing the operating group. The operating group weapon with one hand on the buttstock assembly
consists of the spring guide rod, operating rod spring, and use the thumb of the other hand to push in and
slide assembly, piston assembly, and bolt assembly. upward on the rear of the operating rod assembly.
Pull the operating rod and spring from the receiver
To remove the operating group, first pull the upper group and separate the parts. See figure 2-6, step 2.
retaining pin at the rear of the receiver that holds Hold the buttstock assembly with the left hand to
the buttstock to the left. Allow the buttstock to stabilize the weapon. With the right hand, pull the
pivot downward and place it on a surface to support cocking handle to the rear to lock the bolt. Return
the weapon for disassembly. See figure 2-6, step 1. the cocking handle to the forward position. Place a
Figure 2-6. Removing the Operating Group.

___________________________________________________________________
finger on the face of the bolt and push until the fin- receiver to the left. It is a captured pin; it is not
ger makes contact with the bridge at the end of the removed. Remove the buttstock and shoulder assem-
receiver. This leaves the piston, slide, and bolt bly by pulling it rearward, while supporting the trig-
assemblies exposed. ger mechanism.
Hold the slide assembly while pulling the moving
parts out the rear of the receiver. See figure 2-6,
step 3.
c. Removing the Barrel Group. The barrel group

consists of barrel, heat shield, flash suppressor, front
sight, gas regulator, and gas regulator collar. See fig-
ure 2-7.
CAUTION
Barrels must not be interchanged with those from oth-
er SAWs unless the headspace has been certified for
that weapon by ordnance personnel.
Figure 2-8. Removing the Buttstock and

Buffer Group.
e. Removing the Trigger Group. To separate the

trigger group, push the lowermost retaining pin that
was used to release the buttstock all the way to the left
and remove the trigger assembly from the bottom of
the receiver. See figure 2-9.
CAUTION
The upper and lower retaining pins in the rear of the
Figure 2-7. Removing the Barrel Group.
receiver are captured pins. Do not attempt to remove
them completely.
To remove the barrel from the receiver, close the

Once the trigger group has been removed general dis-
cover and feed mechanism assembly, depress the
assembly is complete.
barrel locking lever with the left hand, lift the carry-
ing handle using the right hand, and push the barrel
forward. 2202. General Assembly
d. Removing the Buttstock and Buffer Group.

The SAW is assembled in reverse order of the
disassembly.
To remove the buttstock and buffer assembly (see fig-
ure 2-8), use a cartridge or the spring guide rod to a. Replacing the Trigger Group. Align the trig-
push the lowermost retaining pin on the rear of the ger mechanism with the slot on the bottom of the
2-14 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-9. Removing the Trigger Group
receiver. Hold the trigger mechanism in position to is locked into the receiver by pulling or lifting on the
accomplish the next step. See figure 2-10. carrying handle. See figure 2-12.
b. Replacing the Buttstock and Buffer Group. d. Replacing the Operating Group
Align the lower hole in the buttstock and buffer group
Open the cover assembly on the receiver. Insert the
with the rear hole in the trigger mechanism, then push
face of the piston into the receiver, aligning the bolt
the lower retaining pin to the right. See figure 2-11.
lugs onto the receiver rails. Pull the trigger and
c. Replacing the Barrel Group. Depress the bar- push the moving parts forward until the bolt is
rel locking lever to the rear with the left hand, while seated into the chamber.
holding the carrying handle with the right hand. Pull
the barrel rearward and push downward; align the gas
regulator with the gas cylinder and lock it by releasing
the barrel locking lever. Check the barrel to ensure it
Figure 2-11. Replacing the Buttstock and

Figure 2-10. Replacing the Trigger Group. Buffer Group.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-12. Replacing the Barrel Group.
Place the operating rod tip into the operating rod Grasp the cocking handle with the right hand, palm
spring. Then, insert the free end of the operating up, and pull and hold it to the rear.
rod and spring into the rear of the piston. Depress Move the safety to the FIRE position.
the rear of the operating rod assembly until the two
lugs on the buffer are positioned in the receiver While continuing to hold resistance on the cocking
grooves. See figure 2-13. handle, use the left hand to pull the trigger and ease
the bolt forward to prevent it from slamming into
Pivot the buttstock upward into position and push the chamber area and damaging the face of the bolt.
the upper retaining pin to the right, locking the
buttstock to the receiver.
e. Conducting a Function Check. A function

check must be performed to ensure that the SAW has
been assembled correctly. The procedures, in order,
are—
Grasp the cocking handle with the right hand, palm
up, and pull the bolt to the rear locking it in place.
While continuing to hold the resistance on the
cocking handle, use the left hand to move the safety
to the SAFE position.
Push the cocking handle forward into the forward
lock position.
Pull the trigger. (The weapon should not fire.) Figure 2-13. Replacing the Operating Group.
2-16 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
If the weapon fails the function check, check for authorized for the operator level. This is not to be
missing parts or the reassembly procedures. (Before confused with procedures authorized for 2d echelon
disassembling the weapon, make sure it is posi- maintenance (unit armorers) or above. Detailed disas-
tioned where the guide rod and spring cannot cause sembly of any of the groups beyond that described in
bodily harm if the bolt is locked to the rear.) this document is NOT AUTHORIZED except by
qualified ordnance personnel.
CAUTION The operator is not authorized to detail disassemble
The bolt must be eased forward to prevent damage to the trigger group or the buttstock and buffer group.
the cover and feed mechanism assembly and operating The other three groups can be further disassembled by
rod group. This is known as “riding” the bolt forward. the operator as described below:
a. Operating Group
NOTE
The cover and feed mechanism assembly can be (1) Detailed disassembly
closed with the bolt in either the forward or the To separate the operating group (see figure 2-14),
rearward position. hold the piston assembly in one hand, place the
other hand on the bolt assembly, and rotate the bolt
2203. Detailed Disassembly and Assembly to disengage the bolt from the slide assembly.
To separate the slide assembly from the piston,
The term detailed disassembly, as it is used in this press the retaining pin at the rear of the slide
manual, refers only to those disassembly procedures assembly to the left and lift the slide assembly.
Figure 2-14. Separating the Operating Group.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-15. Operating Group, Detailed Disassembled.
This completes detailed disassembly of the operat- Place the bolt on the slide assembly, aligning the
ing group. See figure 2-15. driving lug of the bolt with the slot of the slide
assembly. Apply pressure to the face of the bolt to
(2) Detailed assembly compress the firing pin spring. Then, rotate the bolt
to hook the driving lug into the slide assembly.
Hold the piston in one hand with the face of the
piston facing outward and the sear notches down- b. Barrel Group
ward. With the other hand, place the slide assembly
onto the rear of the piston with the firing pin (1) Detailed disassembly
toward the front of the piston. (Check the slide To remove the heat shield, place the barrel with the
assembly retaining pin to make sure it is out.) muzzle end on a hard, flat surface with the heat
Push the slide assembly retaining pin to the right. shield facing away from the body. Place the index
This locks the piston assembly and the slide assem- fingers of each hand inside the chamber. Use the
bly together. thumbs to push up on the top clip. See figure 2-16.
Figure 2-16. Removing the Heat Shield.

2-18 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
To remove the gas regulator and collar, rotate the the concave portion of the tip on the scraper and
gas collar pin out of the notch. Place the tip of the past the notch until the collar slides off. See figure
scraper with the concave side facing the pin of the 2-17.
collar inside the notch. (Be careful not to use too To remove the gas regulator (see figure 2-18), sep-
much pressure, so as not to break the tip of the arate it from the gas block. This completes detailed
scraper.) Rotate the collar counterclockwise over disassembly of the barrel group. See figure 2-19.
Figure 2-17. Removing the Collar.

___________________________________________________________________
Replace the heat shield by placing the hook end of

the heat shield under the front sight post and press
down until the clamps lock on the barrel.
c. Receiver Group
(1) Detailed disassembly

Removing the handguard. The handguard assembly
consists of the handguard, handguard retaining pin,
and cleaning equipment retaining clip. Push the
handguard retaining pin to the left using a length of
cleaning rod (see figure 2-21, step 1, page 2-21);
then pull the handguard down (see figure 2-21, step
2, page 2-21).
Figure 2-18. Removing the

Gas Regulator. CAUTION
The handguard retaining pin is a captured pin. Do not
attempt to remove it completely.
(2) Detailed assembly
Insert the gas regulator into the gas block and align Removing the gas cylinder. To remove the gas cyl-
the notch on the gas regulator with the notch of the inder from the receiver (see figure 2-22, page 2-
gas block. 22), grasp the gas cylinder at the top of the bipod
With the gas regulator installed and supported on a legs, turn it to the left or right to release the locking
firm surface, place the gas regulator collar onto the spring, and then pull it away from receiver.
protruding end of the body and align the spring Removing the bipod. Once the gas cylinder is
with the stud. Push the gas regulator collar firmly removed, remove the bipod (see figure 2-23, page
downward and rotate it until it slips into place. 2-22) by pulling it away from the receiver. This
Then, press it in and rotate it to lock it in place. See completes detailed disassembly of the receiver. See
figure 2-20, page 2-20. figure 2-24, page 2-23.
Figure 2-19. Barrel Group, Detail Disassembled.

2-20 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Section 3
Functioning
The cycle of functioning is broken down into eight

basic steps. These steps are feeding, chambering,
locking, firing, unlocking, extracting, ejection, and
cocking. More than one step may occur simulta-
neously during the cycle of functioning. By under-
standing how the SAW functions, it will be easier to
recognize and correct malfunctions and stoppages
which occur during firing.
The cycle is started by putting the first round of the

belt in the tray groove or by inserting the magazine
into the magazine well. Then the trigger is pulled,
releasing the sear from the sear notch. When the trig-
ger is pulled to the rear, the rear of the sear is low-
ered and disengaged from the sear notch. This allows
the piston and bolt to be driven forward by the
expansion of the operating rod spring. The cycle
Figure 2-20. Replacing the Collar. stops when the trigger is released and the sear again
engages the sear notch on the piston. The sequence
of functioning is as follows:
(2) Detailed assembly 2301. Feeding

Replacing the bipod. Place the bipod on the receiver
group with the bipod legs open and pointed down- As the bolt starts its forward movement, the feed lever
ward. See figure 2-23, page 2-22. is forced to the right, causing the feed-pawl assembly
Replacing the gas cylinder. Push the gas cylinder to turn in the opposite direction. This forces the feed-
through the bipod yoke into the receiver. Push the cyl- pawl assembly over the next round in the belt, and it
inder to the rear while countering the pressure of the is ready to place the next round into the tray groove
locking spring and guiding the end of the cylinder into when the rearward action occurs again. As the bolt
the receiver with the other hand applying downward moves to the rear after firing, the feed roller forces the
pressure. Position the recess in the cylinder near the feed lever to the left. The feed lever is forced to turn,
spring. Turn the cylinder until the spring clicks into the moving the feed pawl to the right. This places a round
recess at the rear of the gas cylinder. See figure 2-25. in the tray groove.
Replacing the handguard. To replace the handguard,

place it on the receiver from the bottom and push it to 2302. Chambering
the rear until it stops. Using the guide rod, push the
handguard retaining pin to the right, which locks the As the bolt travels forward, the upper locking lug
handguard into position. Push the handguard down to engages the rim of the round. The pressure of the
make sure it is locked. See figure 2-21. front and rear cartridge guides holds the round so that
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-21. Removing the Handguard.
positive contact is made with the upper locking lug of 2303. Locking
the bolt. The front cartridge guide prevents forward
movement of the link as the round is stripped from the As the round is chambered, the bolt enters the barrel
belt. The upper locking lug carries the round forward. socket. The upper and lower locking lugs contact the
The chambering ramp causes the nose of the round to bolt camming surfaces inside the barrel and start turn-
be crammed downward into the chamber. When the ing the bolt clockwise. The action of the bolt into the
round is fully seated in the chamber, the extractor slide assembly, as the piston continues forward, turns
snaps over the rim of the round, and the ejector on the bolt to complete its 90 degree (one-quarter turn)
the rail inside the receiver is depressed. clockwise rotation. Locking is now complete.
2-22 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-22. Removing the Gas Cylinder.
Figure 2-23. Removing the Bipod.
2304. Firing ues to the rear, the slide assembly, also moving to the
rear, causes the bolt to begin its counterclockwise
After the bolt is fully forward and locked, the piston rotation. The upper and lower locking lugs of the bolt
continues to go forward, independent of the bolt, for a contact the bolt camming surfaces inside the barrel
short distance. The slide assembly carries the firing socket and, as the bolt continues toward the rear, it
pin through the face of the bolt. The firing pin strikes completes a one-quarter turn counterclockwise. The
the primer of the round and the primer fires the round. rotation and movement to the rear unlocks the bolt
from the barrel socket.
2305. Unlocking
2306. Extracting
After the round is fired and the bullet passes the gas
port, part of the expanding gases go through the gas Extracting begins during the unlocking cycle. The
plug into the gas regulator. The rapidly expanding rotation of the bolt loosens the cartridge case in the
gases enter into the gas cylinder from the gas regula- chamber. As the piston and bolt move to the rear, the
tor, forcing the piston to the rear. As the piston contin- extractor pulls the cartridge case from the chamber.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-24. Receiver Group, Detail Disassembled.
2307. Ejecting
As the cartridge case is pulled from the chamber, the

bolt passes by the ejector. This causes the ejector clip
to expand, forcing the ejector to push the expended
cartridge. The extractor grips the right side of the car-
tridge and causes it to spin from the weapon as it
reaches the ejection port. The empty belt links are
forced out the link ejection port as the rearward move-
ment of the bolt causes the next round to be posi-
tioned in the tray groove.
2308. Cocking
The piston assembly acts against the firing pin, pulling

the firing pin from the primer of the spent cartridge
case. The action of the piston assembly, continuing to
the rear with the firing pin, releases the compression of
the firing pin spring. As long as the trigger is held to
the rear, the SAW will continue to complete the eight
Figure 2-25. Replacing the Gas Cylinder.
steps of functioning automatically. When the trigger is
released and the sear again engages the sear notch, the
2-24 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
cycle of functioning is stopped and the weapon is receiver rails. Excessive loss of gas is usually due to
cocked. To prevent undue wear to the sear and sear loose connections in the gas system. The action taken
notch, the automatic rifleman must hold the trigger to reduce sluggish operation is to move the regulator
firmly to the rear during firing. setting to the high position. The remedy for continued
sluggish operation is to clean, lubricate, tighten, or
replace parts as required.
Section 4
Malfunctions and Stoppages b. Runaway Gun. This is the case when a gun
continues to fire after you have released the trigger;
Automatic riflemen must have a detailed understand- firing is uncontrolled. A runaway gun is usually
ing of the many component parts of their weapon, caused by a worn, broken, or burred sear; the sear
what those parts do during functioning, and what shoulder is unable to grab the operating rod and hold
mechanical problems may be encountered during fir- it to the rear. An excessively worn sear notch on the
ing. This knowledge ensures that those problems can operating rod could also be responsible. To stop a run-
be assessed quickly and corrective action taken. away gun, the automatic rifleman or the assistant
automatic rifleman twist and break the belt of ammu-
nition. The remedy for runaway gun is to replace
2401. Malfunctions worn parts.
A malfunction is a failure of the gun to function satis- Further information on these two malfunctions is
factorily; the gun will fire, but fires improperly. listed in figure 2-26.
Defective ammunition or improper operation of the
gun by a crew member is not considered a malfunc- 2402. Stoppages
tion. Two of the more common malfunctions are slug-
gish operation and runaway gun. A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of function-
a. Sluggish Operation. Instead of firing at its ing caused by faulty action of the weapon or defective
normal rate, a sluggish gun fires very slowly. It can be ammunition. Stoppages are classified by their relation-
due to excessive friction or loss of gas. Excessive fric- ship to the cycle of functioning. Figure 2-27 shows
tion is usually due to lack of lubrication or excessive types of interruptions or stoppages, their probable
dirt/carbon in the gas system or on the bolt and causes, and the corrective actions. Stoppages must be
Figure 2-26. Malfunctions.

___________________________________________________________________
reduced quickly and the weapon returned to action. tridge case, belt link, or round is not ejected, take
Apply immediate action. (See paragraph 2403 below.) remedial action.
2403. Immediate Action WARNING

Immediate action is that action taken by the auto- If nothing is ejected and the barrel is hot
matic rifleman to reduce a stoppage, without investi- (200 or more rounds fired in 2 minutes or
gating its cause, and quickly return the weapon to less), do not open the cover. Push the
action. Two terms used to describe ammunition condi- safety to the right (red ring not visible),
tion should be understood in conjunction with imme- which places the weapon on SAFE. Keep
diate action procedures. the weapon pointed downrange and re-
main clear for 15 minutes, then clear the
A hang fire occurs when the cartridge primer has det- weapon.
onated after being struck by the firing pin but some
problem with the propellant powder causes it to burn
too slowly and this delays the firing of the projectile.
Time (5 seconds) is allotted for this malfunction 2404. Remedial Action
before investigating a stoppage further because injury
to personnel and damage to equipment could occur if Remedial action is any action taken to determine the
the round went off with the cover of the weapon open. cause of a stoppage and to restore the weapon to an
operational condition. This action is taken only after
A cook off occurs when the heat of the barrel is high immediate action did not remedy the problem. See
enough to cause the propellant powder inside the figure 2-27.
round to ignite even though the primer has not been
struck. Immediate action is completed in a total of 10 a. Cold Weapon Procedures. When a stoppage
seconds to ensure that the round is extracted prior to occurs with a cold weapon and immediate action has
the heat of the barrel effecting it. When the round fails failed, use the following procedures:
to extract/eject, further action is delayed (15 minutes)
if the barrel is hot because the gunner must assume While the weapon is on the shoulder, grasp the
that a round is still in the chamber and could cook off cocking handle with the right hand, palm up, pull
at any time prior to the barrel cooling off. the cocking handle to the rear locking the bolt.
While holding the resistance on the cocking handle,
The immediate action procedures for the SAW are— move the safety to SAFE and return the cocking
handle forward.
Wait 5 seconds after the misfire to guard against a
hang fire. Place the weapon on the ground or away from the
Within the next 5 seconds (to guard against a cook face, open the feed cover, and perform the five-
off) pull and lock the cocking handle to the rear point safety check (page 2-9). Reload and continue
while observing the ejection port to see if a car- to fire.
tridge case, belt link, or round is ejected. Ensure If it does not fire, clear the weapon and inspect it
that the bolt remains to the rear to prevent double and the ammunition.
feeding if a round or cartridge case is not ejected.
If a cartridge case, belt link, or a round is ejected, b. Hot Weapon Procedures. If the stoppage
push the cocking handle to its forward position, occurs with a hot weapon (200 or more rounds in 2
take aim on the target, and press the trigger. If the minutes or less), move the safety to SAFE, let the
weapon does not fire, take remedial action. If a car- weapon cool for 15 minutes, and use the same proce-
dures as outlined for cold weapon procedures.
2-26 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-27. Stoppages.

___________________________________________________________________
extend the bipod legs, grasp the foot of each leg

Section 5 and pull down. See figure 2-28.
Mounts and Accessories To retract the bipod legs, push in the latches and
push in the legs.
The SAW is best employed using the bipod for sup- Fold the bipod legs when transporting the weapon.
port. The bipod provides a stable platform that best Hold the two legs together, pull back under the
enables the automatic rifleman to accurately engage handguard, and release so that the hooks on the
targets at the maximum effective range of the weapon. legs grip the handguard. The bipod can be folded
In some situations, however, it may be necessary to only when the legs are in the closed position. See
employ the weapon using assault fire techniques. See figure 2-29.
section 8, Operation and Firing, of this chapter for
more detail.
2502. Spare Barrel Bag
2501. Bipod The spare barrel bag is used to carry a spare barrel for
each SAW. It has an attached carrying strap and zip-
The bipod is used to fire from the prone position or pered exterior pocket for carrying additional cleaning
from a fighting hole. The shoulder rest on the gear or accessories. See figure 2-30.
buttstock provides support for the SAW when fired in
the bipod mode. The gas cylinder holds the bipod in
place. Once the gas cylinder is removed, the bipod can 2503. Night Vision Sights
also be removed from the receiver.
The principal night vision sight used with the SAW is
To lower the bipod legs, hold the legs together and the AN/PVS-4.
pull down and away from the handguard. Release
a. Zeroing the AN/PVS-4. Zeroing aligns the
the legs so that they lock in the vertical position. To
AN/PVS-4 to the SAW. The sight may be zeroed
during daylight or darkness. (TM 11- 5855-238-
10.) To obtain a precise zero, it is best done at 300
meters and at night. If done during daylight, the
daylight cover must be used. Once an AN/PVS-4
has been zeroed on an SAW, anyone who knows
how to use the reticle should fire the weapon effec-
tively. However, there may be some changes in
zero when the objective focus is adjusted to engage
targets at various ranges and when the diopter focus
is adjusted for the vision of different firers. A metal
target is excellent for zeroing purposes, because the
strike of the round can be easily observed with an
AN/PVS-4.
CAUTION
When mounting an AN/PVS-4 to the mounting brack-
et, make sure that the hole for the screw in the AN/
PVS-4 is aligned and flush against the bracket screw.
Figure 2-28. Lowering the Bipod. If not, the screw will strip the threads in the screw hole
of the AN/PVS-4 and prevent use with the SAW.
2-28 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-29. Folding of Bipod Under the Handguard.
b. Mounting the Bracket and the Device burst to seat the device, checks and tightens the
mounting knob, and then fires another three-round
Place the mounting bracket on top of the feed cover
burst. He checks the device to ensure it is settled and
mechanism assembly so that the two forked ends
securely fastened and tightens the mounting knob, if
are secured around the headless pins.
necessary. He does not fire at the boresight target dur-
Remove the screw cover behind the rear sight
ing this procedure.
assembly, and screw the bracket knob in until it is
tight. d. Centering the Reticle in the Field of View. The
Position the AN/PVS-4 on top of the bracket so automatic rifleman turns the device on and centers the
that the mount of the AN/PVS-4 is aligned with the reticle pattern in the field of view by using the azimuth
mounting knob of the bracket. and elevation actuators. To be accurate, he does this by
Turn the mounting knob clockwise until the AN/ rotating the elevation and azimuth actuators from one
PVS-4 is tight. See figure 2-31. side to the other and from top to bottom while counting
the number of clicks. (The elevation actuator has the
c. Seating the Device. Once the device is down direction marked DN with an arrow. This moves
mounted, the automatic rifleman fires a three-round the strike of the round. The azimuth actuator has the
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-30. Spare Barrel Bag.
right direction marked with RT with an arrow. This also

moves the strike of the round. He divides the number of Section 6
clicks for each by two and moves the elevation and azi- Maintenance
muth actuators that number of clicks. This manually
centers the reticle in the field of view horizontally and
vertically. This enables the automatic rifleman to reach Proper maintenance, care, cleaning, and inspec-
an accurate boresight between the point of aim (reticle) tion of a weapon and its accessories determine
and the center of the bore. See figure 2-32. whether or not it will function correctly when
needed. The bore and chamber must be properly
e. Confirming the Boresight. To do this, the auto- maintained to preserve accuracy. Because of the
matic rifleman centers and affixes a 25-meter (M16A2) close fit of working surfaces and the high speed at
zero target to the back of a basic machine gun paster tar- which the gun operates, the receiver and all mov-
get. This provides a large, clear surface for identifying the ing parts must be kept clean, correctly lubricated,
strike of the round. Then, he emplaces the target 10 and free from burrs, rust, and dirt to ensure proper,
meters from the firing position. The automatic rifleman efficient functioning.
places the reticle aiming point on the 25-meter zero tar-
get aiming point (see figure 2-33, page 2-32). and fires a T he r e a r e ce r t a i n a ct i o n s t h at m us t b e t a k en
single round. If the round impacts anywhere near the aim- before, during, and after firing to properly main-
ing point, he fires two more rounds to establish his group. tain the SAW.
2-30 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-31. Mounting the Bracket and the Device.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-32. Centered Reticle Pattern.
2601. Care and Cleaning Before, During, c. After Firing

and After Firing Immediately clear and clean the weapon.
Every 90 days during inactivity, clean and lubricate
a. Before Firing
the weapon unless inspection reveals more frequent
Wipe the bore dry. servicing is necessary.
Inspect the weapon as outlined in the operator’s

technical manual. 2602. Normal Maintenance Procedures
Lubricate the weapon. The SAW should be cleaned immediately after fir-
ing. It should be detail disassembled before cleaning.
b. During Firing After it has been cleaned and wiped dry, a thin coat
of CLP is applied by rubbing with a cloth. This
Inspect the weapon periodically to ensure that it lubricates and preserves the exposed metal parts dur-
remains lubricated. ing all normal temperature ranges. When not in use,
When malfunctions or stoppages occur, follow the the SAW should be inspected daily and cleaned and
procedures in section 4. lubricated when necessary.
2-32 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-33. Reticle Aiming Point and the Target Aiming Point.
a. Cleaning. Cleaning material authorized for use All metal components and surfaces that have been
on the SAW by the operator is CLP, RBC, and dry exposed to powder fouling should be cleaned using
cleaning solvent. Use CLP or RBC for daily mainte- CLP on a bore-cleaning patch. The same procedure is
nance and to remove minor carbon buildup after fir- used to clean the receiver.
ing. Dry cleaning solvent will dry out the metal and is
recommended for cleaning when changing from one CAUTION
type of lubricant to another. When using CLP, no other type cleaner can be used.
Never mix CLP with RBC or LSA.
The special tool, scraper, is used to clean the gas sys-
tem. Just as its name implies it is used to scrape car- (1) Bore and chamber. Use CLP and fresh swabs.
bon buildup out of the various ports, grooves and
recesses of the gas cylinder, piston, block, and collar. (2) Gas regulator. Use the special tool (scraper).
See the text below for details. This tool is carried in Remove all carbon dust. Do not use CLP on the col-
the handguard along with the other SL-3 cleaning lar, gas block, or body.
components for the weapon. See figure 2-34. Clean the gas vent hole. See figure 2-35.
___________________________________________________________________
(3) Gas cylinder and piston. Use the special tool

(scraper). Do not use CLP on the gas cylinder or piston.
Clean the front interior of the gas cylinder (reposi-
tioned in receiver with bipod in place) by inserting
and turning the flat side of the scraper in a 360
degree circular motion. See figure 2-38.
Clean the internal grooves of the front side of the
gas cylinder the same as described in the preceding
bullet, except insert the scraper farther into the gas
cylinder. See figure 2-38.
Clean the three grooves of the piston using a 360
degree circular motion (see figure 2-39). Remove
all carbon dust from the piston inside and out.
Clean the hole in the front of the piston by inserting
and turning the flat side of the scraper in a 360
degree circular motion. See figure 2-40.
(4) Clean carbon and dirt from all

All other parts.
Figure 2-34. SAW Tool Storage. other parts of the weapon.
NOTE
A cloth saturated in CLP is used on exterior
Clean the central hole with the appropriate part of surfaces to prevent corrosion.
the scraper by turning it clockwise and pushing it
inward toward the bottom of the housing. See fig- b. Lubricating. The lubricants authorized for field
ure 2-36. use on the SAW are CLP and LAW. They are used to
Use the protruding tips of the scraper to clean the lubricate certain parts of the weapon before, during,
two grooves of the body. See figure 2-37. and after firing (see paragraph 2601). Each type is
Figure 2-35. Cleaning the Gas Vent Hole. Figure 2-36. Cleaning the Central Hole.
2-34 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-37. Cleaning the Grooves of the Body.
best used in specific climatic and environmental con- (1) Operating rod group. Use CLP on the operating rod
ditions (see paragraph 2602). and spring, the slide assembly, the feed roller, and the
bolt-locking lug.
After the SAW is cleaned and wiped dry, a thin coat
(2) Barrel group. Use CLP on the cam surfaces of
of CLP is applied by rubbing it with a cloth. This
the bolt-locking lugs, the heat shield, and along the
lubricates and preserves the exposed metal parts dur-
outer surfaces of the barrel clamp.
ing all normal temperature ranges. The moving parts
are lubricated with CLP. After lubricating, rub the (3) Receiver group. Use CLP on all moving parts on
components by hand to spread the CLP. the cover assembly and the receiver rails.
Figure 2-38. Cleaning the Front Interior and Internal Grooves of the Gas Cylinder.
___________________________________________________________________
(2) Hot, humid climates. In hot, humid climates,

inspect more frequently for rust and keep free of
moisture. Ensure that the SAW is lubricated properly
with CLP. Generally a heavier application of lubricant
is required.
(3) Hot, dry climates. In hot, dry climates, sand and

dust must be kept from collecting in working parts.
Clean the weapon daily with CLP. Wipe dry. The
Teflon coating left by the CLP will be sufficient to
keep the parts working smoothly.
Figure 2-39. Cleaning the Grooves of the b. Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical (NBC)
Piston. Conditions. If contamination is anticipated, apply
lubricant to all outer surfaces of the weapon (do not
lubricate ammunition). Keep the weapon covered as
much as possible. If the weapon is contaminated,
2603. Special Maintenance Procedures decontaminate by following the procedures out-
lined in FM 3-5, NBC Decontamination, then clean
a. Climatic Conditions
and lubricate.
(1) Cold climates. In cold climates, the SAW must
be kept free of excess lubricants, cleaners, and mois-
ture, all of which can freeze and cause the weapon to 2604. Inspection
operate sluggishly. If brought indoors, allow the SAW
to come to room temperature, wipe completely dry, Inspection begins with the weapon disassembled in
and lubricate with a light coat of CLP. In temperatures its major groups. Shiny surfaces do not mean the
between 10 degrees Fahrenheit (-12 degrees centi- parts are unserviceable. The following parts of the
grade) and -10 degrees Fahrenheit (-23 degrees centi- weapon and related equipment are inspected for
grade), the SAW should be lubricated with CLP, or the conditions indicated. Any broken or missing
LAW. In sustained temperatures below -10 degrees parts should be repaired or replaced according to
Fahrenheit (-23 degrees centigrade) use LAW only. TM 9-1005-201-10.
Figure 2-40. Cleaning the Hole in the Front of the Piston.

2-36 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
a. Operating Rod Group The carrying handle is checked to ensure it is not

cracked, broken, or missing; that it can be folded
The operating rod should not be bent, broken, or
under spring pressure to the right and left; and that
cracked.
it remains locked in an upright position.
The buffer spring should not have breaks.
Lug pins should protrude equally on both sides of c. Handguard Group
the buffer spacer.
The operating rod spring should not have kinks or The handguard should not be cracked or broken.
separated strands or broken strands. It can have a The retaining clip must be attached to the hand-
maximum of one break on any one strand. guard retaining pin.
The bolt assembly is checked for visible damage.
The cartridge extractor should not be cracked or d. Buttstock and Buffer Assembly Group
chipped.
The buttstock is checked for cracks, bends, or
The slide assembly is checked for visible damage. breaks; and for missing components. It is checked
The feed roller is checked for spring tension when for linkage and tension on the buffer rod.
compressed and that the pivot slide is locked onto
the slide assembly. The shoulder rest is checked to ensure it is not bent
or broken and that it locks in both positions.
The firing pin is checked for straightness and
cracks and that the tip is completely rounded.
e. Trigger Mechanism Group
The firing pin spring should not be crushed or bent.
The beveled end should not be stretched. The shoulder of the sear should not show exces-
The sear notch on the piston assembly is checked sive wear.
for signs of excessive wear or burring. Slight rota- The safety should function properly. (The sear
tion of the piston on its housing is normal and is not should move only slightly when the safety is on
cause for rejection. SAFE, and freely when the safety is on FIRE).
The sear pin should not protrude from the trigger
b. Barrel Group
mechanism, because the trigger mechanism will not
The flash suppressor should not be cracked, and it go back in place.
should be fastened securely.
The front sight post and front sight base must not f. Gas Cylinder Group. The gas cylinder should
be bent, cracked, or broken. not be cracked, bent, or broken.
Weapons already zeroed should not be adjusted.
The heat shield assembly is inspected for damage, g. Bipod Group
cracks, or broken retaining clamps.
The bipod group should not be cracked, bent, or
The gas regulator and collar are checked for cracks broken.
or burrs.
The bipod legs should extend and collapse easily.
The barrel is checked for bulges, cracks, bends,
obstructions, or pits in the chamber or bore.
h. Receiver Group
The gas plug is checked for obstructions, cracks,
and bulges. The cover latch should work properly.
___________________________________________________________________
All parts inside the cover assembly should move 2702. Identification
under spring tension.
The type, caliber, model, and ammunition lot num-
All spot welds are checked for cracks. ber, including the symbol of the manufacturer, are
The cover assembly should remain open without necessary for the complete identification of small
support. arms ammunition. The standard 5.56mm NATO car-
The belt-holding pawl must be under spring tridge is completely identifiable by its appearance,
tension. the painting of the bullet tip, the manufacturers ini-
tial and year of manufacture on the base of the car-
The receiver should not be bent or cracked.
tridge case, and the markings on the packing
The cocking handle should slide freely within its containers. When removed from the original pack-
guide and lock in its forward position. ing container, the cartridge may be identified by its
The windage and elevation knobs on the rear sight physical characteristics. The cartridge description
should be movable and legible. and characteristics are as follows.
The windage scale screws should not be worn or
a. Cartridge, 5.56mm Ball M855 (DODAC 1305-
burred.
A059). The M855 cartridge has a gilding, metal-jack-
eted, lead alloy core bullet with a steel penetrator. The
primer and case are waterproof. The ammunition is
linked by a disintegrating metallic split-linked belt for
Section 7
firing from the ammunition box (see figure 2-42). In
Ammunition
an emergency, the M855 round can also be loaded and
fired from the SAW using a 20 or 30 round magazine
from an M16. The M855 round is identified by a
This section covers the several different types of
green tip, has a projectile weight of 62 grains, and is
5.56mm standard military ammunition used in the
2.3 cm long. This is the NATO standard round. It is
SAW (see figure 2-41). Marines should become
effective against personnel and light materials.
familiar with and recognize the appropriate ammuni-
tion types. b. Cartridge, 5.56mm Tracer, M856 (DODAC
1305-A064). This cartridge has a 63.7 grain bullet
2701. Classification without a steel penetrator. It is identified by an orange
tip. The tracer is used for adjustments after observa-
Ammunition for the SAW is classified as listed: tion, incendiary effects, and signalling. When tracer
rounds are fired, they are mixed with ball ammuni-
a. Ball. Used against targets of light material, per- tion in a ratio of four ball rounds to one tracer round.
sonnel, and during marksmanship training. The DODAC for ball and tracer mix is A064.
c. Cartridge, 5.56mm Dummy M199 (DODAC
b. Tracer. Used for observation of fire, signalling,
1305-A060). This cartridge can be identified by the
and marking targets.
six grooves along the side of the case beginning
c. Blank. Used during training when simulated fire
about one-half inch from its head. It contains no pro-
is desired. pellant or primer. The primer well is open to prevent
damage to the firing pin. The dummy round is used
d. Dummy. Used during training such as gun drill, during mechanical training, dry-fire exercises, and
and loading and unloading practice. function checks.
2-38 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-41. Cartridges for the SAW.
NOTE
The older issue M193 (ball) and M196 (tracer)

5.56mm cartridges can be fired with the SAW,
but accuracy is degraded; therefore, it should
only be used in emergency situations when the
new M855 or M856 ammunition described on
page 2-33 is not available.
d. Cartridge, 5.56mm blank M200 (M2 link,

DODAC 1305-A075). The blank cartridge has no
projectile. The case mouth is closed with a seven-
petal rosette crimp and has a violet tip. The original
M200 blank cartridge had a white tip. Field use of
this cartridge resulted in residue buildup, which
caused malfunctions. Only the violet-tipped M200
cartridge should be used. The blank round is used
Figure 2-42. Cartridges in Metallic Belt. during training when simulated live fire is desired.
___________________________________________________________________
An M15A2 blank-firing attachment must be used to pounds. Dummy ammunition (M199) is packed in
fire this ammunition. boxes of 20 rounds each.
WARNING 2705. Storage

Do not fire blank ammunition at any per-
son within 20 feet , because fragments of Store ammunition of all classes away form heat
a closure wad or particles of unburned sources such as; open flame, radiators, heaters, and
propellant can cause injury. hot water pipes. Ammunition is stored under cover. If
ammunition is in the open, it must be kept at least 6
inches above the ground and covered with a double
2703. Ballistic Data thickness of tarpaulin. The cover must be placed so
that it protects the ammunition yet allows ventilation.
Figure 2-43 shows some examples of the penetration Trenches are dug to divert water from flowing under
capability and other ballistic data for the M855 the ammunition.
5.56mm ball round when fired from the SAW.
2706. Care, Handling, and Preservation of
2704. Ammunition Packaging Ammunition
The ammunition can contains two plastic ammunition Ammunition should not be removed from the airtight
boxes. Each box contains 200 rounds and weighs 6.92 containers until ready for use. Ammunition removed
Figure 2-43. Ballistic Data for 5.56mm Ammunition.

2-40 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
from the airtight containers, particularly in damp cli- CONDITION 1: The bolt is locked to the rear.
mates, may corrode. The safety is engaged. Ammunitions is one the
feed tray or a magazine is inserted. The cover is
Ammunition must be protected from mud, dirt, and closed.
moisture. If it gets wet or dirty, the ammunition must
be wiped off before using. Lightly corroded car-
CONDITION 2: Not applicable to the M249.
tridges are wiped off as soon as the corrosion is dis-
covered. Heavily corroded, dented, or loose
CONDITION 3: The bolt is forward. The chamber
projectiles should not be fired.
is empty. The safety is off. The source of
Ammunition must also be protected from the direct ammunition is on the feed tray or in the
rays of the sun. Excessive pressure from the heat may magazine well. The cover is closed.
cause premature detonation.
CONDITION 4: The bolt is forward. The safety is
Oil should never be used on ammunition. Oil collects not engaged. The feed tray is clear of
dust and other abrasives that may possibly damage the ammunition and/or no magazine is inserted. The
operating parts of the weapon. cover is closed.
Figure 2-44. Condition Codes for the SAW.

Section 8
Operation and Firing
2801. Loading
The SAW squad automatic weapon fires from the To load the SAW, make sure the weapon is cleared, as
open bolt position to facilitate cooling. When the described in Section 2. (With the feed cover raised,
trigger is pulled, the bolt and operating rod start for- make sure your face is not exposed to the open cham-
ward initiating the firing sequence. The weapon will ber area when loading.) See figure 2-45.
continue to fire as long as the trigger is held to the
rear and it is supplied with ammunition. The firing a. Belt-Fed. When loading belted ammunition,
operation works on gas pressure created as a fired always cant the weapon to the right. The ammunition
round passes through the barrel. Whenever the bolt box, if used, is attached to the weapon by sliding the
is to the rear the weapon is ready to fire so the flanges on the top of the box into the grooved tracks
weapon must be placed on SAFE to prevent firing. on the bottom of the receiver until the holding lever
The safety is not designed to be engaged when the on the box snaps into place. A loose belt of ammuni-
bolt is forward. The SAW is loaded, fired, unloaded, tion, without the ammunition box, can also be used
and cleared from the open- bolt position. As with but care must be taken to keep the ammunition as
other small arms, Condition Codes are applied when clean as possible during firing to ensure smooth
carrying the SAW. In Condition 1 the weapon is feeding of the rounds. Make sure the open side of the
ready to fire when taken off SAFE, while Conditions links are facing down, and place the lead link tab or
3 and 4 place the weapon in a less ready status. They first round of the belt in the tray groove against the
are described in figure 2-44. cartridge stop (see figure 2-46). The rounds should
be placed flat across the feed tray. With the left
NOTE hand, count five to six rounds down to hold ammuni-
The ammunition box, if used, should be attached tion in place on the feed tray, and at the same time
to the underside of the weapon in all three close the feed cover with the right hand. When clos-
applicable conditions to allow faster transition ing the feed cover, always place your hand in front
from one condition to another. of the rear sight to prevent accidentally changing the
sight adjustment.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-45. Loading.
b. Magazine-Fed. Load the 20 or 30 round maga- CAUTION

zine by inserting it into the magazine well on the left Before raising the feed cover, move the weapon away
side of the receiver. Push the magazine firmly into the from your face so that you are not exposed to the open
well until it seats and the release tab clicks into the chamber.
recess on the magazine. See figure 2-47.
NOTE a. Belt-Fed. Raise the feed cover and remove any

ammunition or links from the feed tray. Perform the
The 20 or 30 round magazine is for emergency five-point safety check.
use only when linked ammunition is not
available. b. Magazine-Fed. Push the magazine release tab
down and pull the magazine from the magazine well.
Raise the feed cover and perform the five-point
2802. Unloading safety check.
To unload the weapon, pull the bolt and lock it in the 2803. Operation of the Safety
rear position if it is not already there. Place the safety
on SAFE. Depending on whether belt-fed or magazine- When the safety is on, the cutaway portion of the
fed ammunition is used, use the following procedures. safety bar is not aligned with the safety lug of the
2-42 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-46. Loading an Ammunition Belt.
sear. When the trigger is pulled, the sear cannot rotate b. Traverse and Search
downward and the operating group cannot move for-
To make minor changes in direction, or traverse, the
ward. When the safety is placed in the FIRE position,
rifleman shifts his shoulders to the right or left to
the cutaway portion of the safety bar is aligned with
select successive aiming points in the target area.
the safety lug on the sear, allowing the sear to move
Major changes require him to redistribute his weight
downward when the trigger is pulled, releasing the
to his elbows and toes and raise his body off the
operating group and initiating the cycle of function.
ground. Using his toes, he shifts his body to the right
The weapon is not designed to be placed on SAFE
or left to be in the opposite direction of the target,
with the bolt forward.
and pivots on his elbows until he is once again
aligned with the target. He rapidly assumes a steady
2804. Firing the SAW position, obtains the proper sight picture, and
engages the target.
a. Trigger Manipulation. The trigger is pulled to
the rear and then released. This gives the rifleman A search is movement of the weapon’s muzzle up
control of the number of rounds fired in each burst. or d own to distrib ute fire in d epth. To m ake
The sustained rate of fire (100 rounds per minute) is changes in elevation, the rifleman moves his
delivered in bursts of 3 to 5 rounds which are fired 4 elbows closer together to lower the muzzle or far-
to 5 seconds apart. The rapid rate of fire (200 rounds ther apart to raise the muzzle. Gross errors in range
per minute) is delivered in bursts of 6 to 8 rounds are corrected by adjusting the range setting with the
which are fired 2 to 3 seconds apart. elevation knob.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-47. Loading a Magazine.
c. Prone Position, Bipod-Supported. This is the touches the receiver, so the aiming point will
preferred position for employment of the SAW. This always be the same.
position provides the most stable platform for firing Place the cheek against the forefinger of the non-
the weapon and affords the automatic rifleman the firing hand to form a stock weld. Try to position
best opportunity to provide the most accurate fire pos- the non-firing hand and cheek at the same spot on
sible out to the maximum effective range of the the stock each time the weapon is fired. The stock
weapon. See figure 2-48. weld should provide for a natural line of sight
through the center of the rear sight aperture to the
Assume a prone position to the rear of the weapon
front sight post and to the target. Relax the neck so
and place the shoulder rest on the firing shoulder.
that the cheek rests on the forefinger naturally.
An imaginary line drawn through the weapon
should bisect the firing shoulder and buttock and Apply a firm, steady pressure rearward and down,
continue through the heel of the foot. holding the weapon tightly into the hollow of the
Spread the legs a comfortable distance apart with shoulder while aiming and firing.
heels as close to the ground as possible and yet still Keep the shoulders level and elbows about an equal
be comfortable. distance from the receiver of the weapon.
Grasp the pistol grip with the firing hand with the
fleshy end of the index finger resting lightly on the d. Assault Fire Techniques. The bipod supported
trigger. Place the non-firing hand on the small of prone position is the preferred firing position for the
the stock with the thumb curled underneath. Slide SAW; however, it may sometimes be necessary to
the non-firing hand forward until the little finger employ the weapon from more hasty positions. This
2-44 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-48. Prone Position, Bipod-Supported.
should only be done when absolutely necessary hand. He leans forward at the waist and bends his
because the accuracy of the fire is greatly diminished. knees slightly as he fires. His feet should be kept
For example, assault fire techniques may be used for shoulder width apart when firing. See figure 2-50.
initial bursts of suppression fire prior to assuming the
prone position, in a chance encounter with the enemy,
or for suppression fire as the automatic rifleman moves
quickly through an objective toward consolidation.
(1) Firing from the hip. In the preferred assault fire
technique, the automatic rifleman grasps the bipod
legs close to the receiver, squeezes them together, and
maintains pressure on them downward and to the left
as he fires. Another technique is to grasp the hand-
guard assembly, maintaining pressure down and to the
left. With either technique he places the buttstock
firmly against his hip and holds it there by steady
inward pressure from his right forearm while firmly
gripping the trigger assembly with his right hand. He
leans forward at the waist and bends his knees slightly
as he fires. His feet should be kept shoulder width
apart when firing. See figure 2-49.
(2) Firing from under the arm. The automatic rifle-
man grasps the handguard maintaining pressure
downward and to the left during firing. He places the
buttstock firmly under his arm and holds it in place
with steady inward pressure from his upper arm while Figure 2-49. Firing From the Hip.
firmly gripping the trigger assembly with his right (Preferred Assault Fire Technique.)
___________________________________________________________________
the barrel from the receiver. While the automatic rifle-

man continues to hold down on the barrel release
latch the assistant inserts the new barrel into the
receiver, ensures that the gas system is aligned, and
pulls to the rear on the barrel changing handle to fully
seat the new barrel. The automatic rifleman releases
the barrel release latch and the assistant gives a quick
tug on the barrel to verify that it is locked in place.
The automatic rifleman can now relay on target and
continue to fire. The automatic rifleman can easily
change barrels by himself if the situation precludes
the assistant from helping him.
Section 9
Qualification Firing
2901. Fundamentals of Marksmanship
a. Accurate Initial Burst. Obtaining an accurate

initial burst of fire on the target is essential to good
marksmanship. This requires the automatic rifleman
to estimate range to the target, set the sights, and
apply the fundamentals of marksmanship while
Figure 2-50. Firing From Under the Arm. engaging targets.
b. Adjustment of Fire. The automatic rifleman must

observe the strike of the rounds when the initial burst
2805. Change Barrel Procedures is fired. If not on target, he manipulates the SAW until
the rounds do strike the target. He must be proficient
The ability to change the barrels of the SAW quickly in observing the strike of rounds, in observing and
provides a great advantage. It allows one barrel to be using tracers, and in rapidly laying the SAW on the
used while the other is cooling. Barrels should be target during firing.
changed when they are beginning to overheat. Chang-
ing a barrel only takes a few seconds and signifi- c. Speed. Speed is also essential to good marks-
cantly improves rate of fire and accuracy, increases manship; it is attained by practice in both dry-fire and
the life of each barrel, and ensures a continuous rapid live-fire exercises. It is an acquired skill gained
rate of accurate fire. As a guide, change barrels after through extensive training that combines other skills
firing the rapid rate for 2 minutes. when delivering fire. Speed should not be stressed to
the detriment of accuracy.
The barrel can be changed with the bolt forward or to
the rear. The weapon does not necessarily need to be d. Steady Position. In automatic fire, position is
unloaded; however, it must be placed on SAFE when the most important aspect of marksmanship. If the
the bolt is to the rear. The automatic rifleman automatic rifleman has a good zero, aims his weapon
depresses the barrel release latch and holds it down. correctly, and properly applies a steady hold in firing
The assistant automatic rifleman grasps the barrel a burst of three rounds, the first round of that burst
changing handle, pulls forward and up and removes will hit the target at the point of aim. However, this is
2-46 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
not necessarily true of the second and third rounds. (3) Sight picture. A correct sight picture has the tar-
The first round hits the aiming point the same as when get, front sight post, and rear sight aligned. The sight
a round is fired singularly. The recoil from the first picture consists of sight alignment and placement of
and subsequent rounds will progressively disturb the the aiming point on the target. Align the tip of the
lay of the weapon with each round of the burst. front sight post in the center (see figure 2-51) of the
rear peep sight and then align the sights with the tar-
The relationship between the point of impact of the get. Align the top of the front sight post on the center
first and subsequent rounds of the burst depends on base of the target.
the stability of the automatic rifleman’s position. His
body, directly behind the weapon, serves as the foun- f. Breath Control. Two types of breath control are
dation, and his grip serves as a lock to hold the used. When firing single shots, as in zeroing, the auto-
weapon against the foundation. The better the body matic rifleman stops breathing after most of the air
alignment and the steadier the grip, the less dispersed has been exhaled during the normal breathing cycle.
the rounds of a burst of automatic fire will be. He fires before he feels any discomfort. During auto-
e. Aim. To aim the SAW, the automatic rifleman matic fire, ideally, the automatic rifleman exhales and
must align the sights, focus his eye, obtain a correct stops his breath when pressing the trigger. He does
sight picture, control his breathing, and maintain trig- not have time to take deep breaths between bursts. He
ger control. must hold his breath before each burst or adapt his
breathing by taking quick shallow breaths or taking
(1) Sight alignment. Align the rear sight aperture deeper breaths between several bursts.
(peep sight) with the sight post of the hooded front
sight. Then, align the front sight post in the center of g. Trigger Control. Pressing the trigger straight to
the rear peep sight. An imaginary horizontal line the rear and releasing it helps control the number of
drawn through the center of the peep sight should rounds in each burst and prevents disturbing the lay of
touch the top of the front sight post, while an imagi- the weapon. For a three-round burst, the automatic
nary vertical line through the center of the rear peep rifleman presses the trigger to the rear, says PRESS,
sight should bisect the front sight post. RELEASE, and releases the trigger.
(2) Focus of the eye. A good firing position places

the eye directly on line with the center of the rear 2902. Position and Grip
sight. Focus on the tip of the front sight post. The nat-
ural ability of the eye to center objects in a circle and The rifleman is in a prone position to the rear of the
to seek the point of greatest light (center of peep gun with his right shoulder against the buttstock
sight) aids in providing correct sight alignment. group. A straight line extending through the barrel
Figure 2-51. Sight Picture.

___________________________________________________________________
and receiver passes through his right shoulder and hip. Fine adjustments, like zeroing, are made by adjusting
His legs are comfortably spread and his heels are the peep sight. Each 180-degree turn equals a 1/2-mil
down (if possible). change in elevation which equals a 1/2-cm change in
impact at a range of 10 meters. Clockwise (to the
The rifleman’s left hand grasps the top of the right) rotations decrease elevation, while counter-
buttstock or the hand guard assembly. His right hand clockwise (to the left) rotations increase elevation.
is on the trigger assembly with his index finger on the The peep sight can be turned nine 180-degree turns
trigger. He exerts a firm pressure to the rear with both from top to bottom. To make the peep sight easier to
hands while aiming and firing. His cheek rests against grasp, the elevation knob is turned to its highest point
the buttstock directly or on his hand as it grips the (1,000 meters). The appropriate adjustment is made
buttstock. Breath control is practiced during aiming for the peep sight, and then the sight is returned to the
and firing. desired range. Whenever readjusting the range, the
point of aim is never changed. The point of aim is the
2903. Sight Settings and BZO Procedures center base of the target.
This paragraph provides information on how to set the b. Windage. Adjustments for windage are made by
sights for elevation and windage for the SAW. It also traversing the rear sight right and left along the sliding
includes information on how to make corrections if scale. The sliding scale is marked or graduated with
the initial setting on the windage knob or peep sight is index lines. Each index line is equal to 1/2-mil change
not accurate. At a 10-meter target, each paster is 1 cm. in direction or 1/2-cm change of impact at 10 meters.
Therefore, two clicks on the windage knob in either Rotation of the windage knob (closest to the muzzle
direction moves the strike of the round left or right 1 end) toward the muzzle (counterclockwise) moves the
cm and two turns on the peep sight moves the strike of
the round up or down 1 cm. For example: If the shot
group was 2 cm above and 1 cm to the right of the
paster, sight corrections are made by correcting wind-
age first. In this case, rotate the windage knob two
clicks toward the buttstock (clockwise). Rotate eleva-
tion knob four turns toward the buttstock (clockwise)
to lower the strike of the round. See figure 2-52.
a. Elevation. Adjustments for elevation (range)
require the automatic rifleman to turn the elevation
knob (closest to the buttstock) on the rear sight to the
desired range setting. Range settings are graduated
increments from 300 to 1,000 meters. Even numbered
settings are on the left side of the scale wheel and are
numbered 4, 6, 8, 10 which represent 400, 600, 800,
and 1,000 meters, respectively. Odd numbered set-
tings are on the right side of the scale wheel and
marked with the number 3 and three index lines,
which represent 300, 500, 700, 900 meters, respec-
tively. Rotation of the elevation knob toward the
muzzle (counterclockwise) increases the range, while
rotation toward the buttstock (clockwise) decreases
the range. Figure 2-52. Sliding Scale on Sight.
2-48 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
rear sight aperture right, which moves the strike of the the sight, the automatic rifleman starts with the sight
rounds right; while rotation toward the buttstock all the way to the right and, while counting the clicks,
(clockwise) moves the aperture left, which moves the rotates the windage knob until it stops on the left side.
strike of the rounds left. He divides the clicks by two. If it is an uneven num-
ber, he rounds it up. To center the sight, he rotates the
c. Corrections. One click of the windage knob or windage knob toward the center (right) while count-
peep sight moves the strike of the round 1/2 cm at a ing the appropriate number of clicks. He adjusts the
range of 10 meters or 1/2 meter at 1,000 meters. To sliding scale at the rear of the sight to center the large
make corrections, figure 2-53 is used as a reference. index line under the zeroed windage mark on the
sight. Two threads should be showing on the front
Range
sight post. If more or less are showing, the automatic
(Meters) Sight Adjustment rifleman turns in the weapon for maintenance.
100 One click moves strike 5 cm (2 inches) (2) Three-round group. The automatic rifleman fires
200 One click moves strike 10 cm (4 inches)
three single rounds loaded individually at the center
base of the aiming points on the basic machine gun
300 One click moves strike 15 cm (6 inches) marksmanship target. He fires the three rounds with-
400 One click moves strike 20 cm (8 inches) out making any adjustments to the sights. The shot
group must be about a 4-cm circle or smaller to estab-
500 One click moves strike 25 cm (10 inches) lish the center of the group in relation to the center
600 One click moves strike 30 cm (12 inches) base of the aiming paster. Establishing a smaller shot
group is difficult, because the SAW is an open-bolt
700 One click moves strike 35 cm (14 inches) weapon. Sight alignment is disturbed somewhat as the
800 One click moves strike 40 cm (16 inches) bolt moves forward during firing.
900 One click moves strike 45 cm (18 inches) (3) Grid square overlay. For a more accurate adjust-
ment, the automatic rifleman moves downrange and
Figure 2-53. Windage and Elevation places the grid square overlay over pasters 1 and 2.
(Peep Sight) Correction Chart. He ensures that he aligns the overlay with the pasters
and squares.
d. Zeroing. Zeroing aligns the sights with the bar-
rel so that the point of aim equals the point of impact. Count the number of squares it will take to move
Ten-meter zeroing is for conducting 10-meter fire the shot group to the aiming paster.
only and has no further application. (Zeroing at range Upon completion, return to the firing line to make
or field zeroing is the automatic rifleman’s battlesight corrections to the weapon. Figure 2-54 illustrates a
zero and must be recorded.) zero group size on which adjustments can be made
and a group that is too loose for adjustments. If a
(1) 10-meter zeroing, set the sights (mechanical zero). group is too loose, check your position and grip.
The automatic rifleman indexes or places the eleva-
tion knob on a range of 700 meters. He centers the (4) Windage correction. If the center of the group is
rear peep sight by rotating it clockwise (right) as far to the left or right of the black aiming paster, the auto-
as it will go, then rotating counterclockwise (left) 5 matic rifleman must correct for windage. To do this,
clicks or half-turns. He rotates the windage knob he must rotate the windage knob to move the peep
toward the muzzle until the peep sight is completely sight in the direction of the desired change (rotate
to the right, then rotates the windage knob toward the windage knob toward the muzzle [counterclockwise]
buttstock 12 clicks to the left. This places the peep to move the strike of the round to the right; rotate the
sight in the approximate center of the sight. Each sight windage knob toward the buttstock [clockwise] to
may vary as to how many clicks are needed. To check move the strike of the round to the left). One click in
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-54. Zero Group Size.
either direction moves the strike of the round 1/2 cm e. Field Zeroing. Automatic riflemen must know
at 10 meters. how to zero the SAW at distance. He should select a
known distance target between 300 and 700 meters. It
For example, if the automatic rifleman sees that the is difficult to determine fully where the center of the
center of the shot group is 2 cm (two black aiming beaten zone is in relation to the target as range
pasters) to the left of the aiming point, he adjusts the increases. Therefore, the 300-meter target on the tran-
point of impact four clicks in the direction of the sition range is recommended because of the ease of
aiming point (to the right) by rotating the windage determining adjustments.
knob toward the muzzle.
(1) The automatic rifleman uses the
Set the sights.
(5) Elevation correction. Before making elevation same procedures as for 10-meter zeroing are used
adjustments, the range knob must be at its highest set- except he places the elevation knob on the range to
ting. If the center of the shot group is above or below the target. The recommended range is 300 meters.
the aiming point, the automatic rifleman rotates the
peep sight clockwise to lower the strike of the round or (2) Fire a three-round burst. The automatic rifleman
rotates the peep sight counterclockwise to raise the assumes a good stable position and fires a three-round
strike of the round. One 180-degree turn in either direc- burst at the center base of the target and notes where
tion moves the strike of the round 1/2 cm at 10 meters. the burst strikes.
(6) Confirmation. The automatic rifleman fires (3) Correct for windage. If the center of the beaten
another three-shot group (loaded singly) after making zone is to the left or right of the target, he corrects
his corrections for windage and elevation. If the center for windage. Each click moves the strike of the
of the group is still off the aiming point, he adjusts rounds 1/2 mil or 6 inches at 300 meters. He adjusts
further until the group is centered on the point of aim. the windage knob accordingly.
(7) Recording. There is no reason to record the 10- (4) Correct for elevation. If the center of the beaten
meter zero, because it applies only to firing at the 10- zone is high or low in relation to the target, he
meter basic machine gun target. corrects for elevation. Because determining that
2-50 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
relationship is difficult, automatic riflemen rely on points to disburse fire across the target by using body
trial and error to gain sufficient experience in position changes. Target group 7 through 8 provides
making reliable estimates. He makes corrections the automatic rifleman with linear targets with depth.
in the same manner as 10-meter zeroing. This series of targets uses a series of aiming points to
disburse fire across the target and in depth by using
(5) Confirm. After making corrections for windage
body position changes.
and elevation, he fires a confirming burst of three
rounds. If the target is not hit, he repeats the procedures. (3) This device assists the auto-
Grid square overlay.
matic rifleman in zeroing his weapon at 10 meters,
(6) Record zero. Upon confirming the zero, he
while using the basic machine gun target (see figure
records it by counting the number of clicks (half- 2-56). The grid square overlay is used the same as an
turns) he moved the peep sight for elevation in rela- M16A2 25-meter zero target, except the material can
tion to the initial setting of 5. For example, if he made be made of plastic or view graph transparency. Each
two half-turns up, he records UP 2. If he made two square is equal to 1 cm.
half-turns down, he records DOWN 2. Adjustments
for the windage scale are not recorded; instead, he Set the sights for 10-meter zeroing, then fire a
loosens the windage sliding scale screws and aligns three-round shot group.
the scale so that the large index line is under the wind- After firing the second three-round shot group (see
age mark on the sight. Then, he tightens the screws. figure 2-57), place the grid square overlay over the
pasters 1 and 2 (see figure 2-58), and count the
number of clicks it will take for rounds to impact on
2904. 10-Meter Firing the black aiming paster. (Corrections for figure 2-
57 would be turn the windage knob toward the muz-
a. Targets and Scoring. The basic machine gun
zle (clockwise) two clicks.)
target (FSN 6920-078-5128) is used for the 10-meter
firing exercise (see figure 2-55). The following expla-
(4) Target analysis. Targets are analyzed and scored
nation of the target, including the size of the aiming
to determine the automatic rifleman’s proficiency and
pasters and scoring spaces, aids in zeroing the M249s
to reinforce the fundamentals of marksmanship. Dur-
and facilitates control during the 10-meter firing exer-
ing firing with a zeroed weapon, a target is best ana-
cises. The target consists of four sections lettered A,
lyzed by considering the common errors of SAW
B, C, and D. Each section has four point targets num-
marksmanship. See figure 2-59.
bered 1, 2, 3, and 4; and two sets of area targets num-
bered 5 through 6 and 7 through 8. Each space is 4 cm (5) Scoring procedures. When scoring the 10-meter
wide and 5 cm high. The black aiming paster within target, the trainer scores all scoring spaces (1 through
the numbered scoring spaces is 1 cm square. The tar- 4, 5 through 6, and 7 through 8). One point is given
get is used to score two automatic riflemen—one uses for each round impacting within each scoring space.
sections A and B, and the other automatic rifleman The maximum point value is 3 points for each scor-
uses sections C and D. ing space. Rounds touching the line on the paster are
(1) Point targets.Point targets on the basic machine considered a HIT. When firing at 1 through 4 with a
gun target are pasters 1 through 4 of sections A, B, C, belt of 12 rounds, the maximum score the automatic
and D. Firing at point targets exposes the automatic rifleman can receive is 12 points. When firing at pas-
rifleman to zeroing techniques and controlled-burst ters 5 through 6, he engages the five scoring spaces
fire techniques. Targets 1 through 4 can also be used with a 15-round belt. The maximum score possible is
for qualification. 15 points. When firing at pasters 7 through 8, the
automatic rifleman engages the eight scoring spaces
(2) Area targets. Area targets on the basic machine with 24 rounds with a maximum score of 24 points.
gun target consist of pasters 5 through 6, and 7
through 8 of sections A, B, C, and D. Target group 5 The total possible score is 51 points. A minimum of
through 6 provides the automatic rifleman with targets 35 points is required to qualify on the 10-meter course
in depth and allows him to use a series of aiming of fire.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-55. Basic Machine Gun Target.
Figure 2-56. Grid Square Overlay.

2-52 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 2-57. Shot Group on Basic Machine

Gun Target.
Figure 2-58. Overlay Placed Over Pasters.
Figure 2-59. Common Errors of Marksmanship.

___________________________________________________________________
b. Conduct of Fire. The 10-meter firing trains auto- commands used on the basic range, on the basic
matic riflemen to apply the fundamentals of auto- machine gun marksmanship target, and on analyzing
matic rifle marksmanship in live-fire exercises. It and scoring the target. The unit is organized in firing
familiarizes the Marine with the weapon’s characteris- orders based on range constraints. The seven tasks are
tics, noise, and recoil. It instills in the automatic rifle- fired in the following manner.
man confidence in his weapon. Each automatic
rifleman learns to zero his SAW, conducts controlled- NOTE
burst fire at point targets, and uses traverse and search
Throughout all firing exercises, the automatic
techniques of fire at area targets. The 10-meter firing
rifleman performs the appropriate tasks during
is conducted on a 10-meter range or a multipurpose
each element of the fire command. The number
range using the basic machine gun target. These exer-
of rounds fired is used instead of the rate for
cises are fired with the bipod from the prone position.
METHOD OF FIRE. This is for control.
The 10-meter firing exercises are for practice as well
(Omitting the rate specifies RAPID fire which is
as part of record qualification. All 10-meter firing
not desirable for the tasks.)
exercises are recorded and scored to provide the auto-
matic rifleman an assessment on his performance. The
(1) Task 1, zeroing
10-meter firing is conducted in accordance with Fir-
ing Table I (figure 2-60). The automatic riflemen are Prepare the rear sight for zeroing and check the
instructed on the objectives and fundamentals of fir- front sight.
ing from the bipod-supported prone position, on fire Assume a good position.
Figure 2-60. Firing Table I.

2-54 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Prepare a single round. FIXED, THREE-ROUND BURSTS

When the following fire command is given, repeat AT MY COMMAND
each element of the fire command as it is given.
Acquire the proper sight picture and give an UP to
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN (Load and move safety personnel.
safety to FIRE)
FRONT (Focus on target or target area) The command to FIRE is given.
PASTER ONE (Locate target)
SEVEN HUNDRED (Adjust sights and acquire Fire the first burst of 3 rounds at paster 3.
sight picture) Repeat the steps above, but fire at paster 4.
FIXED, ONE ROUND (Method of fire)
COMMENCE FIRING (Fire on command but (3) Task 3, NBC traverse and search fire
when ready) Prepare a 15-round belt.
Load one round, obtain the proper sight picture, and The order to mask is given by stating GAS. Once the
give an UP to safety personnel. shooters are masked, the fire command is given.
The command COMMENCE FIRING is given. When the following fire command is given, repeat
each element as it is given:
When ready, engage paster 1 with 3 single shots.
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
Move downrange to observe, mark, and triangulate
FRONT
the shot group. Sight adjustments using the rear
PASTERS FIVE THROUGH SIX
peep sight and windage knob are made at this time
SEVEN HUNDRED
if the shot group is tight enough. If not, fire another
TRAVERSE AND SEARCH, THREE-ROUND
3 rounds to ensure the fundamentals are mastered
BURSTS
before adjusting the sights.
AT MY COMMAND
Repeat the steps above, but fire at paster 2.
NOTE safety personnel.
If the automatic rifleman zeros his weapon using The command to FIRE is given.
9 rounds, he uses the remaining 3 to confirm his
zero. If he is unable to zero with 12 rounds, he is Using the traverse and search technique, engage
removed from the firing line for remedial pasters 5 through 6, firing a 3-round burst for each
training. paster.
(2) Task 2, controlled-burst firing Once complete, the shooters are given the order ALL
Prepare a 6-round belt. CLEAR.
When the following fire command is given, repeat Restore mask to the carrier and move down range to
each element as it is given. observe and analyze the targets.
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN (4) Task 4, traverse and search fire
FRONT
Prepare a 24-round belt.
PASTER THREE
When the following fire command is given, repeat
SEVEN HUNDRED
each element as it is given.
___________________________________________________________________
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN

FRONT FRONT
PASTERS SEVEN THROUGH EIGHT PASTERS SEVEN THROUGH EIGHT
SEVEN HUNDRED SEVEN HUNDRED
TRAVERSE AND SEARCH, THREE-ROUND TRAVERSE AND SEARCH, THREE-ROUND
BURSTS BURSTS
AT MY COMMAND AT MY COMMAND
Acquire the proper sight picture and give an UP to Acquire the proper sight picture and give an UP to
safety personnel. safety personnel.
Engages pasters 7 through 8, firing a 3-round burst at
each paster, using the traverse and search technique. The command to FIRE is given.
Move downrange to observe and analyze the targets.
Using the traverse and search technique, engage
(5) Task 5, traverse and search fire pasters 7 through 8 in 40 seconds, firing a 3-round
burst at each paster.
When the following fire command is given, repeat Once complete, the shooters are given the order ALL
each element as it is given. CLEAR.
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN Restore the mask to the carrier and move down-
FRONT range to observe and analyze the targets.
PASTERS ONE THROUGH FOUR
SEVEN HUNDRED (7) Task 7, traverse and search fire
FIXED, THREE-ROUND BURSTS
AT MY COMMAND
When the following fire command is given, repeat
Acquires the proper sight picture and give an UP to each element as it is given.
safety personnel.
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
The command to FIRE is given. FRONT
PASTERS FIVE THROUGH SIX
Engage pasters 1 through 4 in 20 seconds, firing a SEVEN HUNDRED
three-round burst at each paster. TRAVERSE AND SEARCH, THREE-ROUND
Move downrange to observe and analyze the targets. BURSTS
AT MY COMMAND
(6) Task 6, NBC traverse and search fire
Prepare a 24-round belt. safety personnel.
The order to mask is given by stating GAS. Once the Using the traverse and search technique, the engage
shooters are masked the fire command is given. pasters 5 through 6 in 40 seconds, firing a 3-round
burst at each paster.
When the following fire command is given, repeat Move downrange to observe, analyze and score the
each element of as it is given. target.
2-56 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
c. 10-Meter Qualification Firing. Qualification progress from the 10-meter firing to field firing at var-
consists of firing tasks 2 through 4 of Firing Table I ious types of targets at longer distances. The auto-
for practice, and tasks 5 through 7 of Firing Table I matic rifleman experiences and learns the
for record (Firing Table I, page 2-53). Before firing, characteristics of fire, field zeroing, and range deter-
all automatic riflemen must be familiar with the tasks, mination. He uses the adjusted aiming point method
the time allowed, the ammunition allowances, the pro- of fire adjustment. Transition firing should take place
cedures to follow in the event of a stoppage, and the on available field firing ranges. These firing exercises
penalties imposed. are conducted from the bipod in the prone position, or
from the bipod in a fighting position. Transition fir-
(1) Time and ammunition. Each automatic rifleman
ing is conducted and scored for practice and qualifica-
completes zeroing before record firing. Individual fire tion. Firing Table II is used (see figure 2-61). It
commands are given for each task. Task 5 is fired in 20 consists of eight tasks. Targets should be placed at
seconds; task 6 in 40 seconds; and task 7 in 40 seconds. various ranges that an automatic rifleman might
(2) Stoppages. If a stoppage occurs, the automatic engage. Two “E” type target configurations should be
rifleman must apply immediate action. If the stop- used; either the single or double (see figure 2-62). All
page is reduced, he continues to fire the course. targets should be clearly visible from the firing posi-
tions. Electrical targets that provide feed back to the
If a stoppage occurs that cannot be reduced by shooter and range personnel are desirable.
immediate action, raise hand and await assistance.
Once the stoppage is reduced, complete firing (1) The same procedures used in Firing
Stoppages.
beginning with the next task. Table I (page 2-53) qualification firing apply to transi-
If a stoppage is caused by an error, additional time tion firing.
is not permitted. The score will be the one earned (2) Scoring. Five points are given for each target hit,
before the stoppage occurred. whether hit with the first or second burst. The total
If it is necessary to replace the SAW, zero the new possible points is 55. The automatic rifleman must hit
weapon and refire the exercise. at least 7 (35 points) targets out of 11 exposures to
qualify. DA Form 7304-R is used to record scores.
Automatic riflemen who cannot fire a task or cannot
complete firing in the time allowed (because of mal- b. Conduct of Fire. The unit is organized in firing
functions) can finish the exercise in an “alibi run” orders based on range constraints. One coach per
after all other automatic riflemen complete firing. automatic rifleman is desirable. The coach assists the
They fire only those tasks they failed to engage automatic rifleman, as needed, in all aspects of the
because of the malfunction. transition course except during qualification. The
eight tasks are fired in the following manner:
(3) Scoring. Automatic riflemen do not score their
own targets when firing for qualification. During (1) Task 1, field zeroing the 300-meter, single E-type
qualification firing, at least 35 points must be silhouette
achieved on Firing Table I, page 2-53. Prepares the rear sight for field zeroing and check
the front sight post. Sets the range to the zero target
2905. Transition Firing on the elevation knob. The preferred range is 300
meters.
a. Targets and Scoring. Transition firing provides Assume a good position.
the automatic rifleman the experience necessary to On command, prepare a 12-round belt.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 2-61. Firing Table II.
Load one 12-round belt of ammunition, obtain the

proper sight picture, and announce “up” to the
coach.
The coach relays the READY signal to safety person-

Figure 2-62. Single E-Type and Double E- nel controlling the range.
Type Silhouette Targets.
The COMMENCE FIRING command is given.
When the following firing command is given, repeat Fire a 3-round burst at the target when ready.
each element as it is given: Observe the beaten zone. If the rounds miss the tar-
get, make adjustments for windage and elevation.
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN
After adjustments have been made, repeat
TROOPS IN THE OPENFRONT
steps 8 through 9 with the remaining rounds
THREE HUNDRED
until the rounds are impacting on the target.
FIXED, THREE ROUND BURSTS
Record the zero.
COMMENCE FIRING
2-58 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
(2) Task 2, 200-meter, single E-type silhouette. If the target is not hit, fire another 3-round burst
On command, load one 66-round belt. using the adjusted aiming point method of fire
When the following fire command is given, repeat adjustment.
each element as it is given. It is only given once for
tasks 2 through 8. (4) Task 4, 100-meter, single E-type silhouette
AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN Range personnel give the order to mask by sounding

FRONT off, GAS.
TROOPS IN THE OPEN Don field protective mask and gloves.
ONE HUNDRED TO FOUR HUNDRED Continue to scan the sector.
METERS
FIXED, THREE ROUND BURSTS A 100 meter, single E-type target is exposed for 10
AT MY COMMAND seconds.
Announce “up” to the coach.
Determine the range, place the proper setting on the
rear sight, assume the proper position, obtain the
The coach gives the READY signal to the person con- correct sight alignment and sight picture, and fire a
trolling the line. 3-round burst.
The command to FIRE is given. If the target is not hit, fire another 3-round burst
using the adjusted aiming point method of fire
Scan the sector. adjustment.
A 200 meter single E-type target is exposed for 5 seconds. (5) Task 5, 300-meter, single E-type silhouette
Determine the range, place the proper setting on the Continue to scan the sector, while in field protective
rear sight, assume the proper position, obtain the mask and gloves.
correct sight alignment and sight picture, and fire a
3-round burst A 300 meter, single E-type target is exposed for 15
If the target is not hit, fire another 3-round burst seconds.
adjustment. Determine the range, place the proper setting on the
(3) Task 3, 400-meter, double E-type silhouette correct sight alignment and sight picture, and fire a
3-round burst.
Continue to scan the sector. If the target is not hit, fire another 3-round burst
A 400 meter, double E-type target is exposed for 10 adjustment.
seconds.
(6) Task 6, 100-meter and 300-meter, single E-type
Determine the range, place the proper setting on the silhouettes
correct sight alignment and sight picture, and fire a Continue to scan the sector, while in field protec-
3-round burst. tive mask and gloves.
___________________________________________________________________
A 100 meter and 300 meter, single E-type target are Determine the range, place the proper setting on the
exposed for 20 seconds. rear sight, assume the proper position, obtain cor-
rect sight alignment and sight picture, and fire a 3
Determine the range, place the proper setting on the round burst at each target.
rear sight, assume the proper position, obtain the If the target is not hit, fire another 3-round burst
correct sight alignment and sight picture, and fire a using the adjusted aiming point method of fire
3-round burst at each adjustment.
If the target is not hit, fire another 3-round burst
using the adjusted aiming point method of fire (8) Task 8, 100- and 200-meter, single, E-type and 400-
adjustment at each target. meter double E-type silhouettes
Continue to scan the sector.

Range personnel give the ALL CLEAR order.
The 100 meter and 200 meter single E-type and 400
Return field protective mask to its carrier and meter double E-type targets are exposed for 25 seconds.
remove gloves.
Determine the range, place the proper setting on the
(7) Task 7, 200-meter single E-type and 400-meter rear sight, assume the proper position, obtain cor-
double E-type silhouettes rect sight alignment and sight picture, and fire a 3-
Continue to scan the sector. round burst at each target,
If the target is not hit, fire another 3-round burst
The 200 meter single E-type and the 400 meter double
E-type targets are exposed for 20 seconds.
adjustment at each target.
Chapter 3
MACHINE GUN, 7.62MM, M240G

“Warned by the outpost, Puller’s men waited, straining to see through a dark night and a driving rain. Sud-
denly, the Japanese charged out of the jungle, attacking in Puller’s area near the ridge and the flat ground to
the east. The Marines replied with everything they had, calling in artillery, firing mortars, relying heavily on
crossing fields of machine gun fire to cut down the enemy infantrymen...lines held and the Japanese were cut
down in droves...”
—Actions of the 1st Battalion, 7th Marines, commanded by

LtCol Lewis B. “Chesty” Puller, in defense of
Henderson Airfield, 24 and 25 October 1942.7
World War II, Tarawa

A Marine Machine Gun Team in Action in Support of the Advance Inland
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3-2 MCWP 3-15.1
Table of Contents
Section 1. Introduction 3603. Normal Maintenance Procedures
3101. General Data 3604. Special Maintenance Procedures
3102. Sights 3605. Inspection
3103. Safety
Section 7. Ammunition
3104. Roles of the M240G
3701. Classification
Section 2. Disassembly, Assembly, and 3702. Identification
Nomenclature 3703. Ballistic Data
3201. General Disassembly 3704. Ammunition Packaging
3202. General Assembly 3705. Storage
3203. Detailed Disassembly and Assembly 3706. Care, Handling, and Preservation of
Ammunition
Section 3. Functioning
3301. Feeding
3302. Chambering 3801. Loading
3303. Locking 3802. Unloading and Clearing the Gun
3304. Firing 3803. Operation of the Safety
3305. Unlocking 3804. Firing the M240G
3306. Extracting 3805. Change Barrel Procedures
3307. Ejecting
Section 9. Gun Drill
3308. Cocking
3901. Crew Equipment
Section 4. Malfunctions and Stoppages 3902. Form for Gun Drill
3401. Malfunctions 3903. Examination of Equipment Before Firing
3402. Stoppages 3904. Placing the Gun into Action
3403. Immediate Action 3905. Barrel Change
3404. Remedial Action 3906. Taking the Gun Out of Action
3907. Rotation
Section 5. Mounts and Accessories
Section 10. Qualification Firing
3501. Bipod
3502. Tripod Mount, M122 31001. Fundamentals of Marksmanship
3503. Flex-mount 31002. Position and Grip
3504. Gun Bag 31003. Sight Setting and Battlesight Zero Procedures
3505. Night Vision Equipment 31004. 12.7 Meter (500 Inch) Firing
Section 11. Firing With Blank Ammunition

Section 6. Maintenance
31101. Safety
3601. Cleaning Materials and Lubricants
31102. Inspection
3602. Care and Cleaning Before, During, and After
31103. Assembly
Firing
31104. Operation
____________________________________________________________________
List of Figures
3-1 Left Side, Bipod Mounted 3-40 Flex-mount
3-2 Right Side, Bipod Mounted 3-41 T&E Mechanism
3-3 Rear Sight Assembly 3-42 Attaching the Flex-mount to the Tripod
3-4 Cutaway View 3-43 Attaching the Gun to the Flex-mount
3-5 Five Main Groups 3-44 The Tripod-Mounted Gun
3-6 Removing the Buttstock Group 3-45 Gun Bag
3-7 Removing the Drive Spring Rod Assembly. 3-46 Spare Barrel Bag
3-8 Removing the Bolt and Operating Assembly 3-47 AN/PVS-7B, NVG
3-9 Removing the Trigger Housing Group 3-48 AN/PVS-4, ISWS
3-10 Removing the Barrel Group 3-49 AN/PVS-5, NVG
3-11 Replacing the Trigger Housing Group 3-50 AN/PAQ-4B, IAL
3-12 Replacing the Bolt and Operating Rod Assembly 3-51 Belt of Disintegrating Link Ammunition
3-13 Separating the Bolt and Operating Rod 3-52 Ammunition for the M240G
3-14 Bolt Face 3-53 Ballistic Data for 7.62mm Ammunition
3-15 Operating Group, Detailed Disassembly 3-54 Issue 100-Round Bandolier
3-16 Assembling the Bolt and Operating Rod 3-55 Firing From the Open Bolt Position
3-17 Disassembly of the Gas System 3-56 Opening the Cover
3-18 Barrel Group, Detailed Disassembly 3-57 Feed Tray
3-19 Removing the Cover and Feed Tray 3-58 Loading, Cover Open
3-20 Receiver Group, Detailed Disassembly 3-59 Loading, Cover Closed
3-21 Aligning the Feed Tray Guides 3-60 Inspecting the Chamber
3-22 Trigger Pull Releasing the Operating Group 3-61 Operation of the Safety
3-23 Feeding 3-62 Bipod Position
3-24 Cover Parts 3-63 Changing Barrels
3-25 Chambering 3-64 Team Formed on Line With Equipment
3-26 Locking 3-65 Team in Prone Position
3-27 Firing 3-66 Team Leader Moving to Position
3-28 Action of the Gas 3-67 Extending the Tripod
3-29 Unlocking 3-68 Team Leader Mounting the Flex-mount
3-30 Extraction and Ejection 3-69 Gunner Mounting Gun
3-31 Cocking 3-70 Gun Team Ready to Fire
3-32 Gas Regulator Settings 3-71 Basic Machine Gun Qualification Target
3-33 Immediate Action 3-72 Combination Front Sight Adjusting Tool
3-34 Chamber Condition During Immediate Action 3-73 Correct Sight Alignment
3-35 Bipod Assembly 3-74 Correct Sight Picture
3-36 Lowering the Bipod 3-75 Unlocking the Front Sight Retaining Strap
3-37 M122 Tripod and Flex-mount 3-76 Blank Firing Adapter Assembly
3-38 Tripod 3-77 Installing the Blank Firing Adapter
3-39 Traversing Bar
Chapter 3
Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240G

the gun functions automatically as long as it is sup-
Section 1 plied with ammunition and the trigger is held to the
Introduction rear. It can be fired utilizing either the attached bipod
mount or by mounting the M240G on the tripod. The
The M240G machine gun (see figures 3-1 and 3-2) is tripod provides the most stable base for the weapon,
an air-cooled, belt-fed, gas-operated automatic enabling the gunner to maximize its range capabilities
weapon. It is able to provide a heavy, controlled vol- and deliver a high degree of accurate fire on target.
ume of accurate, long-range fire that is beyond the The traversing and elevating (T&E) mechanism per-
capabilities of individual small arms. The weapon mits controlled manipulation in both direction and ele-
fires from the open-bolt position and is fed by a disin- vation and makes it possible to engage predetermined
tegrating belt of metal links. The gas from firing one targets during darkness or periods of reduced visibil-
round provides the energy for firing the next. Thus, ity. Each member of the gun crew should have access
Figure 3-1. Left Side, Bipod Mounted.
Figure 3-2. Right Side, Bipod Mounted.

____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3-6 MCWP 3-15.1
to TM 08670A-10/1A and TM 08670B-23&P/2 SUP- Cyclic 650 to 950 rounds per minute
continuous burst barrel
PLEMENT 01 which are detailed, pocket-sized refer- change every minute
ence manuals for operators of the M240G, M240, (depending on gas setting)
M240E1, and M240C. Manipulation (tripod mount):

Limits of elevation with
T&E mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 mils
3101. General Data Free gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 mils
Limits of depression with
T&E mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 mils
Weights/Measurements Free gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 mils
Total system weight (gun and Limits of traverse (tripod mount):
tripod complete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.6 pounds
Using traversing bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 mils (425 left, 450 right)
Weight of machine gun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.6 pounds
On the traversing handwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mils
Weight of barrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 pounds Free gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6400 mils
Weight of spare barrel case,
complete with spare barrel
and all SL-3 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.90 pounds 3102. Sights
Weight of tripod, complete
with flex-mount including The M240G has a front sight post which can be
T&E mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 pounds
adjusted using the tool, combination, front sight
Length of machine gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 inches
Height of machine gun on tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 inches
adjusting. This is normally only done to zero the
Muzzle velocity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,800 feet per second
weapon (see paragraph 31003). The rear sight consists
Rifling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four grooves with a uniform of a peep sight aperture on an adjustable sight leaf
right hand twist, slide. This sight leaf slide rides on a range plate with a
one turn in 12 inches graduated scale which is attached to the weapon by a
Ranges hinged mount. See figure 3-3. The gun is normally
Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,725 meters carried with the sight in its horizontal position. The
Maximum effective. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,800 meters gun can be used with the sight in this position to
Grazing fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 meters engage close in targets (800 meters or below) from the
Ammunition bipod or tripod. It can also be raised to a vertical posi-
Caliber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.62 millimeter tion for sighting on targets at greater ranges (more
Types in use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ball, tracer, blank, than 800 meters). These settings are normally used
dummy, and armor-piercing only when the gun is employed on the tripod, which
Basic allowance per gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 rounds provides the stable platform necessary to accurately
Weight of a 100 round engage targets at these greater ranges. The range plate
assault pack (2 per can) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 pounds
Rates of fire scale, located on both sides of the range plate, is
Sustained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 rounds per minute marked at 100 meter intervals from 200 meters to the
fired in 6 to 8 round bursts maximum effective range of 1,800 meters. Range
4 to 5 seconds between bursts changes can be made by moving the rear sight slide
barrel change every 10 minutes horizontally along its graduated steps for range set-
Rapid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 rounds per minute tings from 200 meters to 800 meters, or range changes
fired in 10 to 12 round bursts can be made by raising the sight to its upright position
2 to 3 seconds between bursts and moving the rear sight slide vertically for range
barrel change every 2 minutes settings from 800 meters to 1,800 meters.
____________________________________________________________________
3103. Safety
The M240G safety is located on the trigger housing
assembly. It is set on SAFE (S) by pushing it to the
right and to FIRE (F) by pushing it to the left. In the F
position a red ring is visible around the safety. The
weapon cannot be set on S unless it is cocked (bolt to
the rear). To test the safety, first make sure the weapon
is clear, then pull the bolt to the rear using the cocking
handle. Place the weapon on S, and while holding the
cocking handle to the rear, pull the trigger. The bolt
should not move forward. If it moves, the safety is
defective and should be inspected by ordnance person-
nel. Finally, place the weapon on F, and while holding
the cocking handle to the rear, pull the trigger. The bolt
should move forward. Slowly release rearward tension
on the cocking handle and allow the bolt to move all
the way forward. (This is known as riding the bolt
home. This is done to minimize the wear and tear on
parts that would result from repeatedly allowing the
bolt to spring forward completely during non-firing
function testing.)
3104. Roles of the M240G

The M240G is a versatile weapon that can support
both offensive and defensive operations. It can pro-
vide a heavy volume of close, accurate, and continu-
ous fire support to suppress and destroy enemy
personnel in support of an attack. That same heavy
volume of fire, when employed as final protective
fires, forms an integral part of a unit’s defensive fire
plan and can effectively break up and stop an enemy
assault. The M240G can be found in combat, combat
support, and combat service support units.
Section 2
Disassembly, Assembly, and
Nomenclature
The M240G is designed for easy disassembly and

assembly; the use of force is not necessary. No special
tools are required. As the weapon is disassembled,
Figure 3-3. Rear Sight Assembly. place the parts (in the order in which they are
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
3-8 MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-4. Cutaway View.
removed) on a clean, flat surface. This reduces the the buttstock group, operating group, trigger hous-
possibility of losing a part and aids in assembly, as all ing group, barrel group, and receiver group. See
parts are replaced in reverse order. To prevent unnec- figure 3-5.
essary wear, disassembly should be kept to a mini-
mum, consistent with maintenance and training a. Clearing Procedures. Before the weapon is dis-
requirements. See figure 3-4. assembled, it must be cleared:
Grasp the cocking handle and pull the bolt to the
Disassembly and assembly are divided into two cate- rear.
gories—general and detailed. General disassembly Place the gun on S.
involves separating the weapon into main groups, Open the cover, raise the feed tray, and inspect the
which is also known as field stripping. This is a prac- chamber both visually and physically.
tice that stems from past experience in combat situa- Place the gun on F.
tions. It allows the operator to quickly break the Grasp the cocking handle, squeeze the trigger,
weapon down into a set of major components that can and slowly allow the bolt to return to its forward
be hastily cleaned to keep the weapon ready for position.
action. Detailed disassembly, for the operator,
involves the removal of some of the component parts b. Removing the Buttstock Group
and assemblies from the main groups. When the situa-
Bring the bolt forward and raise the cover.
tion and conditions permit, the operator can then take
the time to more fully disassemble and thoroughly Depress the buttstock latch located on the under-
clean the weapon. Complete general and detailed dis- side of the buttstock where it joins the receiver. See
assembly is normally the expected routine in garrison figure 3-6, step 1.
after the completion of firing and/or field training, but Slide the buttstock upward and remove it from the
it can also be conducted in a field environment when receiver. See figure 3-6, step 2.
necessary, to ensure the proper functioning and main-
tenance of the weapon. Disassembly of the weapon c. Removing the Operating Group. The operating
beyond that described in this publication is not autho- group consists of the operating rod, bolt, and drive
rized, except by qualified ordnance personnel. spring rod assembly.
To remove the drive spring rod assembly, first push
3201. General Disassembly in against its base, then lift up and outward so that
it clears its retaining studs inside the receiver. Then
General disassembly (field stripping) is the separa- remove it from the rear of the receiver. See figure
tion of the M240G into five main groups. They are 3-7, steps 1 and 2 on page 3-10.
____________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-5. Five Main Groups.
Figure 3-6. Removing the Buttstock Group.

3-10 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
bly inside the receiver. With the index finger, reach

inside the top of the receiver and push rearward on
the face of the bolt until the bolt and operating rod
assembly are exposed at the rear of the receiver.
See figure 3-8, steps 1 and 2.
Grasp the bolt and operating rod assembly and
remove them from the rear of the receiver. See fig-
ure 3-8, step 3.
d. Removing the Trigger Housing Group. The

trigger housing group consists of the trigger housing
assembly and the trigger housing assembly spring pin.
Remove the trigger housing assembly spring pin.
See figure 3-9, step 1.
Rotate the rear of the trigger housing assembly
down, disengage the holding notch at the front of
the assembly from its recess on the bottom of the
receiver, and remove the assembly from the
receiver. See figure 3-9, step 2.
e. Removing the Barrel Group. The barrel group

consists of the barrel with attached gas system, adjust-
able front sight assembly, flash suppressor, and barrel
changing handle.
Depress the barrel-locking latch located on the left
side of the receiver where the barrel joins the
receiver. See figure 3-10, step 1.
Grasp the barrel-changing handle and rotate it to an
upright position. Then push forward and pull up,
separating the barrel from the receiver. See figure
3-10, step 2.
f. Receiver Group. The receiver group consists

of the receiver with rear sight, cover, feedtray, and
bipod assembly. General disassembly is completed
after the removal of the other main groups from the
receiver group.
Figure 3-7. Removing the Drive Spring Rod As- 3202. General Assembly
sembly.
General assembly involves replacing the buttstock, oper-
Pull the cocking handle to the rear to start the rear- ating, trigger housing, and barrel groups on the receiver
ward movement of the bolt and operating assem- group. It is done in reverse order of disassembly.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-8. Removing the Bolt and Operating Assembly.
Figure 3-9. Removing the Trigger Housing Group.

3-12 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-10. Removing the Barrel Group.
a. Replacing the Barrel Group latch and rotate the barrel changing handle down to
its lowered position to lock the barrel in place.
Insert the barrel socket into the receiver forward of
the cover and align the rear of the gas plug with the
b. Replacing the Trigger Housing Group
gas cylinder tube in front of the bipod.
Depress the barrel-locking latch and fully seat the Insert the holding notch on the front of the trigger
barrel in the receiver. Release the barrel-locking housing into its recess on the bottom of the receiver.
___________________________________________________________________
Rotate the rear of the trigger housing upward and

align the hole of the trigger housing with the mount-
ing bracket on the receiver. See figure 3-11.
Insert the trigger housing assembly spring pin into
the hole, securing the assembly to the receiver. It
can be inserted from the left or right.
c. Replacing the Operating Group

Insert the bolt and operating rod into the receiver,
aligning the slots along their sides with the rails
inside the receiver. Extend the bolt to the unlocked
(forward) position and then push the entire bolt and
operating rod assembly inside the receiver. See fig-
ure 3-12.
Pull the trigger so that the assembly can slide all
the way into the receiver.
Insert the drive spring rod assembly into the
receiver, sliding it all the way forward against the
recess in the rear of the operating rod. Then lower it
so that its base seats against the retaining studs
inside the receiver that holds it into place.
Figure 3-11. Replacing the Trigger Housing Group.
Figure 3-12. Replacing the Bolt and Operating Rod Assembly.

3-14 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
d. Replacing the Buttstock Group Pull the trigger, with the safety on F and ride the
bolt home by maintaining rearward pressure on the
Align the recessed grooves at the front of the cocking handle as the bolt goes forward.
buttstock with the vertical rails at the rear of the
receiver.
3203. Detailed Disassembly and
Slide the buttstock downward until it locks in place Assembly
on the receiver.
The term detailed disassembly, as it is used in this
manual, refers only to those disassembly procedures
e. Conducting a Function Check. To check for
authorized for the OPERATOR level. This is not to be
correct assembly—
confused with procedures authorized for 2D echelon
Pull the cocking handle to the rear and return it to maintenance (unit armorers) or above. Detailed disas-
its forward position and close the cover. sembly of ANY of the groups beyond that described in
this document is NOT AUTHORIZED except by
Pull the cocking handle to the rear. qualified ordnance personnel.
Figure 3-13. Separating the Bolt and Operating Rod.

___________________________________________________________________
Detailed disassembly and assembly involves removing them together. Then, pull the bolt forward until it is
and replacing component parts of some of the main clear of the firing pin, thus disengaging the bolt from
groups. Although further disassembly of the operating, the operating rod (see figure 3-13, steps 1 and 2). This
barrel, and receiver groups is authorized at the unit completes detailed disassembly of the operating
level, it should be kept to a minimum to reduce the pos- group. The firing pin remains affixed to the operating
sibility of damaging or losing parts. The buttstock and rod and the ejector and extractor remain affixed to the
trigger housing groups will not have a detailed disas- bolt. These parts are removed by ordnance personnel
sembly performed by the operator. only (see figures 3-14 and 3-15).
a. Operating Group
(1) Detailed disassembly.To separate the operating
rod and bolt, remove the spring-loaded pin that holds To join the bolt and operating rod, hold the rod in
one hand, then position the rear of the bolt and
slide it over the firing pin. See figure 3-16, step 1.
Align the holes on the bolt with those on the operat-
ing rod and push the spring-loaded pin through
them to secure the two assemblies together. The pin
can be inserted from the left or right. See figure 3-
16, step 2.
b. Barrel Group
Hold the barrel at the point where the gas system

Figure 3-14. Bolt Face. attaches to it. Grasp and rotate the collar clock-
wise until it releases from the gas plug. Remove
Figure 3-15. Operating Group, Detailed Disassembly.

3-16 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-16. Assembling the Bolt and Operating Rod.
the collar from the gas plug. See figure 3-17, steps c. Receiver Group
1 and 2. (1) Detailed disassembly. To remove the cover and
Slide the gas plug to the rear out of the gas regulator feedtray, first raise the cover straight up. Then pull the
(see figure 3-17, step 3). hinge spring pin out and lift the cover and feedtray
from the receiver. See figures 3-19, steps 1 and 2.
This completes detailed disassembly of the barrel This completes detailed disassembly of the receiver
group (see figure 3-18). group. See figure 3-20.
(2) Detailed assembly. To replace the feedtray, lay
(2) Detailed assembly the feedtray on the receiver so that the feedtray
guides are aligned with the receiver brackets. See
Insert the gas plug into the gas regulator. figure 3-21. To replace the cover, place the cover
onto the receiver aligning its mounting holes with
Place the collar over the forward end of the plug. the mounting brackets on the receiver, and push it
Push against face of the collar while rotating coun- down into its closed position. Then, insert the cover
terclockwise until it locks into place. Pull on the hinge spring pin into the holes to affix the cover and
collar to ensure it is in the locked position. feed tray to the receiver.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-17. Disassembly of the Gas System.
Figure 3-18. Barrel Group, Detailed Disassembly.

3-18 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-19. Removing the Cover and Feed Tray.
Figure 3-20. Receiver Group, Detailed Disassembly.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-21. Aligning the Feed Tray Guides.
Figure 3-22. Trigger Pull Releasing the Operating Group.
pulled down by the trigger, disengaging it from the

Section 3 sear notch on the bottom of the operating rod, and
Functioning initiating forward movement of the operating group
under the force of the expanding drive spring. It ends
when the trigger is released and the rear of the sear
basic steps. More than one step can occur simulta-
raises up reengaging the sear notch, which then
neously during the cycle of functioning. These steps
holds the bolt to the rear in its open or ready to fire
are feeding, chambering, locking, firing, unlocking,
position. See figure 3-22.
extracting, ejection, and cocking. By understanding
how the M240G functions, it will be easier to recog-
nize and correct malfunctions and stoppages which
3301. Feeding
occur during firing.
The cycle begins by loading a round in the feedtray When the bolt is to the rear, the outer feed pawls
groove and then pulling the trigger. The sear is are outside the first round of ammunition. (See
3-20 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
figure 3-23.) The inner feed pawls are between the

first and second rounds (see figure 3-21).
As the bolt moves forward to fire the round in the
feedtray groove, the belt feed pawl moves to the
left. It moves up and over the second round in the
belt of ammunition and is now in position to drag
the second round into the feedtray groove (see fig-
ure 3-22).
As the bolt moves to the rear after firing, the belt feed
pawl moves to the right, dragging the second round
into the feedtray groove. Inside the cover the cam
roller, feed arm with control spring, feed arm fork,
and pivot arm exist only so the feed pawls can move
back and forth, dragging rounds into position to be
chambered (see figure 3-24).
3302. Chambering
This is the process of stripping a round from the

belt and seating it in the chamber. As the bolt trav-
els forward, the upper locking lug of the bolt con-
tacts the base of the cartridge. The bolt strips the
Figure 3-23. Feeding. round from the belt link. The chambering ramp
angles downward and forces the round toward the
chamber along with the spring tension of the car-
tridge guide pawl (see figure 3-25). The cartridge
Figure 3-24. Cover Parts.

___________________________________________________________________
guide pawl also holds back the belt link. When the spring and the locking lever, which the bolt is riding
round is fully seated in the chamber, the extractor on, swings forward pushing the bolt forward and lock-
snaps over the extractor rim of the cartridge, and ing it to the barrel socket. Although the term locking
the ejector is depressed. is used here, it should be noted that in the M240G the
bolt and barrel do not physically interlock. This is
3303. Locking why the barrel can be removed even when the bolt is
forward (see figure 3-26).
During chambering, the bolt enters the barrel socket
as the operating rod is driven forward by the drive 3304. Firing
After the bolt reaches its locked position, the operat-
ing rod moves forward, independent of the bolt (see
figure 3-25). It carries the striker of the fixed firing
pin through the aperture in the face of the bolt, strik-
ing and detonating the primer of the cartridge. See
figure 3-27.
Figure 3-25. Chambering. Figure 3-26. Locking.
Figure 3-27. Firing.

3-22 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-28. Action of the Gas.
3305. Unlocking 3306. Extracting

After the cartridge ignites and the projectile passes the The extractor grips the rim of the cartridge as the bolt
gas port, part of the gases enter the gas cylinder. The and operating rod pull the case from the chamber. See
rapidly expanding gases enter the hollow end cap of figure 3-30.
the gas piston and force the operating assembly to the
rear, providing the power for the last four steps in the 3307. Ejecting
cycle of functioning (see figure 3-28). The operating
rod now moves rearward, independent of the bolt, for As the case is withdrawn from the chamber, the ejec-
a short distance. At this point, the locking lever begins tor exerts a push from the top, and the extractor exerts
to swing toward the rear, carrying the bolt with it into a pull from the bottom. The casing falls from the gun
its unlocked position, and clears the barrel socket (see as soon as it reaches the cartridge ejection port (see
figure 3- 29). figure 3-30). At approximately the same time, the
empty link is forced out of the link ejection port
between the cartridge stops on the feedtray by the next
round moving into the feedtray groove.
Figure 3-29. Unlocking. Figure 3-30. Extraction and Ejection.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-31. Cocking.
3308. Cocking sive friction or loss of gas. Excessive friction is usually

due to lack of lubrication or excessive dirt/carbon in the
This is the process of placing the parts of the gun in gas system or on the bolt and receiver rails. Excessive
position to fire the next round. During the rearward loss of gas is usually due to loose connections in the
independent movement of the operating rod, the fir- gas system. To reduce sluggish operation, move the
ing pin striker is withdrawn from the face of the bolt. regulator setting to the number 2 or 3 position (see fig-
When the bolt has moved far enough to the rear to ure 3-32). To remedy continued sluggish operation,
pick up the next round for chambering, cocking is clean, lubricate, tighten, or replace parts as required.
completed. (See figure 3-31.)
Section 4
Malfunctions and Stoppages
Machine gunners must have a detailed understanding
of the many component parts of their weapon, what
those parts do during functioning, and what mechani-
cal problems may be encountered during firing. This
knowledge ensures that those problems can be quickly
assessed and corrective action taken.
3401. Malfunctions
Figure 3-32. Gas Regulator Settings.
A malfunction is a failure of the gun to function satis-
factorily; the gun will fire, but fires improperly.
b. Runaway Gun. This is when a gun continues to
Defective ammunition or improper operation of the
fire after the trigger is released; firing is uncon-
gun by a crewmember is not considered a malfunc-
trolled. A runaway gun is usually caused by a worn,
tion. Two of the more common malfunctions are slug-
broken, or burred sear; the sear shoulder is unable to
gish operation and runaway gun.
grab the operating rod and hold it to the rear. An
a. Sluggish Operation. Instead of firing at its nor- excessively worn sear notch on the operating rod
mal rate (approximately 9 to 10 rounds per second), a could also be responsible. The action taken to stop a
sluggish gun fires very slowly. It can be due to exces- runaway gun, for both tripod and bipod-mounted
3-24 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
guns, is for the team leader to twist and break the Immediate action procedures for the M240G are as
belt of ammunition. The remedy for runaway gun is follows:
to replace worn parts. Wait 5 seconds after the misfire to guard against a
hang fire.
3402. Stoppages Within the next 5 seconds (to guard against a cook
off), pull the charging handle to the rear, observe the
A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of function- ejection port, and, if brass was seen ejecting, attempt
ing caused by faulty action of the gun or defective to fire again. If brass did not eject, place the weapon
ammunition; in short, the gun stops firing. Stoppages on S, determine if the barrel is hot (200 rounds or
must be cleared quickly and firing resumed. Apply more fired in the last 2 minutes) or cold, and take the
immediate action (see paragraph 3403). appropriate steps as outlined in figure 3-33.
3403. Immediate Action 3404. Remedial Action

When immediate action fails to reduce the stoppage,
Immediate action is that action taken by the gunner/ remedial action must be taken. This involves investigat-
crew to reduce a stoppage, without investigating its ing the cause of the stoppage and may involve some
cause, and quickly return the gun to action. Hang fire disassembly of the weapon and replacement of parts to
and cook off are two terms that describe ammunition correct the problem. Two common causes of a stoppage
condition and should be understood in conjunction that may require remedial action are failure to extract
with immediate action procedures. due to a stuck or ruptured cartridge. See figure 3-34.
a. Stuck Cartridge. Some swelling of the car-
A hang fire occurs when the cartridge primer deto-
nates after being struck by the firing pin but some tridge occurs when it fires. If the swelling is exces-
problem with the propellant powder causes it to burn sive, the cartridge will be fixed tightly in the chamber.
too slowly and delays the firing of the projectile. If the extractor spring has weakened and does not
Time (5 seconds) is allotted for this malfunction tightly grip the base of the cartridge, it may fail to
before investigating a stoppage further because extract the round when the bolt moves to the rear.
injury to personnel and damage to equipment could Once the bolt is locked to the rear, the weapon is
occur if the round goes off with the cover of the placed on S, and the barrel has been allowed to cool, a
weapon open. length of cleaning rod should be inserted into the
muzzle to push the round out through the chamber.
A cook off occurs when the heat of the barrel is b. Ruptured Cartridge. Sometimes a cartridge is
high enough to cause the propellant powder inside in a weakened condition after firing. In addition, it
the round to ignite even though the primer is not may swell as described above. In this case, a properly
struck. Immediate action is completed in a total of functioning extractor may sometimes tear the base of
10 seconds to ensure that the round is extracted the cartridge off as the bolt moves to the rear, leaving
before the heat of the barrel affects it. When the the rest of the cartridge wedged inside the chamber.
round fails to extract/eject, further action is delayed The ruptured cartridge extractor must be used in this
(15 minutes) if the barrel is hot because the gunner instance to remove it. The barrel must be removed and
must assume that a round is still in the chamber and the extractor inserted into the chamber where it can
could cook off before the barrel cools down. grip and remove the remains of the cartridge.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-33. Immediate Action.

3-26 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-34. Chamber Condition During Immediate Action.

___________________________________________________________________
b. Raising. To raise the bipod legs, squeeze them

Section 5 together and rotate the legs rearward and upward into
Mounts and Accessories the slot on the bottom of the receiver until the bipod
latch engages, locking them in position.
In most cases, the M240G can be best utilized when
c. Lateral Movement. The M240G’s bipod pivots
fired from a tripod mount. In this configuration, the
on the ball joint, allowing quick and easy right or left
M240G’s potential for continuous, accurate fire and
lateral movement of the weapon by the gunner.
controlled manipulation can be maximized. In some
situations, however, the gunner can use the bipod
mount. Proper utilization of the bipod and the tripod 3502. Tripod Mount, M122
are discussed in this section. The M122 tripod mount consists of the tripod assem-
bly and flex-mount with the T&E mechanism. See
3501. Bipod figure 3-37. The tripod assembly provides a stable and
relatively lightweight base that is far superior to the
The bipod mount is part of the receiver group. It can- bipod. The tripod may be extended and collapsed eas-
not be removed by the operator. The bipod is held in ily. It consists of a tripod head, one front and two rear
position by the ball joint that joins it to the bottom of legs, and a traversing bar (see figure 3-38). The tra-
the receiver. See figure 3-35. versing bar connects the two rear legs. It is hinged on
one side with a sleeve and on the other side with a
a. Lowering. To lower the bipod legs, push in on sleeve latch. This allows the tripod to collapse to a
the bipod latch and rotate the legs down and for- closed position for carrying or storage or to lock in an
ward (see figure 3-36). Release the legs and they open extended position for use. The traversing bar
will automatically spring outward into their open and also supports the T&E mechanism. Engraved on the
locked position. bar is a scale that measures direction in mils. It is
graduated in 5-mil increments. It is numbered every
100 mils from 0 in the center to 450 mils on the left
side and 425 mils on the right side (see figure 3-39).
3503. Flex-mount
The flex-mount consists of the mount itself and the
(T&E) mechanism. It joins the gun and T&E to the
tripod. The flex-mount enhances the stability of the
tripod platform and dampens the recoil of the weapon
(see figure 3-40). The purpose of the T&E mecha-
nism is to provide controlled manipulation and the
ability to engage predetermined targets (see figure 3-
41). Detailed instructions for its employment are con-
tained in chapter 6.
The traversing portion of the mechanism consists of the
traversing hand wheel, traversing screw, offset head,
and traversing slide with lock lever. As the hand wheel
is turned, the offset head will appear to move along the
Figure 3-35. Bipod Assembly. traversing screw, and the muzzle of the weapon will
3-28 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-36. Lowering the Bipod.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-37. M122 Tripod and Flex-mount.
Figure 3-38. Tripod.

3-30 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-39. Traversing Bar.
Figure 3-40. Flex-mount.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-41. T&E Mechanism.
move to the right or left. Each click of the hand wheel a. Mounting the Gun. The preferred method of
indicates a 1 mil change in direction of the muzzle: 1 mounting the gun is to first attach the flex-mount to
click = 1 mil. There is a total of 100 mils traverse on the tripod and then mount the gun on the flex-mount.
the traversing screw. Notice that the traversing slide is a
U-shaped projection near the bottom of the T&E mech- Prepare the tripod, extend its legs until the sleeve
anism. This slide is locked to the traversing bar by the latch engages, locking them open. See figure 3-38.
slide locking lever while firing. Prepare the T&E mechanism for mounting: rotate
The elevating portion of the mechanism consists of the the elevating hand wheel until approximately 1 1/2
upper elevating screw with scale, elevating hand wheel, inches (two fingers) are visible on the upper elevat-
and lower elevating screw. The scale on the upper ele- ing screw, rotate the traversing slide until approxi-
vating screw is graduated in 50-mil increments from 0 mately two fingers are visible on the lower
to +200 and 0 to -200, for a total of 400 mils of eleva- elevating screw, and rotate the traversing hand
tion change. The elevating hand wheel also has a scale. wheel until the offset head is centered on the tra-
It is marked in 1 mil increments from 0 to 50. One click versing screw. The T&E is now roughly centered.
on the elevating hand wheel indicates a 1 mil change in Insert the flex-mount’s pintle into the tripod’s pin-
elevation of the barrel: 1 click = 1 mil. Beneath the ele- tle bushing and then engage the pintle locking lever
vating hand wheel is the lower elevating screw. to hold it in place. See figure 3-42, steps 1 and 2.
3-32 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-42. Attaching the Flex-mount to the Tripod.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-42. Attaching the Flex-mount to the Tripod—Continued.

3-34 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Lower the traversing slide over the traversing bar terclockwise). Then disengage the pintle lock and
with the traversing slide to the rear and the travers- raise the pintle and entire mount up and off the tripod.
ing wheel to the left. Secure it by turning the lock-
ing lever clockwise. See figure 3-42, steps 3 and 4.
3504. Gun Bag
Attach the gun to the flex-mount by pushing the
recesses on the forward portion of the receiver
on the bottom of the receiver against the forward The gun bag is used to carry and protect the M240G
bushings on the flex-mount (see figure 3-43, machine gun system, complete. It consists of a large
step 1). Rotate the rear of the gun down to the outer bag and a smaller, removable spare barrel bag
mount and insert the retaining pin forward of the inside. The complete gun bag is used to carry the
trigger housing assembly to lock the weapon in machine gun, tripod, flex-mount, spare barrel, and all
place (see figure 3-43, step 2). This completes user maintenance equipment and other accessories
mounting (see figure 3-44). (SL-3 components) (see figure 3-45). This will keep
the gun and all its components together and protected
during events such as unit movements for embarka-
b. Dismounting the Gun. The preferred method of
tion on ships or aircraft. The removable spare barrel
dismounting the gun is to first remove the flex-
bag is designed for field use and will carry the spare
mount’s rear retaining pin, raise up on the rear of the
barrel, and a complete set of user maintenance equip-
gun, and then pull the gun back, disengaging it from
ment and accessories (SL-3 components) (see figure
the mount’s forward bushing.
3-46). The spare barrel bag has adjustable shoulder
To remove the flex-mount from the tripod, first straps and can be worn like a pack. It can also be car-
unlock the traversing slide lock (turn the lever coun- ried by a fixed carrying strap.
Figure 3-43. Attaching the Gun to the Flex-mount.

___________________________________________________________________
3505. Night Vision Equipment sights for the medium machine gun is a high priority.
The overall NVE concept of employment is for ther-
Mounting hardware required to mount night vision mal sights, image intensified night vision devices, and
equipment (NVE) on the M240G is under develop- infrared aim lights to be employed in a complimentary
ment. In the interim, existing NVE can be redistrib- manner, allowing Marines to operate effectively at
uted or its use modified to meet mission needs in night. This will improve their mobility and ability to
regard to M240G employment at night. AN/PVS-5 detect and engage the enemy.
night vision goggle (NVG), AN/PVS-4 individual
served weapon sight (ISWS), AN/PVS-7B NVG, and a. Night Vision Goggles, AN/PVS-7B. The machine
AN/PAQ-4B infrared aim light (IAL) provides the gun squad leader can use the AN/PVS-7B NVG to
M240G with the required night vision capability. The detect, identify, and adjust his guns onto targets. The
first three are passive image intensifiers, and the last machine gun team leader can also use the AN/PVS-7B
one is a device that will place an aim point on a target NVG in the same manner to aide in the employment of
out to 600M. The IAL is visible only with an image his machine gun team. The team leader spots and adjusts
intensification device, so it is invisible to the naked for the gunner at night just as he does during daylight
eye. Until a sight mounting system is fielded for the engagements. The gunner could also be equipped with
M240G, use of these devices in any combination the AN/PVS-7B, either instead of or in addition to the
deemed appro-priate by the unit commander will squad leader or team leader. This would enable the gun-
ensure adequate night vision capabilities within ner to detect, identify, and adjust his own fire onto tar-
M240G squads and teams. Procurement of thermal gets. The AN/PVS-7Bs are lightweight (1.5 lbs.), small,
Figure 3-43. Attaching the Gun to the Flex-mount—Continued.

3-36 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-44. The Tripod-Mounted Gun.
Figure 3-45. Gun Bag.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-46. Spare Barrel Bag.
and easy to carry and use. This is important when con-

sidering the load already carried by machine gun teams.
The AN/PVS-7B NVG can be hand-held or worn with a
head mount. This is important if issued to the gunners
because gunners need both hands free to operate the
weapon and manipulate the T&E. The AN/PVS-7Bs
have a range of 250 meters in moonlight and 200 meters
in starlight. See figure 3-47.
b. Individual Served Weapon Sight, AN/PVS-4. The

AN/PVS-4 is the currently fielded night sight used with
various weapons, including the medium machine gun.
Figure 3-47. AN/PVS-7B, NVG.
3-38 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
There is no mount to attach the AN/PVS-4 to the gun; d. Infrared Aim Light, AN/PAQ-4B. The AN/
however, the AN/PVS-4 can be hand-held and would PAQ-4B IAL is a small, lightweight device that bore-
serve more as a monocular night vision device than as a sights to the M240G and emits a beam of infrared
sight in this configuration. The AN/PVS-4 can be used light that is used in conjunction with a night vision
in this manner by the machine gun squad leader and/or device to acquire and engage targets at night. The IAL
the team leader. The AN/PVS-4 could also be mounted is visible only when viewed with image intensified
on the squad leader’s or team leader’s M16 rifle; how- NVE such as the AN/PVS-4 ISWS, AN/PVS-5 NVG,
ever, the team leader must ensure employment in this and AN/PVS-7B NVG. The IAL allows the gunner to
manner does not interfere with his duties as the assis- aim and maintain fire on the target without the sight-
tant gunner. The AN/PVS-4 ISWS weighs 3.5 lbs and ing process being disturbed by the recoil of the
has a range of 600 meters in moonlight and 400 meters weapon system. The gunner puts the aim point on the
in starlight. See figure 3- 48. target, fires, and adjusts the point of impact. He can
readily see the impact of the rounds because his view
is not being disrupted by the flash and recoil of the
weapon. See figure 3-50.
Figure 3-48. AN/PVS-4, ISWS.
c. Night Vision Goggles, AN/PVS-5. The AN/

PVS-5 NVG is the currently fielded NVG; however, Figure 3-50. AN/PAQ-4B, IAL.
the AN/PVS-7B NVG will begin to augment/replace
it in the future. The NVG functions and is used in
basically the same way as the AN/PVS-7B NVG
although the range is less, 150 M moonlight and 50 M
starlight. See figure 3-49.
Section 6
Maintenance
Proper maintenance, care, cleaning, and inspection of
a weapon and its accessories determine whether or not
it will function correctly when needed. The bore and
chamber must be properly maintained to preserve
accuracy. Because of the close fit of working surfaces
and the high speed at which the gun operates, the
receiver and all moving parts must be kept clean; cor-
rectly lubricated; and free from burrs, rust, and dirt to
ensure proper, efficient functioning. Maintenance of
the mount used with the weapon is no less important.
The functioning of the gun and mount together as a
weapons system determines its overall effectiveness.
Finally, all accessories and equipment used with the
gun and mount, including ammunition, must be prop-
Figure 3-49. AN/PVS-5, NVG. erly maintained.
___________________________________________________________________
3601. Cleaning Materials and Lubricants b. During Firing. During firing, maintain a light
coat of CLP on the parts listed in paragraph 3602a,
a. Cleaning Materials. The only authorized clean- and ensure that the gas system's connections remain
ing materials for use at the unit level are CLP, RBC, tight. Change barrels when necessary.
and dry cleaning solvent. Use CLP or bore cleaner for
daily maintenance and to remove minor carbon c. After Firing. After firing, clean the gun with
buildup after firing. Dry cleaning solvent will dry out CLP, RBC, or dry cleaning solvent. Even the most
the metal and it is recommended for cleaning during careful initial cleaning will not remove all carbon
change from one lubricant to another. deposits; therefore, it is necessary to clean the gun
for 3 consecutive days after firing. After cleaning
b. Lubricants. The lubricants authorized for field each day, wipe off all cleaning materials and place a
use on the M240G are CLP, LAW, LSA, and LSA-T. light coat of CLP on all metal parts.
They are used to lubricate certain operating parts
before, during, and after firing. Each type is best used If the gun is fired daily, remember that repeated
in specific climatic and environmental conditions. See detailed disassembly will cause unnecessary wear.
paragraph 3604. Adequate cleaning can be performed on a gun that has
been disassembled into its five main groups. It is
essential to perform detailed disassembly only after
3602. Care and Cleaning Before, During,
prolonged firing. Ensure that cleaning materials such
and After Firing as CLP and RBC are not used on the nonmetallic por-
tions of the gun, such as the buttstock. Hot water,
a. Before Firing. Inspect for cleanliness, proper
rags, and nonabrasive brushes can be used to remove
mechanical condition, and missing or broken parts.
dirt from the nonmetallic portions of the gun.
Remove excess oil from the bore, chamber, barrel
socket, and face of the bolt. Lubricate the gun by plac- The M122 tripod should be cleaned to remove all dirt,
ing a light coat of CLP on the following parts: then a light coat of CLP should be applied, especially
to the sleeve and sleeve latch.
(1) Operating rod. Apply CLP on those recesses
along the side that make contact with the receiver rails.
3603. Normal Maintenance Procedures
(2) Bolt. A very small amount of CLP should be placed Each gun should be cleaned as soon after firing as pos-
on the spring pin, the roller, and other moving parts. sible and each time it is exposed to field conditions. In
combat conditions the gun should be cleaned and lubri-
(3) Receiver.With the bolt to the rear, apply a line cated daily, whether or not it has been fired. If possi-
of CLP on either side of the bolt. Manually pull the ble, keep the gun covered with a canvas, tarpaulin, or
bolt back and forth, so that CLP is spread over the poncho when not in use. During normal training condi-
bolt and receiver rails. Headspace should also be tions, inspect the gun daily for rust and maintain a light
checked before firing. To do this, rotate the barrel coat of CLP on all metal parts. In ideal conditions,
changing handle and count the number of clicks when the gun is not used and is kept in a clean place, it
heard. There must be a minimum of two clicks, but may only be necessary to disassemble and clean it
not more than seven. If this is not the case, the every 3 to 5 days. The gun should be disassembled,
weapon should not be fired. It should be turned in for cleaned, and lubricated in a clean, dry location where it
higher echelon maintenance/inspection. is least exposed to dirt and moisture.
3-40 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
3604. Special Maintenance Procedures but also look for broken, missing, or burred parts. Test
the spring tension of appropriate parts, and perform
a. Climatic Conditions appropriate checks to determine if the gun functions
(1) Cold climates. In cold climates, the M240G must properly. The gun should be inspected in an orderly,
be kept free of excess lubricants, cleaners, and mois- set sequence so no part is overlooked and no time is
ture; all of which can freeze and cause the gun to wasted. Each inspector will develop the exact
operate sluggishly. If brought indoors, allow the gun sequence, but it may be convenient to first inspect the
to come to room temperature, wipe completely dry, gun, then the mount. The following is a suggested
and lubricate with a light coat of CLP. In tempera- sequence (only the main points are outlined):
tures between 10 degrees Fahrenheit (-12 degrees a. Inspection of the M240G
Centigrade) and -10 degrees Fahrenheit (-23 degrees
Centigrade), the M240G should be lubricated with Start with the cover. Always look for cleanliness,
CLP, LSA, or LAW. In sustained temperatures below but also carefully check parts and components for
-10 degrees Fahrenheit (-23 degrees Centigrade) use serviceability and proper functioning. Pull the feed
LAW only. arm back and forth to make sure that the fork and
pivot arm freely move along with the outer and
(2) Hot, humid climates. In hot, humid climates, inner feed pawls. Check for tight spring tension on
inspect more frequently for rust and keep free of the feed arm control spring. Push the feed pawls up
moisture. Ensure that the gun is lubricated properly against the plate to test their spring tension.
with LSA, LSA-T, or CLP. Generally a heavier appli-
Run your finger over the receiver rails to check for
cation of lubricant is required.
carbon. See if the drive spring is rusted.
(3) In hot, dry climates, sand and
Hot, dry climates. Ensure the weapon is on F, pull the bolt all the way
dust must be kept from collecting in working parts. to the rear, and release the cocking handle. If the
Clean the gun daily with CLP. Wipe dry. The teflon bolt did not remain to the rear, the sear shoulder or
coating left by the CLP or LSA-T will be sufficient to sear notch is excessively worn. Next inspect the
keep the parts working smoothly. forward portion of the receiver rails, the face of the
bolt, and the chambering ramp in the receiver. Ver-
b. Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Condi-
ify that the extractor and ejector are present. Ensure
tions. If contamination is anticipated, apply lubricant
that the bolt moves freely between its locked and
to all outer surfaces of the machine gun (do not lubri-
unlocked positions.
cate ammunition). Keep the gun covered as much as
possible. If the gun is contaminated, decontaminate by Inspect one side of the receiver, then remove the
following the procedures outlined in FM 3-5, NBC barrel. Examine the barrel socket, chamber, and
Decontamination, then clean and lubricate. bore for cleanliness, burrs, and cracks. Make sure
the gas plug and collar fit together tightly. To see if
the gas system is relatively free of carbon, take it
3605. Inspection
apart and inspect the gas portals on the plug to
The gun should be mounted on the M122 tripod and ensure that they are clear. Inspect the bipod assem-
placed on a poncho with the spare barrel case. The bly by lowering and raising the legs. Replace the
exact position of the gun and contents of the spare barrel, examine the rear sight, and inspect the other
barrel case may be specified by the inspecting officer side of the receiver.
or, in his absence, by the unit leader. The T&E mech- Test the mechanical condition of the trigger-hous-
anism should be centered. The bolt should be forward ing group, specifically the safety. With the weapon
and the cover raised. Always check for cleanliness, on S and bolt to the rear, pull the trigger; the bolt
___________________________________________________________________
should remain to the rear. If the bolt went forward, be able to recognize the types of ammunition and
the safety is defective. know how to care for them.
With the weapon on F and the cover closed, pull the
trigger and ride the bolt home slowly by holding the
cocking handle. Riding the bolt home slowly will
prevent damage to the cam roller and feedtray.
Return the gun to its original position (bolt forward,
cover raised).
b. Inspection of the Mount

Check the pintle to see that it is attached properly,
that the tripod is extended fully, and that the T&E
mechanism is not positioned backwards.
Examine the T&E mechanism. Determine if the
scales can be read without difficulty. Manipulate
the T&E hand wheel to examine the cleanliness of
the far ends of the T&E screws. At the same time,
perform a function check by testing for dead clicks.
Dead clicks are present when, while turning either
hand wheel, the barrel does not move. It means the
gears inside the T&E are excessively worn, and the
T&E should be replaced. Also, grasp the stock, and
gently pull the gun back and forth to test for inordi-
nate play in the M122 mount. Determine if the
slide lock lever firmly holds the T&E to the tra-
versing bar.
Examine the tripod and flex-mount for rust. One
particular spot to check is inside the shoes of the Figure 3-51. Belt of Disintegrating
Link Ammunition.
tripod legs.
Inspect the gun bag and spare barrel bag for signs
of deterioration and wear. Ensure that the spare
barrel bag contains all required SL-3 components,
and examine the spare barrel as described above.
Before moving to another display, make sure the Ammunition for the M240G is classified as listed:
gun is displayed as you found it.
a. Tracer Cartridge. Used for observation of fire,
incendiary effect, signaling, and marking targets.
Section 7
b. Ball Cartridge. Used against targets of light mate-
Ammunition rial, personnel, and during marksmanship training.
This section describes the ammunition used with the c. Blank Cartridge. Used during training when sim-
M240G. Ammunition is issued as complete rounds ulated fire is desired.
consisting of the projectiles (bullets), cartridge cases,
propellant powder, and primers. Ammunition is issued d. Dummy Cartridge. Used during training, such as
in a disintegrating metallic split linked belt (see fig- gun a drill. It is completely inert, but simulates service
ure 3-51). The members of machine gun teams must ammunition for practice in loading the gun.
3-42 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
e. Armor-Piercing Cartridge. Used against lightly 3704. Ammunition Packaging

armored targets where armor-piercing effects are
desired. This ammunition is not authorized for train- Ammunition is packaged in a metal box containing
ing purposes. two bandoleers. Each box weighs approximately 16
pounds. Each bandoleer contains 100 linked rounds
and weighs approximately 7 pounds (see figure 3-54).
3702. Identification The bandoleer is made up of a cardboard carton held
inside a cloth bag with a carrying strap. Ammunition
The type, caliber, model, and ammunition lot num- in the bandoleers may be hooked together and fired
ber, including the symbol of the manufacturer, are from the metal containers, or the bandoleers may be
necessary for complete identification of small arms removed for firing.
ammunition. The 7.62mm NATO cartridge is com-
pletely identifiable by its appearance; the painting of
the bullet tip, the manufacturer’s initial and year of 3705. Storage
manufacture on the base of the cartridge case, and the Store ammunition of all classes away from heat
markings on the packing containers. When removed sources; such as open flame, radiators, heaters, and hot
from their original packing containers, the cartridges water pipes. Ammunition should be stored under cover.
may be identified by the following physical character- If it is necessary to leave ammunition in the open, keep
istics (also see figure 3-52): it at least 6 inches from the ground and covered with a
double thickness of tarpaulin. Place the tarpaulin so it
gives maximum protection and allows free circulation
Tracer (M62). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tip of bullet is painted orange.
of air. Dig suitable trenches to prevent water from
Tracer (M62 Overhead Fire). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tip of bullet is painted red.
flowing under the ammunition pile.
Ball (M80). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plain bullet tip.
Full metal jacket on bullet.
Blank (M82) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double tapered neck and no bullet.
One-piece metal cartridge from Ammunition
its base to its nose.
Dummy (M63) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Six longitudinal corrugations (flutings) Ammunition containers should not be opened until the
on the cartridge. Also, there is no ammunition is to be used. Ammunition removed from
primer or vent hole in the primer pocket.
the airtight containers, particularly in damp climates,
Armor-Piercing (M61) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tip of bullet is painted black.
is likely to corrode. Protect ammunition from mud,
dirt, and water. If the ammunition gets wet or dirty,
wipe it off prior to use. Wipe off light corrosion as
3703. Ballistic Data soon as it is discovered. Heavily corroded cartridges
should be replaced. Use caution during firing to
Figure 3-53 shows the armor penetration capability ensure that ammunition is kept out of the dirt. Dirt
and other ballistic data for the M80 ball round and the picked up during firing will act as an abrasive in the
M61 armor piercing round. Also see appendix A for chamber and could cause a malfunction that can result
further ballistic data. in injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-52. Ammunition for the M240G.

3-44 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-53. Ballistic Data for 7.62mm Ammunition.
Figure 3-54. Issue 100-Round Bandolier.
DO NOT expose ammunition to direct rays of the sun. DO NOT fire over friendly troops any ammunition
If the powder is hot, excessive pressure may be devel- graded and marked FOR TRAINING USE ONLY.
oped when the gun is fired. Only specially approved lots of ammunition can be
used for overhead fire. The packaging of this ammu-
DO NOT oil or grease ammunition. Dust and other nition is clearly stamped FOR OVERHEAD FIRE.
abrasives will collect on it and could damage the
operating parts of the gun.
DO NOT fire ammunition (other than blank ammuni-
DO NOT fire dented cartridges, cartridges with loose tion) until it has been positively identified by ammu-
projectiles, or other defective rounds. nition and grade.
___________________________________________________________________
3801. Loading
Section 8
Operation and Firing a. Raised Cover. To load with the cover raised,
the bolt must be to the rear and the safety lever on S.
The M240G fires from the open bolt position to facili- See figure 3-56.
tate cooling (see figure 3-55). When the trigger is
pulled, the bolt and operating rod start forward. A The team leader, who is the assistant gunner, takes a
round is chambered, locked, and fired, all without belt of ammunition with the open side of the links
another action by the gunner. Whenever the bolt is to down and places the first round against the cartridge
the rear, the weapon is ready to fire, so ensure the stops, aligning it with the feed aperture. See figures 3-
safety is on S. 57 and 3-58, step 1.
The gunner closes the cover (while the team leader
holds the belt to ensure that the first round does not
slip away from the cartridge stops) (see figure 3-58,
step 2) and places the safety on F. The gun is loaded
and ready to fire.
b. Closed Cover. To load with the cover closed
and the bolt forward, the safety must be on F.
Figure 3-55. Firing From the

Open Bolt Position.
Figure 3-56. Opening the Cover. Figure 3-57. Feed Tray.

3-46 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-58. Loading, Cover Open.
The team leader takes a belt of ammunition with the 3802. Unloading and Clearing the Gun
open side of the links down and forces the first round
into the feedway until the holding pawl engages it and a. Unloading. Whether or not the belt is expended,
holds it in place. See figure 3-59. unloading procedures are essentially the same: all
ammunition must be removed, and the chamber must
The gunner pulls the cocking handle to the rear and be checked. The gunner pulls the bolt to the rear (in
returns the handle forward. The gun is loaded and case all rounds in the belt have been expended),
ready to fire. places the weapon on S, raises the cover, and the team
leader clears the feedtray of ammunition and links.
The gunner inspects the chamber by lifting the
feedtray (see figure 3-60). If the chamber is clear,
unloading is completed.
b. Clear Gun Procedure. To ensure the gun is

safe, perform the clear gun procedure. This is done
after the gun has been unloaded properly and is simi-
lar to the unloading procedure.
After the gun is properly cleared, the gunner puts the

safety on F, pulls the cocking handle to the rear,
Figure 3-59. Loading, Cover Closed. pulls the trigger, and rides the bolt home. Then the
___________________________________________________________________
When the safety is placed in the F position, the cut-

away portion of the safety bar is aligned with the
safety lug on the sear. This allows the sear to move
downward when the trigger is pulled.
CAUTION
The weapon should NOT be half-cocked. Half-cock-
ing is pulling the bolt to the rear just far enough to en-
gage the safety, then returning the bolt forward. If the
bolt is pulled to the rear while the gun is on S, the safe-
ty will prevent the bolt from being pulled back far
enough to lock it to the rear. If the operator inadvert-
ently lets it slip forward again, the drive spring has the
strength to send the operating group forward to feed,
and then to chamber and fire the next round, even
though the weapon must be on F, the bolt pulled and
LOCKED to the rear, and then the safety engaged in
order to prevent inadvertent discharge of the weapon.
Figure 3-60. Inspecting the Chamber.

3804. Firing the M240G
a. Trigger Manipulation. The trigger is not
squeezed as with other small arms; it is pulled to the
gunner pulls the bolt to the rear and returns the
rear and then released. This enables the gunner to con-
safety to S.
trol the number of rounds in each burst and prevents
The team leader runs a cleaning rod down the bore. excessive wear to the sear and sear notch. Bursts of
When the gunner sees the tip of the cleaning rod in the less than six rounds should not be fired. The rapid rate
chamber, he sounds off “gun clear,” and the team of fire of 200 rounds per minute is delivered in bursts
leader removes the cleaning rod. The gunner then of 10 to 12 rounds, which are fired 2 to 3 seconds
places the gun in a safe position; bolt forward, safety apart. The sustained rate of fire of 100 rounds per
on S, and cover raised. The result of properly execut- minute is delivered in bursts of six to eight rounds,
ing the clear gun procedure is a safe gun. which are fired 4 to 5 seconds apart.
b. Firing From the Bipod. When firing from the
3803. Operation of the Safety bipod, the rear sight is raised. Assume a prone posi-
When the safety is on, the cutaway portion of the tion behind the gun with the right shoulder into the
safety bar is not aligned with the safety lug of the weapon. The right hand grasps the pistol grip and
sear. When the trigger is pulled, the sear cannot rotate manipulates the trigger. Place the left hand on the
downward and the operating group cannot move for- comb of the stock, palm down, with the cheek rest-
ward. See figure 3-61. ing lightly against the cover and/or the left hand (see
3-48 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-61. Operation of the Safety.
figure 3-62). Both hands exert a firm, steady pres- (2) Changing elevation. To manipulate the gun in
sure to the rear during aiming and firing. Unlike the elevation (moving the muzzle up or down), move the
tripod, the bipod mount is relatively unstable elbows closer together or farther apart.
(elbows and upper torso may move). A good sight
c. Firing From the Tripod. When firing from the
picture must be regained before firing each burst.
tripod, the rear sight is lowered. Assume a prone posi-
(1) Changing direction. To manipulate the gun for tion behind the gun with the right shoulder into the
minor changes in direction (moving the muzzle to the weapon. Manipulate the trigger with the right hand
right or left), shift the shoulders and upper torso and the T&E with the left. Exert a steady rearward
slightly. The weapon’s bipod is mounted on a ball pressure during firing with both hands (left hand on
joint, allowing relatively easy minor changes in direc- the elevating hand wheel, palm down).
tion through approximately 45 degrees. To make a
(1) Firing. Point the muzzle of the gun in the gen-
major change in direction, the entire body must be
moved until it is realigned directly behind the eral direction of the target by releasing the slide lock
weapon. Thus, rapid, major changes in direction are lever and pulling the T&E along the traversing bar.
difficult with the bipod. Secure the slide lock lever and raise the rear sight.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-62. Bipod Position.
Place the estimated range on the rear sight, and NOTE

manipulate the gun until there is a good sight pic-
The key words, or thumb rule, are similar to
ture. The assistant gunner then lowers the rear sight
those used in reading map coordinates. They are
and begins firing. Unlike the bipod, the M122 tripod
PUSH RIGHT UP. Push on the traversing hand
provides a stable base and controlled manipulation,
wheel to go right, and push on the elevating
making the use of the sight not only redundant, but it
hand wheel to go up.
also blocks the gunner’s view of the target and
impacting rounds.
3805. Change Barrel Procedures
(2) Manipulation. All manipulation is accom- The ability to change the barrels of the M240G
plished by turning the two hand wheels with the quickly provides a great advantage. It allows one bar-
left hand. If both direction and elevation changes rel to be used while the other is cooling. This
are required to engage a target, manipulate direc- increases the life of each barrel and ensures a continu-
tion first, then elevation. ous rapid rate of accurate fire. Barrels should be
changed when they are beginning to overheat. Chang-
To traverse, place the left hand on the traversing hand ing a barrel only takes a few seconds and signifi-
wheel, thumb up. To move the muzzle to the right, the cantly improves the rate of fire and accuracy. As a
gunner pushes away with the thumb: PUSH RIGHT. guide, a barrel change is required after firing the sus-
To move the muzzle to the left, the gunner pulls to the tained rate for 10 minutes and after firing the rapid
rear with the thumb: PULL LEFT. rate for 2 minutes. The procedures outlined below are
for a tripod-mounted gun; however, they are very sim-
To search, rest the left hand on the elevating hand ilar to those for a bipod-mounted gun.
wheel. To move the muzzle up, the gunner pushes
away with the thumb: PUSH UP. To move the muz- The barrel can be changed with the bolt forward or to
zle down, the gunner pulls to the rear with the the rear. The weapon does not necessarily need to be
thumb: PULL DOWN. unloaded; however, it must be placed on S when the
3-50 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
bolt is to the rear. The gunner depresses the barrel- ence to prescribed procedures. Speed is acquired after
locking latch with his left hand and keeps his hand at precision has been developed. Leaders must remem-
that position (see figure 3-63). The team leader grasps ber that a gun drill is simply a means of improving
the barrel by the changing handle, rotates it to its crew functioning. It is not an end in itself.
upright position, pushes forward and pulls up, separat-
ing the barrel from the receiver. He then grasps the The machine gun squad consists of a squad leader and
spare barrel by the changing handle, and with the gun- two 3-man machine gun teams. Each team operates
ner again depressing the barrel locking latch, inserts one M240G and is composed of a team leader, a gun-
the barrel socket into the receiver, aligns the gas plug ner, and an ammunition bearer.
with the gas cylinder, and pulls to the rear until the A gun drill, as discussed here, is limited to the squad
barrel is fully seated. The gunner then releases the leader and one machine gun team (team leader, gun-
barrel release latch. Once the barrel is fully seated, the ner, and ammunition bearer). Of course, the squad
team leader lowers the barrel-changing handle, count- leader may conduct a gun drill for both of his teams
ing the clicks (minimum two, maximum seven) to simultaneously and the section leader may do likewise
ensure proper headspace. for two or all three squads.
Section 9 3901. Crew Equipment

Gun Drill
In addition to their individual arms and equipment,
A gun drill gives team members training in machine
machine gun team members carry the following:
gun operation and can help develop confidence in
their ability to put the machine gun into action with The squad leader carries the binoculars and com-
precision and speed. Rotation of duties during training pass.
ensures that every member becomes well trained in The team leader carries the tripod and one box of
each position. Precision is obtained by strict adher- ammunition.
Figure 3-63. Changing Barrels.

___________________________________________________________________
The gunner carries the machine gun with one ban- command, each team member examines his equip-
doleer of ammunition. ment as explained in the following paragraphs:
The ammunition bearer carries the spare barrel
a. Team Leader Examination. The team leader
case, flex-mount with T&E mechanism, and one
box of ammunition. examines his ammunition first. (Linked dummy
ammunition should be used for this training.) To do
so, he opens the can, releases the cloth flaps, and pulls
3902. Form for Gun Drill out the cardboard flaps of the bandoleer. He ensures
that the ammunition is properly linked, free of dirt and
The squad leader commands FALL IN, and the team corrosion, and that the double link is up and ready for
forms on line with five paces between team members loading. Ammunition belts should not be removed
(see figure 3-64). The team leader repeats all com- from the bandoleer for examination. After he exam-
mands. The squad leader then gives the command ines the ammunition, he reinserts the cardboard flaps
TAKE EQUIPMENT. Team members take one step in the bandoleer, closes the cloth cover, puts it back in
forward and pick up their equipment. The squad the ammunition can and closes its cover. He places
leader commands FORM FOR GUN DRILL. The the ammunition to his left. He then examines the tri-
team forms in a column with five paces between men. pod. He assures that the legs are folded closely
The team leader is five paces from, and facing, the together and, with his right hand, checks the sleeve
squad leader. Team members assume the prone posi- latch to ensure that it has tension and will function.
tion. See figure 3-65. This completes his examination of equipment.
3903. Examination of Equipment Before b. Gunner Examination. Remaining in the prone

Firing position, the gunner first examines his ammunition as
did the team leader. The gunner then examines his
A thorough examination of equipment is made before gun. He pulls the bolt to the rear, places the safety on
each exercise. After the team is formed, the squad S, raises the cover, and checks the chamber to ensure
leader commands EXAMINE EQUIPMENT. At this that the gun is clear. He crawls forward to the front of
Figure 3-64. Team Formed on Line With Equipment.

3-52 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
the gun and looks through the barrel to ensure that the elevating hand wheel so that about 1 1/2 inches of
bore is clean. The gunner then checks the flash sup- thread are exposed above and below the hand wheel.
pressor for cracks and the front sight for tightness and He then centers the offset head. He checks the lock-
damage to the blade. Next, he checks the gas system, ing lever on the traversing slide to ensure that it
ensuring the collar is properly affixed to the plug. He moves freely. He also inspects the rest of the flex-
checks to ensure that the barrel-changing handle mount ensuring that the locking pin is present and that
moves freely. He ensures that the feed arm, pivot arm, the pintle is clean and free of burrs. The ammunition
and feed arm fork move freely and are properly lubri- bearer removes the spare barrel from its case and per-
cated. He pushes on the feed pawls to ensure they forms the same checks listed for the gunner. He also
have spring tension. He lowers and latches the cover, checks the barrel socket to ensure its cleanliness. The
places the safety on F, and pulls the trigger, riding the ammunition bearer has completed his examination of
bolt forward. He sets the rear sight on 500 meters. equipment when he returns the spare barrel and flex-
This completes the gunner’s examination of equip- mount to the spare barrel case. He checks the acces-
ment. He resumes his position parallel to the gun with sory pocket to ensure the required SL-3 components
his head in line with the feedway. are present.
c. Ammunition Bearer Examination. Remaining d. Report of Examination. Upon completion of
in the prone position, the ammunition bearer begins the examination of equipment, discrepancies that can-
by examining the ammunition as did the team leader. not be corrected by the individual team member will
He then removes the flex-mount from the spare barrel be reported to the squad leader. If there are no dis-
case and inspects the T&E mechanism. He centers the crepancies, each team member reports as follows:
Figure 3-65. Team in Prone Position.

___________________________________________________________________
The ammunition bearer reports AMMUNITION mount in a vertical position. Steadying the mount with
BEARER CORRECT. his right hand near the tripod head, he raises the front
The gunner reports AMMUNITION BEARER leg with his left hand. He grasps the right leg shoe
AND GUNNER CORRECT. with his right hand, the left leg shoe with his left
The team leader reports ALL CORRECT. hand, and raises the tripod to a vertical position, chest
high. He separates the tripod legs with a quick jerk,
3904. Placing the Gun into Action ensuring the sleeve latch engages, locking the tripod
in its open position (see figure 3-67). He then places
To place the gun in action, the squad leader gives the the tripod on the ground with the front leg pointing in
command GUN TO BE MOUNTED HERE, the direction of fire. He rises to his feet and stamps
FRONT, ACTION. the rear legs into the ground. He then assumes a prone
position on his left hip at the left of the tripod.
The team leader rises to his feet, grasps the right leg
of the tripod near the tripod head with his right hand, The ammunition bearer times himself to arrive at the
and grasps the ammunition box with his left hand. He gun position at the time the team leader assumes his
rotates the tripod onto his right hip, left leg up, and position. He rises, takes the spare barrel case by the
moves forward to the gun position. See figure 3-66. handle with his right hand and the ammunition box
with his left hand, and moves up to the gun position.
On arrival at the gun position, the team leader places
On arrival at the gun position, he removes the flex-
his ammunition to his front so that it will be approxi-
mount from the spare barrel case and hands it to the
mately on line with the tripod head when the tripod is
team leader, who immediately inserts the pintle into the
opened. He kneels on his right knee and rests the
pintle bushing and locks it down (see figure 3-68). The
shoes of both tripod legs on the ground with the
Figure 3-66. Team Leader Moving to Position.

3-54 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
approximately on line with where the muzzle of the

gun will be when it is mounted, and places the ammu-
nition box one pace to the left and on line with the
spare barrel case. He then opens the spare barrel case,
takes the spare barrel out, and places it on top of the
case with the muzzle pointing down range and the sight
toward the gun. Then the ammunition bearer turns and
moves to the flank to provide security.
The gunner times himself to arrive at the gun position
as the team leader receives the flex-mount from the
ammunition bearer. He rises to his feet, grasps the
barrel changing handle in his right hand and his ban-
doleer of ammunition in his left hand. He moves for-
ward to the gun position and places his ammunition to
the left of the tripod. He slides the recesses in the
receiver into the mount’s forward bushings, rotates
the gun down into position on the rear of the mount
and inserts the locking pin to secure the gun to the
mount (see figure 3-69). The gunner assumes the
Figure 3-67. Extending the Tripod.
prone position and, when ready to fire, reports UP to
the team leader who reports UP to the squad leader
(see figure 3-70).
team leader then lowers the traversing slide over the
traversing bar of the tripod, centers it on the 0 gradua- NOTE
tion line of the traversing bar, and locks it down. While
the team leader is affixing the flex-mount to the tripod, Live ammunition is never used while conducting
the ammunition bearer places the spare barrel case the gun drill.
Figure 3-68. Team Leader Mounting the Flex-mount.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-69. Gunner Mounting Gun.
Figure 3-70. Gun Team Ready to Fire.

3-56 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
3905. Barrel Change with his right hand, grasps the ammunition box
with his left, and returns to his original position.
When the team leader has reported UP, the squad The team leader rises, grasps the tripod near its
leader commands CHANGE BARREL. head, and rotates it up onto his right hip so that the
left tripod leg is uppermost. He grasps his ammuni-
If the bolt is to the rear, the gunner places the weapon tion with his left hand, turns to his left, and returns
on S. The gunner depresses the barrel-locking latch, to his original position. He places his ammunition
keeping his hand on the barrel release latch through- on the deck and drops to his right knee. He places
out the barrel change. the tripod in a vertical position with the rear shoes
on the deck, supporting the tripod with his right
The team leader grasps the barrel-changing handle
hand near its head. He reaches up with his left hand
and removes the barrel from the machine gun. He
and lowers the front leg. Sliding his right hand
places it on the deck to the left of the spare barrel
down the right leg of the tripod, he releases the
case. The team leader grasps the spare barrel by the
sleeve latch. He grasps the left leg near the shoe
changing handle and inserts it into the gun. The gun-
with his left hand and closes it to the right. He low-
ner depresses the barrel-locking latch to assist the
ers the tripod to the deck with its head to the front,
team leader in securely seating the barrel. He then
and he assumes the prone position and reports UP.
places the safety on F, and resumes his firing position.
The team leader reports UP to the squad leader.
3907. Rotation
Duties are rotated during a gun drill to ensure that all
3906 Taking the Gun Out of Action
members of the team can perform all duties within the
team. To rotate duties, the squad leader commands
At the squad leader’s command OUT OF ACTION—
FALL OUT SQUAD LEADER. At this command
The gunner raises the cover and inspects the receiver the team members rise and move up one position.
and chamber to ensure they are clear, closes the When the team members move, the members assume
cover, pulls the trigger, and places the safety on S. their new positions and call out their new duties in
The team leader secures his ammunition. order: AMMUNITION BEARER, GUNNER,
The gunner removes the locking pin from the flex- TEAM LEADER, SQUAD LEADER.
mount, elevates the rear of the gun, and removes it
from the mount. He lowers the rear sight, grasps
the carrying handle with his right hand, raises the Section 10
gun, and rises to his feet. Grasping the ammunition Qualification Firing
with his left hand, he pivots to his right, and he
returns to his original position. The team leader After machine gunners become proficient in mechani-
unlocks the traversing slide, unlocks the pintle cal training and gun drill, they fire the 12.7-meter
latch, and removes the flex-mount from the tripod. qualification course. Machine gunners learn the fun-
The ammunition bearer times himself to arrive at damentals of marksmanship, their position and grip,
the gun position before the team leader removes the and 12.7-meter zeroing. They become familiar with
flex-mount. The ammunition bearer places the the operation and noise of the M240G during firing.
spare barrel in its case, receives the flex-mount Qualifying on the 12.7-meter course instills confi-
from the team leader, and places it in the spare bar- dence in the gunner's ability to effectively operate
rel case. He closes the spare barrel case, grasps it their machine guns.
___________________________________________________________________
31001. Fundamentals of Marksmanship machine gun marksmanship. Speed should not be

stressed to the detriment of accuracy, adjustment, or
a. Accurate Initial Burst. Obtaining an accurate skill in manipulation.
initial burst of fire on the target is fundamental to
good marksmanship. This is accomplished by cor-
rectly estimating the range to the target, by correctly 31002. Position and Grip
setting the sights on the machine gun, and by prop- a. Gunner. The gunner is in a prone position to the
erly laying the gun with the T&E mechanism. After rear of the gun with his right shoulder against the butt
the estimated range has been set on the rear sight, the stock group. A straight line extending through the bar-
machine gun is manipulated until the line of aim inter- rel and receiver passes through his right shoulder and
sects the target at its center base. hip. His legs are comfortably spread, and his heels are
b. Adjustment of Fire. Adjustment of fire is down (if possible). The gunner’s left hand grasps the
another fundamental of good marksmanship. The elevating hand wheel, palm down. His right hand is
team leader and the gunner observe the strike of the on the grip with his index finger on the trigger. The
bullets when the initial burst is being fired. If it is not gunner exerts a firm pressure to the rear with both
on target, the gun is manipulated until the bullets hit hands while aiming and firing. His cheek rests against
the target. the cover. Breath control is practiced during aiming
and firing.
c. Mechanical Skill in Manipulation. Mechanical
skill in manipulation is required to engage targets that b. Team Leader. The team leader assumes a prone
have depth or width. Skill in the use of the T&E position on his left side to the left of the gun. His head
mechanism will be gained from practice. When both and eyes are even with the feedway. He loads,
traverse and search are necessary, the traverse is unloads, and changes barrels from this position.
accomplished first. One click of either the traversing
or elevating hand wheel moves the muzzle of the gun
1 mil. To traverse the weapon, the gunner places his 31003. Sight Setting and Battlesight Zero
left hand on the traversing hand wheel with his thumb Procedures.
uppermost. To move the barrel of the machine gun to The sights of the M240G are rugged and reliable.
the right, the gunner pushes his thumb up and away When setting battlesight zero (BZO), all adjustments
from himself. To move the gun to the left, he pulls his (windage and elevation) are made to the front sight
hand down. Having traversed the gun, the gunner assembly. The advantage of this system is that it
moves his left hand to the elevating hand wheel, plac- allows each spare barrel to be individually zeroed to
ing it on top of the hand wheel with his thumb to the the machine gun and then locked down with the
rear. In order to elevate the weapon, the gunner turns adjustment tools. This avoids accidental loss of zero
the hand wheel counterclockwise, moving his thumb through inadvertent manipulation during cleaning or
to the right. To depress the gun, the gunner turns the inspections. BZO is normally established at 12.7
hand wheel clockwise, pulling his thumb back toward meters in preparation for qualification firing as
himself. Proper mechanical manipulation of the described in this reference (see paragraph 31104).
machine gun can be remembered by the phrases The upper row of aiming points (A-D) on the qualifi-
PUSH RIGHT UP, PULL LEFT DOWN. cation target is designed for this purpose (see figure
d. Speed. Speed is a basic fundamental of good 3-71). However, any point of aim–point of impact
marksmanship. It is attained by practice and a thor- type of target can be used as a field expedient, (e.g.,
ough understanding of the other fundamentals of the M16A2 BZO target).
3-58 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 3-71. Basic Machine Gun Qualification Target.
The combination front sight-adjusting tool is used for a. Adjusting for Elevation BZO. For the initial fir-
elevation and windage adjustments (see figure 3-72). ing groups, do not unlock or change the elevation setting
This tool unlocks the front sight blade-retaining strap of the front sight post. Begin with the front sight post set at
and has a special slotted end piece to turn the front the position in which it is delivered. Set the rear sight ele-
sight blade for elevation changes. In addition, a hex vation at 500 meters. With a target at 12.7 meters, first cor-
wrench is included on another section of the tool. This rectly align the sights (see figure 3-73), then hold a tight/
hex wrench is designed to turn the socket head wind- well-supported point of aim, point of impact sight picture
age adjustment screws; however, it should not be used (see figure 3-74) and fire three rounds, one round at a time,
for this unless it fits the socket heads of the windage taking time to realign the sight picture between shots.
screws tightly.
If the shot group is above or below the aim point, the
front sight needs adjustment. The combination tool is
used to unlock the front sight retaining strap (see figure
3-75). Unlock the retaining strap and rotate it upward.
The front sight post is now free to rotate. Apply two to
three drops of lubricant (CLP, LSA, or LSA-T) around
the base of the front sight to lubricate the threaded shaft
of the front sight post. This will make it easier to rotate.
NOTE
The following sight adjustments are given from
the gunner's perspective at the rear of the
Figure 3-72. Combination Front Sight machine gun with the individual in a normal
Adjusting Tool. firing position or positioned above the gun.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 3-73. Correct Sight Alignment. Figure 3-74. Correct Sight Picture.
blade the required amount, lower the retaining strap,

If the shot group is above the aim point, rotate the
but do not lock it down until the BZO elevation is
sight post counter-clockwise as if it were being confirmed. Continue the above procedure until the
unscrewed. If the group is below the aim point, rotate
elevation BZO is confirmed. If the post blade is
the sight post clockwise as if it were being screwed in
required to be rotated counterclockwise to a point
or down. where its base is more than half way out of the assem-
NOTE bly, it should be replaced with a Number 2 front sight
blade which is taller than the Number 1 or normal
Rotating the front sight post counterclockwise sight. Once BZO elevation is confirmed, lock the
brings the point of impact down on the target, retaining strap down to its detent.
while rotating the front sight post clockwise
brings the point of impact up on the target. b. Adjusting for Windage BZO
As above, fire a group(s) to determine if a windage
At a range of 12.7 meters, one half turn of the post adjustment is required. If the group is to the left of the
blade, will move the strike of the bullet by approxi- point of aim, the front sight protector assembly must
mately 1/5 of an inch (5mm). One full turn of the post be moved to the left to shift the point of impact to the
blade will move the strike of the bullet by approxi- right (towards the point of aim). If the group is to the
mately 3/8 of an inch (10mm). After rotating the post right of the point of aim, the front sight protector must
Figure 3-75. Unlocking the Front Sight Retaining Strap.

3-60 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
be moved to the right to shift the point of impact to Each time one screw is loosened, the opposite
the left (towards the point of aim). one must be tightened exactly the same amount.
NOTE Once the shot group is confirmed to be centered,
Moving the front sight post to the right moves check for play in the front sight assembly by lightly
the strike of the projectile to the left on the clamping between finger and thumb and attempting to
target. Moving the front sight post to the left move the sight assembly laterally. If there is no play
moves the strike of the projectile to the right on evident, the windage adjustment is completed. If play
the target. is evident, carefully check both screws for looseness.
The 12.7-meter qualification course is fired with the
To move the group to the left, use a tight fitting hex
BZO established as above with the rear sight set for
wrench to loosen (turn counterclockwise) the adjust-
500 meters. Since the BZO procedure above calibrates
ing screw on the right side of the front sight assembly
the rear sight for all targets within the effective range
the desired amount. Then tighten (turn clockwise) the
of the machine gun, the estimated range to any other
opposite side screw (the one on the left side) exactly
target should be placed on the rear sight and a good
the same amount. At a range of 12.7 meters, one com-
sight picture obtained before firing.
plete rotation (360 degrees) of the adjusting screws
will move the point of impact approximately 1/3 inch If confirmation of the BZO is desired, this is easily
(8mm). As the adjusting screws are turned, noticeable done from the 200- or 300-meter line at a rifle range
clicks (eight per revolution) should be detected. If this to disk the target shot group once it is fired. When fir-
is not the case, an armorer should replace the protec- ing, set the range on the rear sight and mount the
tor assembly or the detente spring. weapon on the tripod or use a good field firing posi-
tion with the bipod. If the dispersion of the shot group
CAUTION is too large to calculate the mean center of impact,
The windage adjustment screws will break with the load and fire one ball round at a time. Note that wear-
slightest over torquing. Be careful not to over tighten ing a flak jacket or gas mask by the gunner may
the adjustment screws. change the mean point of impact.
If firing confirmation zero on a range laid out in
yards, do not be overly concerned if the point of
To move the group to the right, loosen (turn counter-
impact is slightly above the point of aim, as the
clockwise) the adjusting screw on the left side of the
beaten zone of a normal burst will cover most tar-
front sight assembly the desired amount. Then tighten
gets. If a large number of very distant targets is to be
(turn clockwise) the opposite side screw (the one on
attacked, using ranges estimated in meters taken
the right side) exactly the same amount. At a range of
from a map or range finder, add yards to meters ele-
12.7 meters, complete rotation (360 degrees) of the
vation change to the front sight in, or clockwise,
adjusting screws will move the point of impact
one-half turn. This is especially true if shot groups
approximately 1/3 inch (8mm).
are just slightly low on a target at 200 or 300 yards.
If this is the case always add the one-half turn yards
NOTE to meters elevation change.
The front sight windage adjustment procedure is At 200 meters, one-half turn of the front sight blade,
the combination of creating slack on one side, in either direction, moves the point of impact up or
and then taking up that slack from the opposite down approximately 4 1/4 inches (108mm). At 200
side. Therefore, the front sight protector meters, one-half turn (four clicks) of the windage
assembly should always be clamped tight screws will move the point of impact left or right
between the heads of the two opposing screws. approximately 3 1/8 inches (80mm).
___________________________________________________________________
31004. 12.7 Meter (500 Inch) Firing Once zeroing is complete, the gunner is ready to
commence practice firing.
In 12.7 meter firing, the gunner familiarizes himself
with the weapon. These firing exercises teach the (2) First string. The first string of fire will utilize pas-
gunner the fundamentals required to achieve the pri- ters 1 through 4 in sections B, C, or D. These are fixed-
mary goal of every machine gun team, which is an fire pasters, with no manipulation of the T&E con-
accurate initial burst on target each time they open ducted other than to obtain proper sight alignment and
fire. These fundamentals include position and grip, picture before firing the 6-round burst. A 6-round belt
sight alignment and sight picture, and proper trigger is loaded and fired at each fixed-fire paster. To engage
manipulation. The exercises also teach the impor- these pasters, the following commands are given:
tance of proper zeroing techniques, and the tech-
niques required to properly manipulate the T&E WITH A 6-ROUND BELT, LOAD, PASTER
mechanism for accurate searching and traversing NUMBER 1 (2, 3, OR 4), 500, FIXED, 6-ROUND
fire. Finally, after completion of practice firing exer- BURST, AT MY COMMAND, FIRE.
cises, gunners are given the opportunity to qualify
with the M240G. These exercises/qualification fir- (3) Second string.The second string of fire utilizes
ings will only be conducted upon completion of all pasters 7 to 8 and requires proper mechanical manipu-
non-live fire training/exercises. lation of the machine gun. A 48-round belt is loaded
and fired at these pasters. The gunner aims at paster 7
a. Practice Firing. This exercise familiarizes the and fires his initial 6-round burst; he then traverses
gunner with the firing characteristics of the machine two clicks right, and fires another 6-round burst,
gun, manipulation of the T&E, and introduces him to repeating this traversing action four times. The next
the strings of fire that will be utilized for qualification. three squares require traverse and search manipula-
There are no time limits on any of the strings of fire tion, two clicks right and one click up, after each 6-
during practice. round burst, ending the string of fire on paster num-
ber 8. To engage pasters 7 to 8, the following fire
(1) Conduct of fire. The unit is organized based on
command is given:
the constraints of the range to be used. The following
actions are accomplished prior to commencing the WITH A 48-ROUND BELT, LOAD, PASTER
practice firing exercise: NUMBER 7, 500, TRAVERSE AND SEARCH, 6-
ROUND BURSTS, AT MY COMMAND, FIRE.
After the conduct of a safety brief applicable to
the range to be used, a gunner and assistant gun- (4) Third string. A 30-round belt is loaded and fired
ner are assigned to each firing position to be at pasters 6 through 5. The gunner aims at paster 6
used. They then set up their guns and perform and fires his initial 6-round burst; traversing and
pre-firing checks. searching manipulation is then required for subse-
Next, each gunner is issued 3 single rounds, 1 quent bursts, one click left and two clicks down after
belt of 3 rounds, 4 belts of 6 rounds each, 2 belts each 6-round burst. He repeats this action four times,
of 48 rounds, and 1 belt of 30 rounds, for a total ending the string of fire on paster 5. The fire com-
of 156 rounds. mand is—
The gunner then zeroes his machine gun, using the
three single rounds, firing three rounds on paster 1 WITH A 30-ROUND BELT, LOAD, PASTER NUM-
to establish his zero and a three round burst on pas- BER 6, 500, TRAVERSE AND SEARCH, 6-ROUND
ter 2 to confirm his zero. Section A of the target is BURSTS, AT MY COMMAND, FIRE.
normally used for zeroing. The gunner will not b. Timed Firing Practice. This is a timed exercise
continue until zeroing has been mastered. to practice operating the weapon with greater speed and
3-62 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
to prepare for the timed strings of fire that will be

encountered in qualification. It should be fired immedi- Section 11
ately following the practice firing exercise. A time limit Firing With Blank Ammunition
of 30 seconds per square is allotted for each string of
fire to engage pasters 1 through 4. A total time of 60
seconds is alloted to engage pasters 6 through 5, and a The ability to fire blank ammunition adds realism to
total time of 60 seconds is allotted to engage pasters 7 nonlive fire training. The M240G can be configured
through 8. The gunner fires a total of 150 rounds for to fire standard M82, 7.62 mm, NATO, blank-linked
this exercise (24 rounds for 1-4, 96 rounds for 7-8, and cartridges. An MK 164 MOD 1 blank firing adapter
30 rounds for 6-5). (BFA) must also be installed before using M82 blank
ammunition. When the M240G is fired without a
c. Qualification Firing. Qualification utilizes the BFA, propellant gases exit out of the muzzle. Unlike
same strings of fire outlined above in practice firing, with live rounds, which can allow high pressures to build
the additional requirement to zero the weapon. There are behind the exiting round, blank rounds use a reduced
a total of 156 rounds fired in the 12.7 meter qualification powder charge and will exit quickly through an open
course, including zeroing. The 1 through 4, 7 through 8, barrel. When the M240G loses propellant gas, it will
and 6 through 5 strings of fire are scored for qualifica- fail to properly cycle and chamber the next round, and
tion. One point is scored for each bullet hole in a scoring it will not fire more than one blank without the opera-
square up to a total of six holes per square. A bonus of tor manually cycling the weapon. The BFA captures
two points is awarded for hitting any scoring square. the propellant gases released by the blank cartridge’s
Thus, a gunner may receive a maximum of eight points firing and use them to cycle and fire the follow-on
per square, (six points for six hits plus two bonus points). rounds until pressure is released from the trigger.
A bullet hole on the line between two squares may be
counted in either square, but not in both squares. It
should be scored in the square which will give the higher 31101. Safety
score. Pasters 1 through 4 may receive a total of 24
points (4 scoring squares with a total possible point value Prior to installing a BFA on an M240G, the operator
of 8 points per square). Pasters 7 to 8 may receive a total must ensure that he has cleared the weapon and that
of 64 points (8 scoring squares with a possible total point there are no live rounds present. See paragraph 3201a
value of 8 points per square each). Pasters 6 to 5 may for clearing procedures. Once it is established that the
receive a total of 40 points (5 scoring squares with a pos- weapon is safe, the BFA can be installed.
sible total point value of 8 points per square). The total
possible score for the 12.7 meter qualification course is
200 points (counting 6 zeroing rounds). CAUTION
Live ammunition or any other type of ammunition dif-
The following classifications may be achieved by
ferent from the M82 blank should NEVER be used
machine gunners:
when the weapon is equipped with the BFA.
p`lob `i^p pfcf`^qf lk
150 and over Expert gunner
130 through 149 First class gunner
31102. Inspection
105 through 129 Second class gunner
104 and below Unqualified
Before installing the BFA, it must be inspected for
cleanliness and service-ability (see figure 3-76). The
BFA should be free from cracks or damage and that
the locking bolt is present and turns freely within the
threads. The locking bolt head is serviceable and
capable of being hand tightened with a 3/4” wrench.
The discriminator assembly is free of cracks or
___________________________________________________________________
warpage. The wire lead is not frayed or detached from M240G. Periodically check to ensure that the lock-
either the discriminator assembly or the BFA. ing bolt is tight, as it may loosen during firing and
cause the M240G to jam.
31103. Assembly
Install the BFA over the flash hider on the M240G
barrel. Hand tighten the locking bolt until a snug fit
is achieved, then tighten securely with a 3/4”
wrench. Next, insert the discriminator assembly into
the feed tray. Ensure that the wire lead from the dis-
criminator assembly is securely attached to the BFA.
See figure 3-77.
31104. Operation
Once the BFA is properly installed, the M240G can
be loaded and operated with M82 blank ammuni-
tion. Do not use the M240G’s regulator setting #3
once the BFA is installed. If regulator setting #3 is
used, the M240G jams. Also, since propellant gases
Figure 3-76. Blank Firing
can injure other personnel, do not operate the Adapter Assembly.
M240G if personnel are within 12.7 meters of the
Figure 3-77. Installing the Blank Firing Adapter.

Chapter 4
MACHINE GUN, CALIBER .50, BROWNING, M2HB

“One group headed straight for the artillery positions of 2/14 near the beach. Here Battery D, receiving the im-
pact of the charge, employed not only howitzers but also mcchine guns to stem it. As the surviving Japanese
stole doggedly closer, despite the fire, gunners of Batteries E and F turned infantrymen, leveling enfilading fire
from their .50-caliber machine guns into the are forward of Battery D. That fire was conclusive—it ‘literally
tore the Japanese to pieces,’ said the battalion executive officer.”
—Engagement of Batteries D, E, and F, 2d Battalion,

14th Marines on 24 July 19448
World War II, Namur Island, Marshall Chain

Marine Machine Gun Team Covers Advancing Infantry
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-2 MCWP 3-15.1
Table of Contents
Section 1. Introduction 4704 Special Maintenance Procedures
4101 General Data 4705 Inspection
4102 Sights
4103 Safety Section 8. Ammunition
4104 Role of the M2 .50 Cal 4801 Classification
4802 Identification
Section 2. Disassembly, Assembly, and 4803 Ballistic Data
Nomenclature 4804 Ammunition Packaging
4201 General Disassembly 4805 Storage
4202 General Assembly 4806 Care, Handling, and Preservation of Ammunition
4203 Detailed Disassembly and Assembly
Section 3. Headspace and Timing 4901 Half Loading and Loading
4301 Headspace 4902 Single Shot Operation
4302 Timing 4903 Precautions During Operation
4904 Unloading and Clearing the Gun
Section 4. Functioning 4905 Positions for Firing
4401 Feeding
4402 Chambering Section 10. Gun Drill
4403 Locking 41001 Crew Equipment
4404 Firing 41002 Form for Gun Drill
4405 Unlocking 41003 Examination of Equipment Before Firing
4406 Extracting 41004 Placing the Gun into Action
4407 Ejecting 41005 Taking the Gun Out of Action
4408 Cocking 41006 Duties of Crew
41007 Carrying the Tripod-Mounted Gun
Section 5. Malfunctions and Stoppages
4501 Malfunctions Section 11. Qualification Firing
4502 Stoppages 41101 Phases of Training
4503 Immediate Action 41102 Fundamentals of Marksmanship
4504 Remedial Action 41103 Preparatory Exercises
41104 Equipment for Training
Section 6. Mounts and Accessories 41105 Positions for Firing
4601 Tripod Mount, M3 41106 Introductory Manipulation
4602 Vehicle Mounts 41107 Sighting and Aiming Exercises
4603 Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5 41108 Sight Setting and Laying Exercises
41109 Manipulation Exercises
Section 7. Maintenance 41110 Observation and Adjustment of Fire
4701 Cleaning Materials and Lubricants 41111 Range Determination and Windage Corrections
4702 Care and Cleaning Before, During, and After 41112 Tracking and Leading Exercises
Firing 41113 Preliminary Gunner’s Test
4703 Normal Maintenance Procedures 41114 Range Firing
____________________________________________________________________
List of Figures
4-1 M2 .50 Cal on Tripod Mount, M3 4-35 Barrel Extension Group with
4-2 Leaf Sight New Type Breech Lock
4-3 Front Sight, Cover, and Blade 4-36 The Cover Group, Exploded View
4-4 Raising the Cover 4-37 Removing the Cover Group
4-5 Aligning Barrel Locking Spring Lug 4-38 Removing the Belt
With the 3/8-inch Hole Feed Lever
4-6 M2 .50 Cal Link 4-39 Removing the Shoulder Headless Pin
4-7 Removing the Barrel and Spring
4-8 Bolt Latch Release Free of the Bolt 4-40 Belt Feed Slide
Latch Release Lock 4-41 Drifting Out the Belt Feed Pawl Pin
4-9 Removing the Back Plate 4-42 Removing the Belt Feed Pawl and Arm
4-10 Driving Spring Rod Assembly 4-43 Disengaging the Belt Feed Pawl Arm
4-11 Removing the Bolt Stud From the Belt Feed Pawl
4-12 Freeing the Bolt 4-44 Removing the Cover Extractor Spring
4-13 Removing the Bolt from the Receiver 4-45 Replacing the Cover Latch Spring
4-14 Removing the Barrel Buffer Group and 4-46 Seating the Belt Feed Pawl Spring
Barrel Extension Group (Left-Hand Feed)
4-15 Separating the Groups 4-47 Replacing the Belt Feed Slide in its
4-16 Separating the Barrel Buffer Assembly Guideways (Left-Hand Feed)
From the Barrel Buffer Body Group 4-48 Snapping the Belt Feed Lever Lug to
4-17 The Eight Major Groups and Assemblies Seat the Shoulder Headless Pin
4-18 Joining the Barrel Extension Group and 4-49 Removing the Trigger Lever Pin Assembly
Barrel Buffer Group 4-50 Trigger Lever and Trigger Lever
4-19 Bolt Group, Exploded View Pin Assemblies
4-20 Removing the Extractor 4-51 Trigger Lever Replaced (Rear View)
4-21 Removing the Bolt Switch and Bolt 4-52 Inserting the Headspace Gage
Switch Stud 4-53 Inserting the Timing Gage
4-22 Removing the Cocking Lever and 4-54 Rotating the Timing Adjustment
Cocking Lever Pin Nut to the Left
4-23 Prying the Sear Stop into the 4-55 Depressing the Trigger
Center Recess 4-56 Feeding (Rear View)
4-24 Prying the Accelerator Stop Lock 4-57 Feeding (Top View)
into the Center Recess 4-58 Belt Feed Slide Moving Out of the
4-25 Drifting the Sear Stop Pin Free From Side of the Cover
Engagement with the Firing Pin Spring 4-59 Belt Feed Pawl Riding Over the First Round
4-26 Removing the Accelerator Stop Lock 4-60 Belt Feed Pawl Behind the First Round
4-27 Removing the Accelerator Stop 4-61 Belt Feed Slide Moving Inside the Cover
4-28 Removing and Replacing the Sear Side 4-62 Chambering
4-29 Removing and Replacing the Sear 4-63 Locking
and Sear Spring 4-64 Firing
4-30 Removing the Firing Pin Extension 4-65 Unlocking
Assembly and Firing Pin 4-66 Causes of Stoppages
4-31 Replacing the Firing Pin and 4-67 Immediate Action
Extension Assembly 4-68 Ruptured Cartridge Case Extractor
4-32 Replacing the Sear Stop and Pin 4-69 Tripod Mount, M3
4-33 Replacing the Bolt Switch and Stud 4-70 T&E Mechanism and Pintle
4-34 Barrel Buffer Body Group, Exploded View 4-71 HMMWV Mount With MK64 MOD 5 Cradle
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-4 MCWP 3-15.1
4-72 M4 Pedestal Mount With MK64 MOD 5 Cradle 4-92 Screwing the Barrel Into the Barrel Extension
4-73 M66 Truck Ring Mount 4-93 Crew Ready to Place the Gun Into Action
4-74 Pintle Adapter 4-94 Squad Leader Moving the Tripod
4-75 T&E Mechanism Mount Assembly Into Position
4-76 M2 .50 Cal and M85 Reticle Pattern 4-95 Emplacing the Mount
4-77 Use of Ranging Symbols M2 and M85 4-96 Mounting the Gun
4-78 Dual-Purpose Sight (Under Development) 4-97 Half Loading the Gun
4-79 Care and Cleaning Procedures Before, 4-98 Crew Ready for Action
During, and After Firing 4-99 Taking the Gun Out of Action
4-80 Inspection Checklist 4-100 Folding the Trail Legs
4-81 Characteristics and Tip Colors of M2 4-101 Dragging the Gun Into Position
.50 Cal Ammunition 4-102 Two-Man Carry
4-82 M2 .50 Cal Ammunition 4-103 Three-Man Carry—Hot Barrel
4-83 Ballistic Data 4-104 Three-Man Carry—Cold Barrel
4-84 Maximum Penetration for Armor-Piercing 4-105 Manipulation
Catridge, M2 .50 Cal 4-106 Correct Sight Picture
4-85 Maximum Penetration for Ball Cartridge, 4-107 Sighting Bar
M2 .50 Cal 4-108 M2 .50 Cal Targets
4-86 Ammunition Box 4-109 Sight Picture With One Target Length Lead
4-87 Clearing the Gun 4-110 Aiming Target Used in Tracking and
4-88 Prone Position Leading Exercises
4-89 Sitting Position, Legs Crossed 4-111 Target Speeds, 10-Meter Moving Targets
4-90 Sitting Position, Legs Extended 4-112 Lead Table
4-91 Crew Formed in Column 4-113 Preliminary Gunner’s Test
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-5 MCWP 3-15.1
Chapter 4
Machine Gun, Caliber .50, Browning, M2HB

(ammunition can be fed into the weapon from the
Section 1 right or the left side of the receiver); however, the
Introduction infantry generally uses only left side feed. A disinte-
The machine gun, caliber .50, Browning, M2HB (M2 grating metallic link belt is used in feeding.
.50 cal), is a belt-fed, recoil-operated, air-cooled,
b. Recoil Operation. The force for recoil operation
crew-served machine gun. The gun is capable of sin-
is furnished by expanding powder gases which are
gle shot as well as automatic fire (see figure 4-1). controlled by various springs, cams, and levers.
Each member of the gun crew should have ready
c. Air Cooling. Maximum surface of the barrel and
access to TM-9-1005-213-10, a detailed, pocket- sized
reference manual for operators of the M2 .50 cal. receiver is exposed to permit air cooling. Perforations
in the barrel support allow air to circulate around the
a. Belt Feed. By repositioning some of the compo- breach end of the barrel and help in cooling the parts.
nent parts, the gun is capable of alternate feed The heavy barrel is used to retard early overheating.
Figure 4-1. M2 .50 Cal on Tripod Mount, M3.

____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-6 MCWP 3-15.1
4101. General Data 4102. Sights

Weights/measurements: The gun has a leaf-type rear sight, graduated in both
Total system weight (gun, and tripod complete) . . . . . . 128 pounds yards and mils for ranges from 100 to 2600 yards, and
from 0 to 62 mils. A windage knob permits deflection
Weight of receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 pounds
changes of 5 mils right or left of center (see figure 4-
Weight of barrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 pounds 2). The front sight is a semi-fixed blade type with
Weight of tripod mount M3 (w/traversing and cover (see figure 4-3).
elevating mechanism and pintle w/bolt) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 pounds
Length of gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 inches
Length of barrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 inches
Muzzle velocity (M2 ball) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,050 feet per second
Rifling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eight lands and grooves with a

right hand twist, one turn
in 15 inches
Ranges:
Maximum (M2 ball) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,400 meters (approximate)
Maximum effective. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,830 meters
Grazing fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700 meters
Ammunition:
Caliber. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 caliber
Types in use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ball, tracer, armor-piercing,

incendiary, armor-piercing-incendiary,
armor-piercing-incendiary-tracer,
sabot light armor penetrator,
sabot light armor penetrator-tracer,
blank, dummy, and plastic
practice (ball and tracer)
Basic load of ammunition
per gun (vehicle mount) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 rounds
Weight of 100 rounds in
ammunition can . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . approximately 35 pounds
Rates of fire:
Sustained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 rounds or less per minute
Rapid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More than 40 rounds per minute
Cyclic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450-550 rounds per minute
Manipulation (tripod mount, tripod controlled):
Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mils
Depression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 mils
Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 mils (400 left/400 right) Figure 4-2. Leaf Sight.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-7 MCWP 3-15.1
Section 2
Nomenclature
Disassembly and assembly may be divided into two
categories; general and detailed. General disassembly
involves separation of the weapon into main groups.
This is also known as field stripping and is a practice
that stems from past experience in combat situations.
The intent behind designating main groups for a
weapon and the practice of field stripping is to allow
the operator to quickly break the weapon down into a
set of major components that can be hastily cleaned to
keep the weapon ready for action. The idea is to disas-
Figure 4-3. Front Sight, Cover, and Blade. semble the weapon just far enough to conduct basic
assemblies and parts. Detailed disassembly, for the
operator, involves the removal of some of the compo-
4103. Safety nent parts and assemblies from the main groups. The
The M2 .50 cal does not have a mechanical safety. idea here is that, when the situation and conditions
Once the weapon has been loaded and charged (bolt to permit, the operator can then take the time to more
the rear with a round on its face) caution must be fully disassemble and thoroughly clean the weapon.
observed by the gunner as the weapon is ready to fire Complete general and detailed disassembly is nor-
once the trigger is depressed. mally the expected routine in garrison after the com-
pletion of firing and/or field training, but this may
also be conducted in a field environment when neces-
4104. Role of the M2 .50 Cal
sary, to ensure the proper functioning and mainte-
This machine gun supports both the offense and nance of the weapon. Disassembly of the weapon
defense. It provides the heavy volume of close, accu- beyond that described in this publication is not autho-
rate, and continuous fire support necessary to suppress rized, except by qualified ordnance personnel.
and destroy enemy fortifications, vehicles and person-
nel in support of an attack. The long range, close 4201. General Disassembly
defensive, and final protective fires delivered by this
gun form an integral part of the unit’s defensive fires. General disassembly for the M2 .50 cal consists of
removing groups and assemblies for inspection or
The M2 .50 cal is also used to— cleaning.
Provide protection for motor movements, vehicle a. Clearing the Gun. Before disassembly can be
parks, and train bivouacs. conducted, the gun must be cleared as prescribed in
Defend against low-flying hostile aircraft. paragraph 4903.
Destroy lightly armored vehicles.
Provide reconnaissance by fire on suspected enemy b. Barrel Group. Turn the cover latch and raise the
positions. cover (see figure 4-4). Grasp the retracting slide handle
Provide final protective fires. with the right hand, palm up, and pull the recoiling
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-8 MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-5. Aligning Barrel Locking Spring

Lug With the 3/8-inch Hole.
Figure 4-4. Raising the Cover.
parts to the rear until the lug on the barrel locking

spring aligns with the 3/8-inch hole in the right side
plate of the receiver (just below the feed way exit). The
barrel can be turned only when the lug is aligned with
the 3/8-inch hole. Place the smallest link of the M2 .50
caliber link, or suitable spacer, between the trunnion
block and the barrel extension (see figures 4-5 and 4-6).
This holds the barrel locking spring lug aligned with
the 3/8-inch hole in the right side plate. Unscrew the
barrel from the receiver (see figure 4-7). Be careful not Figure 4-6. M2 .50 Cal Link.
to damage the threads or barrel locking notches when
setting the barrel down. Pull back slightly on the
retracting slide handle and remove the link or spacer
from the receiver. the bolt is to the rear, push down on the bolt latch
release allowing the bolt to go forward.
c. Back Plate Group. Ensure that the bolt latch
release is in the upright position, free of the bolt latch
release lock. If it is not in an upright position, push CAUTION
down on the bolt latch release and turn the buffer tube Care must be taken to prevent the bolt from slamming
sleeve to the right to free it (see figure 4-8). The bolt forward with the barrel removed.
must be forward before the back plate is removed. If
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-9 MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-7. Removing the Barrel.
Figure 4-8. Bolt Latch Release Free of the

Bolt Latch Release Lock. Figure 4-9. Removing the Back Plate.
4-10 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Use the retracting slide handle to ease the bolt forward e. Bolt Stud. Grasp the retracting slide handle and
after the bolt latch is released. The back plate latch give it a quick jerk, freeing the bolt from the barrel
lock and latch are below the buffer tube. Pull out on extension. Align the shoulder on the bolt stud with the
the lock and up on the latch; remove the back plate by clearance hole in the bolt slot on the right side plate,
lifting straight up (see figure 4-9). and remove the bolt stud (see figure 4-11).
d. Driving Spring Rod Assembly. The inner and

outer driving springs and driving spring rod are
located inside the receiver next to the right side plate
(see figure 4-10). Push in and to the left on the head of
the driving spring rod to remove it. Push to the left to
remove the driving spring rod- retaining pin from its
seat in the right side plate. Pull the driving spring
assembly to the rear and out of the receiver.
CAUTION
Never attempt to cock the gun while the back plate is
off and the driving spring assembly is in place.
Figure 4-11. Removing the Bolt Stud.
WARNING
If the back plate is off and the driving
spring assembly is compressed, the re-
taining pin on the driving spring rod can
slip from its seat in the side plate and
cause serious injury to anyone behind NOTE
the gun.
If the bolt is accidentally moved all the way to
the rear, the bolt latch will engage in the bolt
latch notches in the top of the bolt. If this occurs,
raise the bolt latch (left of the trigger lever) and
push the bolt forward to align the bolt stud with
the clearance hole (see figure 4-12).
f. Bolt Group. After freeing the bolt, slide it to the

rear and out of the receiver (see figure 4-13). Place the
bolt down on its right side (with the extractor arm up),
so that the extractor will not fall from the bolt.
g. Barrel Buffer Group and Barrel Extension
Group. Insert the drift of a combination tool, or other
pointed instrument, through the hole in the lower rear
corner of the right side plate. Push in on the buffer
body lock. At the same time, place one hand in the
receiver and push the barrel extension group and bar-
Figure 4-10. Driving Spring Rod Assembly. rel buffer group to the rear (see figure 4-14). Remove
4-11 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-14. Removing the Barrel Buffer

Group and Barrel Extension Group.
4202. General Assembly

To assemble the gun, replace the groups and assem-
Figure 4-12. Freeing the Bolt. blies in reverse order from disassembly.
a. Barrel Buffer Assembly and Barrel Buffer

Body Group. Replace the barrel buffer assembly in the
barrel buffer body group with the key on the spring
guide to the right. This key must fit in its slot in the
right side of the barrel buffer body. Turn the barrel
buffer tube until the screwdriver slot (in the rear of the
tube) is vertical, arrow pointing to the right. The stud
on the tube lock will now engage the serrations in the
barrel buffer tube to keep the tube from turning. Push
the barrel buffer assembly fully forward.
b. Barrel Buffer Group and Barrel Extension

Group. To join the two groups together, hold the barrel
buffer group in the right hand, with the index finger sup-
Figure 4-13. Removing the Bolt from the porting the accelerator. Join the notch on the shank of the
Receiver. barrel extension group with the cross groove in the piston
rod of the barrel buffer assembly. At the same time, align
the breech lock depressors with their guideways in the
the barrel buffer group and the barrel extension group sides of the barrel extension, ensuring that the tips of the
through the rear of the receiver. Separate the two accelerator are against the rear end of the barrel exten-
groups by pushing forward on the tips of the accelera- sion; claws against the shank (see figure 4-18). Push the
tor (see figure 4-15). groups together. As the accelerator rotates to the rear,
press down its tips to ensure positive locking of groups.
h. Barrel Buffer Assembly. Pull the barrel buffer Place the groups in the receiver, and push them forward
assembly from the rear of the barrel buffer body until the barrel buffer body spring lock snaps into posi-
group. The barrel buffer assembly will not be disas- tion. When the parts are properly locked in place, the bar-
sembled (see figure 4-16). This completes general dis- rel buffer tube should protrude about 1 1/8 inches from
assembly (see figure 4-17). the rear of the barrel buffer body group.
4-12 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-15. Separating the Groups. Figure 4-16. Separating the Barrel Buffer As-
sembly From the Barrel Buffer Body Group.
Figure 4-17. The Eight Major Groups and Assemblies.

4-13 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
c. Bolt Group. Place the bolt in the receiver with f. Back Plate Group. Hold the back plate with
the top of the cocking lever forward and the extractor the latch down and the trigger up; place the back
down. Push the bolt forward into the receiver. As the plate guides in their guideways. Hold out on the
front end of the bolt approaches the tips of the accel- latch lock and tap the back plate into position until
erator, look into the side plate of the receiver, and the latch snaps into place. Release the latch lock,
press down on the rear end of the bolt to ensure the and pull up on the back plate group to ensure it is
front end of the bolt clears the accelerator tips. Raise firmly seated.
the rear of the bolt and continue to push it forward
until the bolt latch release engages the notches in the
g. Barrel Group. Pull the retracting slide handle to
top of the receiver.
the rear until the lug on the barrel locking spring is
NOTE visible through the 3/8-inch hole in the right side
The barrel extension, barrel buffer, and bolt plate. Place the smallest loop of a caliber .50 link, or
groups may be assembled and returned to the suitable spacer, between the trunnion block and the
receiver together barrel extension. Screw the barrel all the way into the
barrel extension; then unscrew the barrel two notches.
d. Bolt Stud. Align the stud hole with the clear- Remove the link and close the cover. This completes
ance hole and replace the bolt stud, ensuring that the general assembly.
shoulder of the stud is inside the side plate.
e. Driving Spring Rod Assembly. Press up on the h. Function Check. To check for correct assem-
bolt latch and push the bolt all the way forward by bly, the gunner ensures that the bolt is forward and
pushing on the bolt and stud only. Place the end of the the cover is closed. With the bolt latch release lock
driving spring rod in its hole in the rear of the bolt, engaged (up position), the gunner pulls the retract-
and push forward on the driving spring group and the ing slide handle to the rear. The bolt will be
barrel buffer tube. Press in and to the right on the head engaged by the latch assembly and held to the rear.
of the driving spring rod and place the retaining head The gunner returns the retracting slide handle to the
in its seat in the right side plate. forward position and releases the firing pin. The
gunner then disengages the bolt latch release lock
NOTE (down position), pulls the retracting slide handle to
At this time, the barrel buffer should be the rear, and returns it to the forward position. This
completely inside the receiver. If not, the barrel completes the function check and indicates that the
buffer body spring is not properly seated. gun is correctly assembled.
Figure 4-18. Joining the Barrel Extension Group and Barrel Buffer Group.
4-14 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
4203. Detailed Disassembly and Assembly a. Bolt Group. Figure 4-19 shows a detailed disas-
sembled bolt group.
The term detailed disassembly, as it is used in this man-
ual, refers only to those disassembly procedures autho-
(1) Detailed Disassembly
rized for the operator level. This is not to be confused with
procedures authorized for 2d echelon maintenance (unit
(a) Extractor. Rotate the extractor upward, and
armorers) or above. Detailed disassembly of any of the
remove it from the bolt, freeing the bolt switch. The
groups beyond that described in this document IS NOT
ejector and ejector spring are not removed from the
AUTHORIZED except by qualified ordnance personnel.
extractor. See figure 20.
To replace damaged or broken parts within major groups
or assemblies, knowledge of detailed disassembly and (b) Bolt Switch and Bolt Switch Stud. Lift out the
assembly is required. Detailed disassembly and assembly bolt switch and pull out the bolt switch stud. See fig-
involves the bolt, barrel buffer, barrel extension, cover, ure 4-21. On some models the bolt switch stud may be
receiver, and back plate groups. staked so that it cannot be removed.
Figure 4-19. Bolt Group, Exploded View.

4-15 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
(d) Sear Stop and Pin. Before removing the sear

stop and pin (on some models the accelerator stop and
lock), press down on the top of the sear to release the
firing pin. Use the thin end of the cocking lever to pry
the sear stop (accelerator stop lock) out of its groove
in the bolt, and into the center recess (see figures 4-23
and 4-24). Turn the bolt over and drift the sear stop
pin free from engagement with the firing pin spring
(shake out the accelerator stop lock) (see figures 4-25
and 4-26). Turn the bolt over and lift the sear stop and
pin from the bolt (see figure 4-27). If the pin does not
come out freely, place the thin end of the cocking
lever under the sear stop, against the pin, and pry it
out of the bolt.
(e) Sear Slide. Press down on the sear and with-

draw the sear slide. Withdraw the square end first. See
figure 4-28.
(f) Sear and Sear Spring. To prevent loss of the sear

Figure 4-20. Removing the Extractor.
spring, insert the thin end of the cocking lever
between the coils of the sear spring. Lift out the sear
and remove the sear spring. Leave the spring on the
(c) Cocking Lever Pin and Cocking Lever. Rotate cocking lever. See figure 4-29.
the top of the cocking lever toward the rear of the bolt
and remove the cocking lever pin. Lift out the cocking (g) Firing Pin Extension Assembly and Firing Pin.
lever. See figure 4-22. Raise the front end of the bolt and allow the firing
pin extension assembly and firing pin to fall into
NOTE
your hand (see figure 4-30). Separate the firing pin
The rounded nose of the cocking lever is down from its extension. This completes detailed disas-
and to the rear of the bolt sembly of the bolt.
Figure 4-21. Removing the Bolt Switch and Bolt Switch Stud.
4-16 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-22. Removing the Cocking Lever

and Cocking Lever Pin.
Figure 4-23. Prying the Sear Stop into the

Center Recess.
Figure 4-24. Prying the Accelerator Stop Figure 4-25. Drifting the Sear Stop Pin Free
Lock into the Center Recess. From Engagement with the Firing Pin Spring.
4-17 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-28. Removing and Replacing the

Sear Side.
Figure 4-26. Removing the Accelerator Stop

Lock.
Figure 4-29. Removing and Replacing the

Sear and Sear Spring.
Figure 4-27. Removing the Accelerator Stop. Figure 4-30. Removing the Firing Pin
Extension Assembly and Firing Pin.
4-18 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-31. Replacing the Firing Pin and Extension Assembly.
(2) Detailed assembly of the cocking lever toward the front of the bolt; then
(a) Firing Pin and Extension Assembly. Engage the rotate it to the rear and depress the sear. This should
rear end of the firing pin in its seating groove in the release the firing pin.
front end of the firing pin extension assembly. Insert
(f) Bolt Switch Stud and Bolt Switch. Replace the
the firing pin and extension assembly in the bolt,
bolt switch and stud with the smaller end up. Place the
striker first, sear notch down (see figure 4-31). Push
bolt switch over the bolt switch stud, so that the
the extension assembly into the bolt, and tilt the front
groove marked L is continuous from the left-hand
end down until the striker protrudes through its aper-
feed (see figure 4-33). The wider portion of the bolt
ture in the face of the bolt.
switch will be to the front.
(b) Sear Spring and Sear. With the sear spring still
(g) Extractor. With the extractor arm vertical,
wedged on the cocking lever, replace the spring, and
replace the extractor stud in the extractor pivot hoe of
insert the sear in its slot, stud up, and notch to the
the bolt. Rotate the extractor forward; ensure that the
front. Make sure the sear spring is properly seated in
collar is engaged in its slot in the bolt.
its recess in the bolt and the bottom of the sear.
(c) Sear Slide. Press down on the sear and replace
the sear slide in its guideways. The slide may be
inserted from either side, unless the gun is to be fired
by the side plate trigger. In that case, the square end
must be to the left.
(d) Sear Stop and Pin. Replace the sear stop and pin
(accelerator stop and lock). Press down on the head of
the pin (base of the accelerator stop) to force it into
place (see figure 4-32). Swing the sear stop into its
groove in the bolt.
(e) Cocking Lever and Pin. Replace the cocking
lever, the rounded nose down and to the rear, the top
of the cocking lever to the rear. Replace the cocking
lever pin from the left side of the bolt. To test for cor-
rect assembly, cock the firing pin by rotating the top Figure 4-32. Replacing the Sear Stop and Pin.
___________________________________________________________________
Turn the accelerator back to push the barrel buffer

tube assembly out of its slot.
(b) Barrel Buffer Body Spring Lock. In most cases,
the barrel buffer body spring lock is staked and will
not be removed.
(c) Accelerator Pin and Accelerator. Drift the
accelerator pin out and remove the accelerator. This
completes detailed disassembly of the barrel buffer
body group.
Figure 4-33. Replacing the Bolt Switch and (a) Accelerator and Accelerator Pin. Replace the
Stud. accelerators with the tips up and the claws to the rear.
Replace the accelerator pin so that the ends are flush
with the sides of the barrel buffer body group.
b. Barrel Buffer Body Group. See figure 4-34. (b) Barrel Buffer Tube Lock Assembly. Turn the bar-
rel buffer body upside down. Hold the assembly
against the barrel buffer body, lug down. With the
(a) Barrel Buffer Tube Lock Assembly. Turn the bar- thumb of one hand press the forward winged part into
rel buffer body group upside down. Pry up on the bar- the circular opening in the slot. With the other hand,
rel buffer tube lock latch to disengage the latch before raise the rear of the assembly enough to lift the lug
moving the lock body to the rear. Pry up the latch end over the buffer body. Push the assembly forward until
of the assembly, so that the lug will clear the barrel the rear winged part (barrel buffer tube lock latch)
buffer body. At the same time, press down on the snaps into the circular opening in the slot. This com-
front of the lock body to keep it from springing out. pletes assembly of the barrel buffer body group.
Figure 4-34. Barrel Buffer Body Group, Exploded View.

4-20 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
c. Barrel Extension Group when the beveled edge is up and to the front and the
hole for the breech lock pin is toward the bottom of
(1) Detailed disassembly. See figure 4-35. the barrel extension. Replace the breech lock pin so
(a) Breech Lock Pin and Breech Lock. Drift the lock that the ends of the pin are flush with the sides of the
pin out and remove the breech lock from the bottom barrel extension. This completes assembly of the bar-
of the barrel extension group. The top of the breech rel extension group.
lock may have a wide, single beveled edge, or a dou- d. Cover Group
ble beveled edge. In earlier models the top may be
flat; the newer models may have a large slot. Guns (1) Detailed disassembly. See figure 4-36.
currently manufactured have the breech lock with the
slot on top for use with the accelerator stop and lock. (a) Cover Pin. With the cover closed, remove the
When the accelerator stop and lock replaces the sear cotter pin and drift the cover pin out of the receiver.
stop and pin, the breech lock with the slot will be Unlatch the cover and rotate it up and forward to
used. remove the cover from the trunnion block (see figure
4-37). Place the cover group (top up) on a flat, sturdy
(b) Barrel Locking Spring. The barrel locking spring surface, with the latch end to the front and the hinged
should already be staked to the barrel extension; it end toward you.
should not be removed. This completes detailed disas-
sembly of the barrel extension group. (b) Belt Feed Lever and Lock Pin. Remove the belt
feed lever pin (cotter pin). Push the belt feed lever to
(2) Detailed assembly of breech lock and breech lock the right, until the toe end of the belt feed lever
pin. Replace the breech lock from the bottom of the (engaging the slide) is in line with the slot in the
barrel extension. Make sure that the wide, single bev- cover. Lift the belt feed lever off its pivot stud. Ensure
eled edge (double beveled edge) is up and to the front. the shoulder headless pin and spring do not fly out.
The breech lock will be correctly positioned in its slot See figure 4-38.
Figure 4-35. Barrel Extension Group with New Type Breech Lock.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-36. The Cover Group, Exploded View.
Figure 4-37. Removing the Cover Group. Figure 4-38. Removing the Belt Feed Lever.
4-22 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
(c) Shoulder Headless Pin and Spring. Remove

these from their seat in the side of the belt feed lever.
See figure 4-39.
(d) Belt Feed Slide. To remove the belt feed slide:
Remove the belt feed slide from either side. See
figure 4-40.
Drift the belt feed pawl out, maintaining pressure
on the belt feed pawl to prevent the spring from fly-
ing out. Use any available punch or M2 .50 cal
combination as shown in figure 4-41.
Slowly release pressure and remove the belt feed-
pawl and arm. See figure 4-42. Figure 4-39. Removing the Shoulder
Headless Pin and Spring.
Disengage the belt feed pawl arm from the belt
feed pawl. See figure 4-43.
the spring meshes with the cover latch spring stud,
Remove the belt feed pawl spring. remove the spring from its stud.
(f) Cover Extractor Spring. Press down on the
(e) Cover Latch Spring. Pry the hooked end of the cover extractor spring and pry the end of the spring
spring out of its groove in the cover, and shift it to the out of its recess in the cover extractor cam (see figure
left until it rests on the cover extractor spring. Press 4-44). This spring, if not handled carefully, can cause
down on the cover latch spring and slide it away from injury. Disengage the opposite end of the spring from
the cover latch. Make sure that it rides on the top of the cover extractor spring stud. This completes
the cover extractor spring. When the enlarged hole in detailed disassembly of the cover spring.
Figure 4-40. Belt Feed Slide.

___________________________________________________________________
(a) Cover Extractor Spring. Place the cover in the

same position as for detailed disassembly. Hook the
slotted end of the spring under the cover extractor
stud with the projection pointing in the direction of its
recess. Exercising caution, press down, and seat the
projection of the spring in its recess in the cover
extractor cam.
(b) Cover Latch Spring. Place the cover latch spring
inside the cover with the enlarged hole meshing with
the cover latch spring stud, the hooked end down
(resting on the cover extractor spring). Press down on
Figure 4-41. Drifting Out the Belt the cover latch spring and slide it toward the latch.
Feed Pawl Pin. Pry up on the latch end of the spring so that it rides up
over the projecting wing of the cover latch. Snap the
hooked end of the spring into its groove in the cover.
See figure 4-45.
(c) Belt Feed Slide. To reassemble the belt feed
slide:
Replace the belt feed pawl arm on the belt feed
pawl.
Figure 4-42. Removing the Belt

Feed Pawl and Arm.
Figure 4-43. Disengaging the Belt Feed Pawl Figure 4-44. Removing the Cover Extractor
Arm From the Belt Feed Pawl. Spring.
4-24 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
NOTE
There are two pins on each side of the belt feed
pawl. The larger is the belt feed pawl arm pin;
the smaller is the belt feed pawl arm locating
pin. See figure 4-43. For a left-hand feed, the
belt feed pawl arm must be placed over the pins
so that the belt feed pawl arm is toward the latch
end of the cover, when the assembled slide is
returned to the cover.
Place the small end of the belt feed pawl spring

over the belt feed pawl spring stud (inside the belt
feed slide). Place the assembled pawl and arm over Figure 4-45. Replacing the Cover
the spring so that the large end of the spring is Latch Spring.
seated in the recess in the pawl, with the projecting
oval (loop) of the spring away from the belt feed
pawl arm. See figure 4-46.
Align the pinholes in the pawl, arm, and slide;
replace the belt feed pawl pin. Make sure that the
pin is flush with the sides of the slide.
Replace the belt feed slide in its guideways, with
the belt feed pawl to the left, arm toward the latch.
See figure 4-47.
(d) Shoulder Headless Pin and Spring. Replace

these in their seats in the side of the belt feed lever.
For left-hand feed, the spring and pin are seated in the Figure 4-46. Seating the Belt Feed Pawl
hole nearest the belt feed lever lug. See figure 4-46. Spring (Left-Hand Feed).
(e) Belt Feed Lever and Lock Pin. Place the belt
feed lever over the pivot stud, lug up and to the left.
With a thumb at either end of the lever, press down
and turn the lever until the shoulder headless pin is
against the inside of the cover. Pivot the lever until it
is aligned with the slots of the cover and slide. Press
the lever down as far as it will go. Move the lug end
all the way to the right. Maintain a downward pres-
sure, and snap the lug end all the way to the left so
that the shoulder headless pin is properly positioned in
the cover (see figure 4-48). Replace the lock pin (cot-
ter pin) in the pivot stud. Make sure that the toe end of
the lever moves laterally in its slot without binding.
Figure 4-47. Replacing the Belt Feed Slide in
its Guideways (Left-Hand Feed).
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-49. Removing the Trigger Lever Pin

Assembly.
pawl pin from the right side of the receiver. Remove

the cartridge stop assembly (or rear cartridge stop and
link stripper on guns of earlier manufacture) and front
cartridge stop from the right side of the receiver.
(c) Trigger Lever Pin Assembly and Trigger Lever.
Release the hinged lock from the left side plate.
Figure 4-48. Snapping the Belt Feed Lever Turn the pin clockwise and withdraw the pin to the
Lug to Seat the Shoulder Headless Pin. left. Remove the trigger lever from inside the
receiver. Guns of earlier manufacture may have a
trigger lever pin assembly without the hinged lock.
(f) Cover Pin. To replace the cover group on the
In this case, lift the lock of the pin out of the small
receiver, place the latch end of the cover in position,
hole in the left side plate and rotate the lock end
with the latch engaging the top plate. With the heel of
downward 90 degrees until it is just forward of a
your hand, tap the hinged end downward into posi-
vertical position. Withdraw the pin to the left (see
tion. Align the pin holes and replace the cover pin.
figures 4-49 and 4-50). This completes detailed dis-
Insert the cotter pin in the cover pin and spread the
assembly of the receiver group.
ends. This completes assembly of the cover group.
e. Receiver Group
(a) Trigger Lever and Trigger Lever Pin Assembly.
(1) Detailed disassembly Replace the trigger lever in the receiver, with the long
(a) Belt Holding Pawl, Spring(s), and Pin. Press end forward and the bowed surface upward, between
down on the spring belt holding pawl and withdraw the top plate bracket and the bolt latch bracket (see
the belt holding pawl pin to the rear. Remove the belt figure 4-51). The trigger lever should project about 1/
holding pawl and springs, being careful not to loose 8 inch beyond the timing adjustment nut. Align the
the springs. The split belt holding pawl assembly hole in the trigger lever with the holes in the receiver.
includes a left-hand and a right-hand holding pawl, Position the trigger lever pin assembly so that the key
connected by a belt holding pawl sleeve; two belt on the pin will pass through the keyway in the left
holding pawl springs are used. Guns of earlier manu- side plate. Push the trigger lever pin assembly all the
facture use a single belt holding pawl adapted for way in and turn the pin 90 degrees to the left, or coun-
either one or two springs. terclockwise. Turn the lock flat against the side of the
receiver (with the lock without the hinge, turn the
(b) Cartridge Stop Assembly, Front Cartridge Stop, lock counterclockwise until the lock fits in the small
and Belt Holding Pawl Pin. Withdraw the belt holding hole in the side plate).
4-26 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-50. Trigger Lever and Trigger Lever

Pin Assemblies.
Figure 4-51. Trigger Lever Replaced

(Rear View).
4301. Headspace
(b) Cartridge Stop Assembly, Front Cartridge Stop, Headspace is the distance between the face of the bolt
and Belt Holding Pawl Pin. Install the cartridge stop and the base of the cartridge case fully seated in the
assembly (or rear cartridge stop and link stripper) and chamber. Headspace adjustment is correct when the
front cartridge stop, on the right side of the receiver. recoiling groups are fully forward and there is no
Replace the belt holding pawl pin. independent rearward movement between the bolt,
(c) Belt Holding Pawl, Spring(s), and Pin. Place the barrel, and barrel extension.
belt holding pawl in position on the left side of the Correct headspace is important because improper
receiver, first seating the springs. Depress the pawl adjustment can cause improper functioning of the gun
and insert the belt holding pawl pin. This completes and, frequently, injury to personnel and/or damage to
assembly of the receiver group. parts. Headspace is checked and set prior to firing
f. Back Plate Assembly. The back plate assem- when the gun is assembled, when the barrel or any
bly is not disassembled by the operator. major group or assembly within the receiver is
replaced, and when there is any doubt that correct
headspace is set.
Section 3
The headspace and timing gage consists of a head-
Headspace and Timing space gage and two timing gages. These gages pro-
The M2 .50 cal’s headspace and timing must be set vide an accurate means of checking the adjustment of
manually by the operator. Correctly set headspace headspace and timing.
and timing is essential for the safe and effective NOTE
operation of the weapon. This section describes the
procedures required for proper adjustment of head- The headspace and timing gage should be kept
space and timing. with the gun at all times.
___________________________________________________________________
Using the gage, the distance between the face of the the barrel extension. The lug on the barrel locking
bolt and the chamber end of the barrel can be accu- spring must be aligned with the 3/8-inch hole in the
rately determined by following these procedures: right side plate. See paragraph 4302b.
If the NO GO end of the gage enters the T-slot,
Raise the cover, retract the recoiling parts headspace is too loose. The barrel must be screwed
(described in para. 4403), and screw the barrel all into the barrel extension (one click at a time)
the way into the barrel extension. Then unscrew the checking with the gage after each click, until the
barrel two notches. GO end enters and the NO GO end does not.
Cock the gun. Pull the retracting slide handle all the Remove the gage.
way to the rear and then return it to its most forward
position.
4302. Timing
NOTE
Timing is the adjustment of the weapon so that firing
Be careful not to depress the trigger because takes place when the recoiling parts are between .020
this will cause the firing pin to be released. If and .116 inches out of battery to prevent contact
the pin is forward the gage cannot be inserted between the front end of the barrel extension and the
in the T-slot far enough to give an accurate trunnion block. Timing is correctly set when the
determination. recoiling parts are locked together, firing takes place
just before the parts are in battery (fully forward), and
CAUTION when the gun fires on the FIRE gage and does not fire
The firing pin should never be released with the on the NO FIRE gage. Timing must be checked and/or
gage in the T-slot as this could damage the firing set each time headspace is set, or whenever timing is
pin and gage. questionable.
Pull the retracting slide handle back until the barrel

extension is about 1/16 inch from the trunnion
block. This will ensure that the locking surfaces of
the breach lock and the bolt are in proper contact.
This prevents the driving spring group and weight
of the parts from giving a false determination. See
figure 4-52.
Insert the GO end of the headspace gage in the T-
slot, between the face of the bolt and the rear end.
of the barrel. If the GO end of the gage enters
freely down to the center ring of the gage, then
attempt to insert the NO GO end of the gage. If the
GO end enters, and the NO GO end does not enter,
correct headspace is set.
If the GO end of the gage does not enter freely,
headspace is too tight. When this condition exists the
barrel must be unscrewed one click (notch) at a time
(checking with the gage after every click), until the
GO end of the gage enters freely. To complete the
adjustment, attempt to insert the NO GO end of the
gage; if it does not enter correctly, headspace is set.
Remember to screw the barrel or to unscrew it from Figure 4-52. Inserting the Headspace Gage.
4-28 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
The following procedures are used to check and/or set To correct this, pull the retracting slide handle to
the timing: the rear and allow the bolt to go forward. Insert the
first gage, remove the back plate, and screw the
Ensure that the gun has correct headspace adjust- timing adjustment nut to the left until it rests on the
ment. trigger lever (see figure 4-54). Press firmly UP on
Cock the gun. Pull the retracting slide handle all the the trigger lever, attempting to fire. Rotate the tim-
way to the rear and return it to its most forward ing adjustment nut to the right, one notch at a time,
position. Press the bolt latch release and allow the firmly pressing up on the trigger lever after each
bolt to go forward. notch, attempting to fire the weapon.
When the firing pin is released, turn the timing
NOTE adjustment nut two additional notches to the right
Do not depress the trigger. and replace the back plate.
Cock the weapon and allow the bolt to go forward.
Insert the NO FIRE gage between the receiver block
Raise the extractor and pull the retracting slide han- and the barrel extension and attempt to fire the
dle back until the front end of the barrel extension weapon by depressing the trigger (see figure 4-55).
is about 1/4 inch from the trunnion block. The weapon should not fire. If the weapon does not
Insert the NO FIRE timing gage between the bar- fire, a mechanical defect exists and the gunner should
rel extension and the trunnion block, placing the notify his organizational ordnance personnel.
beveled edge of the gage on the barrel notches.
See figure 4-53.
Let the barrel extension close slowly on the gage. CAUTION
Depress the trigger firmly, attempting to release the Do not attempt to cock the gun with the back plate off.
firing pin. The firing pin should not release. If the fir-
ing pin does release, the gun is timed to fire too early.
Figure 4-53. Inserting the Timing Gage. Figure 4-54. Rotating the Timing Adjustment
Nut to the Left.
___________________________________________________________________
With the M2 .50 cal, the recoiling groups must be

manually operated to place the first round in the
chamber. The cycle of operation begins with the first
round positioned over the belt holding pawl. The
recoiling groups are in their forward position.
4401. Feeding
When the bolt is fully forward, the belt feed slide is in
the cover and the ammunition belt is held in the feed-
way by the belt holding pawl. Figures 4-56 shows the
bolt fully forward, belt feed slide in the cover, and the
ammunition belt held in the feedway by the belt hold-
ing pawl. Figure 4-57 shows the bolt fully forward,
belt feed slide in the cover, and the ammunition belt
held in the feedway by the belt holding pawl.
As the bolt moves to the rear, the cam grooves
guide the belt feed lever, pivoting the lever and
moving the slide out the side of the cover (see fig-
ure 4-58). The belt is held stationary by the belt
holding pawl, while the belt feed pawl pivots, com-
pressing its spring, and rides up over the link hold-
ing the first round (see figure 4-59).
When the bolt is all the way to the rear, the belt feed
Figure 4-55. Depressing the Trigger. slide moves out far enough to allow the belt feed pawl
spring to force the pawl down behind the first round.
See figure 4-60.
Replace the NO FIRE gage with the FIRE gage and

attempt to fire. The weapon should fire.
When all of the above procedures have been com-
pleted, the weapon is correctly timed.
Section 4
Functioning
basic steps. More than one step may occur simulta-
are feeding, chambering, locking, firing, unlocking,
extracting, ejection, and cocking. By understanding
how the M2 .50 cal functions, you will more easily be
able to recognize and correct malfunctions and stop-
pages which occur during firing. Figure 4-56. Feeding (Rear View).
4-30 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-57. Feeding (Top View).
Figure 4-58. Belt Feed Slide Moving Out of the Side of the Cover.
Figure 4-59. Belt Feed Pawl Riding Over Figure 4-60. Belt Feed Pawl Behind the
the First Round First Round.
___________________________________________________________________
As the bolt moves forward, the belt feed lever moves the ammunition belt. Initially, the grip of the extrac-
the slide back into the receiver. The belt is pulled in tor is held secure by the downward pressure of the
by the belt feed pawl. The next round rides over the cover extractor spring.
belt holding pawl, compressing its spring and forcing
the pawl down until the round has passed over the
NOTE
pawl. See figure 4-61.
If for any reason a round is not extracted from
When the bolt is fully forward, the slide is back in the the belt, the belt feed pawl arm will ride up over
cover; the first round is engaged by the extractor. The the round, holding up the belt feed pawl to
extractor grips the first round in the feedway and, as prevent double feeding.
the recoiling parts move to the rear, withdraws it from
As the bolt continues its movement to the rear, the

cover extractor cam forces the extractor down, caus-
ing the cartridge to enter the T-slot in the bolt. As the
extractor is forced down, the extractor lug, riding
along the top of the extractor switch, forces the rear
end of the extractor switch downward. Near the end of
the rearward movement, the extractor lug overrides
the end of the switch and the switch snaps back up
into position.
4402. Chambering
As the bolt moves forward, the round is held by the T-
slot and the extractor assembly. The extractor stop pin
(on the left side of the bolt) permits the extractor
assembly to go down only far enough to align the
round with the chamber. As the bolt continues for-
ward, the round is chambered. As this action takes
place, the extractor lug rides up the extractor cam,
compressing the cover extractor spring and snaps into
Figure 4-61. Belt Feed Slide Moving the groove in the next cartridge base through the pres-
Inside the Cover. sure of the spring. See figure 4-62.
Figure 4-62. Chambering.

4-32 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
4403. Locking recoiling groups are completely locked together

three-fourths of an inch before the groups are fully
Initially, the bolt is forced forward in counterrecoil by forward. See figure 4-63.
the energy stored in the driving spring assembly and
the compressed buffer disks. At the start of counter-
recoil, the barrel buffer body tube lock keeps the 4404. Firing
accelerator tips from bouncing up too soon and catch-
ing in the breech lock recess in the bolt. After the bolt As the trigger is pressed down, it pivots on the trig-
travels forward about 5 inches, the lower rear projec- ger pin so that the trigger cam on the inside of the
tion of the bolt strikes the tips of the accelerator, turn- back plate engages and raises the rear end of the trig-
ing the accelerator forward. This unlocks the barrel ger lever. That, in turn, pivots on the trigger lever
extension from the barrel buffer body group and pin assembly, causing the front end of the trigger
releases the barrel buffer spring. The barrel buffer lever to press down on the top of the sear stud. The
spring expands, forcing the piston rod forward. sear is forced down until the hooked notch of the fir-
ing pin extension is disengaged from the sear notch.
Since the cross groove in the piston rod engages the The firing pin and firing pin extension are driven
notch on the barrel extension shank, the barrel exten- forward by the firing pin spring. The striker of the
sion and barrel are also forced forward by the action firing pin hits the primer of the cartridge, firing the
of the barrel buffer spring. Some of the forward round. See figure 4-64.
motion of the bolt is transmitted to the barrel exten-
sion through the accelerator. As the accelerator rotates For automatic firing, the bolt latch release must be
forward, the front of the accelerator speeds up the bar- locked, or held depressed, so that the bolt latch will
rel extension; at the same time, the accelerator tips not engage the notches in top of the bolt. Hold the bolt
slow down the bolt. to the rear, as in single shot firing. The trigger is
pressed and held down. Each time the bolt travels for-
Locking begins 1 1/8 inches before the recoiling ward in counter-recoil, the trigger lever depresses the
groups (bolt, barrel extension, and barrel) are fully sear, releasing the firing pin extension assembly. The
forward. The breech lock in the barrel extension firing pin automatically fires the next round when the
rides up the breech lock cam in the bottom of the forward movement of the recoiling groups is nearly
receiver into the breech lock recess in the bottom of completed. The gun should fire about 1/16 inch before
the bolt, locking the recoiling groups together. The the recoiling groups are fully forward. At the instant
Figure 4-63. Locking.

___________________________________________________________________
of firing, the parts are in battery; i.e., the proper posi- bolt. At the end of the first 3/4 inch of recoil, the bolt
tion for firing. Only the first round should be fired is unlocked, free to move to the rear, independent of
with the parts fully forward. The gun fires automati- the barrel and barrel extension.
cally as long as the trigger and bolt latch are held
down, and ammunition is fed into the gun. As the recoiling groups move to the rear, the barrel
extension causes the tips of the accelerator to rotate
rearward. The accelerator tips strike the lower rear
4405. Unlocking
projection of the bolt, accelerating the movement of
At the instant of firing, the bolt is locked to the barrel the bolt to the rear. The barrel and barrel extension
extension and against the rear end of the barrel by the continue to travel to the rear an additional 3/8 inch or
breech lock, which is on top of the breech lock cam an approximate total distance of 1 1/8 inches, until
and in the breech lock recess in the bottom of the bolt. they are stopped by the barrel buffer assembly. See
figure 4-65, step 1.
When the cartridge explodes, the bullet travels out of
the barrel. The force of recoil drives the recoiling During the recoil of 1 1/8 inches, the barrel buffer
groups rearward. During the first 3/4 inch, the recoil- spring is compressed by the barrel extension shank
ing groups are locked together. As this movement since the notch on the shank is engaged in the cross
takes place, the breech lock is moved off the breech groove in the piston rod head. The spring is locked in
lock cam stop, allowing the breech lock depressors the compressed position by the claws of the accelera-
(acting on the breech lock pin) to force the breech tor, which engage the shoulders of the barrel exten-
lock down, out of its recess from the bottom of the sion shank. After its initial travel of 3/4 of an inch, the
Figure 4-64. Firing.

4-34 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
bolt travels an additional 6 3/8 inches to the rear after are beveled. As the breech lock is unlocked, the ini-
it is unlocked from the barrel and barrel extension, for tial movement of the bolt away from the barrel and
a total of 7 1/8 inches. During this movement, the barrel extension is gradual. The slope of the lock-
driving springs are compressed. The rearward move- ing faces facilitates locking and unlocking and pre-
ment of the bolt is stopped as the bolt strikes the vents sticking. The leverage of the accelerator tips
buffer plate. Part of the recoil energy of the bolt is on the bolt speeds extraction, after it is started, by
stored by the driving spring rod assembly, and part is kicking the bolt to the rear to extract the empty case
absorbed by the buffer disks in the back plate. See fig- from the chamber.
ure 4-65, step 2.
4407. Ejecting
4406. Extracting
The empty case, held by the T-slot, has been As the bolt starts its forward movement (counter-
expanded by the force of the explosion; therefore, it recoil) the extractor lug rides below the extractor
fits snugly in the chamber. If the case is withdrawn switch, forcing the extractor assembly farther down,
from the chamber too rapidly, it may be torn. To until the round is in the center of the T-slot. The
prevent this, and to ensure slow initial extraction of round, still gripped by the extractor, ejects the empty
the case, the top forward edge of the breech lock case from the T-slot. The last empty case of an ammu-
and the forward edge of the lock recess in the bolt nition belt is pushed out by the ejector.
Figure 4-65. Unlocking.

___________________________________________________________________
4408. Cocking operation is usually due to human failure to eliminate

excessive friction caused by dirt, lack of proper lubri-
When the recoiling groups are fully forward, the top cation, and burred parts, or by tight headspace adjust-
of the cocking lever rests on the rear half of the V- ment or incorrect timing.
slot in the top plate bracket. As the bolt moves to the
rear, the top of the cocking lever is forced forward.
b. Runaway Gun. A runaway gun is when a gun
The lower end pivots to the rear on the cocking lever
continues to fire after the trigger is released; firing is
pin. The rounded nose of the cocking lever, which
uncontrolled. If the cause is present before the gun is
fits through the slot in the firing pin extension,
fired, the gun will start to fire when the recoiling
forces the extension to the rear, compressing the fir-
groups move into battery the second time. If the
ing pin spring against the sear stop pin (accelerator
defect occurs during firing, the gun will continue fir-
stop). As the firing pin extension is pressed to the
ing when the trigger control mechanism is released.
rear, the hooked notch of the extension rides over the
sear notch, forcing the sear down. The sear spring A runaway gun may be caused by the following:
forces the sear back up after the hooked notch of the
firing pin extension has entered the sear notch. The Bent trigger lever, forward end of the trigger lever
pressure of the sear and firing pin springs hold the sprung downward.
two notches locked together. There is a slight over- Burred beveled contacting surfaces of the trigger
travel of the firing pin extension in its movement to lever and sear.
the rear, to ensure proper engagement with sear. As Jammed or broken side plate trigger.
the bolt starts forward, the overtravel is taken up and
completed when the cocking lever enters the V-slot To remedy uncontrolled automatic fire—
of the top plate bracket, and is cammed towards the
rear. Pressure on the cocking lever is relieved as the Keep the gun laid on target and let the gun fire out
bolt starts forward. all remaining ammunition.
In an emergency, twist the ammunition belt. This
causes the gun to jam, and may damage the feeding
Section 5 mechanism.
Malfunctions and Stoppages Replace broken, worn, or burred parts. Check the
side plate trigger and trigger control mechanism,
Machine gunners must have a detailed understanding when applicable.
cal problems may be encountered during firing. This 4502. Stoppages
A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of opera-
tion caused by the faulty action of the gun or ammuni-
tion. Immediate action is required by the gunner to
4501. Malfunctions reduce a stoppage (see paragraph 4503). The most
A malfunction is any failure of the gun to function common stoppages with M2 .50 cals are failure to
satisfactorily. feed, failure to chamber, or failure to fire. The proce-
dures outlined in figure 4-66 will assist in trouble-
a. Sluggish Operation. Instead of firing at its nor- shooting and reducing most stoppages without analyz-
mal rate, a sluggish gun fires very slowly. Sluggish ing their cause in detail.
4-36 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-66. Causes of Stoppages.
4503. Immediate Action Both a hang fire and cook off can cause injury to per-
sonnel or damage to the weapon. To avoid these,
Immediate action is that action taken by the gunner always keep the round locked in the chamber with the
and/or crew to reduce a stoppage, without investi- cover closed in the first 5 seconds after a misfire
gating its cause, and quickly return the gun to occurs. This prevents an explosion outside of the gun
action. Immediate action is performed by the gun- in the event of a hang fire.
ner; however, every crew member must be trained
to apply immediate action. Hang fire and cook off If the barrel is hot, the round must be extracted within
are two terms used to describe ammunition condi- the next 5 seconds to prevent a cook off. When more
tions that should be understood in conjunction with than 150 rounds have been fired in a 2-minute period,
immediate actions. the barrel is hot enough to produce a cook off.
A hang fire occurs when the cartridge primer has det- If the barrel is hot and the round cannot be extracted
onated after being struck by the firing pin but there is within the 10 second total, it must remain locked in
some problem with the propellant powder that causes the chamber, with the cover closed, for at least 5 min-
it to burn too slowly creating a delay in firing. utes to allow cooling of the barrel. This guards against
a cook off occurring with the cover open. If the cook
A cook off occurs when the intense heat of the barrel, off did occur with the cover open, injury to personnel
as a result of prolonged or rapid firing, causes the and damage to the weapon could result.
unintended firing of a cartridge if it remains in the The immediate action procedures for the M2 .50 cal
chamber exposed to that heat for too long. are as follows (see figure 4-67):
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-67. Immediate Action.

4-38 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
If gun fails to fire, wait 5 seconds, a hang fire may be 4504. Remedial Action
causing the misfire. In the next 5 seconds, pull the
bolt to the rear (check for ejection and feeding of When immediate action fails to reduce a stoppage, its
belt), release it, relay on the target and attempt to fire. cause must be investigated, usually by disassembling
the weapon and inspecting the appropriate parts (see
NOTE figure 4-66). Parts may have to be replaced before the
gun can be returned to action. Two other problems
When the bolt latch engages the bolt and holds it
may be detected and corrected without the need for
to the rear, the gunner must return the retracting
disassembly. They are:
slide handle to its forward position. If the bolt
latch release and trigger are depressed at the
a. Removal of a Cartridge From the T-Slot. If the
same time, the bolt goes forward and the weapon
cartridge does not fall out, hold the bolt to the rear,
should fire automatically.
and with the extractor raised, use a length of cleaning
rod to push the cartridge out the bottom of the
If the gun again fails to fire, wait 5 seconds, pull the
receiver.
bolt to the rear (engage with bolt latch if applicable),
and return the retracting slide handle to its forward
b. Removal of a Ruptured Cartridge. A ruptured
position.
(separated) cartridge case may be removed with a
Determine if the barrel is hot or cold before con- cleaning rod or ruptured cartridge extractor. To
tinuing. remove a ruptured cartridge with the ruptured car-
tridge extractor (caliber .50, 41-E-557-50, 7160041),
If the barrel is cold, open the cover, remove the
raise the cover and pull the bolt to the rear. Place the
belted ammunition and inspect the weapon.
ruptured cartridge extractor in the T-slot of the bolt in
If the barrel is hot, take action as described above. the same manner as that of a cartridge, so that it is
Figure 4-68. Ruptured Cartridge Case Extractor.

___________________________________________________________________
held in line with the bore by the ejector of the extrac- AAVP-7A1 and externally mounted on the M1A1
tor assembly of the gun. With the ruptured cartridge tank. The principal night vision sight used with the
extractor aligned with the bore and held firmly in the M2 .50 cal is the AN/TVS-5.
T-slot, let the bolt go forward into battery. This forces
the extractor through the ruptured case, and the shoul-
ders will spring out in front of the case. Pull the bolt 4601. Tripod Mount, M3
to the rear and remove the ruptured case and extractor.
See figure 4-68. Always check head-space and timing
after a ruptured cartridge occurs, and set if necessary. The M3 mount is the standard ground mount of the
M2 .50 cal (see figure 4-69). It is a folding tripod with
three telescopic, tubular legs connected at the tripod
Section 6 head. The total weight of the M3 is 44 pounds, which
Mounts and Accessories includes the traversing and elevating (T&E) mecha-
nism and pintle. Each leg ends in a metal shoe that
The principal ground mount used with the M2 .50 cal can be stamped into the ground for greater stability.
is the tripod mount, M3. The tripod mount, M3 is The two trail legs are joined together by the traversing
designed for use against ground targets. The three bar. The traversing bar serves as a support for the
principal vehicular mounts used with the M2 .50 cal T&E mechanism, which in turn supports the rear of
are the HMMWV mount; the M66 truck ring mount; the gun. The tripod head furnishes a front support for
and M4 pedestal mount. The M2 .50 cal is also the mounted gun which is further supported by the
mounted in the up-gunned weapons station on the short front leg.
Figure 4-69. Tripod Mount, M3.

4-40 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
When the tripod is emplaced on flat terrain, with all allowing the stud to fit the desired hole. Tighten the
extensions closed, the adjustable front leg should form leg clamping handle.
an angle of about 60 degrees with the ground. This
places the gun on a low mount, about 12 inches above a. Traversing and Elevating Mechanism. See
the ground. To raise the tripod farther off the ground, figure 4-70.
extend the telescopic front and trail legs (enough to (1) Traversing mechanism. The traversing mecha-
keep the tripod level and maintain the stability of the nism consists of a traversing bar, slide, and screw
mount). To adjust the front leg, turn the front leg assembly. The traversing bar, graduated in 5-mil
clamp screw handle counterclockwise to loosen the increments and fits between the trail legs of the tripod.
front leg clamp screw nut. Adjust the leg to the The traversing slide and screw assembly are clamped
desired angle, and tighten the front leg clamp. To in place on the traversing bar by the traversing slide
extend any of the tripod legs, unscrew the leg clamp- lock lever. When the traversing slide is locked to the
ing handle, press down on the indexing lever, and traversing bar, the traversing hand wheel should be
extend the leg to the desired length. Align the stud on centered. The traversing slide is properly mounted
the indexing lever with one of the holes in the tripod when the lock lever is to the rear and the traversing
leg extension. Release pressure on the indexing lever, hand wheel is positioned to the left.
Figure 4-70. T&E Mechanism and Pintle.

___________________________________________________________________
To make changes in direction, loosen the traversing The MK64, MOD 5 cradle is used to mount the
slide lock lever and move the slide along the travers- M2 .50 cal and the MK-19 on the HMMWV arma-
ing bar. This permits traverse of 400 mils left or right ment carrier (see figure 4-71) and on the M4 pedestal
of the 0 index in the center of the traversing bar. mount on M151 series vehicles (see figure 4-72).
Readings on the traversing bar are taken from the left More information concerning mounting the
side of the traversing slide. Changes of 50 mils or less M 2 .5 0 c a l o n t h e s e v e h i c l e s i s c o n t a i n e d i n
in deflection, can be made by turning the traversing TM 08686A-13&P/1.
hand wheel of the screw assembly. The hand wheel
allows a traverse of 50 mils left or right of center. One
click in the traversing hand wheel signifies 1-mil
change in direction.
(2) Elevating mechanism. The elevating mechanism
consists of an upper and lower elevating screw and is
connected to the gun by inserting the quick release pin
assembly through the holes in the upper elevating
screw yoke and the rear mounting lugs of the receiver.
A scale, graduated in mils, is fitted to the upper screw
to indicate elevation. This scale is marked to show
250 mils in depression and 100 mils in elevation from
the 0 setting.
The elevating hand wheel is graduated in 1-mil incre- Figure 4-71. HMMWV Mount With MK64
ments up to 50 mils and is fastened to the elevating MOD 5 Cradle.
screw by a screw lock. This synchronizes the hand
wheel graduations with those on the upper elevating
screw. A spring actuated index device produces a
clicking sound when the hand wheel is turned. Each
click equals a 1-mil change in elevation. The hand
wheel is turned clockwise to depress the barrel and
counterclockwise to elevate.
b. Pintle. The gun is connected to the tripod mount,
M3 by a pintle (see figure 4-70). This pintle is
attached to the machine gun by a pintle bolt through
the front mounting hole in the receiver. The tapered
stem of the pintle seats in the tripod head and is held
secure by a pintle lock and spring. To release the pin-
tle, raise the pintle lock, releasing the cam.
4602. Vehicle Mounts

a. Types. The M2 .50 cal can be mounted on the
HMMWV armament carrier, M4 pedestal mount, and
M66 ring mount. It is also found in the turret of the Figure 4-72. M4 Pedestal Mount With MK64
MOD 5 Cradle.
AAVP-7A1, and on the M1A1 tank.
4-42 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
The M66 truck ring mount also uses the MK64 cradle
to mount the gun onto the mounts roller carriage
which is on a circular track (see figure 4-73). The cra-
dle can be rotated in the pintle sleeve of the carriage
and can be adjusted for elevation. The carriage is
guided on the track by rollers. The track is secured to
the vehicle by supports.
b. Accessories. There are two accessories needed
to mount the M2 .50 cal on vehicles: the pintle adap-
tor and the traversing and elevating mechanism
mount assembly.
(1) Pintle adapter. The upper end of the pintle
adapter has a hole that is shaped to accept the M4 cra-
dle’s pintle. The adapter is equipped with a quick-
release pintle that secures the carriage and cradle. The Figure 4-73. M66 Truck Ring Mount.
lower end of the adapter is shaped to fit the mounting
hold in the upper end of the M4 pedestal, HMMWV
weapons platform, and the M66 ring mount. It is
secured by the pintle lock on the vehicle pedestal. See
figure 4-74.
(2) T&E mechanism mount assembly. This assembly
adapts the T&E so that it secures the carriage and
cradle to the M4 pedestal or HMMWV weapons
platform pedestal and provides fire control adjust-
ments (see figure 4-75). The lower end of the assem-
bly is attached to the pedestal by a train lock clamp.
It may be released for traverse or locked in position Figure 4-74. Pintle Adapter.
by a train lock handle. Two positioning clamps are
provided to prevent up or down movement of the tra-
versing lock clamp on the M4 pedestal. When used not emit visible infrared light that can be detected by
on the HMMWV weapons platform pedestal, only the enemy. The AN/TVS-5 may also be used with
one clamp is required above the traversing lock the MK19. For more on the AN/TVS-5, see TM 11-
clamp. A standard M2 .50 cal traversing mechanism 5855-214-10.
composes the upper end of the T&E assembly. It is a. Installation. To install the AN/TVS-5—
attached to the lower rear holes in the M4 cradle by a
retaining pin. For more on the T&E mechanism, see Release the catch at the left side of the cartridge
chapter 5, section 5. cover and raise the cover to the UP position.
Position the M2 mounting bracket assembly over
4603. Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5 the breech of the machine gun and slide it to the
rear until it stops.
The AN/TVS-5 is a portable, battery-operated elec- Swing the three locking cams to the rear to secure
tro-optical instrument used for passive night obser- the bracket to the weapon side cam first, followed
vation and fire. It amplifies natural light such as by the two top locking cams.
moonlight, starlight, and skyglow. The sight does Close the cartridge and secure it with the catch.
___________________________________________________________________
(1) M2 .50 cal/M85 reticle pattern. The vertical lines

at the top of the reticle indicate range in hundreds of
meter to a 6-foot tall standing person. Measurement is
made from the horizontal line to the top or bottom of
the vertical line (see figures 4-76 and 4-77).
The horizontal line of the range scale indicates the
range in hundreds of meters to a 20-foot wide target
(such as a tank viewed from the side). Place the left
edge of the target at the left side of the horizontal line.
The range to the target is read at the right edge of the
target. The M2 .50 cal aiming points for ranges from
400 to 1,200 meters are shown as small dots in a verti-
cal line through the center of the reticle. Use the cen-
ter of the horizontal lines for ranges of 0-250 meters.
Locate the target, estimate the range, and adjust the
weapon to place the proper aiming point on the target.
(2) MK-19/M2 .50 cal reticle pattern. See figure 4-78.
Aiming points are the same as the M2 .50 cal/M85
reticle. The stadia lines are used to determine range to
a 20-foot wide target. Manipulate the sight picture so
that the target fills the space between the stadia lines
in order to determine the corresponding range to the
target. MK-19 aiming points for stationary targets are
aligned vertically in the center of the reticle. Aiming
Figure 4-75. T&E Mechanism points for a target moving 10 mph are located verti-
Mount Assembly. cally to the left and right of the stadia lines.
c. Field Zeroing. The AN/TVS-5 may be zeroed
during daylight or darkness. For the zeroing proce-
dure, see paragraph 2505.c.
Install the sight on the mounting bracket assembly Section 7

by positioning it in the groove at the top rear of
Maintenance
the bracket so that the scribe line on the bracket is
aligned with the scribe line in the sight mounting Care, cleaning, and maintenance determine whether or
adaptor. Tighten the lever screw to secure the not the gun will function properly when needed. The
sight to the bracket. It will be easier to tighten the bore and chamber must be properly maintained to pre-
lever screw if you place an empty cartridge case serve accuracy. Because of the close fit of working
over the lever arm to increase the amount of surfaces and the high speed at which the gun oper-
leverage applied. ates, the receiver and moving parts must be kept
clean, correctly lubricated, and free from burrs, rust,
b. Use of the Reticle Cell. The proper reticle cell dirt, or grease to ensure proper, efficient functioning.
must be installed in the AN/TVS-5 before the sight The care, cleaning, lubrication, and adjustment of the
can be used for aimed fire of the M2 .50 cal. The AN/ mounts used with the gun are no less important. The
TVS-5 is normally equipped with a reticle for the M2 functioning of the gun and mount together determine
.50 cal and M85. If not, installation of the proper reti- overall effectiveness. All accessories and equipment
cle must be performed by direct support of higher cat- used with the gun and mount, including ammunition,
egory maintenance. must be properly maintained.
4-44 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-76. M2 .50 Cal and M85 Reticle Pattern.
a. Cleaning Materials. CLP is a special cleaning

solution and lubricant containing teflon that can be
used to clean and preserve all the metal parts of the
weapons system. It may be used as a lubricant during
normal operation of the gun also. RBC can be used to
clean the bore of the machine gun barrel after firing.
Immediately after using bore cleaner, dry the bore and
any parts of the gun exposed to the bore cleaner; then
apply a thin coat of CLP or lubricating oil. Dry clean-
ing solvent can also be used to clean all metal parts of
the weapons system. This material dries out the metal
severely so a thin coat of CLP or lubricating oil
should be applied afterwards. This cleaning material
is especially useful when cleaning the gun in prepara-
tion for changing the type of lubricant used.
If RBC and CLP are not available, hot or cold water

can be used; however, warm or hot, soapy water is
recommended. After using soap and water, dry the
Figure 4-77. Use of Ranging Symbols M2
parts immediately and apply a thin coat of CLP.
and M85.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-78. Dual-Purpose Sight (Under Development).
b. Lubricants. LSA is the preferred lubricant for combat conditions the gun should be cleaned and lubri-
use on all friction producing parts during operation of cated daily whether or not it has been fired. If possible,
the gun in normal conditions. It will not burn off the keep the gun covered with a canvas, tarpaulin, or pon-
gun as it heats up during operation nor will rain or cho when not in use. During normal training condi-
excess moisture wash it off. LAW should be used dur- tions, inspect the gun daily for rust, and maintain a light
ing operation of the gun in sustained temperatures coat of CLP on all metal parts. In ideal conditions,
below 0 degrees Fahrenheit (-18 degrees Celsius). See when the gun is not used and is kept in a clean place, it
the cold climate conditions in paragraph. 4704. may only be necessary to disassemble and clean it
every three to five days. The gun should be disassem-
4702. Care and Cleaning Before, During, bled, cleaned, and lubricated in a clean, dry location
and After Firing where it is least exposed to dirt and moisture.
Gun crews must conduct procedures for the care

and cleaning of their weapons system before, dur- 4704. Special Maintenance Procedures
ing, and after firing. These procedures are outlined
in figure 4-79. a. Climatic Conditions. Extremely cold, hot, dry,
and tropical climates affect the gun and its function-
4703. Normal Maintenance Procedures ing. Care should be taken under these climatic condi-
tions to ensure that the gun is cleaned daily with the
Each gun should be cleaned as soon after firing as pos- prescribed lubricants and protected from the elements
sible and each time it is exposed to field conditions. In by some sort of cover if possible.
4-46 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-79. Care and Cleaning Procedures Before, During, and After Firing.
(1) Cold climates. The weapon must be kept free of to all outer surfaces of the machine gun (do not lubri-
excess lubrication and moisture. If the weapon is cate ammunition). Keep the gun covered as much as
brought indoors, allow it to come to room tempera- possible. If the gun is contaminated, decontaminate by
ture, and then wipe it dry and proceed with clean- following the procedures outlined in FM 3-5, Nuclear,
ing and lubrication. Lubricate the gun with LSA or Biological, and Chemical Decontamination, then
CLP and keep it covered outdoors as much as possi- clean and lubricate.
ble. In sustained temperatures below 0 degrees
Fahrenheit (-18 degrees Celsius), the weapon should
be lubricated with LAW. 4705. Inspection
(2) Hot, humid climates. Inspect the gun more fre- When inspected, the machine gun should be com-
quently for signs of rust. Keep the gun free of mois- pletely assembled and mounted with headspace and
ture and lightly lubricated with CLP. timing properly set. Inspecting personnel should look
(3) Hot, dry climates. Inspect and clean the weapon
for dirt, cracks, burrs, and rust. Operate the gun manu-
daily. Avoid excess lubrication as this will attract ally to ensure that it is functioning properly. The
dust, grit and sand. inspection procedures shown in figure 4-80 can be
used as a guide for crew members or inspecting per-
b. Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Condi- sonnel to ensure that the gun and equipment are prop-
tions. If contamination is anticipated, apply lubricant erly maintained.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-80. Inspection Checklist.
Section 8
Ammunition Based on use, the principal classification of the sev-
eral types of ammunition used with the machine gun
This section describes the ammunition used in the M2 are as follows:
.50 cal. All machine gunners must be able to recog-
a. Ball. For use in marksmanship training and
nize the types of ammunition available and know how
against personnel and light material targets.
to care for that ammunition.
b. Tracer. To aid in observing fire. Secondary pur-
The M2 .50 cal cartridge consists of a cartridge case,
poses are for incendiary effect and for signaling.
primer, propelling charge, and bullet. The term bullet
refers only to the small arms projectile. The term ball c. Armor Piercing. For use against armored air-
ammunition refers to a cartridge having a bullet that craft and lightly armored vehicles, concrete shelters,
has a metallic jacket and lead core. and other bullet-resisting targets.
4-48 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
d. Incendiary. For incendiary effect, especially b. Code Symbol. The code symbols for machine
against aircraft. gun ammunition indicate the grade as well as con-
tents and type of inner packing. To provide proper
e. Armor-Piercing Incendiary. For combined identifica-tion, the abbreviated markings are stenciled
armor-piercing and incendiary effect. in yellow on each metal ammuni-tion container,
f. Armor-Piercing Incendiary Tracer. For com- together with the re-packed lot number.
bined armor-piercing and incendiary effect with the
additional tracer feature. c. Ammunition Marking. Ammunition can be
identified by its physical character-istics. Colors
g. Sabot Light Armor Penetrator. For use against
painted on the tips of the bullet aid in this identifica-
light armored vehicles and aircraft. Also called SLAP.
tion. The physical characteristics and tip colors used
h. Sabot Light Armor Penetrator-Tracer. For use to identify M2 .50 cal ammu-nition types can be
against light armor vehicles and aircraft with the addi- found in figure 4-81.
tional tracer feature. Also called SLAP-T
i. Blank. For simulated fire (contains no bullet). d. Ammunition Grades. The grades for caliber .50
cal ammunition are as follows:
j. Ball, Plastic Practice. For use in scaled range
training. For example, where range restrictions limit or AC aircraft and antiaircraft machine guns.
prohibit use of one of the other types of live ammunition. MG Ground machine guns.
3 Unserviceable, not to be issued or used.
k. Tracer, Plastic Practice. For use with the
SLAP-T in scaled range training. More than one grade may be authorized for ammuni-
tion. As an example, AC or MG ammunition may be
l. Dummy. A dummy is completely inert. For use used for both aircraft and antiaircraft machine guns
in nonfiring training such as gun drill and to practice and ground machine guns. Ammunition that cannot be
loading and unloading procedures. identified is considered grade 3, but is not classified
unserviceable until every effort has been made to
4802. Identification establish its identity. Ammunition placed in grade 3
(due to loss of lot number) and identification as hav-
a. Marking. The contents of original boxes or con- ing been in serviceable lots issued to a specific orga-
tainers may be readily identified by markings on the nization, may be reissued after visual inspection for
box. They indicate, by stencil, the number of rounds local training purposes (graded for training purposes
in the box or container, the caliber, the code symbol, only) in ground machine guns. It will not be used for
and the lot number. overhead fire. See figure 4-82 on pages 50 and 51.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-81. Characteristics and Tip Colors of M2 .50 Cal Ammunition.
4803. Ballistic Data from the 45-inch barrel (muzzle velocity 2935 feet
per second).
The approximate maximum range and average muzzle
velocity of some of the different types of M2 .50 cal Figure 4-85 lists the maximum penetration in
ammunition authorized for use in the machine gun are inches for ball cartridge, caliber .50, M2, fired
as shown in figure 4-83. from the 45-inch barrel (muzzle velocity 2,935
feet per second).
Figure 4-84 lists the maximum penetration in inches
for armor-piercing cartridge, caliber .50, M2, fired
4-50 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-82. M2 .50 Cal Ammunition.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-82. M2 .50 Cal Ammunition—Continued.

4-52 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-83. Ballistic Data.
Figure 4-84. Maximum Penetration for Armor-

Piercing Catridge, M2 .50 Cal.
Figure 4-86. Ammunition Box.
4805. Storage
Figure 4-85. Maximum Penetration for Ball Store ammunition of all classes away from heat
Cartridge, M2 .50 Cal. sources; i.e., open flame, radiators, heaters, and hot
water pipes. Ammunition should be stored under cover.
If it is necessary to leave ammunition in the open, keep
4804. Ammunition Packaging it at least 6 inches from the ground and covered with
a double thickness of tarpaulin. Place the tarpaulin so it
M2 .50 cal ammunition is packaged in a metal box gives maximum protection and allows free circulation
containing 100 linked rounds. Each box of 100 rounds of air. Dig suitable trenches to prevent water from
weighs approximately 35 pounds. See figure 4-86. flowing under the ammunition pile.
___________________________________________________________________

Section 9
Ammunition
Operation and Firing
Ammunition containers should not be opened until the
ammunition is to be used. Ammunition removed from Operation includes loading and unloading the gun,
the airtight containers, particularly in damp climates, clearing the gun, and allowing the bolt to go forward.
is likely to corrode.
4901. Half Loading and Loading
Protect ammunition from mud, dirt, and water. If the
ammunition gets wet or dirty, wipe it off prior to use. To half load the gun, the gunner ensures the bolt is
Wipe off light corrosion as soon as it is discovered. forward and the cover is closed. The squad leader
Heavily corroded cartridges should be replaced. inserts the double loop end of the ammunition belt in
the feedway until the first round is engaged by the
Use caution during firing to ensure that ammunition is belt holding pawl. The gunner grasps the retracting
kept out of the dirt. Dirt picked up during firing will slide handle with the right hand, palm up, and vigor-
act as an abrasive in the chamber and could cause a ously jerks the bolt to the rear and releases the
malfunction that may result in injury to personnel and/ retracting slide handle. If the bolt latch release lock
or damage to equipment. is engaging the bolt latch release, the bolt and
retracting slide handle will move forward under
DO NOT expose ammunition to direct rays of the sun. pressure of the driving spring group, half loading the
If the powder is hot, excessive pressure may be devel- gun. However, if the bolt latch release is up and free
oped when the gun is fired. of the bolt latch release lock, the bolt latch will hold
the bolt and the retracting slide handle to the rear.
DO NOT oil or grease ammunition. Dust and other The retracting slide handle must be returned to its
abrasives will collect on it and could damage the most forward position prior to releasing the bolt. To
operating parts of the gun. complete half loading, press the bolt latch release,
allowing the bolt to go forward.
DO NOT fire dented cartridges, cartridges with loose
projectiles, or other defective rounds. To fully load the gun, the procedure is the same as in
half loading, except it requires the gunner to pull and
DO NOT fire over friendly troops any ammunition release the bolt twice.
graded and marked FOR TRAINING USE ONLY.
Only specially approved lots of ammunition can be 4902. Single Shot Operation
nition is clearly stamped FOR OVERHEAD FIRE. To fire the gun single shot, the bolt latch release must
be in the up position. The latch engages the notches
DO NOT fire ammunition (other than blank ammuni- on top of the bolt when the bolt is to the rear after
tion) until it has been positively identified by ammu- each round is fired. When the bolt latch release is
nition and grade. depressed the latch assembly is raised, allowing the
4-54 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
bolt to be driven forward into battery. The gun may accomplished, a wooden block, extending above and
then be fired by pressing the trigger. When the bolt below the receiver approximately 1 inch, is inserted in
latch release is locked down by the bolt latch release the receiver between the bolt and the rear of the bar-
lock on the buffer tube sleeve, the gun functions as an rel. A cleaning rod is then inserted in the muzzle end
automatic weapon. of the barrel, pushed through the bore until it can be
seen in the receiver, and immediately removed. See
4903. Precautions During Operation figure 4-87.
Ensure that the cover, once raised, remains in the
raised position, with the barrel remaining in the gun,
before allowing the bolt to go forward. If the cover is
lowered when the bolt is to the rear, the belt feed lever
lug will not fit into its proper groove in the bolt. Thus,
parts may be damaged as the bolt goes forward. In the
cover assembly, the belt feed lever lug is held to the
left by the action of the shoulder headless pin and
spring, just above the pivot.
If the bolt is allowed to go forward with the barrel
out of the gun, parts may be damaged when the bolt
slams forward. The added weight and cushioning
effect of the barrel act as a buffer and protect the
parts from damage.
To allow the bolt to go forward with the barrel out of
the gun, pull the retracting slide handle all the way to
the rear, engaging the bolt stud in the notch in the rear
of the retracting slide. Maintain a steady pressure to
the rear on the retracting slide handle. Press the bolt
latch release and allow the bolt to ride slowly forward.
Figure 4-87. Clearing the Gun.
4904. Unloading and Clearing the Gun
a. Unloading. To unload the gun, the gunner
unlocks the bolt latch release (if applicable) and then
pulls the retracting slide handle to the rear and holds it
there. The squad leader then removes the round that CAUTION
was ejected out of the bottom of the gun. The gunner During any temporary cessation of fire, where it is not
then raises the cover and the squad leader removes the necessary to unload to clear the gun, the bolt should be
ammunition belt from the feedway. The gunner then latched to the rear to prevent accidental firing.
examines the chamber and T-slot. If there is a round
on the T-slot the gunner pulls the bolt an additional 1/
16 inch to the rear and pushes the round up and out of
the T-slot by reaching under the gun and forcing the 4905. Positions for Firing
round up the face of the bolt. In darkness, the gunner
The M2 .50 cal can be fired from the prone or sitting
must feel the chamber and T-slot to see if it is clear.
position with the gun mounted on the tripod in low
b. Clearing. To clear the gun, additional precau- position, or from a sitting position with the gun
tions are taken. After the steps above have been mounted on the tripod in high position.
___________________________________________________________________
a. Prone Position. In the prone position, the gun- b. Sitting Position. In the sitting position, the gun-
ner is between the trail legs with his body extending ner sits directly between the trail legs of the tripod.
directly to the rear of the gun (see figure 4-88). The Depending on his physique the gunner can sit with his
inside of his feet are as flat as possible on the legs crossed right over left (see figure 4-89), or extended.
ground, legs well spread, toes turned outward. His With his legs crossed, his right foot can be placed on the
left elbow rests on the ground with the left hand traversing slide locking lever to ensure that the T&E
placed on the elevating handwheel, palm down. The stays locked down during firing. With his legs extended,
gunner lightly grasps the right spade grip with his he can place them under the rear legs of the tripod or
right hand, thumb in position to press the trigger. over the top of them (see figure 4-90). He grasps the ele-
The position of the body varies according to the phy- vating hand wheel with his left hand, palm down. He
sique of the individual so that the eye is in the proper lightly grasps the right spade grip with his right hand,
position to align the sights. thumb in position to press the trigger. His right arm will
Figure 4-88. Prone Position.
Figure 4-89. Sitting Position, Legs Crossed.

4-56 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-90. Sitting Position, Legs Extended.
be placed on the outside of his right leg pushing to the and keep it operating. Gun drill gives the gun crew
right to take up slack in the T&E. fundamental training in the operations of the machine
gun and the confidence in their ability to put the gun
c. HMMWV, Pedestal or Truck Mount. With the
into action with precision and speed. Precision is
HMMWV, pedestal or truck mounts, the gunner places attained by learning and practicing correct procedures,
both hands on the spade grips, locks his elbows into the to include inspecting the gun before firing and observ-
sides of his body with his body forward and chest ing safety procedures. Once precision is attained,
against his hands, thumbs in position to press the trig- speed and teamwork can be developed. Rotation of
ger. Brace the body and arms firmly during firing. duties during training is essential so that every crew
member becomes familiar with the duties of each
position in the gun crew.
Section 10
NOTE
Gun Drill
Live ammunition is never used for a gun drill.
The M2 .50 caliber machine gun, employed on the Only dummy ammunition should be used for
M3 tripod, requires a crew of three to put it into action this type of training.
___________________________________________________________________
41001. Crew Equipment If other members are assigned, they place ammuni-
tion boxes in front, one foot apart, latches to the
In addition to their individual arms and equipment, right front.
machine gun crewmen carry the following:
41003. Examination of Equipment Before
Squad Leader Tripod Firing
One box of ammuntion
Gunner Binoculars
Once the squad is in the prone position, the squad
M2 compass leader gives the command EXAMINE EQUIP-
Receiver w/T&E mechanism and pintle attached
Headspace and timing gauge MENT BEFORE FIRING.
Ammunition Barrel a. Squad Leader. The squad leader inspects the

Bearer Barrel cover
One box of ammunition
M3 tripod to ensure that—
The indexing levers and clamps on the front and
trail legs function properly, and the legs are in the
41002. Form for Gun Drill short (low) position.
The squad leader gives all commands from the posi- Front legs and trail legs are closely folded; front leg
tion of attention. The squad members repeat all com- clamp is hand tight.
mands from the squad leader. Sleeve lock latch and pintle lock release cam are in
working order; pintle lock release cam is down.
The first command given by the squad leader is Pintle bushing is free of dirt and burrs.
FALL IN. At this time the squad members form up Metallic links of the ammunition are clean (open
on line with five paces between each person and their the ammunition box).
equip-ment and ammunition one pace to their front.
The next command given is TAKE EQUIPMENT.
The squad members now take one step forward and
pick up their equipment with both hands.
The final command is FORM FOR GUN DRILL. At
this time the squad will face to the right in this order:
squad leader, gunner, and ammunition bearer. The
squad then assumes the prone position. Once in posi-
tion, the squad places the equipment in the following
order (see figure 4-91):
The squad leader places the tripod to his left (trail
legs to the rear, front leg uppermost), ammunition
to his right, and latch to the front.
The gunner places the receiver across his front,
back plate to the right, and retracting slide handle
upward.
The ammunition bearer places the barrel to his Figure 4-91. Crew Formed in Column.
right, muzzle to the rear and ammunition box to his
left front with latch to the right front.
4-58 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Ammunition belt is properly loaded and placed in Gunner pulls the bolt to the rear and rides the bolt
the box, the double loop end up. home.
Ammunition box is closed and locked after ammu-
nition is inspected. c. Ammunition Bearer. The ammunition bearer
inspects the barrel and ammunition box to ensure
b. Gunner. The gunner inspects the receiver group that—
to ensure that— Barrel is clear.
Barrel support and breech bearing are free of dirt. Barrel carrier assembly is securely attached to the
Pintle is free of dirt. barrel.
Feed mechanism and bolt switch are properly Barrel bearing is free of dirt.
assembled to feed from left (raises the cover for Metallic links of the ammunition are clean (open
proper inspection). the ammunition box).
Ammunition belt is properly loaded and placed in
Striker projects through the aperture in the face of
the box, double loop end up.
the bolt (now closes the cover).
The ammunition box is closed and latched after the
Rear sight is set at 1,000 yards (900 meters); wind-
ammunition is inspected.
age is zero.
T&E mechanism is securely attached to the
When the ammunition bearer completes his inspection,
receiver.
he moves to the gunners position with the barrel in his
Traversing hand wheel is centered. right hand and ammunition in his left hand. With the
Elevating screws are equally exposed (about 2 aid of the gunner the ammunition bearer screws the
inches) above and below the elevating hand wheel. barrel into the barrel extension. See figure 4-92. The
Back plate is latched and locked in place. headspace and timing adjustment is now made by the
Bolt latch release is locked in the down position by gunner. The ammunition bearer remains on the left and
the bolt latch release lock. on line with the gunner. See figure 4-93.
Figure 4-92. Screwing the Barrel Into the Barrel Extension.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-93. Crew Ready to Place the Gun Into Action.
d. Reporting. At the completion of the inspection, with his right hand, he lifts the tripod across the front
a report is rendered to the squad leader as follows: of his body with the front leg up, and carries the tri-
pod to the desired location (see figure 4-94). Upon
The ammunition bearer reports: AMMUNITION arrival at the position, he places the trail leg shoes on
BEARER CORRECT (or he states any deficien- the ground with the front leg pointing upward. With
cies). his right hand on the tripod head, he slides his left
The gunner reports: GUNNER AND AMMUNI- hand down on the left trail leg and, with a snapping
TION BEARER CORRECT (or he states any motion, pulls the left leg to the left, engaging the
deficiencies). sleeve latch. Steadying the tripod with his left hand on
The squad leader would report: SQUAD ALL the front leg, he loosens the front leg clamp with his
CORRECT (or he states any deficiencies) if he has right hand (see figure 4-95), positions the front leg
to report to a senior. with his left hand, and tightens the front leg clamp
with his right hand. He then aligns the tripod for
41004. Placing the Gun into Action direction, drops the mount to the ground, stamps the
right and left trail shoes with his right or left foot, and
To place the gun into action, the squad leader com- assumes the prone position behind the mount.
mands and signals GUN TO BE MOUNTED (point-
ing to the position where the gun is to be mounted); The gunner and ammunition bearer move together.
FRONT (pointing in the direction of fire); and When the tripod is nearly mounted, the gunner and
ACTION (vigorously pumping his fist in the direc- ammunition bearer jump to their feet. The gunner
tion of the designated gun position). places both hands on the spade grips; the ammunition
bearer grasps the ammunition box with his left hand
At the command/signal ACTION, the squad leader and the gun-carrying handle with his right hand. Both
grasps the left trail leg near the center with his left men lift the gun off the ground and move rapidly to
hand. Jumping to his feet and grasping the tripod head the gun position. At the gun position, the ammunition
4-60 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
bearer places the ammunition box on the line and two hand wheel is to the left and the lock lever is to the
feet to the left of the tripod head, latch facing the tri- rear. The squad leader moves into position to the left
pod. The gunner, assisted by the ammunition bearer, of the gun with his feet to the rear, and his head on
inserts the pintle into the pintle bushing. The ammuni- line with the feedway. He unlatches and raises the
tion bearer stamps the front shoe into the ground with cover of the ammunition box, removes the ammuni-
his left foot, releases the carrying handle, lowers his tion belt, and inserts the double looped end into the
right hand, and lifts the gun pintle lock release cam. feedway and taps the cover with his right hand to
See figure 4-96. The squad leader can assist if ensure that it is closed.
required. When the gun pintle is fully seated, he
presses the pintle lock release cam down with his With his right hand, palm up, the gunner grasps the
right hand, then turns to his left and retrieves the retracting slide handle, and vigorously jerks it to
ammunition box which the squad leader left in his the rear and releases it. The gun is half loaded (see
original location. The ammunition bearer places this figure 4-97). He then assumes the correct gunner’s
ammunition box to the rear of the ammunition box position directly behind the gun, legs spread and
that he previously placed next to the tripod head, latch heels down. His right hand lightly grasps the right
facing the tripod. He then turns to the left and returns spade grip with the thumb in position to depress the
to his original position. trigger. His left hand is on the elevating hand
wheel, palm down, with his thumb near the slide
The gunner holds the spade grip with the right hand, lock lever. He rests on his left elbow, head as close
and with his left hand, lowers the T&E mechanism to the rear sight as possible. He then tells the squad
to the traversing bar, ensuring that the traversing leader UP (see figure 4-98).
Figure 4-94. Squad Leader Moving the Figure 4-95. Emplacing the Mount.
Tripod Into Position.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-96. Mounting the Gun.
Figure 4-97. Half Loading the Gun.
41005. Taking the Gun Out of Action replaces the ammunition in the box, and closes and
latches the box. The gunner closes the cover, pulls the
After the report UP is given, the squad leader then retracting slide handle to the rear with the right hand,
gives the command OUT OF ACTION. The gunner palm up, releases it, presses the trigger with his right
then raises the top cover with his left hand. The squad thumb, and loosens the traversing slide lock lever
leader lifts the ammunition out of the feedway, with his left hand. He then rises to his feet, grasping
4-62 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-98. Crew Ready for Action.
Figure 4-99. Taking the Gun Out of Action.
both spade handles. At this time the ammunition The gunner and ammunition bearer lift the gun from
bearer arrives at the gun position. With his left hand the tripod, turn right, and carry the gun back to their
on the ammunition box, he places his right foot on the original position. They put the gun down, muzzle to
front leg shoe. With his right hand, he reaches down the left, retracting slide handle up. The gunner kneels
and lifts up the pintle lock release cam and grasps the down, then pulls the retracting slide handle to the rear,
carrying handle. See figure 4-99. and aligns the lug on the barrel locking spring with
___________________________________________________________________
the 3/8 inch hole in the right side of the receiver. The sleeve latch, and folds the left trail leg against the
ammunition bearer unscrews the barrel from the right with his left hand (see figure 4-100). Holding the
receiver, picks up the ammunition box and barrel, tripod head with his right hand, trail legs with his left,
moves five paces to the rear, and remains in a stand- he lifts the tripod across the front of his body, with the
ing position with the ammunition box to his left, latch front leg up. He turns to the right and returns to his
to the front. original position.
The gunner rotates the bolt latch release lock to the At this time the ammunition bearer comes forward,
right and releases the bolt latch. He checks his sights picks up the remaining ammunition box, and places it
to ensure that they are properly set (1,000 yards), then to the right of the squad leader, latch to the front. The
assumes the prone position. ammunition bearer returns to his original position and
assumes the prone position. The squad leader places
The squad leader assumes a kneeling position behind the tripod on the ground, assumes a prone position to
the tripod and releases the sleeve lock latch with his the right of the tripod and announces UP.
right hand, rises to his feet, grasps the front leg with
his left hand, and rotates the tripod to its vertical posi-
tion on the trail legs. With his right hand he loosens 41006. Duties of Crew
the front leg clamp, folds the front leg down and tight- To hand-carry gun and equipment, the squad leader
ens the clamp. With his right hand on the tripod head, commands SECURE EQUIPMENT, FOLLOW
he rotates the tripod on its right trail leg, releases the ME. At this command—
The gunner moves forward toward the new position
carrying the receiver on either shoulder, spade
grips to the front.
The squad leader carries the tripod over either
shoulder and the ammunition box in one of his
hands.
The ammunition bearer carries his ammunition box
in his left hand, and the barrel in his right hand,
muzzle to the rear, or on his right shoulder, muzzle
to the front.
41006. Carrying the Tripod-Mounted Gun

When a gun is mounted on the tripod it can be moved
over short distances by dragging it, or with two or
three men carrying it in step.
a. Dragging. The gun is dragged when limited
cover or the situation requires the gun to be moved in
this manner. The gunner and squad leader will drag
the gun to the desired position. See figure 4-101.
b. Two-Man Carry. With the gunner on the right
and squad leader on the left, each one grasps the front
Figure 4-100. Folding the Trail Legs. leg of the tripod with their forward hand and trail legs
4-64 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-101. Dragging the Gun Into Position.
with the other hand just above the traversing bar. See
figure 4-102.
c. Three-Man Carry
(1) Hot barrel. The gunner is in the rear grasping the
trail legs of the tripod. The squad leader, on the left,
and ammunition bearer, on the right, each grasp the
carrying handle. They also each carry an ammunition
can in their free hand. See figure 4-103.
(2) As with a hot barrel, the gunner
Cold barrel.
remains to the rear grasping the trail legs of the tri-
pod.The squad leader and ammunition bearer, how-
ever, now grasp the front leg of the tripod. See
figure 4-104.)
CAUTION
Carrying the gun by the barrel may cause damage to
the barrel support and the barrel extension.
Figure 4-102. Two-Man Carry.

Section 11
Qualification Firing
In the hands of a properly trained Marine, the M2 Prior to being assigned as a M2 .50 cal crewman, a
.50 cal can provide a unit with decisive firepower. Marine should already be qualified on the M60
Proper training of M2 .50 cal crew members to machine gun.
deliver accurate and responsive fires takes time,
attention to detail, and hard work. In the hands of It is essential that instructors and demonstration per-
an untrained person, this machine gun is a hazard to sonnel be thoroughly trained and rehearsed in their
friendly personnel and units. duties before group instruction commences.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-104. Three-Man Carry—Cold Barrel.
Figure 4-103. Three-Man Carry—Hot Barrel.
Each exercise is first explained and demonstrated. 41101. Phases of Training

Each man is then given practical work in the exercise
and supervised by coaches. Finally, the men are given Marksmanship training is divided into two major
an examination in order to determine their progress phases:
and proficiency.
Preparatory marksmanship training.
If a sufficient number of machine guns are avail-
Range firing.
able, it is preferable to assign a coach and four men
to one gun.
These phases are further broken down into progres-
Training prescribed herein, including courses to be sive steps, and should be taught in the order outlined
fired, should be conducted on the M60 machine gun herein.
prior to training with the M2 .50 cal. This method per-
mits the M2 .50 cal gunners to receive the maximum The following must be observed during marksman-
machine gun training without excessive expenditure ship training:
of M2 .50 cal ammunitions.
4-66 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Each student will be proficient in mechanical train- Sight setting and laying exercises.
ing and crew drill before he receives instruction in Manipulation exercises.
machine gun marksmanship. Fire adjustment.
No man will be allowed to fire on the range until he Range determination.
has received thorough training in preparatory marks- Tracking and leading exercises.
manship, regardless of previous qualifications. Examination before range firing.
41102. Fundamentals of Marksmanship b. Order of Instruction. The first five steps are
listed in the order of instruction. They must be taught
To become accurate and proficient in machine gun in that order. Since range determination is not based
marksmanship, a Marine must be thoroughly trained on the material covered in any of the other steps, it
in the following fundamentals: may be taught any time before the examination.
Tracking and leading will be conducted after 10-meter
Accurate delivery of initial round (burst) of fire on
firing, but before firing on moving targets. Every man
either stationary or moving targets.
who is to fire on the range, including those who have
Mechanical skill in manipulating the gun and rapid
previously qualified, will receive complete instruc-
shifting of fire to new targets.
tions in the preparatory exercises. The instructor
Adjustment of fire by the following methods:
ensures that each man is tested thoroughly and graded
Observation of strike.
in the exercises before he is allowed to fire. Men with
Observation of flight of tracer.
an unsatisfactory rating will be given additional
Frequent relaying of the gun during firing.
instruction until a satisfactory rating is obtained.
Speed in combining these fundamentals when
delivering fire.
Speed in combining these fundamentals when 41104. Equipment for Training
delivering fire.
One sighting bar.
One M2 .50 cal and mount complete (tripod and
41103. Preparatory Exercises vehicular mounts).
One 1/2-inch aiming paster per gun.
a. Purpose. The purpose of the preparatory exer-
One vehicle silhouette aiming target per gun.
cises in marksmanship training is to teach the essen-
One target frame per gun, covered with blank paper
tials of marksmanship. A thorough, carefully
and equipped with braces for mounting.
supervised course in the preparatory exercises con-
One 10-meter machine gun target per gun.
serves time and ammunition during range practice. The
Material for blackening sights.
preparatory exercises consists of the following steps:
Positions for firing and introductory manipulation 41105. Positions for Firing
with both the tripod- and vehicular-mounted
machine gun. The M2 .50 cal can be fired from the prone or sitting
Sighting and aiming exercises. position as described in paragraph 4806.
___________________________________________________________________
41106. Introductory Manipulation exercise is to apply the preceding lesson to sight

alignment of the machine gun sights on a target. A
To give the gunner practice in manipulation, the fol- M2 .50 cal target is placed 10 meters from the pintle
lowing procedure is used: the coach stands about 10 (see figure 4-108).
paces in front of the gun and uses hand signals to indi-
cate the direction in which the gunner is to move the The coach uses a demonstration crew of two assistants
muzzle. The gunner manipulates the hand wheels, who are placed at the gun. One acts as the coach and
observed by the coach who makes necessary correc- the other as the pupil during the demonstra-tion. The
tions. When the gunner reacts quickly, and can manip- exercise is first explained and then demonstrated. The
ulate the gun as indicated, he is ready to continue his coach shows the gunner the correct sight picture. The
instructions. See figure 4-105. coach then moves the gun off the target and requires
the gunner to move the gun back on the correct sight
41107. Sighting and Aiming Exercises picture using the hand wheels.
a. First Sighting and Aiming Exercise (Sighting The coach checks and critiques the alignment made
Bar). The purpose of the first sighting and aiming by the gunner. Practical work is then conducted using
exercises is to teach the correct sight alignment and the method demonstrated.
sight picture. When the top center of the front sight
blade is in the center of the peep sight, the sights are
correctly aligned. A correct sight picture is one in 41108. Sight Setting and Laying Exercises
which the sights are correctly aligned, with the top of
the front sight blade just touching the bottom center of a. Sight Setting Exercise. The purpose of this
the target (see figure 4-106). All men will be required exercise is to teach the method of setting the rear
to demonstrate proficiency in obtaining the correct sight, and to develop accuracy and speed in its use.
sight alignment and a correct sight picture with a The exercise is first explained and demonstrated. The
sighting bar (see figure 4-107). sight slide is set at the desired range by turning the
elevating screw knob. The hair line through the peep
b. Second Sighting and Aiming Exercise (With sight is used as an index in setting the sight at the
Gun). The purpose of the second sighting and aiming desired graduation.
Figure 4-105. Manipulation. Figure 4-106. Correct Sight Picture.

4-68 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-107. Sighting Bar.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-108. M2 .50 Cal Targets.
To demonstrate the exercise, the instructor has one b. Sight Setting and Layout. The purpose of the
demonstrator take the gunner’s position at the gun and sight setting and laying exercise is to develop accu-
another at the coach’s position. The exercise is dem- racy and speed in laying the gun on an aiming point,
onstrated as follows: and to give additional practice in sight setting.
The instructor announces the range: e.g., EIGHT The instructor explains that the exercise starts with the
HUNDRED. sight leaf down and the slide at 1,000 yards, that
The pupil repeats the range, sets the sight at the ranges less than 1,000 or greater than 1,800 will not
announced range, then assumes the correct gunner’s be announced.
position and reports UP. The coach checks the set-
ting of the slide and points out any errors. To demonstrate the exercise, the instructor has one
demonstrator take the gunner’s position at the gun and
another the coach’s position. The exercise is demon-
All men go to their groups, work in pairs, and go
strated as follows:
through the exercise until each man has become profi-
cient in accurate and rapid sight setting. The coach announces an aiming point and range.
4-70 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
(For example: 1) PASTER NUMBER 5. 2) ONE ter on the target. See section 5 of chapter 5 for
TWO HUNDRED.) detailed information on the T&E mechanism.
After giving the first element, the coach pauses long (3) Manipulate for elevation by rotating the elevat-
enough to permit the gunner to repeat it and then ing handwheel with the left hand.
gives the second element.
(4) Traversing and searching the target is accom-
The gunner repeats both elements, raises the sight plished by laying on the initial aiming paster (number
leaf, and sets the sights. Upon completing the sight 5 or 6) and then shifting to each of the other numbered
setting, he manipulates the gun by turning the T&E pasters in order (5 through 10 or its reverse). All
hand wheels until the sights are accurately aligned major shifts in traverse (e.g., 5 to 10; 6 to 9; or the
on the designated aiming point. He then assumes reverse) are done by loosening the traversing slide
the correct gunner’s position and announces UP. lock lever. When shifting from pasters number 5 to 6,
The coach checks the sight setting and lay at the 7 to 8, or the reverse, use the T&E hand wheels.
completion of the exercise.
(5) Upon receiving the command, the gunner
repeats the instruction, sets the sight, lays the gun on
All men go to their groups, and instruction is continued.
the designated paster, assumes the correct gunner’s
position, and reports UP.
41109. Manipulation Exercises
(6) At the command FIRE, the pupil repeats the
Manipulation is the process of shifting the direction of command, simulates firing two single shots, then
the gun from one definite point to another definite point. shifts to the next paster and simulates firing until the
After the gunner understands the principles of sighting exercise is completed. The gunner aims at each paster.
and aiming, and can assume a satisfactory firing posi-
tion, he is given instruction in manipulating the gun to (7) While the gunner is performing these opera-
obtain an accurate initial lay, then to shift the direction tions, the coach:
of the gun to successive points with proficiency.
Checks the sight setting and initial lay.
a. Manipulation Exercise. The coach ensures Checks the gunner’s position.
that the following instructions are understood and Sees that the gunner simulates firing a shot(s)
followed: before manipulating the gun.
Checks for proper manipulation.
(1) A machine gun target is placed out 10 meters Checks the lay and critiques the exercise at completion.
from the pintle for this manipulation exercise.
(2) Manipulation of the gun for great shifts in direc- b. Announcement of Instructions (Example)
tion is obtained by releasing the traversing slide lock PASTER NUMBER 5 (6) TO PASTER NUM-
lever and moving the slide to the right (left). Small BER 6 (5).
changes in direction are made by turning the travers- ONE THOUSAND.
ing hand wheel with the left hand. One click on the TRAVERSE AND SEARCH. At the command
T&E hand wheel moves the strike 1 mil, or 1 centime- FIRE, the instruction proceeds as described in
41109a, bullets 4, 5, and 6.
___________________________________________________________________
41110. Observation and Adjustment of 20 clicks (mils) and add one or more clicks (mils)
Fire depending on the slope of the ground.
The purpose of observation and adjustment practice is The gunner may use the adjusted aiming point method
to teach the adjustment of fire by observing the strike to adjust the fire. In this method the gunner must use
of the bullets, the flight of tracers, or by frequent his sights. He selects an aiming point which will place
relaying on the target using the sights. the next burst on the target. For example, should the
gunner fire on a target at 500 meters and estimate that
a. Observation. When firing on the 10-meter the strike is 20 meters short and 10 meters to the right
range, the strike of the bullet is visible on the target. of the target, he would rapidly select an aiming point
approximately 20 meters beyond the target and 10
When firing at greater distances, the strike of the bul- meters to the left of the target, lay on that aiming
let on the ground may cause dust to rise which is visi- point, and fire.
ble to the gunner; however, during wet weather, the
strike cannot always be seen. In this event, the tracers
will allow the gunner or crew to note the strike of the 41111. Range Determination and Windage
burst in relation to the target. Corrections
Range determination is the process of determining
b. Adjustment. Using the mil relation, one click of
distance between two points. There are two methods
the traversing handwheel or elevating hand wheel
of estimating range by eye—mental unit of measure
moves the strike of the bullet one half an inch on the
(yardstick) and the appearance of objects. The gunner
target at a range of 10 meters.
needs training and practice in both methods over var-
When firing on the 10-meter range, adjust, moving the ied terrain and under varied conditions of light and
shot group a required number of centimeters vertically weather. A definite system of range determination,
or horizontally until the center of the group is on the frequently practiced, is the only way to make estima-
aiming paster. Should the gunner’s initial burst strike tion by eye reliable. For information on range estima-
the target 2 centimeters (approximately 3/4 inch) to tion by eye, see section IV, chapter 5.
the left and 3 centimeters (approximately 1 1/8 inch)
below the aiming paster, he adjusts his fire by travers- 41112. Tracking and Leading Exercises
ing right four clicks, and elevating six clicks before
firing again. The gunner normally completes a course of instruc-
tion in firing a machine gun at stationary targets
When firing on field targets, adjustment is made by before instruction is given in firing at moving targets.
moving the burst into the target. One click (mil) on
the traversing hand wheel will move the strike one Battlefield targets may be either moving or station-
half meter at 500 meters, or 1 meter at 1,000 meters; ary. The technique of engaging a moving target dif-
however, the distance one click (mil) in the elevating fers from that of engaging a stationary target. The gun
hand wheel will move the strike depends on the range must be aimed ahead of the target a sufficient distance
to the target and the slope of the ground. The gunner to cause the bullet and target to arrive simultaneously
determines the number of mils necessary to move the at the same point. This distance is measured in target
center of the strike into the target and he manipulates lengths. One target length as seen by the gunner is one
the gun the required number of mils. This does not lead. Leads are measured from the center of mass.
require the use of sights. For example, should the gun- (See figure 4-109.) The lead necessary depends upon
ner fire on a target at 500 meters and observe the range, speed, and direction of movement of the tar-
strike 10 meters to the right of the target and short get. To hit the target, the gunner aims at a point ahead
about 50 meters, he would traverse the gun to the left of the target equal to the estimated number of leads,
4-72 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 4-109. Sight Picture With One Target

Length Lead. Figure 4-110. Aiming Target Used in Tracking
and Leading Exercises.
maintains this lead by tracking the target (manipulat-
ing the gun at the same angular speed as that of the The gunner is required to aim at a prescribed point
target), and then fires. Fire is adjusted by observation (center of mass) on the target and maintain that aim
of strike and/or tracer. during uniform movement of the target. As instruction
progresses, speeds used should differ from successive
a. Target Construction. In order to perform track- runs of the target. Speeds, at which 10-meter targets
ing and leading exercises, a target must be fabricated. should be run to represent speeds at various ranges,
The target must consist of a light colored background are shown in figure 4-111.
and a movable dark colored vehicle silhouette. The
light colored background can be fabricated by tacking
cardboard or paper to a standard 12.7-meter target
frame. The movable vehicle silhouette is fabricated
from cardboard as shown in figure 4-110. A Marine
designated as a target handler moves the vehicle sil-
houette in front of the light colored background by
means of the 18-inch silhouette extension tab.
b. Tracking. Tracking consists of maintaining cor-
rect alignment of the sights (with or without a lead) on Figure 4-111. Target Speeds, 10-Meter
a moving target by moving the gun at the same angu- Moving Targets.
lar speed as that of the target.
The target handler must have practice in moving the tar-
get silhouette across the blank target at the varying speeds.
___________________________________________________________________
c. Leads and range for the vehicle. The gunner moves the point
of aim through the target silhouette and aims at a
(1) Lead table. Mathematical computation or use of
point ahead of target equal to the prescribed lead from
voluminous lead tables to obtain exact leads to be
the center of mass.
used on a moving target are impractical in combat.
The simple lead table shown below gives amount of
The gunner then directs the target handler to move the
lead necessary to hit a target moving at right angles (0
marking silhouette until the center of the target is at
degrees) to direction to hit at speed and ranges indi-
the point of aim. He then repeats this procedure three
cated. See figure 4-112.
times for each target lead announced.
Following the gunner’s instructions, he moves the

marking silhouette until the gunner commands
HOLD. He then places a pencil dot at this point and
returns the silhouette to the original position. This
procedure is followed until the gunner has completed
three tries for each target announced by the coach.
Figure 4-112. Lead Table. The three pencil dots for each target should be
enclosed in a circle 1 centimeter in diameter.
(2) Correction changes. The gunner must make cor-
The exercise should be conducted for varying right
rections as conditions change. If the target speed is 7 and left leads.
1/2 mph, the amount of lead is half that shown in the
table; at 30 mph, double that shown. The angle at
which the target is moving also alters the amount of d. Tracking and leading. Combine tracking and
lead taken. (If the angle between line of fire and line leading exercises at 10 meters. After the gunner has
of travel of the target is less than 45 degrees, use half gained proficiency in tracking the target, he is
of the lead shown in the table.) For a target moving required to repeat the tracking exercises while using
directly toward the gun, the line of aim is placed on the proper lead to simulate firing when his sights are
the center of the lower edge of the target, depending properly aligned.
on range and slope of the ground. The lower edge is
As a further exercise in tracking and leading, the gun-
used for longer ranges and for broken ground. For a
ner may be required to track and lead moving targets
target moving directly away from the gun, the line of
at greater range. A vehicle can be run at right angles
aim is placed similarly on the center or upper edge of
to the line of aim at ranges between 500 and 1,000
the target. Too much lead is better than too little
yards, and at varying speeds that average 15 mph.
because the target runs into the fire, also the observa-
tion of a strike is easier. Intelligent use of the lead
table includes immediate application of fire with esti- 41113. Preliminary Gunner’s Test
mated lead followed by necessary corrections based
upon observation of strike and/or tracer. Preliminary gunner’s tests should be held periodi-
(3) Lead exercises (10 meter). The target handler
cally in order to ensure that proficiency with the M2
places his marking silhouette on the blank target, .50 cal is maintained by all crewmen. Preliminary
traces around it, and holds it in place for the gunner gunner’s test, if given, should be given prior to range
to aim. firing. The recommended preliminary gunner’s test
has a possible score of 100 points. A score of 80
The gunner is required to take a position at the gun. should be required for satisfactory completion of the
The coach designates a direction (right or left), speed, test. See figure 4-113.
4-74 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
41114. Range Firing

The purpose of range firing is to teach the Marine
to apply the fundamentals of marksmanship as
stated in paragraph 41102. Range firing is con-
ducted upon completion of preparatory marksman-
ship training. Range firing begins with instruction
firing. Each student completes instruction firing
before firing for record. Once record firing is
begun, the table is completed before additional
instructional firing is undertaken.
Instructional firing is practice firing on a marksman-

ship range with the help of an instructor. The coach
and pupil method may be used. Instruction firing
teaches the accurate delivery of fire, mechanical skill
in manipulating the gun to engage various types of
targets, and observation and adjustment of fire within
the time prescribed.
Record firing records results and is used as a basis for

a Marine’s classification in marksmanship. Record
firing is a test of the gunner’s proficiency in all phases
of instruction in machine gun marksmanship and fur-
nishes the means for classification according to the
proficiency attained.
Information on the course to be fired, procedures to be

used, range configuration, and the duties of range per-
sonnel are contained in FM 23-65, Browning
Machinegun, Caliber .50 HB, M2. Information on
field target firing and familiarization firing can also be
found in FM 23-65.
Figure 4-113. Preliminary Gunner’s Test.
Chapter 5
MACHINE GUN, 40MM, MK-19 MOD 3

“Howard held fire until the tanks and infantry had passed across his front, passed his crouching outposts, were
beyond him and headed for Company D’s position. Then, only then, did he let go. Every rifle, automatic rifle
and machine gun loosed off in a hurricane of aimed fire. The NKPA soldiers were blasted off the tanks,
dropped in the road, and cut down in swaths....
“Then all hell broke loose. The high-velocity 90mm guns of the Marine Pershings opened fire. The 5th Ma-
rines’ recoilless rifles zeroed in with long blasts; so did those from the 1st Marines across the road. Roise’s
3.5-inch rockets wooshed....
“...the remaining T-34’s were blown to pieces by a storm of shot and shell.”
—Combat encounter involving Company D, 5th Marines

in the defense near Ascom City, South Korea,
17 September 19509
Korea, on the “Quantico” Line

Marine Machine Gun Team Awaiting an Expected Chinese Counterattack.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5-2 MCWP 3-15.1
Table of Contents
Section 1. Introduction Section 6. Maintenance
5101 General Data 5601 Cleaning Materials and Lubricants
5102 Sights 5602 Care and Cleaning Before, During, and After
5103 Safety Firing
5104 Role of the MK-19 5603 Normal Maintenance Procedures
5604 Special Maintenance Procedures
Section 2. Disassembly, Assembly, 5605 Inspection
and Nomenclature
Section 7. Ammunition
5201 General Disassembly
5202 General Assembly 5701 Identification
5203 Detailed Disassembly and Assembly 5702 Types
5703 Ballistic Data
5704 Packaging
Section 3. Functioning 5705 Storage
5301 Feeding 5706 Care, Handling, and Preservation
5302 Chambering
5303 Locking Section 8. Operation and Firing
5304 Firing 5801 Functioning Check
5305 Unlocking 5802 Loading
5306 Extraction 5803 Charging the Gun
5307 Ejection 5804 Firing
5308 Cocking 5805 Clearing and Unloading the Gun
5806 Positions for Firing
Section 4. Malfunctions and Stoppages
Section 9. Gun Drill
5401 Malfunctions
5402 Stoppages 5901 Crew Equipment
5403 Immediate Action 5902 Form for Gun Drill
5404 Remedial Action 5903 Examination of Equipment Before Firing
5904 Placing the Gun into Action
5905 Taking the Gun Out of Action
Section 5. Mounts and Accessories 5906 Duties of Crew
5501 Tripod Mount, M3 5907 Carrying the Tripod-Mounted Gun
5502 Gun Cradle 5908 Marksmanship Training and Qualification
5503 Vehicle Mounts Firing
5504 Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5
List of Figures
5-1 The MK-19 MOD 3 Machine Gun 5-10 Removing the Feed Tray Cover Retaining Pin
5-2 Front Sight 5-11 Removing the Feed Slide Assembly
5-3 Rear Sight 5-12 Lifting the Locking Pin
5-4 Safety 5-13 Rotation of Sear Housing Assembly
5-5 Five Main Groups, Exploded View 5-14 Inserting the Bolt and Backplate Assembly
5-6 Five Main Groups Into Receiver
5-7 Removing the Bolt and Backplate Pin 5-15 Depressing the Sear While Sliding the Bolt
5-8 Removing the Bolt and Backplate Assembly Assembly Forward
5-9 Removing the Secondary Drive Lever 5-16 Receiver Assembly, Detailed Disassembled
____________________________________________________________________
5-17 Retracting the Drive Lever Lock 5-37 Pedestal Mount M4

5-18 Removing the Primary Drive Lever 5-38 M66 Ring Mount
and Vertical Cam 5-39 HMMWV Weapons Station
5-19 Removing the Alignment Guide Assembly 5-40 Pintle Adapter
5-20 Removing the Ogive Plunger 5-41 T&E Mechanism Mount Assembly
5-21 Removing of Round Positioning Block 5-42 Procedures Before, During, and After Firing
5-22 Removal of Lock Plunger 5-44 40mm Ammunition Box
5-23 Position of Drive Levers, Bolt to Rear 5-43 MK-19 40mm Ammunition
5-24 Round Positioned In Feeder, Bolt to Rear 5-45 Ammunition Belt With Female Link
5-25 Round Picked Up by Extractors on First Round
5-26 Round Cammed Down Onto Face of Bolt 5-46 Placement of Round Across
5-27 Round Positioned Against Round Positioning Primary Feed Pawls
Block, Bolt Forward 5-47 Moving Primary Drive Lever to the Right
5-28 Round Positioned on Face of Bolt, Ready to 5-48 Attach Feed Throat to Feeder
Chamber 5-49 Rotating Charger Handles Down and
5-29 Chambering/Locking Pulling to Rear
5-30 Firing/Unlocking 5-50 Clearing Rounds From Gun
5-31 Extracting/Ejecting/Feeding/Cocking 5-51 Mounting the Cradle on Tripod
5-32 Lowering Charger to Stop Runaway Gun 5-52 Attaching the T&E to the Tripod
5-33 Corrective Action for Stoppages 5-53 Gunner Moving into Position
5-34 M3 Tripod 5-54 Placing and Securing the MK-19
5-35 MK64 MOD 5 Cradle into the Cradle
5-36 MK64 MOD 5 Cradle Mounted on 5-55 Inserting the First Round into the Feeder
the M3 Tripod
Chapter 5
Machine Gun, 40mm, MK-19 MOD 3
5101. General Data

Section 1
Introduction Weights/measurements:
Total system weight (gun, cradle,
and tripod) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140.6 pounds
The MK-19 is an air cooled, blowback-operated, fully
Weight of gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75.6 pounds
automatic weapon (see figure 5-1). The ammunition is Weight of gun cradle (MK64 MOD5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 pounds
fed into the gun by a disintegrating metallic link belt. Weight of M3 tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 pounds
The weapon features a barrel which prevents cookoff Length of gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.1 inches
even after prolonged firing. A flash suppressor is Muzzle velocity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 feet per second
fixed to the muzzle of the barrel. The slotted configu- Rifling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right hand, uniform twist,
one turn in 48 inches
ration suppresses vibration during firing and dissi-
pates flash and smoke. The MK-19 is employed from Ranges:
a tripod or from a variety of vehicles. Each MK-19 Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,212 meters
machine gun crewman should have ready access to Maximum effective
TM 08521A-10/1A, a detailed, pocketsize, operators Point target. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,500 meters
reference manual. Area target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,212 meters
Figure 5-1. The MK-19 MOD 3 Machine Gun.

____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5-6 MCWP 3-15.1
Ammunition:
Caliber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 millimeter
Types in use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High explosive, dual purpose;
high explosive, target practice;
and dummy
Basic load of ammunition per gun

(vehicle mount) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 rounds
Weight of 48 rounds (HE or HEDP)
in container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 pounds
Rates of fire:
Sustained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 rounds per minute
Rapid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 rounds per minute
Figure 5-2. Front Sight.
Cyclic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325-375 rounds per minute
Manipulation (tripod mount, tripod controlled):

Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mils
Depression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 mils
Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 mils (400 left/400 right)
5102. Sights
The front sight on the MK-19 is a fixed sight (see fig-
ure 5-2). The rear leaf sight is mounted on a spring-
type dovetail base (see figure 5-3). It can be folded
forward to the horizontal when the gun is to be moved
or when utilizing the battle sight. The range plate on
the rear sight leaf is marked at each 100 meters,
beginning at 300 meters through 1,500 meters. Range
changes may be made by either the elevation wheel or
the slide release. Generally, major changes in eleva-
tion are made with the slide release while minor
adjustments are made with the elevation wheel. When
utilizing the elevation wheel, two clicks equal 1 mil.
In addition, the rear sight may be adjusted for wind-
age. By turning the windage screw two clicks for each
mil, windage may be adjusted up to 10 mils either
side of zero. The battle sight enables the gunner to
look down the barrel when the leaf sight is in the hori-
zontal position. The night vision sight AN/TVS-5 can
be mounted on the rear sight housing. Figure 5-3. Rear Sight.
____________________________________________________________________
5103. Safety ideal weapon in the defense. Its fragmentation pro-

ducing effects are devastating against attacking dis-
The safety is located on the sear assembly (see figure mounted infantry. Its ability to effectively penetrate
5-4). It has an S (SAFE) and an F (FIRE) position. To lightly armored vehicles prevents the enemy from
ensure the safety functions properly, first ensure the remaining mounted and rapidly closing with friendly
gun is clear. With the feedtray cover closed, pull the defensive positions.
bolt to the rear, place the safety on S and attempt to
fire. The bolt should not go forward. Put the safety on
F and attempt to fire. The bolt should spring forward.
Section 2
5104. Role of the MK-19
Nomenclature
The MK-19 provides support in both the offense and
defense. Its capability for a heavy volume of close,
The MK-19 can be disassembled and assembled
accurate, and continuous fire support makes it a
without the use of force. Disassembly and assembly
highly responsive weapon with which to suppress
can be accomplished by utilizing only an expended
and destroy enemy personnel, fortifications, and
casing and a cartridge link. As the weapon is disas-
vehicles in support of an attack. Its capability for
sembled, place the parts (in the order in which they
both long range and close defensive fires make it an
are removed) on a clean, flat surface to facilitate
ease in assembly.
Disassembly and assembly may be divided into two

categories; general and detailed. General disassembly
involves separation of the weapon into main groups.
This is also known as fieldstripping and is a practice
that stems from past experience in combat situations.
The intent behind designating main groups for a
weapon and the practice of field stripping is to allow
the operator to quickly break the weapon down into a
set of major components that can be hastily cleaned to
keep the weapon ready for action. The idea is to disas-
semble the weapon just far enough to conduct basic
assemblies and parts. Detailed disassembly involves
the removal of some of the component parts and
assemblies from the main groups. When the situation
and conditions permit, the operator can take the time
to completely disassemble and thoroughly clean the
weapon. Complete general and detailed disassembly
is normally the expected routine in garrison after the
completion of firing and/or field training, but this may
also be conducted in a field environment when neces-
sary to ensure the proper functioning and mainte-
nance of the weapon. Only qualified ordnance
personnel are authorized to disassemble the weapon
beyond that described in this publication.
Figure 5-4. Safety.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
5-8 MCWP 3-15.1
5201. General Disassembly b. Removing the Feed Slide Assembly and Feed
Tray
General disassembly separates the MK-19 into five
main groups. These groups include the receiver (with Hold the top cover straight up.
chargers, sight, barrel, and flash suppressor assem- Remove the secondary drive lever by pushing
bly), feed slide assembly and tray, feed tray cover (top down on the point post from out-side the feed tray
cover), sear, and the bolt and backplate with grips cover and pulling the lever to the rear until it disen-
attached. See figures 5-5 and 5-6. gages. See figure 5-9.
Fold down the feed tray with feed slide assembly.
a. Removing the Bolt and Backplate Assembly Pull the retaining pins straight out from both sides.
Lift off the cover. See figure 5-10.
Ensure the gun is clear and ride the bolt forward.
Lift off the feed tray and feed slide assembly. See
Pull straight out on the bolt and backplate pin uti- figure 5-11.
lizing a spent casing. See figure 5-7.
NOTE
Pull out the assembly until it clicks.
Place the gun on F. It is permissible to separate the feed slide
assembly from the feed tray. Move the feed slide
Depress the sear, support the assembly with both assembly to line up the tabs with slots in the
hands, and pull rearward to remove. See figure 5-8. tray, then lift off the feed slide assembly.
Figure 5-5. Five Main Groups, Exploded View.

____________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-6. Five Main Groups.
Figure 5-7. Removing the Bolt Figure 5-8. Removing the Bolt
and Backplate Pin. and Backplate Assembly.
5-10 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 5-9. Removing the Secondary Drive Lever.
Press the receiver sear (located under the safety)

and rotate the sear housing assembly 90 degrees in
either direction. See figure 5-13.
Put the safety in the S position and lift out the sear
housing assembly.
5202. General Assembly
To properly assemble the five major groups of the

gun, replace the groups in reverse order of their
removal.
a. Attaching the Sear Housing Assembly

Figure 5-10. Removing the Feed Tray Ensure that the sear spring is held in position and
Cover Retaining Pin. line up the assembly at a 90-degree angle to the
barrel centerline.
Turn the assembly 90 degrees toward the barrel
centerline until the assembly locks into position.
c. Removing the Sear Assembly
Turn the receiver on its side and place the safety b. Attaching the Feed Slide Assembly and the
on F. Feed Tray
Lift the lockpin with cartridge link. See figure 5-12. Lower the feed slide assembly and tray into posi-
tion.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-11. Removing the Feed Slide Assembly.
Figure 5-12. Lifting the Locking Pin.
c. Attaching the Feed Tray Cover (Top Cover) Press the raised pivot post through the hole in the
feed tray cover. Press the feed tray firmly against
Align pinholes in feed tray cover with pinholes in the feed tray cover.
feed tray assembly.
Hold the cover straight up and insert the feed tray e. Insert the Bolt and Backplate Assembly
cover retainer pins into both sides of the cover. Ensure the cocking lever is forward.
Insert the bolt and backplate assembly into the
d. Replacing the Secondary Drive Lever receiver. See figure 5-14.
Lift the feed slide assembly and the feed tray.

CAUTION
Insert the forked end of the secondary drive lever
Before inserting assembly, put cocking lever in for-
between the feed slide assembly and the feed tray.
ward position.
5-12 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 5-13. Rotation of Sear

Housing Assembly.
Press the receiver sear and slide the bolt assembly

forward until the retainer pin holes in the backplate
and receiver are aligned. See figure 5-15.
Insert the backplate retainer pin to lock the assem-
bly in position.
5203. Detailed Disassembly and Assembly
The term detailed disassembly, as it is used in this

manual, refers only to those disassembly procedures
authorized for the operator level. This is not to be con-
fused with procedures authorized for 2d echelon Figure 5-14. Inserting the Bolt and Backplate
maintenance (unit armorers) or above. Detailed disas- Assembly Into Receiver.
sembly of any of the groups beyond that described in
this manual is NOT AUTHORIZED except by quali-
fied ordnance personnel. Detailed disassembly of the
receiver assembly is authorized by operators to the
degree shown in this section. See figure 5-16.
a. Disassembling the Receiver Group
(1) Removing the primary drive lever and vertical cam
Reach under the top of the receiver and locate the

drive lever lock. Slide the lock 1/4 inch to the rear. Figure 5-15. Depressing the Sear While
See figure 5-17. Sliding the Bolt Assembly Forward.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-16. Receiver Assembly, Detailed Disassembled.
Figure 5-17. Retracting the Drive Lever Lock.
Press down on the primary drive lever pivot post Slide the alignment guide toward the feeder mouth.
which releases both the primary drive and the verti- Pull back and lift out the alignment guide. See fig-
cal cam. ure 5-19.
Pull out the lever and cam from their respective
ends of the receiver. See figure 5-18.
(3) Removing the ogive plunger. After remov-
(2) Removing the alignment guide ing alignment guide, remove ogive plunger by
Depress the alignment guide spring. Insert the car- pushing rearward on the forward edge. See fig-
tridge link into the slot in the feeder mouth. ure 5-20.
5-14 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 5-18. Removing the Primary Drive Lever and Vertical Cam.
Figure 5-19. Removing the Alignment Guide

Assembly.
Figure 5-20. Removing the Ogive Plunger.
(4) Removing the round positioning block (5) Removing the charger assemblies (both sides).
See figure 5-22.
Depress the round positioning block and slide it
toward the muzzle end of the gun. Retract lock plunger with link or spent case.
Pull the round positioning block away from the Slide charger all the way rearward.
receiver. See figure 5-21. Pull charger away from receiver.
___________________________________________________________________
(2) Attaching the round positioning block

Insert block locks into slots (tang end forward).
Push against block and slide it toward the rear until
block locks in place.
(3) Inserting the ogive plunger assembly. With the

round positioning block in place, slide the ogive
plunger assembly in the slot.
(4) Inserting the alignment guide assembly. Once the

ogive plunger is in position—
Insert alignment guide into slot at mount.
Engage lug on the guide to slot in receiver.
Figure 5-21. Removing of Round
Slide the guide toward the ogive plunger until it
Positioning Block.
locks in place.
(5) Replacing the vertical cam and primary drive lever
Slide the vertical cam assembly through the rear of

the receiver.
Engage forked end in the notch.
Hold vertical cam in position and insert primary
drive lever from the opposite end of receiver.
Engage pivot post of lever through holes in
receiver and vertical cam.
Slide the drive lever lock forward.
Figure 5-22. Removal of Lock Plunger. Section 3

Functioning
b. Detailed Assembly of the Receiver Group The cycle of functioning is broken down into eight
(1) Attaching the charger assembly (both sides)
basic steps. More than one step may occur simulta-
Rotate charger handle to the straight up position. are feeding, chambering, locking, firing, unlocking,
Line up lugs on charger with slots in receiver rails extracting, ejection, and cocking. By understanding
and insert charger lugs into slots. how the MK-19 functions, it will be easier to recog-
Hold charger tightly against rail and slide charger nize and correct malfunctions and stoppages which
forward until it locks in place. occur during firing.
5-16 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
5301. Feeding be positioned onto a new round in the feeder. After

the gun is fired, the bolt moves to the rear, stripping
Feeding is the action of placing the round into posi- the round from the feeder. It is cammed downward
tion on the face of the bolt in preparation for cham- into the extractors on the face of the bolt where it is
bering. When the bolt moves forward, it forces the in position for chambering. See figures 5-24, 5-25,
primary drive lever to move to the right. The pri- and 5-26. Simultaneously, the primary drive lever is
mary drive lever pulls the secondary drive lever with pulled to the left and the secondary drive lever is
it. The secondary drive lever, which pivots in the pulled with it. The feed assembly moves to the right
feed tray cover, pushes the feed slide assembly to the and the pawls force the new round against the round
left along the rails of the feed tray (see figure 5-23). positioning block in a position ready for feeding
This causes the pawls of the feed slide assembly to (see figure 5-27).
Figure 5-23. Position of Drive Levers, Bolt to Rear.
Figure 5-24. Round Positioned In Feeder, Bolt to Rear.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-25. Round Picked Up by Extractors.
Figure 5-26. Round Cammed Down Onto Face of Bolt.
Figure 5-27. Round Positioned Against Round Positioning Block, Bolt Forward.
5-18 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
5302. Chambering 5303. Locking

Figure 5-28 shows the round positioned on the face Locking is accomplished when the bolt reaches the for-
of the bolt ready to be chambered. By depressing ward end of the rail and the round is momentarily held
the trigger, the sear is depressed, permitting the in the forward-most position by the recoil springs. This
recoil springs to drive the bolt forward on the rails. is not locking as found in the gas or recoil operated
As the bolt nears the forward end of the rail, the weapons. In blowback operation, the only force which
nose of the round enters the rear of the chamber. holds the bolt and round in position is the spring ten-
The round is fully chambered when the leading sion and weight of the bolt. The bolt and round are held
edge of the casing comes into contact with the rear in this position until the pressure of the recoil springs is
of the chamber and the bolt is in the forward-most overcome by the rearward movement of the bolt caused
position (see figure 5-29). by the expansion of gas during firing.
Figure 5-28. Round Positioned on Face of Bolt, Ready to Chamber.
Figure 5-29. Chambering/Locking.

___________________________________________________________________
5304. Firing 5306. Extraction

The initial rearward movement of the bolt along the
As locking occurs, the cocking lever is indexed to rails pulls the casing out of contact with the receiver
the rear. This allows the firing pin mechanism to then the extraction of the spent casing is accom-
release the firing pin on the face of the bolt. As the plished. See figure 5-31.
bolt’s forward motion is arrested, the firing pin is
driven by the firing pin spring into the primer of the 5307. Ejection
round. See figure 5-30.
The vertical cam forces a new round into position on
the face of the bolt and ejects the spent casing out
5305. Unlocking through the ejection port. See figure 5-31.
As the round fires, the pressure of the burning pow- 5308. Cocking
der overcomes the tension of the recoil spring and the Simultaneously with ejection, the cocking lever is
bolt moves to the rear. cammed forward by the rail, cocking the firing pin.
Figure 5-30. Firing/Unlocking.
Figure 5-31. Extracting/Ejecting/Feeding/Cocking.

5-20 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
charger handle and locks and lowers one charger

Section 4 handle. This interrupts the cycle of function and the
Malfunctions and Stoppages weapon ceases to fire (see figure 5-32). Lowering
the charger handle to interrupt the cycle of operation
Machine gunners must have a detailed understanding can damage the gun.
cal problems may be encountered during firing. This
5401. Malfunctions
A malfunction is a failure of the gun to function satis-
factorily. Defective ammunition or improper opera-
tion of the gun by a crew member is not considered a
malfunction of the gun.
a. Sluggish Operation. Sluggish operation of the
gun is usually due to excessive friction caused by dirt,
carbon buildup, lack of proper lubrication, or burred Figure 5-32. Lowering Charger to Stop
parts. To correct the problems, the gunner should Runaway Gun.
inspect the gun for worn and damaged parts and
replace them as required. Keep the gun clean, and
lubricate as required.
c. Firing Out of Battery. This is a serious mal-
b. Runaway Gun. A runaway gun is a gun that con- function. A round is being fired before it is fully
tinues to fire after the trigger has been released. It may seated in the chamber. If this occurs, the gunner
be caused by worn parts or short recoil of the bolt should see smoke, a flash, or powder blowback from
assembly. To correct the problem, hold the fire on the the bottom of the gun. The following safety proce-
target until feeding is stopped or the ammunition is dure should be used:
expended. The best method of stopping the gun depends
on several factors such as the amount of ammunition Cease fire immediately.
remaining on the belt and how the gun is mounted. If Place weapon on S.
ammunition is not a factor and the gun is employed in Clear the area around the gun of all personnel and
the free gun mode, the gunner keeps the rounds on tar- ammunition.
get until the rounds on the belt have been fired. Notify safety and ordnance personnel.
Do not attempt to fire the weapon again until it has
NOTE been inspected and fixed by higher echelon mainte-
nance personnel.
Do not twist or attempt to break the ammunition
belt.
5402. Stoppages
If the gun is mounted on either the M3 or vehicle A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of func-
mount with the traversing and elevating (T&E) tioning caused by faulty action of the gun or ammuni-
mechanism attached, the gunner holds the grip with tion. Stoppages must be reduced quickly and firing
one hand. With the other hand, he presses the resumed. This is accomplished by immediate action.
___________________________________________________________________
5403. Immediate Action (1) Bore Obstruction. This means that part of the
previous round may be lodged in the barrel and could
Immediate action is that action taken by the gunner/ possibly prevent the next warhead from passing safely
crew to reduce the stoppage, without investigating the through it. The gunner/crew should be alert for a muf-
cause, and quickly return the gun to action. fled report from the gun when it fires, smoke and
a. During Peacetime and Training debris from the bottom of the receiver, and/or the fail-
ure of the warhead to leave the muzzle. The safety
l Clear the area of personnel. procedures are as follows:
l Wait 10 seconds.
l Cease fire immediately.
l Pull bolt to the rear. (Catch the round as it is
ejected.) l Place the weapon on S.
l Clear the area around the gun of personnel and
WARNING ammunition.
l Notify safety, explosive ordnance disposal, and ord-
If immediate action of a stoppage (bolt nance personnel.
forward) results in the extraction of a
spent cartridge, the crew will initiate sub- (2) Jammed Bolt. The bolt may jam as the gunner
sequent action for a suspected obstruc- is attempting to pull it to the rear. He will not be able
tion in the barrel before attempting to fire to pull and lock it to the rear or release rearward ten-
again. (See paragraph 5403C[1]). sion and ride it forward.
l Push charger handles forward and up. WARNING

l Attempt to fire.
l If nothing happens: Do not open the top cover. This could al-
low the bolt to spring forward suddenly
l Put gun on S.
with a round on the face of the bolt. If that
l Wait 10 seconds.
round fires while the cover is open, seri-
l Pull bolt to the rear. (Catch round as it is ejected.) ous injury to personnel and damage to
l Open the cover, unload, and clear the weapon. equipment could occur. The following
safety procedure should be used:
b. During Extreme Combat Situations.
l Press charger handle locks and rotate charger han-
l Put the gun on S.
dles down.
l Press the charger handle locks and rotate the
l Pull and lock the bolt to the rear. charger handles down.
l Push the charger handles forward and up to their l Pull the charger handles to the rear as far as possi-
locked position. ble and maintain rearward pressure on the handles
l Relay the gun on target and attempt to fire. while the squad leader/assistant gunner lifts the top
cover.
c. Subsequent Action. Two potentially serious l Pull the charger handles to the rear until the bolt
stoppages may occur with the MK-19 that require dif- locks to the rear. Ensure the bolt will stay to the rear
ferent procedures from those described above.
5-22 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
before releasing rearward tension on the charger 5502. Gun Cradle

handles. Rotate them to their upright position.
The MK64 MOD 5 cradle is used to support the MK-
Remove the round from the face of the bolt using a 19, connecting it to either the M3 tripod or to vehicle
length of cleaning rod. mounts. The gun is connected to these mounts by the
cradle’s pintle. The pintle seats in the tripod head and
Press the charger handle locks and rotate the is held secure by a pintle lock and spring. The pintle
charger handles down. is released by raising the pintle lock which releases
Place the weapon on F, depress the trigger, and ride the cam. The cradle also features a stow bracket to
the bolt home. hold the weapon in position during movement (when
Ensure the feed slide assembly is to the left and that vehicle mounted) and has a mounting plate on the left
the secondary drive lever is engaged with the feed side for inserting an ammunition canister mounting
slide pin. bracket (for use when vehicle mounted). As a safety
Close the top cover. device, the cradle has a safety stop that prevents the
gun muzzle from going too low. The T&E mechanism
is attached to the cradle and permits accurate delivery
5404. Remedial Action of fire. See figures 5-35 and 5-36, page 5-26.
When immediate action fails to reduce a stoppage,
remedial action must be applied. This involves inves- 5503. Vehicle Mounts
tigating the cause of the stoppage and may require a. Types. The MK-19 mounts on the M4 pedestal
disassembly of the weapon and replacement of parts mount, the M66 ring mount, and the HMMWV weap-
to correct the problem. See figure 5-33, pages 5-23 ons station.
through 5-25.
(1) Pedestal mount, M4. Thisis designated for instal-
lation on M151 series vehicles; e.g., the fast attack
vehicle (see figure 5-37, page 5-27). The mount is
Section 5 composed of a pintle socket, pintle clamping screw,
Mounts and Accessories column, and braces. See TM 9-1005-245-14 for infor-
mation on the pedestal. For information on mounting
the MK-19, see TM 9-1010-231-13&P.
The MK-19 can be fired from either a ground or vehi-
cle mount. A set of maintenance equipment and a (2) M66 ring mount. This mount is designed for instal-
mount and gun record book are issued with each MK- lation on 2-, 5-, and 10-ton trucks or on combat vehicles
19 to help care for and operate the weapons system. (see figure 5-38, page 5-27). It consists of a machine gun
mount, pintle socket, pintle clamping screw, ring assem-
5501. Tripod Mount, M3 bly, brake assembly, and backrest assembly. The multi-
ple-type ring assembly has a fixed ring for mounting to
The M3 tripod provides a stable and durable mount the vehicle. It also has a revolving ring that carries the
for the MK-19. (The M3 tripod is also used for the pintle socket for the stepped type machine gun mount,
M2 .50 cal.) Firing the gun from the tripod permits a the pintle shanks, a brake assembly, and the backrest
high degree of accuracy and control (see figure 5-34, assembly. See TM 9-1003-245-14 for additional M66
page 5-26). For more information, see chapter 4, sec- ring mount information and TM 9-1010-231-13&P for
tion VI, paragraph 4602. information on mounting the MK-19.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-33. Corrective Action for Stoppages.

5-24 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 5-33. Corrective Action for Stoppages—Continued.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-33. Corrective Action for Stoppages—Continued.

5-26 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 5-36. MK64 MOD 5 Cradle Mounted on

the M3 Tripod.
Figure 5-34. M3 Tripod.
Figure 5-35. MK64 MOD 5 Cradle.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-37. Pedestal Mount M4.
Figure 5-38. M66 Ring Mount.

5-28 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
(3) HMMWV weapons station. This consists of a tal. When used on the HMMWV weapons platform
rotating platform with a pedestal that accepts the pedestal, only one clamp is required above the tra-
MK64 MOD 5 cradle (see figure 5-39). The pedestal versing lock clamp. A standard caliber .50 traversing
is detachable with a quick release pin. For information mechanism composes the upper end of the T&E
on weapons stations, see TM 9-1010-231-13&P. assembly. It is attached to the lower rear holes in the
M4 cradle by a retaining pin.
b. Accessories. There are two accessories needed
to mount the MK-19 on vehicles.
5504. Night Vision Sight, AN/TVS-5
(1) Pintle adapter. The upper end of the pintle
adapter has a hole that is shaped to accept the M4 cra- The AN/TVS-5 is a portable, battery-operated, elec-
dle’s pintle. The adapter is equipped with a quick- tro-optical instrument used for passive night observa-
release pintle that secures the carriage and cradle. The tion and fire. It amplifies natural light such as
lower end of the adapter is shaped to fit the mounting moonlight, starlight, and skyglow. The sight does not
hold in the upper end of the M4 pedestal, HMMWV emit visible infrared light that can be detected by the
weapons platform, and the M66 ring mount. It is enemy. The AN/TVS-5 may also be used with the
secured by the pintle lock on the vehicle pedestal (see M2. See TM 11-5855-214-10 for more information on
figure 5-40). the AN/TVS-5.
(2) T&E mechanism mount assembly. This a. Installation. The M2 mounting bracket is used
assembly adapts the T&E so that it secures the car- to install the AN/TVS-5 on the MK-19. With the MK-
riage and cradle to the M4 pedestal or HMMWV 19 mounted on the tripod—
weapons platform pedestal and provides fire control
adjustments (see figure 5-41). The lower end of the Slide the mounting bracket over the rear sight
assembly is attached to the pedestal by a train lock housing of the gun. The bracket slides from the
clamp. It may be released for traverse or locked in muzzle end of the weapon.
position by a train lock handle. Two positioning Lock down the locking cams of the mounting
clamps are provided to prevent up or down move- bracket in the following sequence: side cam, left top
ment of the traversing lock clamp on the M4 pedes- cam, right top cam.
Figure 5-39. HMMWV Weapons Station. Figure 5-40. Pintle Adapter.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-41. T&E Mechanism Mount Assembly.
Place the AN/TVS-5 on the mounting bracket by (2) Dual-purpose reticle pattern. The M2 aiming
positioning it in the groove at the top rear of the points are as on the M2/M85 reticle. The stadia lines
bracket so that the scribe line on the bracket is are used to determine range to a 20-foot wide target.
aligned with the scribe line in the sight mounting Manipulate the sight picture so that the target fills the
adapter. space between the stadia lines in order to determine
Insert the lever screw from the bottom of the the corresponding range to the target. MK-19 aiming
mounting bracket into the sight mounting adapter. points for stationary targets are aligned vertically in
Tighten the lever screw. the center of the reticle. Aiming points to lead a tar-
get moving 10 mi/h are located vertically to the left
b. Use of the Reticle Cell and right of the stadia lines.
c. Field Zeroing. To field zero—
(1) The proper reticle cell must be
Proper reticle cell.
installed in the AN/TVS-5 before the sight can be Select a suitable target of known range in the hun-
used for aimed fire of the MK-19. The AN/TVS-5 dreds of meters from 500 to 700.
should be equipped with a dual-purpose reticle pat- Sight in on the target with the weapon's zeroed day-
tern for both the M2 and MK-19. Installation of the light sights. Use the proper range setting.
proper reticle must be performed by authorized main- Lower the daylight sight without disturbing the
tenance personnel. alignment of the weapon.
5-30 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Mount the AN/TVS-5. Place the sight into opera- Dry cleaning solvent can also be used to clean all
tion. metal parts of the weapons system. This material dries
Adjust the azimuth and elevation actuators until the out the metal severely so a thin coat of CLP or lubri-
proper range mark comes to bear on the target. cating oil should be applied afterwards. This cleaning
Fire one or two rounds to settle the sight on the material is especially useful when cleaning the gun in
weapon. preparation for changing the type of lubricant used.
Tighten the sight mounting bracket and the lever
screw. When RBC and CLP are not available, hot or cold
Refire on the target, making any necessary adjust- water can be used; however, warm or hot, soapy water
ments to the sight, until the target can be hit using is recommended. After using soap and water, dry the
the proper range mark. parts immediately and apply a thin coat of CLP.
b. Lubricants. LSA-T is the preferred lubricant for
use on all friction producing parts during operation of
Section 6 the gun in normal conditions. Lubricate the weapon
Maintenance with LSA-T in temperatures between 0 degrees Fahr-
enheit and 215 degrees Fahrenheit. It will not burn off
Care, cleaning, and maintenance determine whether or the gun as it heats up during operation nor will rain or
not the gun will function properly when needed. The excess moisture wash it off.
bore and chamber must be properly maintained to pre- LAW should be used during operation of the gun in
serve accuracy. Because of the close fit of working sustained temperatures below 0 degrees Fahrenheit (-
surfaces and the high speed at which the gun oper- 18 degrees Celsius). See cold climate conditions in
ates, the receiver and moving parts must be kept paragraph 5604.
clean; correctly lubricated; and free from burrs, rust,
dirt, or grease to ensure proper, efficient functioning.
The care, cleaning, lubrication, and adjustment of the 5602. Care and Cleaning Before, During,
mounts used with the gun are no less important. The and After Firing
functioning of the gun and mount together determine Figure 5-42 is an operational checklist for procedures
overall effectiveness. All accessories and equipment to be followed before, during, and after firing the MK-
used with the gun and mount, including ammunition, 19. At no time should the bolt and backplate assem-
must be properly maintained. bly be immersed in cleaning solvent, as it dilutes the
grease in the packed bearings.
a. Cleaning Materials. CLP is a special cleaning 5603. Normal Maintenance Procedures
solution and lubricant containing Teflon™ that can be Each gun should be cleaned as soon after firing as
used to clean and preserve all the metal parts of the possible and each time it is exposed to field condi-
weapons system. It may be used as a lubricant during tions. In combat conditions the gun should be cleaned
normal operation of the gun also. and lubricated daily, whether it has been fired or not.
RBC can be used to clean the bore of the machine gun If possible, keep the gun covered with a canvas, tar-
barrel after firing. Immediately after using bore paulin, or poncho when not in use. During normal
cleaner, dry the bore and any parts of the gun exposed training conditions, inspect the gun daily for rust and
to the bore cleaner and then apply a thin coat of CLP maintain a light coat of CLP on all metal parts. In
or lubricating oil. ideal conditions, when the gun is not used and is kept
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-42. Procedures Before, During, and After Firing.
in a clean place, it may only be necessary to disassem- (2) Hot, humid climates. Inspect the gun more fre-
ble and clean it every 3 to 5 days. The gun should be quently for signs of rust. Keep the gun free of mois-
disassembled, cleaned, and lubricated in a clean, dry ture and lightly lubricated with CLP.
location where it is least exposed to dirt and moisture.
(3) Hot, dry climates. Inspect and clean the weapon
daily. Avoid excess lubrication, as this will attract
5604. Special Maintenance Procedures dust, grit, and sand.
a. Climatic Conditions. Extremely cold, hot, dry, b. Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical (NBC)
and tropical climates affect the gun and its function- Conditions. If contamination is anticipated, apply
ing. Care should be taken under these climatic condi- lubricant to all outer surfaces of the machine gun (do
tions to ensure that the gun is cleaned daily with the not lubricate ammunition). Keep the gun covered as
prescribed lubricants and protected from the elements much as possible. If the gun is contaminated, use the
by some sort of cover if possible. procedures outlined in FM 3-5, NBC Decontamina-
tion, to decontaminate. Once decontaminated, clean
(1) Cold climates. The weapon must be kept free of
and lubricate.
excess lubrication and moisture. If the weapon is
brought indoors, allow it to come to room tempera-
ture, wipe it dry, and proceed with cleaning and lubri- 5605. Inspection
cation. Lubricate the gun with LSA or CLP and keep Ensure there are no signs of dirt or corrosion during
it covered outdoors as much as possible. In sustained the inspection and examine each part for serviceabil-
temperatures below 0 degrees Fahrenheit (-18 degrees ity. Inspection begins with the weapon disassembled
Celsius), the weapon should be lubricated with LAW. into its five main groups.
5-32 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
a. Receiver Assembly d. Bolt and Backplate Assembly

Housing must not show any cracks. Cocking lever must not be broken or be worn on
Receiver rails must not be cracked, bent, or burred. the rear tip.
Feed pawls must not exhibit weak spring action or Guide rods must not be bent or binding.
burrs. Recoil springs must not be weak.
Backplate pin must have retaining ring.
Barrel must be free from carbon and not show any
Safety wire must be attached to pin.
deformity in the lands or grooves.
Flash suppressor must not be dented or cracked.
e. Sear Housing Assembly. Inspect for burrs on
Rear sight must move to the horizontal position any part, especially on the rear shoulder of the sear.
without difficulty. The dove tail portion must not
be dented and the number on the range scale must f. Mounts and T&E Mechanism
be visible. Clicks should be clearly heard and felt as the T&E
Ogive plunger head and round positioning block mechanism is manipulated. The numbers on the
springs must not be weak. scale should be easily visible.
Charger assemblies must not be burred on grooved Cradle should fit snugly onto the M3 or M4 mount.
edges. Sleeve latch should function and the traversing bar
Vertical cam must not be burred or scratched on the should be tight and all numbers should be easily visible.
chromed edge.
Primary drive lever must not be burred, especially
around pivot posts. Section 7
Ammunition
Secondary drive lever must not be burred on the
pivot post or forked end. Retaining ring must be on
pivot post. 5701. Identification
Aluminum buildup must be removed from vertical
Forty millimeter ammunition for the MK-19 can be
cam. If present, armorer can remove it with fine
identified by markings on its packaging and by the
steel wool.
physical characteristics of the rounds, such as color
and markings (see text below and figure 5-43, pages
b. Feed Slide Assembly
34 and 35). Ammunition for the MK-19 is linked with
Feed pawls and feed tray pawls must not be burred M16A2 links. These links can be identified by four,
or binding. finger-like tabs holding the rotating band.
Guide rails on tray must not be burred.
5702. Types
c. Feed Tray Cover (Top Cover)
a. High Explosive. High explosive (HE) projec-
Housing must not be cracked. tiles are used for fragmentation effect against light
Latch must not be binding or loose. materials and fortifications and personnel. There are
___________________________________________________________________
two types of HE rounds: M383 (DODAC 1310- c. Practice Rounds. Upon impact, the M918 pro-
B571) and M384 (DODAC 1310-B470). Their fillers duces a flash, smoke, and a loud report to simulate the
and body materials differ, although performance traits explosion of the HEDP round. Its arming distance is
are the same. The casings are olive drab with a yel- 18 to 30 meters. The M385 duplicates the trajectory
low ogive and yellow markings. and time of flight of the HE rounds but is inert and
has no blast effect in the target area.
b. High Explosive Dual Purpose. High explosive
dual purpose (HEDP) ammunition has a high explo- NOTE
sive projectile with an internally shaped charge capa-
In training, targets should not be engaged at less
ble of armor penetration as well as fragmentation
than 200 meters with HE or HEDP ammunition.
effect. They are used against lightly armored vehi-
In combat, the minimum safe distance for target
cles, medium and light materials and fortifications,
engagement is 75 meters.
and personnel. The M430 HEDP round (DODAC
1310-B542) is the standard round for the MK-19. The
casings are olive drab with a yellow ogive and yellow 5704. Packaging
markings.
HE and HEDP ammunition is packaged in metal cans.
c. Practice. Practice rounds have a solid, nonex- The HE ammunition can contains 48 linked rounds
plosive projectile. One type contains a flash charge (M383 and M430) per can and the HEDP ammunition
inside to simulate explosion upon impact. They are can contains 50 rounds (M384) per can. A full can
used in range gunnery practice. There are two types of weighs approximately 60 pounds (see figure 5-44).
practice rounds: the M918 with a flash charge inside
the projectile (DODAC 1310-B584) and the M385 Practice ammunition is packaged in metal cans. The
with a solid projectile (DODAC 1310-B480). The M918 can contains 40 linked rounds. The M385 can
M918 is blue with a blue ogive and brown band and contains 50 rounds. A full can weighs approximately
black markings. The M385 is blue with a blue ogive 60 pounds.
and black markings. Dummy ammunition is packaged in small metal cans
d. Dummy. Dummy rounds are completely inert. with 10 linked rounds in each.
They are used in training; e.g., a gun drill or loading,
unloading, and cleaning procedures. The M922
dummy round (DODAC 1310-B472) is green with a
gold ogive and black markings.
5703. Ballistic Data

a. HE Rounds: M383 and M384. These rounds
inflict personnel casualties in the target area with
ground burst effects. Their effective casualty radius is
15 meters. Their arming distance is from 18 to 36
meters.
b. HEDP Round: M430. This round penetrates 2
inches of steel armor at 0 degrees obliquity and
inflicts personnel casualties in the target area with
ground burst effects. Its effective casualty radius is 15
meters. Its arming distance is from 18 to 40 meters. Figure 5-44. 40mm Ammunition Box.
5-34 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 5-43. MK-19 40mm Ammunition.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-43. MK-19 40mm Ammunition—Continued.

5-36 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
5705. Storage Only specially approved lots of ammunition can be

Store ammunition of all classes away from heat nition is clearly stamped FOR OVERHEAD FIRE.
sources; e.g., open flames, radiators, heaters, hot water
pipes. Ammunition should be stored under cover. If it is DO NOT fire ammunition (other than blank ammuni-
necessary to leave ammunition in the open, keep it at tion) until it has been positively identified by ammu-
least 6 inches from the ground and covered with a dou- nition and grade.
ble thickness of tarpaulin. Place the tarpaulin so it gives
maximum protection and allows free circulation of air.
Dig suitable trenches to prevent water from flowing Section 8
under the ammunition pile. Operation and Firing
Operation of the MK-19 includes loading, unloading,
5706. Care, Handling, and Preservation clearing, and charging the gun.
Ammunition containers should not be opened until the
ammunition is to be used. Ammunition removed from 5801. Functioning Check
the airtight containers, particularly in damp climates,
Prior to operating the gun, the gunner should conduct
is likely to corrode. Protect ammunition from mud,
a functioning check which includes the following
dirt, and water. If the ammunition gets wet or dirty,
steps:
wipe it off prior to use. Wipe off light corrosion as
soon as it is discovered. Heavily corroded cartridges a. Inspecting the Feed Tray Assembly and
should be replaced. Chamber. Open feed tray cover and inspect the feed
tray assembly and chamber to ensure the gun is clear.
Use caution during firing to ensure that ammunition is
kept out of the dirt. Dirt picked up during firing will b. Checking the Safety. With the cover closed and
act as an abrasive in the chamber and could cause a the bolt to rear:
malfunction that may result in injury to personnel and/
or damage to equipment. Place the safety on S.
Pull the trigger. The bolt should not go forward.
DO NOT expose ammunition to direct rays of the sun. Place the safety on F.
If the powder is hot, excessive pressure may be devel- Pull the trigger. The bolt should spring forward.
oped when the gun is fired.
c. Checking Under the Feed Tray Cover. With
DO NOT oil or grease ammunition. Dust and other
abrasives will collect on it and could damage the the bolt forward:
operating parts of the gun. Open the feed tray cover.
DO NOT fire dented cartridges, cartridges with loose Inspect the firing pin and bolt face for signs of
projectiles, or other defective rounds. worn or damaged parts.
Move the secondary drive lever back and forth to
DO NOT fire over friendly troops any ammunition ensure that it moves freely.
graded and marked FOR TRAINING USE ONLY. Press the feed pawls to check for spring pressure.
___________________________________________________________________
d. Closing the Cover. Ensure that the secondary the gun begins by attaching the feed throat to the
drive lever is to the right and engaged under the feed feeder (see figure 5-48). With the bolt forward and
tray. Slide the feed slide to the left and ensure that the the weapon on F.
bolt is forward before closing the cover.
Insert the first round, female link first.
Push the round across the first pawl until it clicks
5802. Loading and move the feed slide assembly to the left.
When the gun is mounted on the M3 tripod, ammuni- Close the feed cover. If it does not close easily,
tion is fed directly from the can. When mounted on manipulate the feed slide assembly.
the vehicle mount, first attach the ammunition can
bracket to the slots on the gun cradle and set the
ammunition can on the bracket, securing with the
retaining pin.
To feed the ammunition into the gun, start by attach-
ing the feed throat to the feeder. The gunner then
squeezes the spring loaded pins on the feed throat and
inserts it into the slots on both sides of the feeder.
With the bolt forward, and the cover raised—
Insert the first round into the feeder, female link
first (see figure 5-45).
Push the round across the first feed pawl (see figure
5-46).
Move the feed slide assembly to the left (see figure
5-47).
Close the cover.
5803. Charging the Gun

Charging the gun places the first round in position Figure 5-46. Placement of Round Across
so it may be fired. Charging the initial round into Primary Feed Pawls.
Figure 5-45. Ammunition Belt With Female Link on First Round.

5-38 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 5-47. Moving Primary Drive Lever to the Right.
Figure 5-48. Attach Feed Throat to Feeder.
Grasp the charger handles and press the charger Pull the charger handles to the rear which places
handle locks up and in. the bolt and round in position to fire.
Rotate the charger handles down and pull them to Press the charger handle locks and return the han-
the rear (see figure 5-49). dles to the forward and up position.
Press the locks and push the charger handles for- The weapon is prepared to fire. Put the safety on S
ward and up to the original position. until ready to fire.
Place the safety on F and press the trigger, the bolt
will spring forward, loading the first round on to
the face of the bolt.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-49. Rotating Charger Handles Down and Pulling to Rear.
5804. Firing
To fire the MK-19—
Place the safety on F.
Place the charger handles in the forward and up
position.
Place hands on the control grips, thumb(s) on the
trigger.
Press the trigger to F.
Fire in 3 to 5 round bursts.
5805. Clearing and Unloading the Gun

a. Clearing. Observe the following procedures:
Put the weapon on S and keep it pointed down

range.
Charge the weapon and leave the charger handles Figure 5-50. Clearing Rounds From Gun.
to the rear and down. DO NOT open the cover.
Insert a length of cleaning rod through the right
hand receiver rail as close to the face of the bolt as
possible.
Push down on the casing (the round may be live or
5806. Positions for Firing
spent) forcing it off the face of the bolt and out the
bottom of the gun. The squad leader/assistant gun- The MK-19, like the M2 .50 cal, can be fired from the
ner should catch the round as it falls out. tripod mount or vehicle mount. On the tripod mount,
Dispose of the live round per applicable directives. it can be fired with the gunner in the prone or sitting
position. When fired from the vehicle mount, the gun-
b. Unloading. To unload the gun: open the cover, ner is in the standing position. The details of the vari-
reach beneath the feeder, and press the primary and ous firing positions are the same as for the M2 .50 cal
secondary positioning pawls (see figure 5-50). At the and can be found in paragraph 4906. The only differ-
same time, slide the linked rounds out of the feeder ence between the weapons relative to the firing posi-
and feed tray. tion is one of terminology. What are called spade
5-40 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
grips on the M2 .50 cal are called control grips on the 5902. Form for Gun Drill
MK-19. Both the spade and control grips look alike
and serve the same function. The section or squad leader commands, FORM FOR
GUN DRILL. The crew forms in column, one man in
front of the gunner, one behind. There are five paces
between men, in the following order: squad leader,
Section 9 gunner, and ammunition bearer. When the crew mem-
Gun Drill bers reach their correct positions, they assume the
prone position with equipment arranged as follows
The MK-19 machine gun, employed on the ground on (see figure 4-91):
the M3 tripod, requires a crew of three to put the gun The squad leader places the tripod to his left, trail
into action and keep the weapon supplied with ammu- legs to the rear, front leg uppermost; ammunition
nition. The purpose of a gun drill is to develop preci- box to his right, latch to the front.
sion, speed, skill, and teamwork in the procedures for The gunner places the MK-19 across his front,
examining equipment, putting the gun into action, and flash suppressor to the left, top cover up.
taking the gun out of action. Generally, crew duties in The ammunition bearer places the cradle to his
a gun drill with the MK-19 are the same as those for right, pintle and T&E mechanism outboard, ammu-
the M2 .50 cal, therefore figures from that chapter will nition box to his left front, latch to the front.
be referred to in this section. Precision is stressed. If other members are present, ammunition boxes
Once precision is attained, speed and teamwork can are placed in front, one foot apart, latches to the
be developed. Duties should be rotated during a gun right (front).
drill to allow each member of the crew to become
familiar with the duties of the other members. Duties are rotated to ensure that each member learns
and is capable of performing the duties of the other
5901. Crew Equipment members.
In addition to individual arms and equipment, crew 5903. Examination of Equipment Before
members carry the following equipment for the tri- Firing
pod-mounted MK-19:
When the crew is formed and equipped, the squad leader
The squad leader carries the M3 tripod and one box commands, INSPECT EQUIPMENT BEFORE FIR-
of ammunition. ING. At this command, the crew proceeds as follows:
The gunner carries the MK-19, M2 compass, and a. Squad Leader. The squad leader inspects the
binoculars. M3 tripod to ensure that—
The ammunition bearer carries the MK64 MOD5
cradle with attached T&E mechanism and one box Indexing levers and clamps on the front and trail
of ammunition. legs function properly, and the legs are in the short
(low) position.
___________________________________________________________________
Front leg and trail legs are closely folded. Front leg The squad leader reports: ALL CORRECT (or any
clamp is hand tight. deficiencies).
Sleeve lock latch and pintle lock release cam are in
working order. Pintle lock release cam is down. 5904. Placing the Gun into Action
Pintle bushing is free from dirt and burrs.
Ammunition is clean, serviceable, and placed in the To place the gun into action, the section leader or
box correctly (female link first). squad leader commands and signals, GUN TO BE
Ammunition box is closed and locked. MOUNTED (pointing to the position where the gun is
to be mounted), FRONT (pointing in the direction of
b. Gunner. The gunner inspects the MK-19 to fire), ACTION (vigorously pumping his fist in the
ensure that— direction of the designated gun position).
The chamber is clean by inspecting the feed tray At the command or signal ACTION, the squad leader
assembly and the chamber. grasps the left trail leg near the center with his left
The cover is closed, the bolt is forward, and the hand. Springing to his feet and grasping the tripod
safety is on F. head with his right hand, he lifts the tripod across the
The charger assemblies are forward and locked in front of his body with the front leg up, and carries the
the up position. tripod to the desired location (see figure 4-94). Upon
arrival at the position, he places the trail leg shoes on
c. Ammunition Bearer. The ammunition bearer the ground with the front leg pointing upward. With
inspects the cradle and ammunition box to ensure his right hand on the tripod head, he slides his left
that— hand down on the left trail leg and, with a snapping
motion, pulls the left leg (to the left) to engage the
The cradle is properly prepared by checking that sleeve latch. Steadying the tripod with his left hand on
the pintle swings freely and is free of dirt, and all the front leg, he loosens the front leg clamp with his
pins and bolts are properly seated on the cradle. right hand, positions the front leg with his left hand,
The T&E mechanism is properly prepared by and tightens the front leg clamp with his right hand
ensuring that the traversing hand wheel is centered (see figure 4-95). He then aligns the tripod for direc-
and the elevating screws are equally exposed tion, drops the mount to the ground, stamps the right
(about 2 inches) above and below the elevating and left trail shoes with his right or left foot, and
hand wheel. assumes the prone position behind the mount.
The ammunition is clean, serviceable, and placed in
the box correctly (female link first). When the tripod is nearly mounted, the ammunition
The ammunition box is closed and locked. bearer jumps to his feet and grasps the ammunition
box in his left hand and the cradle with his right
d. Reporting. At the completion of the inspection, hand. At the gun position, the ammunition bearer
a report is rendered as follows: places the ammunition box on line with and 2 feet to
the left of the tripod head, latch facing the tripod.
The ammunition bearer reports: AMMUNITION The ammunition bearer hands the cradle to the squad
CORRECT (or any deficiencies). leader. The squad leader inserts the pintle into the
The gunner reports: GUN AND AMMUNITION pintle bushing (see figure 5-51). The ammunition
CORRECT (or any deficiencies). bearer stamps the front shoe of the tripod into the
5-42 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 5-52. Attaching the T&E to the Tripod.
Figure 5-51. Mounting the Cradle on Tripod.
the tripod (see figure 5-52). After he gives the cra-

dle to the squad leader and stamps the front shoe of
the tripod, the ammunition bearer turns to his left
and retrieves the ammunition box which the squad
leader left in his original location. The ammunition
bearer places this ammunition box to the rear of the
ammunition box he previously placed next to the tri-
pod head, latch facing the tripod. He then turns to
the left and returns to his original position.
When the squad leader has completed placing the cra-
dle on the mount, the gunner grasps the gun with his
left hand on the barrel and his right hand on either
grip. He lifts the gun from the ground and moves rap-
idly to the gun position (see figure 5-53). Upon
arrival, the squad leader assists in mounting the gun
by positioning the cradle and steadying the gun as it is
lowered into the cradle. Then the gun is secured to the
cradle (see figure 5-54).
Figure 5-53. Gunner Moving into Position.
With his right hand, the gunner opens the top cover.
The squad leader inserts the first round into the
feeder, female link first (see figure 5-55). He then
ground with his left foot. The squad leader lifts the pushes the first round across the feed pawl and moves
gun pintle lock release cam, and when the gun pintle the feeder slide assembly to the left; the gunner closes
is fully seated, he presses down the pintle lock the top cover. The gunner pulls the charger handles to
release cam with his right hand. The squad leader the rear and returns them to the upright position. He
attaches the T&E mechanism to the traversing bar on presses the trigger, thus positioning the round on the
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-54. Placing and Securing the MK-19 into the Cradle.
face of the bolt. The gunner pulls the charger handles tray and places it in the ammunition box. He then
to the rear a second time and returns them to the removes the round from the face of the bolt, attaches
upright position. He then places the safety on S. The it to the ammunition belt, and closes the ammunition
squad leader raises the rear sight and the gunner box. The gunner closes the top cover.
announces UP.
The squad leader releases the gun from the cradle.
The gunner lifts the gun off the mount and moves to a
5905. Taking the Gun Out of Action position 10 paces to the rear of the tripod, placing the
gun on the ground across his front, flash suppressor to
To take the gun out of action, the squad leader com- the left and top cover up. He then assumes the prone
mands OUT OF ACTION. position.
The gunner raises the top cover with his right hand; Once the gunner has moved away from the tripod, the
the squad leader lifts the ammunition out of the feed ammunition bearer, moves forward and kneels to the
5-44 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
The ammunition bearer returns to his original posi-

tion and assumes the prone position. The assistant
gunner places the tripod on the ground, assumes a
prone position to the right of the tripod, and
announces UP.
5906. Duties of Crew

To hand carry the gun and equipment, the squad
leader commands SECURE EQUIPMENT, FOL-
LOW ME. At this command, the gunner moves for-
ward toward the new position carrying the receiver on
either shoulder, spade grips to the front. The squad
leader carries the tripod over either shoulder and the
ammunition box in one of his hands. The ammunition
bearer carries his ammunition box in his left hand and
the cradle in his right hand.
5907. Carrying the Tripod-Mounted Gun

Figure 5-55. Inserting the First Round into the
Feeder. When the gun is mounted on the tripod, it can be moved
for short distances by dragging, or by a two- or three-
man carry. (In the two- or three-man carry, men should
left of the tripod. The squad leader removes the cra- move in step to make carrying easier.) These proce-
dle and gives it to the ammunition bearer. The ammu- dures are similar to those used with the M2 .50 cal.
nition bearer takes the cradle in his right hand, picks
up the front ammunition box with his left hand, and a. Dragging. The gun is dragged when limited cover
moves to his original position. He lays the cradle on or the situation requires the gun to be moved in this
the ground to his right, the front of the cradle for- manner. The team gunner and squad leader drag the
ward, pintle and T&E mechanism outboard; he places mounted gun to the desired position. See figure 4-101.
the ammunition can on the ground to his left, latch to b. Two-Man Carry. With the gunner on the right
the front. He remains standing. and squad leader on the left, each grasps the front leg
The squad leader assumes a kneeling position behind with his forward hand and a trail leg with the other
the tripod and releases the sleeve lock latch with his hand, just above the traversing bar. See figure 4-102.
right hand. He rises to his feet, grasps the front leg c. Three-Man Carry. The gunner is behind the tri-
with his left hand, and rotates the tripod to a vertical pod with a trail leg in each hand. The squad leader is
position on the trail legs. With his right hand, he loos- on the left and the ammunition bearer on the right.
ens the front leg clamp, folds down the front leg, and Each grasps the front leg. In addition, the squad leader
then tightens the clamp. With his right hand on the tri- and ammunition bearer each carry an ammunition box
pod head, he rotates the tripod on the right trail leg, in their free hand. See figure 4-103.
releases the sleeve latch, and folds the left trail leg
against the right with his left hand (see figure 4-100).
Holding the tripod head with his right hand, trail legs 5908. Marksmanship Training and
with his left, he lifts the tripod across the front of his Qualification Firing
body with the front leg up. He turns to the right and
returns to his original position. The principles discussed in chapter 4, section 10,
Qualification Firing, are applicable to the MK-19 as
At this time, the ammunition bearer comes forward, well as the M2 .50 cal. The exercises and other infor-
picks up the remaining ammunition box, and places it mation provided there should be used in training
to the right of the assistant gunner, latch to the front. Marines with either weapon.
Chapter 6
EMPLOYMENT AND GUNNERY

“...there was little to stop the Japanese from moving farther west and spreading out over all of Wilkes Island
unless fire from machine-guns 9 and 10 could aid the main defense line to keep the enemy bottled up around
the abandoned 3-inch guns. Gun 9 was already delivering flankng fire against these Japanese, and the enemy
advance was temporarily checked. The Takano troops now turned their attackes to knock out htis machine gun,
but its position was well prepared and well camouflaged. Although nearly surrounded, the Marines on this gun
continued to hold and repel attacks which kept up until dawn.”
—Machine gun position number 9, Wilkes Island,

22 and 23 December 194110
World War II, Iwo Jima

Marine Machine Gun Team Fires on Japanese Positions
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6-2 MCWP 3-15.1
Table of Contents
Section 1. Introduction Section 8. Overhead Fires
6101 Employment Considerations 6801 Rules
6102 Sequence of Training 6802 Use of Binocular in Applying Safety Rules
6803 Troop Safety Zones
Section 2. Characteristics of Fire
6201 Trajectory Section 9. Techniques of Predetermined Fire
6202 Burst of Fire 6901 Methods of Laying the Machine Gun
6203 Cone of Fire 6902 M2 Compass Method
6204 Beaten Zone 6903 Using the T&E Mechanism
6205 Dead Space
6206 Danger Space Section 10. Final Protective Lines
61001 Sectors of Fire
Section 3. Classes of Fire 61002 Methods of Laying Final Protective Lines
6301 Classes of Fire with Respect to the Ground 61003 Rates of Fire on the Final Protective Line
6302 Classes of Fire with Respect to the Target 61004 Laying the Gun for a Principal Direction of Fire
6303 Classes of Fire with Respect to the Gun
Section 11. Range Cards
Section 4. Range Determination 61101 Orientation
6401 Methods of Range Determination 61102 Recording Information
6402 Lateral Distance Measurement
Section 12. Firing From Defilade Position
Section 5. Traversing and Elevating Mechanism 61201 Defilade Position
6501 Traversing Bar and T&E Mechanism Method 61202 Selecting a Firing Position
61203 Laying the Gun for Direction
Section 6. Fire Control 61204 Laying the Gun for Elevation
6601 Chain of Fire Control 61205 Determining Mask Clearance
6602 Sectors of Fire 61206 Adjustment of Fire
6603 Rates of Fire 61207 Constructing a Terrain Profile
6604 Adjustment of Fire
6605 Fire Commands Section 13. Machine Gunner's Mathematics
61301 The Mil (A Unit of Angular Measure)
Section 7. Methods of Target Engagement 61302 The Mil Formula (WERM Formula)
6701 Distribution of Fire
6702 Point Targets Section 14. Antiaircraft Gunnery
6703 Wide Targets 61401 Employment
6704 Deep Targets 61402 Target Course Definitions
6705 Oblique Targets 61403 Requirements for a Hit
6706 Area Targets 61404 Lead
6707 Moving Targets 61405 Target Engagement
61406 Tracer Observation
____________________________________________________________________
Section 15. Firing Positions Section 16. Wire Communication

61501 T-Shaped Position 61601 Equipment
61502 Horseshoe-Shaped Position 61602 Installing a Field Wire Loop
61503 Two-Hole Position
List of Figures
6-1 Trajectory 6-29 Elevation Reading
6-2 Cone of Fire 6-30 Firing for Effect on a Predetermined Target
6-3 Effective Beaten Zone 6-31 Field Expedient—Base Stake Method
6-4 Effect of Ground Slopes on the Beaten Zone 6-32 Field Expedient—Aiming Stake Method
6-5 Effect of Range on Beaten Zone 6-33 Field Expedient—Horizontal Log Method
(Example Shown for the M240G) 6-34 Field Expedient—Notched Stake Method
6-6 Danger Space and Dead Space 6-35 View Through Binocular; Use of Auxiliary
6-7 Grazing Fire Aiming Point
6-8 Plunging and Grazing Fire 6-36 Method of Laying When the Ground is Level
6-9 Classes of Fire With Respect to the Target or Uniformly Sloping
6-10 Classes of Fire With Respect to the Gun 6-37 Method of Laying When There is a Break
6-11 Estimating Angles in Mils With the Hand in the Uniform Slope (For Ranges Less
6-12 Traversing Bar and T&E Mechanism Than 600 Meters)
(T&E Reading of L5-50/3) 6-38 Dead Space
6-13 Traversing Method, Using a Squad of Guns, 6-39 Standard Range Card Form
Both Flanks Visible to the Gunners 6-40 Range Card With a Principal Direction of Fire
6-14 Traversing Method, Using a Squad of Guns. 6-41 Minimum and Maximum Position Defilade,
Target for Heavy Machine Gun More than Partial Defilade, and Direct Lay Areas
100 Mils in Width (Medium Machine Gun 6-42 Aiming Point Method
More Than 50 Mils) 6-43 Map and Compass Method
6-15 Traversing Method Using a 6-44 Angles of Elevation, Angle of Site, and
Section (Minus) of Guns. Target More Quadrant Elevation
Than 100 Mils in Width (Each Squad of Guns 6-45 Profile Example
Covers the Entire Target) 6-46 Profile Line (Map Contour Interval is 10 Feet)
6-16 Traversing Method, Using a Squad of Guns; 6-47 Marking of Elevation
Both Flanks Invisible to the Gunners 6-48 Terrain Profiling
6-17 Engaging a Deep Enfilade Target With a Pair 6-49 Sample Terrain Profile
of Guns, Ends Visible to Gunners 6-50 The Mil
6-18 Squad of Guns Engaging a Shallow or 6-51 Estimating Distance Between Two Objects
Oblique Target 6-52 Estimating Mask Clearance
6-19 Sample Figure Command 6-53 Estimating Range Using Known Width
6-20 Vehicle Lead Table 6-54 March Column with Four M2
6-21 Moving Target Aiming Points .50 Cals (Added)
6-22 Componenets of Minimum Clearance 6-55 Diagram Showing Midpoint, Approaching
6-23 Theory Behind the Gunner’s and Leg, and Receding Leg
Leader’s Rule 6-56 Target Course Names
6-24 Application of the Gunner’s and 6-57 Lead Angle, Moving Ground Target
Leader’s Rules 6-58 Lead Angle, Aerial Target
6-25 Gunner’s Rule 6-59 Midpoint Leads
6-26 Leader’s Rule 6-60 Amount of Lead Necessary for Various
6-27 M240G Gunner’s and Leader’s Rule Data Angles of Approach
6-28 Direction Reading 6-61 Superimposition
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6-4 MCWP 3-15.1
6-62 Illusion of Curvature 6-68 Firing Secondary Sector

6-63 Localized Vision 6-69 Digging T-Shaped Position
6-64 Line and Lead Information, Based on 6-70 No Secondary Section (L-Shaped Position)
Tracer Sensings 6-71 Horseshoe-Shaped Machine Gun Position
6-65 Off-Line Tracer Sensings for Incoming, 6-72 Two-Hole Machine Gun Position
Outgoing, Directly at the Gun, and Very 6-73 Installation of the Wire Loop
Steep Diving Course 6-74 Connection of the Wire Loop
6-66 A Hit 6-75 Connection of Other Telephones to the
6-67 T-Shaped Position; Firing Primary Sector Wire Loop
Chapter 6
Employment and Gunnery

● Firing from position defilade.
Section 1
Machine gunner’s mathematics.
Introduction ●
● Firing positions.
Technique of fire is the method of delivering and con-
trolling effective fire. Each member of the machine This chapter discusses the above subjects, which
gun crew must be trained in the standard methods of apply to all phases of techniques of fire and all
applying fire, both as a crew member and as a gun- machine guns.
ner, and he must perform his assigned task automati-
cally and effectively.
6101. Employment Considerations
The simplest and most effective technique of deliver-
ing fire with the machine gun, mounted on its ground To be most effective, a machine gun should be
or vehicular mounts, is to align the sights of the gun on employed from a tripod mount on the ground, using a
the target and properly apply fire. This technique of fire traversing and elevating (T&E) mechanism. While a
is called direct laying. At times, techniques of fire other machine gun may be employed from a vehicle mount
than direct laying are more appropriate and effective. while on the move, this lessens the accuracy of fire
When delivering overhead fire and fire from position and generally decreases the survivability of the vehi-
defilade, the gunner must use the appropriate tech- cle and personnel. When the gun must be employed
niques described in sections 7 and 11 of this chapter. from a vehicle, the leader seeks a firing position that
provides the greatest possible degree of cover for the
Before the machine gun can be employed to the best vehicle and crew. Crews should be trained to remove
advantage using any firing technique, certain funda- the gun from the vehicle mount and employ it from a
mentals must be understood and applied. These tripod even during temporary halts. Mounting and dis-
include— mounting drills should be standardized and practiced
regularly. Machine guns have capabilities and limita-
● Characteristics of fire. tions just as any weapon system does. Machine guns,
● Classes of fire. though powerful weapons, do not stand alone. They
● Range determination. are most effectively employed in concert with other
● Fire control and fire commands. weapons in an attempt to achieve a synergistic effect
where the fires of one weapon compliment or aug-
● Target designation.
ment the fires of another. The capabilities and limita-
● Methods of engaging targets. tions of every available weapon must be considered in
● Overhead fire. order to achieve this in a tactical plan.
● Predetermined fire. a. The Squad Automatic Weapon. Some exam-
● Final protective fires. ples of employment options using the squad automatic
● Range cards. weapon (SAW) are as follows:
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6-6 MCWP 3-15.1
(1) Offense. In the offense, the SAW can augment a equipment is to be engaged as well as personnel, or
base of fire, adding their high volume of fire to help for some other compelling reason which the com-
suppress and destroy enemy personnel on an objec- mander or unit leader decides is critical to the success
tive. The SAW can also move with assault elements of the mission. Short of situations such as those,
adding considerable firepower in the assault and SAWs may provide all the fire power to a squad or
immediately upon consolidation on the objective. This platoon sized ambush patrol that is needed.
frees the medium machine gun teams/squads to be
b. The M240G. The M240G, as the Corps’ medium
more effectively employed in a base of fire rather than
trying to keep up with the assault, which can severely machine gun, provides a high volume of accurate fire
limit their ability to effectively engage targets. beyond the range capabilities of other small arms found
in the rifle company. It is best employed tripod mounted.
(2) Defense.In the defense, the SAW can augment Tripod mounting the gun provides the most accurate
the final protective line (FPL) and principal direction means of delivering fire, especially at maximum effec-
of fire (PDF) of machine guns, or they can cover dead tive range, and use of the T&E mechanism allows preci-
space in those FPLs with direct fire. SAWs can also sion manipulation of that fire. It can be employed from
be assigned their own PDFs to cover likely avenues of the bipod but this should be done only in hasty situations,
approach or other priority targets areas. The SAW’s such as chance contact, or as a last resort when some sig-
lighter weight and easier portability (in comparison to nificant problem prevents the use of the tripod. Other
medium or heavy machine guns) make it well suited employment considerations include—
for ambush patrols because of the need for speed of
movement and stealth in those operations. More (1) Offense. In the offense the preferred method for
important, however, is the weapon’s capability for a employing the M240G is by section from a base(s) of
high volume of accurate fire. The fire power provided fire from which the guns can mass their fires in a con-
by two or three SAWs can be devastating against per- tinuous, accurate, heavy volume that will produce a
sonnel caught in an ambush’s kill zone. telling effect against enemy personnel and equip-
ment. The weight of massed medium machine gun
In the past, when small units lacked a weapon with fire is significant and must not be underestimated. The
the capabilities of the SAW, medium machine guns goal is to mass the fires of the guns, not the guns
were considered essential to the conduct of a squad- themselves. The principles of dispersion, employ-
or platoon-sized ambush, ensuring success through ment in pairs, and cover and concealment need not be
their high volume of accurate fire. In some cases violated to achieve the massing of machine gun fire.
machine guns may still be critical to success in an An observer(s) should be used to direct and adjust the
ambush, but unit leaders should carefully consider the fires whenever possible so that the guns can be posi-
mission of the ambush patrol before arbitrarily assign- tioned in defilade for greater protection. Although
ing machine guns to it. Medium machine guns have to employing medium machine guns in smaller ele-
be pulled out of the defense to go along on ambush ments down to squad size is an option in the offense
patrols. This can weaken part of the defense for the (primarily through attachment to subordinate ele-
duration that the patrol is out. Even if guns for ments), employing them in this manner should be
ambush patrols can be obtained from units in the carefully considered and used reluctantly. Used in this
reserve or elsewhere, someone’s fire power in the manner their fires tend to be added in a more piece-
main defense is usually diminished to accommodate meal fashion, with reduced effect, as compared to the
the patrol. Medium or even heavy machine guns may weight of fire that can be introduced by the section as
be needed for an ambush in situations such as when a whole. During movement to contact, the guns can be
fixed fire from a tripod-mounted weapon using a T&E used to over watch a unit’s movement especially
is considered crucial to the successful engagement of when negotiating terrain that impedes mobility such
targets in the ambush, or when vehicles or other as crossing streams or steep draws. In difficult terrain
____________________________________________________________________
guns can also over watch from a moving unit’s flanks, same organization, as in the heavy machine gun pla-
advancing by bounds with one squad always in posi- toon, weapons company of the infantry battalion.
tion to fire. Security for the guns must be a matter of Tables of organization do not dedicate sufficient per-
priority in these instances. In chance contact, the force sonnel to simultaneously operate both weapons pro-
that establishes fire superiority first and then exploits vided by tables of equipment. Consequently, the
it with a rapid assault, most often prevails. When con- commander must decide what mix of heavy machine
tact is initiated, machine gunners must move rapidly guns to employ. The commander considers the fol-
in the direction of enemy contact, searching for posi- lowing issues when making his decision.
tions that will allow them to quickly add the weight of
(1) Effect against armor. The MK-19, with its high
their fires against the enemy.
explosive dual-purpose round, is effective against
(2) Defense. In the defense, once again, the machine light armor. It will penetrate 2 inches of homogeneous
gun section should be employed as a whole in general steel with 0 degrees obliquity out to 2,200 meters. It
support of the overall unit. The fires of the machine should be noted, however, that it is difficult to effec-
gun section are controlled by the unit leader, such as tively engage moving vehicles with the MK-19
the rifle company commander, who is advised by the because its 40mm ammunition has a high angle of tra-
machine gun section leader and weapons platoon jectory, slow time of flight, and can suffer adverse
commander. Whenever grazing fire can be attained, aerodynamics (drift), that becomes especially pro-
the M240G should be assigned the mission of firing nounced at ranges greater than 1,000 meters (see
an FPL. The guns should generally be positioned on table 1 in appendix C). The M2 .50 cal, when firing
the flanks with interlocking FPLs and sectors of fire the sabot light armor penetrator (SLAP) round, is
across the unit’s front. All dead space in an FPL highly effective against light armor targets out to
should be covered by other weapons systems. When ranges up to 1,500 meters. At that range the SLAP
terrain or mission prevent the effective use of an FPL round will penetrate 3/4 of an inch of steel armor at 0
then a PDF will be assigned to M240Gs. PDFs are degrees obliquity. The M2 .50 cal can be effectively
typically designed to cover likely avenues of approach employed against moving vehicles.
or areas where the enemy may mass. Often a mix of
FPLs and PDFs will be assigned to a section of guns (2) Effect against personnel. The MK-19’s high
in the defense in order to best cover the frontage; explosive or high explosive, dual-purpose round make
however, only one mission, either an FPL or PDF, it very effective against personnel, with an effective
should be assigned per gun squad. The M240G can be casualty radius of 15 meters. The M2 .50 cal is also an
employed from defilade firing positions and can effective weapon against personnel because of its high
effectively engage in indirect fire. See section 13, in volume of fire and 700 meters of grazing fire. These
this chapter, for information on firing from position characteristics make the M2 .50 cal well suited for the
defilade, appendix A for the pertinent firing tables and assignment of an in the defense against infantry attack.
appendix H for information on firing and adjusting
(3) In the defense. The MK-19, with its high trajec-
indirect machine gun fires.
tory, is not suitable for an FPL in the defense and
c. The M2 .50 Cal and MK-19. These heavy should normally be assigned a PDF to cover an ave-
machine guns provide high volumes of accurate fire at nue of approach, an obstacle, a defile, a choke point,
ranges beyond the capabilities of small arms, and or dead space in the FPL of a flatter trajectory
medium machine guns. The lethality of their ammuni- weapon. The M2 .50 cal, however, can be assigned
tion make them ideal for engaging troop concentra- either an FPL or PDF to good effect. Depending on
tions, lightly armored vehicles, other vehicles, the protection and mobility of the enemy, vehicle-
fortified positions, aircraft, and other equipment. The mounted heavy machine guns may be included in a
MK-19 and the M2 .50 cal are often located in the counter attack force. Heavy machine guns may be
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
6-8 MCWP 3-15.1
employed with anti-armor weapons and other ele- (7) Indirect firing and fire from defilade. Because of
ments in task organized combined antiarmor teams its high trajectory compared to most machine guns,
(CAAT) with missions assigned such as; conducting the MK-19 can effectively employ indirect fire
anti-armor ambushes forward of the forward edge of against some defilade enemy positions. It can also be
the battle area (FEBA), supporting a combat outpost, employed very effectively from defilade firing posi-
or reinforcing a counter attack force. tions. Indirect firing requires that the guns be laid for
deflection on some reference point other than the tar-
(4) In the offense. The mix of heavy machine guns get and that there be an observer in communication
employed in the offense depends on the nature of the with the guns who can adjust rounds on the target. For
enemy—especially the type and degree of protec- example, using observation posts on the military crest
tion—and the terrain and vegetation. Some guns may to adjust rounds, the MK-19 can be employed effec-
need to remain mounted in order to keep up with an tively in a reverse-slope defense to engage the
attack, such as with a mechanized unit, or if mobility advancing enemy on the forward slope. The M2 .50
is not an issue the unit leader may want to dismount cal can also be employed from defilade firing posi-
them in a base of fire in order to take advantage of the tions and can effectively engage in indirect fire. With
added accuracy of tripod-mounted guns. The CAATs the M2 .50 cal, proper use of firing tables and indirect
mentioned above can be very useful in the offense fire techniques can yield effective fire against targets
also. In this role they can act as a motorized scout ele- at considerably greater distances than the listed maxi-
ment that seeks to find and maintain contact with the mum effective range of the weapon. (See section 13
enemy while the unit’s main body maneuvers to of this chapter, for information on firing from position
engage, or they can conduct a route reconnaissance defilade, appendices B and C for the pertinent firing
and provide reports about the trafficability of a unit’s tables, and appendix H for information on firing and
planned route of march. A CAAT, creatively task adjusting indirect machine gun fires.)
organized with a mix of heavy machine guns, anti-
armor weapons, engineers, forward observers, etc., (8) Complementary effects. The high angle of fire of
can be an effective independent maneuver element the MK-19 and the flatter trajectory of the M2 can be
whose capabilities add flexibility to an offensive plan. employed effectively in tandem in many situations,
the characteristics of one complementing the other.
(5) The M2 .50 cal has limited
Effect against aircraft.
For example, the M2 .50 cal can be used to pin the
effectiveness against aircraft. The most effective cali- enemy down while the MK-19 is used to drop high
ber .50 ammunition to engage aircraft with are: armor explosive (HE) or high explosive dual purpose
piercing, armor piercing incendiary, and SLAP. While (HEDP) on top of the enemy.
the MK-19’s fragmentation producing ammunition
could be effective against stationary aircraft, such as
helicopters in a landing zone, the ammunition’s slow 6102. Sequence of Training
time of flight make the weapon ineffective against
Mechanical training, gun drill, and marksmanship are
moving aircraft.
completed before training in technique of fire. Some
(6) Effect of firing through vegetation. The M2 .50 training in range estimation by eye and characteristics
cal can be employed effectively through light vegeta- of machine gun fire are necessary before conducting
tion, while the 40mm round fired from the MK-19 range practice; however, training in machine gun
may detonate prematurely when fired through the marksmanship is a prerequisite to instruction in tech-
same vegetation. nique of fire.
____________________________________________________________________
the air, the projectile begins to fall, following a curved

Section 2 path until it intersects the line of aim again at the tar-
Characteristics of Fire get. The curved path followed by the projectile is
called the trajectory (see figure 6-1). The farther the
The gunner’s knowledge of the machine gun cannot bullet travels, the greater the curvature of this path.
be complete until he learns something of the action The highest point on the trajectory (maximum ordi-
and effect of the projectiles when fired. This section nate) is a point approximately two-thirds of the range
discusses various characteristics of machine gun fire, from the gun to the target.
including trajectory, cone of fire, and beaten zone.
6202. Burst of Fire
6201. Trajectory
The number of shots in a burst of fire is limited by
The trajectory, or path of a projectile through the air, several factors, including the size and shape of the tar-
is influenced by several factors. The major factors get, ground formation, and ammunition supply. For
influencing the trajectory are the velocity of the bul- normal ground targets, the number of rounds in each
let, the gravity of the earth, the rotation of the bullet, burst varies from about 6 to 20 for the heavy machine
and the resistance of the air. To overcome the influ- gun, and from 6 to 12 for the medium machine gun.
ence of these factors, it is necessary to elevate the
bore above a straight line from the muzzle of the gun 6203. Cone of Fire
to the target. The amount of elevation for any given
range is automatically provided by the graduations on When a burst is fired, the vibrations of the gun and tri-
the rear sight of a rifle or machine gun. Because of pod, variations in ammunition, and conditions of the
this elevation of the axis of the bore, the projectile, atmosphere give each bullet a trajectory differing
when it leaves the muzzle, does not travel in a straight slightly from that of the others. The resulting group of
line to the target. It starts on the prolongation of the trajec-tories is known as the cone of fire (see figure 6-
axis of the bore and rises above the line of aim. Then, 2). For the M240G, at ranges up to 700 meters over
under the influence of gravity, and the resistance of level or uniformly sloping ground, the lower bound of
Figure 6-1. Trajectory.

6-10 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 6-2. Cone of Fire.
the cone of fire does not rise above the height of a of fall of the bursts. On rising ground, the length of
standing man (1.8 meters). With each increase in ele- the pattern is shortened. The minimum length occurs
vation of the gun, there is a further rise of the cone where the slope of the ground is perpendicular to the
above the ground. cone of fire at the point of impact. See figure 6-4.
b. Effect of Range. As the range increases, the
6204. Beaten Zone beaten zone becomes shorter and wider. The beaten
zone remains 2 mils wide at any range. See figure 6-5.
The beaten zone is the area on the ground upon which
the cone of fire falls. c. Center of Impact. The center of the beaten zone
is called the center of impact (see figure 6-3). It has
a. Effect of Slope of Ground. When the cone of been found that 82 percent of the shots are uniformly
fire falls on level ground which is at the same height grouped around the center of impact. These comprise
as the gun, the lengths of the beaten zone are as the effective beaten zone. The remaining 18 percent of
shown in figure 6-3. The maximum length is obtained the shots are so scattered that they are considered to
when the slope of the ground approximates the angle be outside of the effective beaten zone.
Figure 6-3. Effective Beaten Zone.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-4. Effect of Ground Slopes on the Beaten Zone.
Figure 6-5. Effect of Range on Beaten Zone (Example Shown for the M240G).
6-12 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
6205. Dead Space danger space and the appropriate firing tables. See
appendix A, M240G Firing Tables or appendix B, M2
Dead space is an area within the maximum range of a .50 Cal Firing Tables.
weapon which cannot be covered by fire or observa-
tion from a particular position because of intervening Danger space should be considered along with graz-
obstacles, the nature of the ground, the characteristics ing fire in assigning an FPL mission to a gun. It must
of the trajectory, or the limitations of the pointing be remembered, however, that effective danger space
capabilities of the weapon. The identification of dead is based on the height of an average man standing
space in the FPL, a mission assigned to machine guns upright. Even over uniformly sloping terrain suffi-
in the defense, is particularly critical. Dead space in cient dead space can exist along the line of fire,
the FPL that is not covered by other weapons systems because of the characteristics of the trajectory, for the
could provide the enemy the opportunity to penetrate enemy to exploit by crouching down or crawling in
friendly lines. See figure 6-6, paragraphs 6206 and order to move under the fire. For example; for the
6301 and appendix G for more detail. M240G, the maximum dead space, in ideal condi-
tions on uniformly sloping ground, is 55 inches with
6206. Danger Space the weapon sighted at 700 meters. This maximum
dead space occurs at approximately 1/2 the range; 350
This is the area from the muzzle of the gun, out to and meters. A man running in a low crouch could get
including the beaten zone, where a standing man lower than 55 inches and therefore quickly move
(measured as 1.8 meters tall) will be hit, somewhere underneath the cone of fire in this example.
on his body, by some part of the cone of fire (see fig-
ure 6-6). When firing over flat or uniformly slopping
terrain at ranges less than 850 meters, the M240G’s
Section 3
trajectory does not rise above 1.8 meters. Beyond 850
Classes of Fire
meters the gun’s trajectory does rise more than 1.8
meters. This figure of 1.8 meters is used as an esti-
mate of the height of a standing man in tactical plan- Machine gun fire is classified with respect to–
ning. Danger space is an important tactical
consideration when planning the employment of ● The ground.
machine guns. The likelihood of enemy casualties can ● The target.
be estimated at various ranges by using the concept of ● The gun.
Figure 6-6. Danger Space and Dead Space.

___________________________________________________________________
6301. Classes of Fire with Respect amount of dead space in the trajectory of the cone of
to the Ground fire. For example; For the M240G, the maximum dead
space, in ideal conditions on uniformly sloping
a. Grazing Fire. Fire approximately parallel to the ground, is 31 inches for a weapon sighted at 600
ground where the center of the cone of fire does not meters. This maximum dead space occurs at approx-
rise above 1 meter. When firing over level or uni- imately 1/2 that range; 300 meters. A man would have
formly sloping terrain, the maximum extent of grazing to crawl in order to move underneath the cone of fire
fire obtainable for the M240G is approximately 580 in this example, significantly hampering the speed of
meters. This figure is rounded to 600 meters to sim- his advance. See figures 6-7 and 6-8 and appendix G
plify calculations in tactical planning and to accom- for more details.
modate the rear sights of the M240G which are
graduated in 100 meter increments. The maximum b. Plunging Fire. Fire in which the angle of fall of
extent of grazing fire obtainable for the M2 .50 cal is the rounds, with reference to the slope of the ground,
approximately 680 meters, rounded to 700 meters for is such that the danger space is practically confined to
the same reasons given for the M240G. On level or the beaten zone, and the length of the beaten zone is
uniformly sloping ground danger space exists along materially shortened. Plunging fire is obtained when
the entire range of grazing fire. Grazing fire is the pri- firing from high ground into low ground, when firing
mary consideration when assigning the mission of an from low ground into high ground, and when firing at
FPL to a machine gun, because it ensures a minimal long ranges. See figure 6-8.
Figure 6-7. Grazing Fire.

6-14 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 6-8. Plunging and Grazing Fire.
6302. Classes of Fire with Respect b. Traversing Fire. Fire distributed against a wide
to the Target target requiring successive changes in the direction of
the gun. When engaging a wide target requiring tra-
a. Frontal Fire. The long axis of the beaten zone is versing fire, the gunner should select successive aim-
at a right angle to the long axis of the target. See fig- ing points throughout the target area. These aiming
ure 6-9. points should be close enough together to ensure ade-
quate target coverage, but not so close as to be waste-
b. Flanking Fire. Delivered against the flank of a ful of ammunition by concentrating a heavy volume
target. See figure 6-9. of fire in a small area. See figure 6-10.
c. Oblique Fire. The long axis of the beaten zone c. Searching Fire. Fire distributed in depth by suc-
is at an angle, but not a right angle, to the long axis of cessive changes in the elevation of the gun. The
the target. See figure 6-9. amount of elevation change depends upon the range
and slope of the ground. See figure 6-10.
d. Enfilade Fire. The long axis of the beaten zone
coincides or nearly coincides with the long axis of the d. Traversing and Searching Fire. Fire delivered
target. This class of fire is either frontal or flanking both in width and depth by changes in direction and
and is the most desirable class of fire with respect to elevation. It is employed against a target whose long
the target, because it makes maximum use of the axis is oblique to the direction of the fire. See figure
beaten zone. See figure 6-9. 6-10.
e. Swinging Traverse. Employed against targets
6303. Classes of Fire with Respect to the which require major changes in direction but little or
Gun no change in elevation. Targets may be dense, of con-
siderable width, in relatively close formations mov-
a. Fixed Fire. Fire delivered on a point target. Lit- ing slowly toward or away from the gun, or vehicles
tle or no manipulation is required. After the initial or mounted troops moving across the front. The tra-
burst the gunner will follow any change or movement versing slide lock lever is loosened enough to permit
of the target without command. See figure 6-10. the gunner to swing the gun laterally. See figure 6-10.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-9. Classes of Fire With Respect to the Target.
f. Free Gun. Fire delivered against moving targets ples are aerial targets, vehicles, mounted troops, or
which must be quickly engaged and which require infantry in close formation moving rapidly toward or
rapid changes in both direction and elevation. Exam- away from the gun position.
6-16 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 6-10. Classes of Fire With Respect to the Gun.
other units. Ranges are determined to the nearest 100

Section 4 meters for machine gun firing. In combat, the most
Range Determination commonly used methods are estimating by eye and
observed fire.
Under combat conditions, ranges are seldom known in
advance. Also, damp ground or poor visibility often a. Estimating by Eye. Estimating by eye is the
make adjustment of fire by observation impossible. method most often used in the field. First, it is impor-
Under such conditions, the cone of fire may miss the tant to realize certain conditions affecting the appear-
target completely, although there is an error in range ance of objects. Light and terrain can sometimes
no greater than 100 meters. Therefore, correct range make objects seem much nearer or more distant than
determination is highly important for effective they really are. (Although, the effect of these condi-
machine gun fire. The maximum usable range is that tions on the appearance of objects within the first 100
amount of range visible to either the leader or gunner meters is negligible.) Whenever the appearance of
but still within the maximum effective range of the objects is used as a basis for range estimation, the
machine gun. observer makes allowances for the following effects.
Objects seem nearer when–

6401. Methods of Range Determination ● Object is in a bright light.
There are many methods for determining range. Some ● Color of the object contrasts sharply with the color
of these are estimating by eye, firing the gun, measur- of the background.
ing range from a map or aerial photograph, stepping ● Looking over water, snow, or a uniform surface
off the distance, or securing the information from like a wheat field.
___________________________________________________________________
● Looking from a height downward. meter unit up to that point, and multiply the estimated
● In the clear atmosphere of high altitudes. distance by 2.
● Looking over a depression most of which is hidden.
(2) An alternate method of estimation. Another
● Looking down a straight road or railroad track. method of estimating ranges is by memorizing the
appearance of objects, vegetation, and the amount of
Objects seem more distant when– detail that can be distinguished at a few key ranges.
● Looking over a depression, most of which is visi- By learning details that can be distinguished on the
ble. appearance of a man at 300, 500, 700, and 1,000
meters, a fairly reliable range estimation can be made
● There is poor light or fog.
when a man is in the vicinity of the target.
● Only a small part of the object can be seen.
● Looking from low ground toward higher ground. b. Observed Firing. In determining the range
using the observed fire technique, the gunner opens
In some cases, much of the ground between the fire on the target by the estimated range, moves the
observer and the target is hidden from view and the center of impact into the target by means of the T&E
application of the unit of measure to the hidden por- mechanism, resets the rear sight so that the line of aim
tion of the ground is impossible. In such cases, the is on the target, notes the sight setting on the rear
appearance of objects is the only guide. If there is a sight, and announces it as the range to the target. All
considerable stretch of visible ground extending from guns are then laid, and fire is opened on the unit
the flat edge of a depression to the target, it is best to leader’s command. To use this method, all guns are
estimate the distance to the far edge of the depres- zeroed previously so that the range determined for one
sion, judging by the appearance of objects, and then to gun may be used for the others.
apply the unit of measure over the remaining distance When the ground in the vicinity of the target permits
to the target. no observation of strike, or when it is desired to
obtain surprise, fire is adjusted on a point which does
There are two methods of estimating by eye; the 100-
offer observation and which is known to have the
meter unit of measure method and the appearance-of-
same range as the target. The gunner lays his gun on
objects method.
the target when ordered.
(1) 100-Meter unit of measure method. To use this When engaging targets in a tree or building, fire is
method, the gunner must be able to visualize a 100- adjusted on the ground at the foot of the tree or build-
meter distance on the ground. With this distance in ing where the strike of the bullets is visible. The range
mind, he can mentally determine how many of these thus determined is taken as the range to the target. The
100-meter units there are between his position and the gunner announces the range and elevates his gun until
target. In training, his estimates should be checked by it is laid on the target.
pacing off the distance. Familiarity with the 100-
meter unit and its appearance on different types of
6402. Lateral Distance Measurement
ground and at different distances enables the estimator
to apply it with relative accuracy. Application of the In addition to the ability to determine range accu-
unit of measure beyond 500 meters is difficult. For rately, the gunner needs a quick method of measur-
this reason, in ranges over 500 meters, it is better to ing lateral distance right or left from a reference
select a point halfway to the target, apply the 100- point to a target.
6-18 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
When the gun is mounted on the tripod, width can be this distance. General guidelines for mil equivalent
measured by aiming on a point and manipulating the can be found in figure 6-11.
traversing hand wheel, counting the clicks from one
point of aim to another point of aim. Each click equals
1 meter at 1,000 meters, or 1/2 meter at 500 meters. Section 5
This method is accurate but time consuming. Traversing and Elevating Mechanism
The finger measurement method is not a method of The T&E mechanism, when properly employed,
range determination but only a method of measuring enables the gunner to accurately engage targets dur-
the lateral distance (in fingers) between two points. ing periods of reduced visibility and fire from defilade
To measure the distance in fingers between a refer- positions, as well as to engage enemy positions
ence point and a target, extend the arm with the palm located on reverse slopes. By utilizing the T&E mech-
outward, the fingers cupped, and the elbow locked. anism, the machine gun is firmly locked into the
Close one eye, raise the index finger, and sight along desired position. The gunner can apply the data neces-
its edge, placing the edge of the finger along the flank sary to engage a desired target, shift to other targets,
of the target or reference point. Note the space and by reapplying the original data, the gunner can
remaining between the two points, and then fill this rapidly and accurately reengage the original target. In
space by raising fingers until the space is covered. addition, by calcu-lating and applying the quadrant
The measurement from the reference point to the tar- elevation, the gunner can engage targets from a defi-
get is then stated as being one or more fingers, lade position and fire on enemy positions on reverse
depending on how many fingers are raised to cover slopes (see section 12, chapter 6). The information
Figure 6-11. Estimating Angles in Mils With the Hand.

___________________________________________________________________
contained in this section pertains to the use of the mary sector of fire with the exception of the FPL.
T&E mechanism for all of the machine guns dis- The FPL needs no direction reading since the tra-
cussed in this manual. versing slide is positioned to the extreme right or left
of the traversing bar. To obtain direction readings to
6501. Traversing Bar and T&E Mechanism targets other than the FPL, loosen the traversing
Method slide lock lever and slide the traversing bar slide
along the traversing bar until the gun is laid on the
Direction and elevation readings constitute the data center of a point target and on either flank of a lin-
necessary to engage preselected target areas during ear target. Lock the traversing bar and read the direc-
periods of limited visibility. These readings are mea- tion reading from the scale on the traversing bar (see
sured by and recorded from the traversing bar and T&E figure 6-12). If the left edge of the traversing slide
mechanism. All measurements are recorded in mils. does not fall exactly on a 5-mil graduation (tick-
mark), move the left edge of the traversing bar slide
a. Preliminary Steps
back to the next smaller graduation, and use the tra-
(1) Positioning the traversing mechanism. Turn the versing hand wheel to complete the initial lay. This
traversing hand wheel toward your body as far as it technique will keep the muzzle of the gun moving in
will go, then turn it away two complete revolutions. the same direction when laying on a target.
Check the traversing hand wheel scale to ensure the 0
For example, in laying the gun on target, the gunner
on the scale is lined up with the 0 index line before
finds that the left edge of the traversing bar slide falls
and after the two revolutions. The traversing mecha-
between the LEFT 300 and LEFT 305 gradua-tions on
nism can be positioned at night by turning the travers-
the traversing bar. He moves the left edge of the tra-
ing hand wheel toward your body as far as it will go,
versing bar slide back to the LEFT 300 graduations
and then turning it away 50 clicks (two revolutions).
and pulls on the traversing hand wheel to center the
(2) Laying the gun for direction. To lay the gun for gun on target. Assuming he traversed LEFT 3 mils
direction when an FPL has been assigned, lock the (clicks) with the traversing hand wheel, his direction
traversing slide on that end of the traversing bar reading is LEFT 303 (LEFT 300 on the traversing bar
which is opposite to the direction of the FPL. Pick up plus LEFT 3 on the traversing hand wheel). Had he
the rear legs of the tripod and shift the tripod until the initially moved the traversing bar slide to the LEFT
muzzle of the gun points along the FPL. If an FPL has 305 graduation, he would have had to push the tra-
not been assigned, the gun will be laid for direction on versing hand wheel (i.e., move the muzzle to the
the center of the primary sector. In this case, lock the right) 2 mils to center on the same target. In this case
left edge of the traversing slide on the 0 graduation on he would have to subtract the hand wheel reading of
the traversing bar. The left edge of the traversing bar RIGHT 2 from his traversing bar reading of LEFT
slide is always used as the index. Pick up the rear legs 305 in order to obtain the proper direction reading of
of the tripod and shift the tripod until the muzzle of LEFT 303. The technique of moving the traversing
the gun is laid on the center of sector. Once the gun is bar slide to the next smaller graduation provides for
laid for direction, emplace the tripod firmly by dig- greater simplicity and consistency.
ging in the tripod shoes or by placing sandbags on the
tripod legs. This is done to ensure greater stability and NOTE
prevent accidental movement of the tripod.
When the traversing hand wheel is used to lay
b. Direction Direction readings are
Readings. on a target, it must be reset to zero before laying
obtained and recorded to all targets within the pri- on another target.
6-20 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 6-12. Traversing Bar and T&E Mechanism (T&E Reading of L5-50/3).
When the left edge of the traversing slide is on a grad- is obtained before moving to another target. To
uation to the left of 0 graduation on the traversing bar, obtain this reading, the gun is laid on the base of
the direction reading is recorded as LEFT that num- the target.
ber of mils (the muzzle of the weapon moves to the
left). After taking a direction reading of a linear target, The elevation reading is obtained from two scales.
the width of the target is measured in mils by travers- The first portion of the reading is taken from the
ing across the target using the traversing hand wheel. engraved scale on the upper elevating screw plate.
The traversing mechanism must be repositioned The second portion is taken from the engraved scale
before moving to another target. on the top of the elevating hand wheel, using the indi-
cator as the index (see figure 6-12). The two portions
c. Elevation Readings. After obtaining the of the elevation reading are separated by a slash (/)
direction reading to a target, an elevation reading when they are recorded.
___________________________________________________________________
The engraved scale on the upper elevating screw plate Range determination is critical, because any discrep-
is graduated in 50-mil increments from -200 mils to ancy will cause an error in the elevation when the tar-
+200 mils. There is an index line below each number get is engaged. The dry-fire method of obtaining data
and a PLUS or MINUS sign above each number, with is used only when firing is not possible or when the
the exception of the 0 (see figure 6-12). The zero situation is such that firing would disclose the position
reading has no sign. In obtaining the elevation read- of the gun. To check the elevation, refer to the appro-
ing, the gunner should lower his head until his eyes priate firing tables. See appendices A, B, and C.
are on line with the top of the elevating hand wheel.
The first portion of the reading is the number and plus
or minus sign above the first visible index line. As in Section 6
figure 6-10, this would be a -50 reading. The scale on Fire Control
the elevating hand wheel is graduated in 1-mil incre-
ments for a total of 50 mils. Locate the graduation on Fire control of machine guns includes all operations
line with the indicator (see figure 6-10). The entire connected with the preparation and actual application
reading is recorded as -50/3. of fire to a target. It implies the ability of the leader to
An elevation reading is valid on only one mecha- open fire at the instant he desires, adjust the fire of his
nism. If data are placed on another mechanism using guns upon the target, regulate the rate of fire, shift fire
the same mount and gun, the data could be inaccu- from one target to another, and cease firing. The abil-
rate. The number of threads exposed on the lower ity to exercise correct fire control depends primarily
elevation screw must remain the same both when on the discipline and correct technical training of the
obtaining and using data (see figure 6-12). If the gun crew. Failure to exercise correct fire control
number of threads is increased or decreased after the results in danger to friendly troops, loss of surprise
data are recorded, accurate fire cannot be placed on effect, premature disclosure of position, misapplica-
the target. For example, when a gun is freed to tion of fire on unimportant targets, loss of time in
engage a secondary sector, should the base of the securing adjustments, and waste of ammunition.
T&E mechanism rotate, the data are only correct if
the gunner ensures that the same number of exposed 6601. Chain of Fire Control
threads is replaced on the mechanism. To replace the
elevation reading of -50/3 on the T&E mechanism, The chain of fire control follows the chain of com-
manipulate the elevating hand wheel until the hori- mand. Fire control of the machine gun fire unit is exe-
zontal line below -50 is visible at eye level, with the cuted by the section and squad leaders.
hand wheel indicator on 3. a. Weapons Platoon Leader. Usually the platoon
(1) Elevation reading by firing. To ensure a correct leaders give their instructions orally and directly to
elevation reading to a target, the gunner should fire the section leaders. These orders assign a mission to
and adjust on this target. the section (or squad), or give the firing position area
the section (or squad) occupies and the targets it
(2) Elevation reading without firing. Data may be engages, or the sector of fire it covers, and the exact
obtained on targets without firing and adjusting as location of friendly troops that may be endangered by
mentioned in the preceding paragraph. This is accom- the fire of the section. Frequently, the technique used
plished using the dry-fire method of laying the gun. In in engaging targets is prescribed. The section leaders
using this method, the range to the target is deter- (or squad leaders) may be assembled for this purpose,
mined by eye; this range is placed on the rear sight or the platoon leader may go to the section leader (or
and the gun is laid on the center base of the target. squad leaders) and give them individual orders. With
The direction and elevation readings are then taken. the section (or squads) widely separated as they may
6-22 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
be in a defensive situation, the platoon leader may wise ordered, the first few bursts are at the rapid rate;
send written instructions to the section (or squad) thereafter, the prescribed rate is used.
leaders. He is rarely able to issue fire commands
orally, especially after firing has begun. 6604. Adjustment of Fire
b. Section Leader. The machine gun section
Fire is adjusted by observation of strike, observation of
leader in the weapons platoon is responsible for both tracers, and frequently relaying or checking the aim.
the tactical and technical employment of his section.
It is his responsibility to pass on to his squads the a. Initial Adjustment of Fire. The gunner sets his
information received from the platoon leader as to the sights with the range to the target, lays on the target,
firing position area, targets to be engaged, sector of fires an aimed burst, and observes the strike or tracer.
fire, friendly troops who may be endangered by fire of When the initial burst is correct, he continues to fire
the section, and fire adjustment of the section. (manipulating if necessary) until the target is covered.
c. Squad Leader. The squad leader carries out the (1) Firing from the tripod. When the initial burst is
instructions of the section or platoon leader. He is not correctly placed, the gunner determines from the
responsible for fire control and fire discipline within strike or tracer the amount of traverse and search
his squad. The squad leader concentrates on the obser- required to place the next burst on the target and
vation and adjustment of fire. Besides assisting in the manipulates the gun accordingly with the T&E hand-
service of the gun, the number 2 man (ammo man) wheels. He makes large range corrections by resetting
watches the squad, section, or platoon leader for sig- the sights and relaying on the target.
nals; he cannot do this if he observes the fire. The (2) Firing from the bipod. When the initial burst is not
number 2 man transmits all commands to the gunner correctly placed, the gunner may either change the ele-
or the squad leader. The squad leader is responsible vation and windage on the sights, or he may select a
for picking the exact firing position. new aiming point to place the next burst on the target.
He adjusts body position for small correction in eleva-
6602. Sectors of Fire tion and deflection. He makes larger range corrections
by resetting the sights and relaying on the target.
A sector of fire is a section of terrain designated by
specific boundaries and covered by fire by the unit to b. Subsequent Corrections and Adjustments.
which it is assigned. Sectors of fire vary in size but Observation and adjustment of fire is the most impor-
are generally limited to the area which can be engaged tant element of fire control. It is continuous through-
without moving the tripod, when the machine gun is out the action. The gunner is trained to observe and
so mounted. adjust his own fire without command and to check his
laying frequently. He is trained to anticipate the action
6603. Rates of Fire of the enemy after fire is open, and to shift his fire to
cover any changes in the formation or location of his
The greatest surprise and shock effect is obtained by target. If the gunner fails to do these things, the squad
combining the maximum rate of fire with the simulta- leader promptly corrects him by announcing or signal-
neous opening of fire of all guns for at least the first ing subsequent fire commands. This responsibility to
few bursts. Fleeting targets are engaged as soon as adjust fire continues through the chain of command to
possible and with the maximum fire available. The the platoon leader. When subsequent fire commands
initial delivery of fire using the rapid rate facilitates are issued, the gunner makes the required corrections
adjustment of fire. When the rate of fire is not speci- or adjustments and continues to engage the target
fied, the rapid rate is used. In all cases, unless other- without further command to fire.
___________________________________________________________________
(1) Firing from the tripod. When firing the gun on the a. Initial Fire Commands. The elements contained
tripod, subsequent commands are given as correc- in the initial fire command are identical to those uti-
tions in elevation and/or deflection at which the last lized for the infantry unit leader. The acronym
burst was fired. These corrections are habitually given ADDRAC can be utilized to remember the elements.
in mils and are announced or signaled as: ADD,
DROP, RIGHT, or LEFT so many mils. Changes in A LERT
deflection and elevation such as: RIGHT 2; ADD 5, D IRECTION (only when not obvious)
are made with the T&E hand wheels. D ESCRIPTION (only when not obvious)
R ANGE
(2) Firing from the bipod. When firing a machine A SSIGNMENT/METHOD
gun on the bipod, subsequent commands should be (division, manipulation, rate; all only
given relative to the impact of the previous burst. These as required)
corrections should be announced as: ADD, DROP, C ONTROL
LEFT, or RIGHT so many meters. The word meters is
omitted as it is the standard unit of measure. (1) Alert.The alert is the first element of the initial
fire command. Its purpose is to designate the gun
6605. Fire Commands crews and ready them to receive and execute the fire
command. FIRE MISSION is announced for all tar-
Fire commands are the means by which fire control is
gets. When both guns of a squad are to fire, the squad
exercised. Fire commands are the instructions issued to
leader announces FIRE MISSION. If only one gun is
the gun crews that enable them to properly engage the
to fire, then NUMBER ONE, FIRE MISSION or
desired targets. There are two types of fire commands–
NUMBER TWO, FIRE MISSION is given. When
initial and subsequent. Initial fire commands are issued
the squad leader desires to alert both guns, but only
to engage targets and to shift fire to new targets. Subse-
wants one gun of the squad to fire, he announces
quent fire commands are issued to adjust fire, change the
FIRE MISSION, NUMBER ONE or FIRE MIS-
rate of fire, and cease fire. The following explanation is
SION, NUMBER TWO.
based on employment of the guns by squad (two
machine gun teams). A good fire command is as brief as (2) When the target is not obvious, the
Direction.
clarity will permit. It contains all necessary elements gunners must be told to look in a particular direc-
given in proper sequence. It is given clearly and at a rate tion to see it. Direction is given as FRONT,
that can be easily understood by the gunners. The gun- RIGHT (LEFT) FRONT, RIGHT (LEFT)
ner repeats each element to ensure understanding. It is FLANK, etc. An indistinct target may be indicated
most improbable that a complete initial fire command by the use of a reference point. The selected refer-
would ever be issued during a fire fight. The leader ence point must be an easily recognizable terrain
determines which elements of a fire command are obvi- feature or object which is in or near the target area.
ous to the gunners and which elements must be given to When a reference point is used, it is announced as
them. Some targets may necessitate including all ele- REFERENCE. For clarity, the word TARGET
ments. Others may be engaged with only the alert, range, always precedes the target description when a refer-
and command to fire. For example: FIRE MISSION, ence point is used. When the selected reference
SEVEN HUNDRED, FIRE. The procedures outlined are point is within the target area, the target may be
used to accustom machine gunners to issue and execute indicated as extending so many mils, meters, or fin-
instructions in a definite, logical sequence. The use of gers from the reference point. When using this
complete fire commands in training makes this sequence method, the words mils and meters are always
second nature for machine gunners, preparing them for implied for bipod-mounted guns. Examples of the
fragmentary fire commands in combat. use of reference points within the target area are:
6-24 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
REFERENCE: BUNKER; TARGET: TROOPS procedure may be accomplished by firing a rifle from
EXTENDING RIGHT TWO FIVE, LEFT TWO the gun positions. The use of tracer ammunition will
FIVE; AND REFERENCE: TANK; TARGET: facilitate observation of fire.
TROOPS EXTENDING SHORT ONE ZERO,
OVER TWO ZERO. (b) Laying the Gun. Laying the gun on a target is a
simple and accurate method and does not sacrifice
If the selected reference point is not within the target surprise. To use this method, the leader goes to each
area, a typical command would be: gun, lays it on the target, and requires the gunners to
check the lay. The gunners open fire simultaneously
REFERENCE: LONE TREE, RIGHT FIVE ZERO; on command of the leader.
TARGET: MACHINE GUN IN EDGE OF WOODS. (3) Description. A target description is a word or two
used to inform the gunner of the nature of his target.
When a reference point within the target area is used
The following words are examples of target descrip-
to designate the target, the range announced is that to
tions: troops (any dismounted enemy personnel);
the reference point. When the reference point is out-
machine gun (any automatic weapon); tank (any
side the target area, the range to the target is
armored vehicle); if several targets are in view, the
announced. An obscure target may be identified by
particular target, or part of a target, which is to be
first designating an obvious feature (reference point)
engaged may be described as leading truck, right
and then leading the gunner, step by step, to the target
building, far end, halted column, etc. If the target is
by naming successive reference points until his atten-
obvious, no description is necessary.
tion is directed to the target itself. For example, REF-
ERENCE: RED ROOFED HOUSE, RIGHT OF (4) Range. This element follows the target descrip-
HOUSE, HEDGE, CENTER OF HEDGE, GATE, tion and is announced in meters. The words range and
ABOVE GATE; TARGET: MACHINE GUN. meters are not used. The range is announced in even
digits, hundreds, or thousands. For example: FOUR
With a tripod-mounted gun, the interval between the FIVE ZERO, THREE HUNDRED, ONE HUN-
reference point and the target is measured by laying DRED, ONE THOUSAND.
the gun on the reference point and manipulating the
designated number of mils to the target. With the gun (5) Assignment/Method. This element is utilized only
on the bipod, the gunner must measure this interval in when specific assignments are required to divide the
meters or fingers. target, assign class of fire, or to designate a rate of fire.
(a) Division. This element is given only when
In addition to designating targets orally, the follow-
required and is discussed in detail under engagement
ing methods may be used, depending on the situation:
of targets.
(a) Firing. Designating an indistinct target by firing NOTE
a machine gun is a simple, rapid, and accurate
method. However, it may cause loss of surprise and It is announced as: NUMBER ONE RIGHT
premature disclosure of the gun position. The leader HALF, NUMBER TWO LEFT HALF; or NUM-
designating the target announces the general direction BER ONE RIGHT TWO-THIRDS, NUMBER
of fire if it is not obvious. He then lays one gun on the TWO LEFT TWO-THIRDS; or NUMBER ONE
target and commands WATCH MY BURSTS. He RIGHT TWO-THIRDS, NUMBER TWO LEFT
fires one or more bursts on the target and completes ONE-THIRD.
the designation orally; for example, MIDPOINT,
RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK or NEAR (FAR) END. He (b) Manipulation. This element prescribes the class
designates midpoint and flanks or ends. The minimum of fire with respect to the gun which is required to
number of bursts necessary will be used. A similar effectively engage the target. It is announced as:
___________________________________________________________________
FIXED, TRAVERSE, SEARCH, TRAVERSE b. Repeating and Correcting Initial Fire Com-
AND SEARCH, SWINGING TRAVERSE, or mands. If the gunner fails to understand any element
FREE GUN. This is only given when the required of the fire command, he may request a repetition of
manipulation is not obvious. the element by announcing the misunderstood element
with a rising inflection in his voice to denote a ques-
(c) Rate. The greatest surprise and effect is obtained tion. When repeating any portion of the fire com-
by a pair of guns opening fire simultaneously at the mand, the leader will preface it with the words, THE
rapid rate of fire. Regardless of the rate of fire COMMAND WAS . . . .In fire commands, an incor-
announced, gunners always open and adjust their fire rect portion is corrected by announcing CORREC-
at the rapid rate. They use the prescribed rate thereaf- TION and then giving the correct command. For
ter. The rate of fire to be used may be sustained, rapid, example, to correct a wrong range command of 500
or cyclic. The factors influencing the selection of the meters to 600 meters, the command would be COR-
rate of fire are the size and nature of the target and RECTION, SIX HUNDRED.
ammunition supply.
c. Subsequent Fire Commands. When adjusting
The sustained rate of fire is measured in rounds per fire, the deflection correction must always be given first.
minute and is the rate at which a machine gun may be
fired indefinitely without damage from overheating. CEASE FIRE is announced when the leader wishes
The sustained rate is directed by announcing SUS- to interrupt fire for any reason. It indicates that the
TAINED. The rapid rate of fire is measured in rounds gun crew will remain on the alert and that additional
per minute and is the rate at which a machine gun may instructions will follow. Firing is renewed by
be fired for a limited period of time without danger of announcing a subsequent fire command or by
damage from overheating. The rapid rate permits a high announcing a new fire command. Firing is resumed
volume of fire to be delivered for a fixed and relatively with the same data by using the command FIRE.
short period of time. Gunners will automatically
employ the rapid rate unless another rate is announced. To allow the gun crew to relax between fire missions,
the termination of the alert is announced. It is CEASE
(6) Control. For immediate engagement of the target, FIRING, END OF MISSION.
the command FIRE or the arm-and-hand signal to fire
is given without pause. It is often of great importance
that machine gun fire be withheld for surprise and Section 7
maximum effect, and that both guns of a pair open fire Methods of Target Engagement
at the same time. To ensure this, the leader may pref-
ace the command or signal to commence firing with
the words AT MY COMMAND or ON MY SIG- 6701. Distribution of Fire
NAL. When the gunners are ready to engage the tar-
Fire, to be effective, is distributed over the entire tar-
get, they report UP to the team leaders who signal
get. Improper distribution results in gaps between
READY to the squad leader, or they may announce
beaten zones and allows a part of the enemy to escape
NUMBER ONE (TWO) UP. The squad leader then
or to use his weapons without effective opposition.
gives the command or signal to fire.
a. Factors Affecting Distribution. There is no
NOTE
fixed rule as to the maximum width of a target that
Fire commands should be as brief and concise may profitably be engaged by a single machine gun,
as possible; therefore, obvious information is although it is preferable that targets be 100 mils or
omitted when possible. All initial fire less in width in the case of the heavy gun on the tri-
commands must contain ALERT, RANGE, pod, and 50 mils or less in width in the case of the
and COMMAND. The remaining elements medium gun on the tripod or bipod mounts. When
may be omitted only if they are obvious. possible, targets exceeding the above widths are not
6-26 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
assigned to a single gun. This is because the travers- are considered as point targets and are engaged by
ing screw on the elevating mechanism of the tripod fixed fire. The command for this type of fire is
limits the amount of traverse that can be secured with- FIXED. Gun crews are trained to follow any move-
out readjusting the traversing slide lock lever. Major ment or change in formation by the enemy after the
shifts in the gunner’s body position are required when initial burst of fire.
firing the gun on the bipod mount. Also, wider targets
require appreciable time to traverse and a continuous 6703. Wide Targets
volume of fire is not placed over the entire target.
Finally, the amount of ammunition required for a a. Using a Squad of Guns. When a pair of guns
wider target is excessive for a single gun. engage frontal targets which are 100 mils or less in
width for the heavy gun and 50 mils or less in width
b. Machine Gun Fire Unit. A squad of guns is the for the medium gun, and are also less than the length
machine gun fire unit. Whenever practical, at least of the beaten zone in depth, the normal traversing
two guns are assigned the same mission, although method is used. Each gun delivers the initial burst of
occasions may arise when single guns may profitably fire 2 mils outside its corresponding flank of the tar-
be employed. The assignment of a squad of guns to a get; its fire is adjusted on that point, and it is traversed
single mission ensures continuous fire should either across the target to a point 2 mils outside the other
gun be put out of action, provides a greater volume of flank. Each gun is traversed back and forth between
fire on the target, and reduces the time required to these two points, covering the entire target until
cover the target. CEASE FIRING is given (see figure 6-13). The
c. Manipulation. Manipulation is the process of command for this type of fire is TRAVERSE. An
moving the machine gun between bursts so that fire is example of a fire command used to engage the type
distributed over a wide, deep, or oblique target. target just described is as follows:
(1) Bipod. Manipulation is done by selecting a series FIRE MISSION

of aiming points along the path of the target and fir- RIGHT FRONT
ing a succession of aimed bursts until the assigned
portion of the target is covered. The gunner observes TROOPS
the width and length of the beaten zone of the initial
EXTENDING FROM DEAD
burst and each succeeding aiming point is selected far
enough from the preceding burst to allow an overlap TREE RIGHT TO CLEARING SEVEN
of the beaten zones as the target is covered.
FIVE ZERO TRAVERSE AT MY SIGNAL
(2) Tripod.Traversing fire is accomplished in 2-mil (The signal to fire is given after the gunner announces
increments, firing after each manipulation, to ensure UP.)
overlap of the beaten zones. On level or uniformly
sloping ground, searching fire is usually accomplished When the target measures more than 100 mils for
in 2-mil increments, firing after each manipulation; the heavy guns and 50 mils for the medium guns in
however, when the ground is irregular, the beaten width, and is less than the length of the beaten
zone is observed on the ground to determine the zone in depth, the leader assigns half (or any other
amount of search to apply between bursts to ensure portion) of the target to one gun and the remaining
overlap of the beaten zones. half (portion) to the other gun. One portion may be
much less than the other for purposes of increas-
ing the density of fire on the smaller portion. In
6702. Point Targets
either case, each gun fires the initial burst 2 mils
Targets having a width or depth no greater than the outside its respective flank and covers its portion
beaten zone for the ground on which they are located as described in subparagraph (1) and as shown in
___________________________________________________________________
figure 6-14. The command would be, for example,

NUMBER 1, RIGHT HALF; NUMBER 2, LEFT
HALF; TRAVERSE.
Another example for a fire command used to engage
this type of target is as follows:
FIRE MISSION
RIGHT FRONT
TROOPS, EXTENDING
FROM DEAD TREE RIGHT TO CLEARING
EIGHT HUNDRED
NUMBER 1, RIGHT ONE-THIRD; NUMBER 2, LEFT
TWO-THIRDS
TRAVERSE AT MY COMMAND
(The command to fire is given when both gunners
announce UP.)
Figure 6-14. Traversing Method, Using a

Squad of Guns. Target for Heavy Machine
Gun More than 100 Mils in Width (Medium
Machine Gun More Than 50 Mils).
b. By Section (Minus) Using Four Machine

Guns. Each squad (pair of guns) engages the entire
target as prescribed except when engaging extremely
wide targets (see figure 6-15). In engaging extremely
wide targets, each squad may be assigned one-half (or
any other portion) of the target. Each portion is
assigned and designated separately as an individual
target. Each squad covers its assigned portion of the
target by either of the methods previously described,
depending upon the width of the target.
c. Engaging Wide Targets, Flanks of Which are
Not Readily Identifiable by the Gunner. When the
flanks of a target are not easily identifiable to the gun-
ner, the target may be identified by firing a gun or
Figure 6-13. Traversing Method, Using a rifle, laying the guns, or by using a reference point
Squad of Guns, Both Flanks Visible to which is visible to the gunner and in the vicinity of
the Gunners. the target. The first two methods are simple and accu-
rate, and once the flanks of the target are identified,
the target is engaged in the same manner as described
for a squad of guns. The reference point method of
6-28 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
When each gun (on bipod or tripod mount) is laid on

the right or left flank respectively, its fire is adjusted
on the flank, and the target is engaged in the same
manner as described for either the medium or heavy
gun on a tripod mount.
The flanks of an indistinct target may be identified to
the gunner as extending so many mils (or so many
sights, fingers, or yards with the medium gun on
bipod mount) from a reference point within the target
area. In this method, each gun is laid initially on the
announced reference point (initial aiming point), its
Figure 6-15. Traversing Method Using a fire adjusted on this point, and traversed to the right or
Section (Minus) of Guns. Target More left respectively, the prescribed distance to its corre-
Than 100 Mils in Width (Each Squad of Guns sponding flank and then back across the target the
Covers the Entire Target). total prescribed distance to the other flank, firing after
each manipulation (see figure 6-16). Each gun is tra-
versed back and forth across the entire target until
cease firing is given. The lay of each gun is checked
designating an indistinct target may also be used as as it passes the reference point (initial aiming point).
described below. Examples of fire commands that may be used when
the flanks of the target are not easily identifiable to
When the selected reference point is outside the tar- the gunner are as follows:
get area, the gunner may be directed to the target by
announcing the interval to the right or left (over or
short) between the reference point and the target. With
either the medium or the heavy gun on a tripod
mount, the gunner measures the interval between the
reference point and the flank of the target by laying on
the reference point, with the sights set at the range to
the target, and shifting the gun the designated number
of mils. The interval over or short between the refer-
ence point and the target must be measured with the
gun in mils (using computed search method) or by
estimating the interval in meters.
With a bipod mount, the gunner lays directly on the
designated flank of the target by first measuring the
interval between the reference point and that flank of
the target (in sights or fingers) and, if necessary, by Figure 6-16. Traversing Method, Using a
estimating the interval over or short between the refer- Squad of Guns; Both Flanks Invisible
ence point and the target (in meters). to the Gunners.
___________________________________________________________________
The leader designates the target by firing one gun: FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.)
FIRE MISSION The leader designates the target by using a reference point
LEFT FLANK within the target area (machine gun on tripod mounts):
WATCH MY BURSTS (or TRACERS) FIRE MISSION
(Lays and fires gun at left flank.) LEFT FLANK
FRONT
(Lays and fires gun at right flank.) RIGHT FLANK
TROOPS REFERENCE: LONE TREE
NINE HUNDRED TARGET: TROOPS EXTENDING
TRAVERSE AT MY COMMAND RIGHT TWO ZERO MILS; LEFT,
FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.) THREE ZERO MILS SEVEN HUNDRED
TRAVERSE AT MY COMMAND
The leader designates the target by using a reference
point outside the target area (machine guns are on tri- FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.)
pod mounts):
d. Using a Single Gun. The single gun is laid just
FIRE MISSION outside either flank (or on a reference point with the
target area), its fire adjusted on the flank (or reference
RIGHT FRONT
point), and traversed back and forth, covering the
REFERENCE: DEAD TREE entire target until cease firing is given. In other words,
RIGHT SIX ZERO MILS; DROP THREE FIVE it engages the target in the same manner as either gun
ZERO METERS of a squad as previously described. The leader may
(or drop so many mils using computed search) designate the flank on which he desires fire to be
placed initially. An example of a fire command for a
TARGET: TROOPS EXTENDING wide target which is to be engaged by a single
RIGHT FIVE ZERO MILS medium machine gun on a bipod mount is as follows:
SIX HUNDRED FIRE MISSION
TRAVERSE AT MY COMMAND FRONT
FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.) TROOPS EXTENDING FROM DEAD TREE
RIGHT ONE SIGHT (OR FINGER)
The leader designates the target by using a reference
point outside the target area (machine gun on tripod FIVE HUNDRED
mounts): TRAVERSE AT MY COMMAND (The signal to
fire is given after the gunner announces UP.)
FIRE MISSION
e. Swinging Traverse. The swinging traverse
RIGHT FRONT
method used against massed or rapidly moving tar-
REFERENCE: DEAD TREE gets at short ranges is described earlier in this chap-
RIGHT ONE SIGHT (FINGER); DROP THREE ter. An example of a fire command for a swinging
FIVE ZERO traverse is as follows:
METERS FIRE MISSION
TARGET: TROOPS EXTENDING, RIGHT ONE LEFT FRONT
SIGHT (FINGER) TRUCKS
SIX HUNDRED SWINGING TRAVERSE
TRAVERSE AT MY COMMAND FIRE
6-30 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
6704. DEEP TARGETS guns is that to the midpoint of the target, thus taking
advantage of the length of the beaten zones to ensure
a. Using a Pair of Guns fire on the target with the initial bursts.
(1) Stationary deep target, ends visible to gunner.
See figure 6-17. Deep targets which are stationary or If the target extends over 200 meters in depth, the
have limited mobility require only searching fire to range to the near end is announced for number 1 gun,
cover them effectively. When the ends are visible to and that to the far end for the number 2 gun. The com-
the gunners, the number 1 gun is laid initially on the mand for this type of fire is SEARCH. When the tar-
near end of the target; and the number 2 gun is laid get is 200 meters or less in depth and is to be engaged
initially on the far end. The fires on each gun are by a squad of guns (or by a single gun), the fire com-
adjusted on these initial aiming points and searched to mand may be as follows:
the far and near ends of the target, respectively. After
searching the full extent of the target, the direction of FIRE MISSION
search of each gun is reversed, and both guns are FRONT
searched up and down between these two limits, cov- HALTED COLUMN
ering the entire target until cease firing is given. In SEVEN HUNDRED (midrange)
determining the sight setting to be placed on the guns,
the depth of the target is considered when firing a SEARCH
squad of guns. If the depth of the target is estimated to AT MY COMMAND
be 200 meters or less, the range announced for both FIRE (Given after gunner announces UP.)
Figure 6-17. Engaging a Deep Enfilade Target With a Pair of

Guns, Ends Visible to Gunners.
___________________________________________________________________
When the target is over 200 meters in depth and is to When the number 1 and number 2 guns (on the bipod
be engaged by a squad of guns, the fire command may or the tripod mount) are laid on the near or far end,
be as follows: respectively, their fires are adjusted individually on
those ends, and the target is engaged in the same man-
FIRE MISSION ner as described for either the medium or heavy gun
LEFT FRONT on a tripod mount in subparagraph (1).
TROOPS ALONG RIGHT EDGE OF WOODS The limits of an indistinct deep target are identified to
the gunners as extending so many meters (or mils)
NUMBER 1, SIX HUNDRED; NUMBER 2, NINE from a reference point within the target area. In this
HUNDRED method, both guns are laid initially on the announced
reference point (initial aiming point), with their sights
SEARCH AT MY COMMAND
set at the range to the reference point, and their fire
FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.) adjusted on this point. The number 1 gun is searched
down, firing after each manipulation, until it has reach
(2) Stationary deep target, ends invisible to gunner. If the near end of the target as designated in meters (or
the ends of the target are not visible to the gunner, the mils); the number 2 gun is searched up, firing after
target may be identified by firing a gun or rifle each manipulation, until it has reached the far end of
(tracer), laying the guns, or by using a reference point the target. When each gun has reached the near and
which is visible to the gunner and in the vicinity of far end, respectively, the direction of search is
the target. The first method (firing the gun) is the reversed, and both guns are searched up and down
quickest and simplest method of designating an indis- between these two limits, covering the entire target
tinct target. Once the limits of the target are identified, until cease firing is given.
the target is engaged in the same manner as described
in subparagraph (1). When designation by tracer (fir- (3) Computed search method. When it is desired to
ing a gun or rifle) is likely to disclose the gun posi- describe the depth of a target in mils, the leader com-
tion, or otherwise destroy the element of surprise, the putes the amount of search from the reference point in
reference point method may be used. mils by the following method:
When the selected reference point is outside the tar- ● Determine the ranges to the near or far ends of the
get area, the gunner may be directed to the target by target.
announcing the interval over or short (right or left) ● From the firing tables, find the required angles of
between the reference point and the target. elevation (AE) in mils for both ranges and deter-
mine the difference.
With either the medium or the heavy gun on a tripod ● The difference between the angle of elevation is the
mount, the gunner measures the interval right or left amount of search required on level ground with the
between the reference point and the target by laying on gun and target at the same elevation. (If the fire is
the reference point, with the sights set at the range to the plunging, the amount of search is increased.) If the
midpoint of the target and shifting the gun the desig- computed amount of search is an odd number of
nated number of mils. The interval over or short mils, it is increased to an even total so that the
between the reference point and the end of the target search can be made in 2-mil increments.
may be measured with the gun in mils (using computed
search method) or by estimating the interval in meters. For example, (computed from firing tables for 7.62
With the bipod mount, the gunner lays directly on the ball ammunition, appendix A) a deep target has been
designated end of the target by first estimating the sighted, the ends of which are not visible to the gun-
interval over or short between the reference point and ners. A suitable reference point within the target at
the end of the target (in meters) and, if necessary, by 1,100 meters distance is visible. The depth of the tar-
measuring the interval right or left between the refer- get is estimated as 200 meters and the reference point
ence point and the target (in sights or fingers). appears to be midway between the ends. Thus, the
6-32 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
range to the near end is 1,000 meters and to the far (5) Target moving toward the gun position. If the tar-
end is 1,200 meters. The angle of elevation for a range get is moving rapidly toward the gun positions, both
of 1,000 meters is 16.2 mils; for 1,200 meters, 24.1 guns are laid on the near end with the range to that
mils; the difference being 8 mils. This target extends 4 point and searched up. The element of the fire com-
mils over and 4 mils short of the reference point. mand for covering a rapidly approaching or receding
Searching in 2-mil increments, the gunners cover the target is BOTH GUNS: NEAR (FAR) END;
target by searching 4 mils over and 4 mils short of the SEARCH.
reference point. This target is described to the gun-
ners as follows: b. By Section (Minus) Using Four Machine
Guns. A section (minus) of four guns uses the same
TARGET, method as a pair of guns, each squad (pair of guns)
TROOPS EXTENDING engaging the target as if it were acting alone. In case it
becomes necessary to switch the fire of one squad of
OVER 4 MILS; SHORT 4 MILS.
guns to another target, the original target is still cov-
When the ends of the target are not visible to the gun- ered by the remaining squad.
ners (using a reference point within the target area),
c. Subdivision of a Deep Target. A deep target
the fire command would be as follows:
need never be subdivided since the elevating mecha-
FIRE MISSION nism of either the medium or heavy gun allows enough
RIGHT FRONT search to cover any deep target within the maximum
usable range for direct laying (2,000 meters).
REFERENCE: LONE BUSH
TARGET: TROOPS EXTENDING SHORT TWO d. Using a Single Gun. The single gun is laid on
MILS, OVER FOUR MILS the near end of the target with a range to the midpoint,
SIX HUNDRED (range to reference point) its fire adjusted on the near end, and then searched up
and down covering the entire target. When a refer-
SEARCH ence point within the target area is used, the single
AT MY COMMAND gun is laid on the announced reference point with the
FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.) range to the reference point, its fire adjusted on this
point, searched down to the near end, and then
The leader designates the target by using a reference point searched up and down covering the entire target, until
outside the target area (machine guns on tripod mounts). cease firing is given.
An example of this type fire command is as follows:
FIRE MISSION 6705. Oblique Targets
LEFT FRONT Using a squad of guns, oblique targets are engaged
REFERENCE: DEAD TREE with combined traversing and searching fire (see fig-
RIGHT THREE ZERO MILS; ADD SIX MILS ure 6-18). The gunner employs enough search while
TARGET: TROOPS EXTENDING OVER firing to keep the center of impact of the beaten zone
TWO MILS on the target. The range announced in the initial fire
command is determined in the same manner as for a
NINE HUNDRED
deep target.
SEARCH
AT MY COMMAND (1) Flanks invisible. If the flanks of the target are
not easily identifiable by the gunner, the target may
FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.) be designated in the same manner as described ear-
(4) Target moving away from the gun position. When lier in this chapter. A reference point within the tar-
the target is moving rapidly away from the guns, both get area; however, is not used as an initial aiming
guns are laid on the far end with the range to that point because of the difficulty in describing the
point and searched down. obliquity of the target.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-18. Squad of Guns Engaging a Shallow or Oblique Target.
(2) By section (minus) using four guns. A section TROOPS EXTENDING FROM BLACK
(minus) of four guns uses the same method as a squad STUMP - RIGHT TO LONE PINE
of guns, each squad engaging the target as if it were SEVEN HUNDRED (midrange)
acting alone. In case it becomes necessary to switch
TRAVERSE AND SEARCH
the fire of one squad of guns to another target, the
original target is still covered by the remaining squad. AT MY SIGNAL
(Signal to fire given after gunners announce UP.)
(3) Using a single gun. The single gun is laid ini-
tially on the near flank, and then traversed and When the target measures 100 mils or less in width, is
searched back and forth, covering the entire target 200 meters or less in depth, and is to be engaged by a
until cease firing is given. section (minus) of four guns:
b. Fire Commands. Examples of fire commands SQUAD 1, SQUAD 2

used for oblique targets are: FIRE MISSION
When the target is not wide enough to necessitate sub- FRONT TROOPS TO THE RIGHT OF RED BANK
division, is 200 meters or less in depth, and is to be SEVEN HUNDRED (midrange)
engaged by a squad of guns (or by a single gun): TRAVERSE AND SEARCH
FIRE MISSION AT MY SIGNAL
RIGHT FRONT (Signal to fire given after gunners announce UP.)
6-34 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
When the target is wide enough to necessitate subdi- (2) Flanks invisible. When the flanks of the target
viding, is over 200 meters in depth, and is to be are invisible to the gunners, the leader indicates their
engaged by a squad of guns or by a section (minus) of location and the point at which each gun fires its ini-
four guns: tial burst, either by firing one gun, by laying both
guns, by firing a gun or rifle, or by use of a reference
FIRE MISSION point. When the location of the flanks or the refer-
FRONT ence point (which may be the initial aiming point)
TROOPS EXTENDING FROM TRUCK - RIGHT have been announced, the procedure to cover the area
TO BRIDGE is the same as when the flanks are visible.
NUMBER 1 (and 3 if section [minus] of four guns is b. By Section (Minus) Using Four Guns. A sec-
engaging the target), tion (minus) of four guns uses the same method as a
SEVEN HUNDRED squad of guns, with each squad of guns within the
NUMBER 2 (and 4 if section [minus] of four guns is section (minus) engaging the target as if it were acting
engaging the target), alone.
ONE THOUSAND c. Using a Single Gun. The single gun uses the
NUMBER 1 (and 3), same method of engaging an area target as described
RIGHT HALF NUMBER 2 (and 4), previously for either gun of a squad.
LEFT HALF TRAVERSE AND SEARCH d. Fire Commands. Figure 6-19 is a sample fire
AT MY SIGNAL command. Examples of fire commands used for area
(Signal to fire given after gunners announce UP.) targets are:
6706. Area Targets

Targets which cannot be covered by either traversing
fire or searching fire alone, or by combined travers-
ing and searching fire (as in the case of oblique tar-
gets) are called area targets. The area which can be
covered effectively by a squad of guns or by a section
(minus) of four guns is small because of the time and
ammunition required for this type.
a. Using a Squad of Guns
(1) Flanks visible. When the flanks of the target are
visible to the gunners, the guns are laid just outside
their corresponding flanks. Each gun then fires tra-
versing fire across its assigned portion of the target,
changes elevation the total amount prescribed in the Figure 6-19. Sample Fire Command.
initial fire command, traverses back to the flank from
which traversing fire was started, and ceases firing. A
typical manipulation element of the fire command
would be TRAVERSE, SEARCH UP 4 (MILS) or When there is no reference point along the near or far
SEARCH UP 100 (METERS). Further firing over edge of the target, the leader must lay the guns for the
the area is on the leader’s orders. initial burst and complete the fire command orally.
___________________________________________________________________
FIRE MISSION a. Leads. To hit a moving target, the gun must be

FRONT aimed ahead of the target a sufficient distance to cause
(Lays each gun on the right and left flank, the bullet and target to arrive at the same time at the
respectively) same point. This distance is measured in target
lengths. One target length as seen by the gunner is one
AREA: TROOPS IN GREEN PATCH
lead. Leads are measured from the center of mass. The
NINE HUNDRED sample lead table in Figure 6-20 gives the amount of
TRAVERSE lead needed to hit a moving target moving at right
SEARCH UP THREE MILS angles to the gunner at speed and ranges indicated.
(or up so many meters) The gunner makes adjustments as conditions change.
AT MY COMMAND If target speed is 7 1/2 miles per hour, the amount of
lead is half that shown on the table; at 30 miles per
FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.) hour, double that shown. The angle the target moves
Using a reference point at the far edge of the target: also changes the lead. If the target is moving on an
oblique angle, only half the lead is required. For a tar-
FIRE MISSION get moving directly at the gunner, the aiming point is
FRONT below the center base of the target depending on range
and slope of the ground. For a target moving directly
REFERENCE: BLACK STUMP
away from a gunner, the aiming point is above the
TARGET: TROOPS IN AREA center base of the target (see figure 6-21). Too much
EXTENDING RIGHT TWO ZERO MILS; lead is better than too little because the target moves
LEFT THREE ZERO MILS into the beaten zone, and observation of the strike of
EIGHT HUNDRED (range to reference point) the rounds is easier in relation to the target.
TRAVERSE: SEARCH DOWN THREE MILS (or
down so many meters)
AT MY COMMAND
FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.)
6707. Moving Targets

Figure 6-20. Vehicle Lead Table.
The engagement of moving targets with the MK-19
poses special problems because of the slow velocity
of the round compared to most machine guns. In gen-
eral, leads must be increased by four times when
using the MK-19 as opposed to the M2 .50 cal. For
additional information on tracking and leading mov-
ing targets see paragraph 41113 in chapter 4.
The fundamentals used to hit moving targets are the
same as those needed to hit stationary targets. How-
ever, the procedures to engage moving targets vary as
the angle, speed, and range of the target vary. Targets
moving directly at the gunner are engaged the same as
a stationary target; there is no change in the applica-
tion of the fundamentals. But fast-moving targets at
varying ranges and angles do require changes in the
application of steady position and aiming. For aerial
target engagement, see section 14 in this chapter. Figure 6-21. Moving Target Aiming Points.
6-36 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
NOTE (2) Aim. You must determine angle, speed, and

range quickly; acquire the appropriate lead; and
An individual with a combat load can run as fast
engage the target. Align the front sight post in the
as 8 miles per hour for short periods on the
proper relationship to lead the target. For targets mov-
battlefield.
ing directly away, place the front sight post above
center of mass. For targets moving directly at you,
b. Tracking Techniques. The gunner aims at a align the front sight post below center of mass. For all
point ahead of the target equal to the estimated num- other targets, align the front sight post with center
ber of leads, maintains this lead by tracking the tar- base of the target with the appropriate lead.
get (manipulates the weapon at the same angular
speed as that of the target), and then fires. Tracking (3) Breath control. There are no changes except that
puts the gunner in position for a second burst if the you must hold your breath quickly because of the
first one misses. fleeting nature of moving targets.
(4) Trigger control. There is no change in the appli-
c. Trapping Techniques. The gunner establishes cation of this fundamental.
an aiming point forward of the target and along the
target path. He presses the trigger as the target reaches
the appropriate point in regard to lead. Section 8
Overhead Fires
d. Bipod Techniques. For targets moving directly
away or at the gunner using a bipod, the same proce-
dures are used. From a prone position, the gunner may Overhead fire is fire delivered over the heads of
be required to adjust his position quickly depending friendly troops. A machine gun on a tripod is capable
on range, angle, and speed of the target. of delivering this type of fire because of the small and
uniform dispersion of the cone of fire. In the attack,
(1) Steady position. If appropriate lead cannot be the use of overhead fire permits the machine gun to
achieved by shifting your shoulders right or left support the advance of rifle units.
(traverse) or by moving your elbows closer or farther
apart (search), redistribute your weight to your elbows NOTE
and toes and raise your body off the ground. Using Overhead fire is not delivered when the gun is
your toes, shift your body right or left in the opposite mounted on the bipod, unless the vertical
direction of the target and pivot on your elbows until interval of the troops below the gun target line is
you are well ahead of the target. Rapidly assume a such as to make safety obvious.
steady position, obtain the sight picture, lead and
engage the target. Trapping is the preferred tech-
The center of the cone of fire must clear the heads
nique. In order to apply this method, the bipod legs
of the friendly troops by a prescribed distance. See
must move freely. When firing from a fighting posi-
figure 6-22. This distance, known as minimum
tion, you must be flexible enough to track any target
clearance, is found by adding together the follow-
in your sector. If lead cannot be achieved, slide the
ing elements:
bipod legs in the appropriate direction (left or right)
ahead of the target and continue as in the prone posi- ● The height of a man, standing, taken as 1.8 meters.
tion. Trapping is still the preferred technique. If the ● Half the vertical dimension of the 100 percent cone
terrain does not permit sliding the weapon left or of fire at the range to the troops.
right, lift the bipod legs off the ground and place them ● A margin of safety equal to the vertical distance
where you can aim ahead of the target, reestablish a which extends a 5-mil angle at the gun or 3 meters,
steady position, and continue as before. whichever is greater.
___________________________________________________________________
● An additional allowance to compensate for a 15- uniformly sloping ground when the troops are 600
percent error in range determination. meters from the gun. The same data can be deter-
mined for the M2 machine gun by using table II of
To obtain this minimum clearance, the gun is ele- appendix B.
vated so that the center of the cone of fire is raised
from the feet of the friendly troops, to minimum clear- b. Uneven Terrain. Level or uniformly sloping
ance above their heads. The amount of the elevation ground between the gun and target will seldom be
change to give this minimum clearance is known as found in the field. This prevents the use of standard
the safety angle and is the difference between the overhead firing tables in all but a few cases. The prob-
angle of elevation to hit the troops and the angle of lem presented to the gunner or leader planning the
elevation for troop safety. fires of guns is the determination of the exact point on
the ground to which it is safe for friendly troops to
advance without being hit by friendly overhead fire.
6801. Rules
The exact point on the ground where the lowest bullet
a. Corresponding Range on Level or Uniformly hits in any given burst depends on the terrain, the gun
Sloping Ground. When the gun is fired from the tri- position, and the target location. This exact point is
pod with the required safety angle, the center of impossible to practically calculate because of the infi-
impact determines the shortest range at which fire can nite number of combinations possible. So, in order to
be delivered over the heads of friendly troops. The fire over the heads of friendly troops in these
range from the gun to the point of strike is called the instances, calculations must be based on other crite-
corresponding range. When the ground is level or ria. In figure 6-23 a line is shown that extends from
uniformly sloping between the gun and the target, the the gun position to a point lower than the target by
corresponding range for the safety angle used is one half of the vertical cone height and the height of a
obtained by converting the angle of elevation for standing man. A man could safely stand anywhere on
troop safety, which is expressed in mils, into range. or below the line between points “A” and “B.” Point
For example, with the M240G, the angle of elevation “A” is the point where the man’s head touches the line
for troop safety for troops at a range of 600 meters, of sight and point “B” is the point underneath the tar-
with 7.62 ball ammunition, is 23.2 mils (see appendix get. If a safety distance is added by drawing the line to
A, firing tables for 7.62 ball ammunition, table II). In point “C,” as shown in figure 6-24, clearance is pro-
table II (firing table for 7.62 ball ammunition), the vided above the troop’s heads even if they are stand-
range for 23.2 mils is 1,175 meters (even figure to the ing directly under the target. Safety can be guaranteed
nearest 25 above the exact figure of 1,162 meters), at any point on or below that line regardless of the ter-
which is the corresponding range when troops are 600 rain profile. The line between “A” and “C” in figure
meters in front of the gun. Thus, no target at a closer 6-24 is the safety line. The line angle between the line
range than 1,175 meters can be engaged over level or of sight and the safety line is the safety angle. The
Figure 6-22. Componenets of Minimum Clearance.

6-38 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 6-23. Theory Behind the Gunner’s and Leader’s Rule.
point where the line intersects the terrain is the safety (1) The gunner’s rule is used to deter-
Gunner’s rule.
limit. When friendly troops reach the safety limit they mine the safety limit when the range to the target is
begin to rise above the safety line because the terrain 850 meters or less and friendly troops are at least 350
slopes upward toward the target. meters in front of the gun position (see figure 6-25).
The gunner applies this rule unless the safety limit has
The gunner’s and leader’s rules allow the determina- been determined and announced by the platoon or sec-
tion of the safety limit by setting the safety angle on tion leader. The rule is as follows:
the gun and looking across the gun’s sights. The
safety limit is determined by the intersection of the ● Lay the gun on the target with the sights set to hit
new line of aim and the ground. When the feet of the the target. The range to target must be determined
friendly troops reach this point the fire must be lifted with the most accurate means available.
or shifted.
Figure 6-24. Application of the Gunner’s and Leader’s Rules.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-25. Gunner’s Rule.
● Without disturbing the lay of the gun, set the line of that terrain feature selected by the leader can be used
aim. For the M240G, set the sight on 1,500 meters. as the safety limit. The rule is as follows:
For the M2 .50 cal, set the sight on 1,600 meters.
● The leader selects an easily identifiable terrain fea-
● Look through the sights and note the point where
ture to which he believes friendly troops can
this new line of aim strikes the ground. This point
advance safely.
is the safety limit. When the feet of the friendly
● The gunner(s) lays the gun on the target with the
troops pass this point, overhead fire must be ceased
sights set to hit the target. The range to the target
or shifted. It is not safe to continue firing when
must be determined with the most accurate means
friendly troops have passed this point.
available.
● Gunners report SAFE (friendly troops are not past
● Set the line of aim for the M240G. Leave the sight
the safety limit) or NOT CLEAR (friendly troops
set to the target range. Using the T&E depress the
are past the safety limit) to indicate whether or not
muzzle of the gun by a number of mils equal to the
it is safe to fire. The gunner will report the location
range to target in hundreds of meters, plus an extra
of the safety limit to the squad leader.
20 mils. Example: Target range = 1,100 meters.
● Relay the gun back on to the target ensuring that the
Depress the muzzle by 11 mils (one mil equals one
proper range to the target has been reset on the
click on the elevating hand wheel) and then depress
sights.
the muzzle another 20 mils for a total of 31 mils.
● Set the line of aim for the M2 .50 cal. Set the sight
(2) Leader’s Rule. The leader may want to orient his on 1,600 meters or the range to the target plus 500
gunners on the safety limit using an identifiable ter- meters, whichever is greater. Under no conditions
rain feature. The leader’s rule is used to determine if should the sight be set less than 1,400 meters.
6-40 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
● Note the point where the new line of aim strikes the Example: If the unit leader had selected the sin-
ground. gle tree (A) in figure 6-26 as the terrain feature
P If the line of aim intersects the selected terrain he wanted to use for a safety limit he would see
feature, the selected feature is safe to use as the that it cannot be used because the line of aim
safety limit. Example: If the unit leader selected intersects the ground below it. If friendly troops
the center of the open area between the clumps did advance to (A) they would be well above the
of trees (A and B) in figure 6-26 as the terrain safety line and could possibly be hit by the
feature that he wanted to use as the safety limit machine gun’s fire.
then he could use that feature because the line of
aim intersects the ground at that point and is, At ranges under 850 meters the leader’s rule can be
therefore, the “actual safety limit.” used to override the gunner’s rule, if the application of
P If the line of aim intersects the ground above the
the gunner’s rule results in a safety limit that, in the
selected terrain feature then the selected feature leader’s opinion, is too restrictive. For example, a ter-
is safe to use as a safety limit. The leader may rain feature may be below the line of aim on the gun-
want to identify a new terrain feature if one is ner’s rule and deemed unsafe as a safety limit. When
closer to the line of aim than the first feature the leader’s rule is applied that same terrain feature
selected. Example: If the unit leader had selected may be on or above the line of aim and therefore
the pair of trees (B) in figure 6-26 as the terrain would be safe to use as the safety limit.
feature that he wanted to use for a safety limit
then he could use them because they are located The gunner’s rule, using sight settings to determine
below the point where the line of aim intersects the safety angle, is quick and simple. It provides a
the ground. Friendly troops could advance to very large margin of safety for friendly troops. The
those trees without rising above the safety line. leader’s rule is more complicated and allows the
P If the line of aim is below the selected terrain leader to “fine tune” the safety margin, giving his
feature, then a new terrain feature must be machine guns more time to engage the enemy, while
selected that is on or above the line of aim. still affording a high degree of safety to friendly
Figure 6-26. Leader’s Rule.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-27. M240G Gunner’s and Leader’s Rule Data.
troops. Figure 6-27 illustrates the M240G’s safety back to the range to the target in order to check, while
margins allowed by both rules and demonstrates the firing, the laying on the target.
safety of the leader’s rule at ranges under 850 meters.
c. Procedure Before Friendly Troops Reach the 6802. Use of Binocular in Applying Safety
Limit of Safety Rules
(1) Safety limit identified on the ground.After the It is frequently desirable to determine safety for over-
safety limit has been determined, the gunners and all head fires before guns are placed in position. Safety
leaders note some terrain feature by means of which may be approximately determined by means of the
the limit may be identified on the ground. In case inverted sight leaf in the binocular. The gunner’s and
safety has been determined by the platoon or section leader’s rules are applied with the inverted sight leaf
leader, he announces the limit of safety so that the in the binocular in a manner similar to that with the
gunners and squad leaders are able to identify it. rear sight on the gun. After the guns are emplaced, the
When necessary, the limit is indicated with the rear safety is checked with the gun sights.
sight of each gun, care being taken not to change the
laying of the gun on the target.
6803. Troop Safety Zones
(2) Report by gunners. When the gunner’s rule is
applied, the gunners report SAFE or NOT CLEAR to At times it may be imperative to deliver overhead fire
indicate whether or not it is safe to fire. even though the gunner’s or the leader’s rule indi-
cates that it is not safe to fire. Such conditions will
(3) Checking laying while firing. After determining or usually exist when the target is at a long range and the
noting the safety limits, the gunner moves the sight guns, troops, and target are about the same elevation.
6-42 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
To cover such cases, refer to the appropriate over-

head fire table. Observe the following additional pre- Section 9
cautions when firing overhead fires with the M240G Techniques of Predetermined Fire
and the M2 .50 cal:
● Use depression stops to prevent the muzzle of the 6901. Methods of Laying the Machine Gun
gun from being accidentally lowered below the
Mounting the machine gun on the tripod provides a
limit of safety.
stable platform from which the gun can be fired and
● Do not fire overhead fire through trees which are
enables the crew to engage targets utilizing both direct
likely to deflect bullets into friendly troops.
and indirect fire. These capabilities provide the means
● Do not use worn barrels or barrels that show evi- by which accurate data can be collected to enable the
dence of previous overheating. gunner to engage targets under all conditions of visi-
● Do not deliver overhead fires without use of tripod bility. In all cases, care must be taken not to disturb
and T&E mechanism; tripod must be firmly the mount once initial readings have been taken from
emplaced. the T&E mechanism, as this will provide inaccurate
● Unless the terrain or firing tables provide obvious data and may endanger friendly troops.
safety, do not deliver overhead fire if the range
from the gun to target is less than 350 meters or
6902. M2 Compass Method
exceeds 850 meters.
● The commanders of troops required to move The most accurate method of engaging targets is to uti-
beneath overhead fires must be informed that such lize the M2 compass method. This method enables the
fires are planned. gunner to measure the horizontal and vertical angles
● Ensure that all members of the gun crew are aware and thereby place the proper elevation on the T&E
of the safety limit. mechanism to engage the desired target without adjust-
● Do not allow cones of fire to cross over the heads ing onto the target and revealing the gun position.
of friendly troops.
In order to engage the desired target, the section or
● Application of gunner’s and leader’s rules requires
squad leader determines the quadrant elevation angle
that the guns be accurately zeroed.
(see section 11), and by placing the M2 compass on
● Since the trajectories of the M240G tracer ammuni- the flat portion of the feed tray cover, he duplicates
tion are unpredictable beyond 750 meters (which that angle prior to firing.
results from the round becoming unstable as the
tracer material burns out), do not use tracer ammu-
nition for overhead fires beyond this range. 6903. Using the T&E Mechanism
● When the friendly troops reach the safety limit, fir- Proper utilization of the T&E mechanism is what prin-
ing ceases. cipally distinguishes the machine gun from the auto-
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-28. Direction Reading.
matic rifle. In order to engage targets, the gunner must

be able to lay the machine gun on predetermined tar-
gets. This can be accomplished either by use of the
T&E mechanism or one of the field expedient methods.
a. T&E Method. Direction and elevation readings

constitute the data necessary to engage a predeter-
mined target. These readings are taken from the tra-
versing bar and the T&E mechanism. When possible,
this data should be determined to the nearest mil.
● Determine direction to the nearest mil is deter-

mined by reading the mil setting on the traversing
bar and either adding or subtracting the mil setting
on the traversing hand wheel. See figure 6-28 and
paragraph 6501.
Figure 6-29. Elevation Reading.
● Determine elevation by reading the upper elevating
screw and the elevating hand wheel. See figure 6-29.
● After the direction and elevation has been deter-
mined, record it on the range card for future use.
● When firing, the guns are allowed 2 mils of traverse
in each direction (see figure 6-30). After firing the
first burst, traverse 2 mils in one direction and fire,
then 4 mils in the other direction (firing a burst after
each 2 mil change); thus, bursts are fired 2 mils to
the right and left of center. Normally, searching fire
will not be necessary because of the length of the
beaten zone, unless the target is being engaged with
plunging fire.
Figure 6-30. Firing for Effect on a

Predetermined Target.
6-44 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
b. Field Expedients. Field expedients include the

use of stakes and other devices to engage predeter-
mined targets. The T&E method is more accurate, but it
requires some light at the gun position; therefore, field
expedients are used to supplement the T&E method.
(1) Base stake method. The base stake method is the
simplest and most useful field expedient. Stakes are
used to define the sector limits and the FPL. A stake is
driven into the ground under the gas cylinder to pick
up the elevation needed to fire the FPL (see figure 6-
31). Note that the T&E mechanism is still in use. This
field expedient in particular will seriously limit the
ability to quickly and effectively engage targets out- Figure 6-31. Field Expedient—Base Stake
side the sector. Method.
(2) Aiming stake method. Luminous tape, luminous
paint, or some other suitable material is needed to use
● Raise the rear sight slide to its uppermost position.
this technique. After the gun has been laid to hit the tar-
● Move the head slightly to the right so that the front
get, the following procedure is used. See figure 6-32.
sight post appears in the left corner of the rectangle
● Place a strip of luminous tape or paint at least half- formed by the rear sight slide and the rear sight
way up the rear of the front sight post and on the lead. Maintaining the same positions and grip,
top of a stake. direct the assistant gunner to drive the stake into
Figure 6-32. Field Expedient—Aiming Stake Method.

___________________________________________________________________
the ground about 1 meter in front of the gun. Align

the stake so that the two pieces of luminous mate-
rial are adjacent (aligned for direction) and the top
edges of both pieces of material are level (aligned
for elevation). One stake is set out for each target.
● To hit a target when it cannot be seen, raise the rear
sight slide to its uppermost position and manipulate
the gun until the correct sight picture is obtained.
3) Horizontal log method. This technique is used to

define sector limits and fields of grazing fire. The FPL
would be located along one of the sector stakes. A log or
board is placed between the sector stakes in such a way
that the barrel will be at the proper elevation to obtain
grazing fire across the front. In this case, the tripod is
used, but not the T&E mechanism. See figure 6-33.
(4) Notched stake method. If, for some reason, the
bipod mount is being used instead of the tripod, tar-
gets can be made predetermined by the use of notched
or forked stakes. The stakes are driven into the ground
so that the butt stock rests in the notches when the gun
is laid to hit the target. Shallow trenches or grooves
are dug for the bipod feet. See figure 6-34.
Figure 6-34. Field Expedient—Notched Stake

Method.
(5) Auxiliary aiming point method. When the target is

invisible to the gunner or is exceptionally difficult to
see, fire may often be directed by use of an auxiliary
aiming point, securing data by one of the two methods
given below. The heavy machine gun may be laid by
using an auxiliary aiming point that is not more than
20 mils off the gun-target line (10 mils with the
medium machine gun).
(6) Binocular method. The leader selects a clearly
defined object in the vicinity of the target (see figure
Figure 6-33. Field Expedient—Horizontal 6-35). Using the inverted sight leaf, he aligns on the
Log Method. target that graduation which corresponds with the
6-46 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
range to the target (1.050). Keeping the binocular in FIRE MISSION

that position, he reads the graduation on the scale FRONT
opposite the auxiliary aiming point. When the auxil-
AUXILIARY AIMING POINT
iary aiming point is not on the gun-target line, the
deflection is read on the horizontal mil scale of the BLACK STUMP
binocular. Using these readings as the sight setting 1,350 SIGHT
and deflection, for example, range 1,350 sight right RIGHT 20
20, the gunner lays on the object selected as the auxil- FIXED
iary aiming point and fires, distributing the fire as
ordered by the unit leader. See figure 6-35. AT MY COMMAND
FIRE
(7) Gun method. Data for auxiliary aiming points
may be determined by means of the rear sight slide
and windage scale on the gun. The gun is first laid on Section 10
the target with the correct sight setting to hit the tar- Final Protective Lines
get, and when the tactical situation permits, the initial
lay is verified by firing. Then, without disturbing the
lay of the gun, the rear sight is manipulated so that the An FPL is a predetermined line along which grazing
line of aim is directed at some clearly defined object fire is placed to stop an enemy assault. The fire is usu-
(stump, bush, or aiming stake) which the gunner is ally fixed as to direction and elevation and can be
always able to see, no matter what the visibility condi- fired under all conditions of visibility. When fixed fire
tions may be. The settings on the rear sight and the is incapable of producing the maximum effective
windage gauge are recorded. Then, when fire is to be grazing fire, because of irregularities in the terrain,
placed on the target, the leader announces these set- some searching fire may be used in conjunction with
tings in his fire command and orders the gunner to lay the fire of other weapons to ensure that all of the FPL
on the auxiliary aiming point. An example of a fire is covered. Except when targets are being engaged,
command is: the gun is laid on the FPL.
Figure 6-35. View Through Binocular; Use of Auxiliary

Aiming Point.
___________________________________________________________________
61001. Sectors of Fire a. Level or Uniformly Sloping Ground
In the defense, machine gun squads are assigned sec- (1) Heavy gun
tors of fire, the inner limits of which are usually, but (a) Direction. The gunner lays the gun in the direc-
not always, the bands of grazing fire placed along the tion of the FPL or zero line and zeroes the dial.
FPL. The sector of fire should not exceed 800 mils
(45 degrees). The machine gun fire unit is responsible (b) Elevation. The gunner selects an aiming point on
for engaging the enemy within its sector, subjecting the FPL or zero line at a range of approximately 600
him to fire as he approaches, and finally forcing him meters (see figure 6-36). The assistant gunner mea-
to pass through coordinated bands of grazing fire sures the angle of quadrant elevation by means of an
before he can make his assault. When the sector of M2 compass or gunner’s quadrant.
fire does not include an FPL, a zero line is used. It is (2) Medium machine guns on tripods
desirable that the zero line approximately bisect the
sector, and that it points toward a clearly defined land- (a) Direction. The gunner centers the traversing
mark in the area. hand wheel mechanism and zeroes the traversing
micrometer. Upon determining along which limit of
the sector the FPL is to lie, the gunner sets the travers-
61002. Methods of Laying Final Protective ing slide toward that end of the traversing bar which is
Lines opposite the direction of the FPL. He then lifts the
On level or uniformly sloping ground up to a range of rear legs of the tripod and aligns the muzzle in the
600 meters, (7.62mm, with the M240G) the center of approximate direction of the line. By doing this, he
the cone of fire does not rise above 1 meter. The obtains the maximum angle of traverse away from the
entire cone of fire does not rise more than 1.8 meters. FPL in the direction of the targets in his sector.
The length of the forward half of the beaten zone (50 NOTE
meters) is added to the range (600 meters) in comput-
ing the total possible danger space on level or uni- Directional laying of the gun to the left re-
formly sloping ground; approximately 650 meters. quires that the traversing slide be set to the
However, level ground or ground that slopes uni- right of the zero mark on the traversing bar,
formly for 600 meters is not often available. Two and vice versa. For all readings of the travers-
cases are given in the following paragraphs to illus- ing bar scale, the left edge of the traversing
trate the different types of terrain on which FPLs may slide is used as an index.
be placed and the methods of laying the gun for eleva-
tion and direction to get the maximum amount of If a zero line is used instead of an FPL, the gunner
grazing fire in each case. centers the traversing slide at zero on the traversing
Figure 6-36. Method of Laying When the Ground is Level or Uniformly Sloping.
6-48 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
bar scale. He then lifts the rear legs of the tripod and c. Dead Space. Dead space, as discussed in this
aligns the gun on the designated line. The traversing section, is that portion of the FPL that cannot be cov-
bar reading of zero is indicated on the range card. ered by grazing fire. Streams, ravines, and small
depressions in the ground may allow passage under
(b) Elevation. The gunner lays the gun on an aim- the grazing fire along the FPL. This dead space must
ing point on the FPL or zero line at a range of approx- be covered by other weapons (see figure 6-38). The
imately 600 meters. He notes the sign and the first location of dead space along the FPL should be accu-
number whose graduation is visible above the elevat- rately determined. This can be done by walking the
ing hand wheel on the elevating screw scale, then trace of the FPL. Dead space exists any time the cen-
obtains the number on the elevating micrometer dial ter mass of a man’s chest drops below the line of aim.
toward which the indicator is pointing. A combina- If personnel are unable to move beyond the gun posi-
tion of these numbers, when replaced on the gun, tion, observation of fire both from behind the gun and
allows the gun to be laid for the same elevation. from the flank will assist in the location of dead
space. (See appendix G for more detail.)
b. Irregularly Sloping Ground
(1) Direction.The gunner lays the gun by sighting in d. Laying in the FPL. Specific details concerning
the desired direction, as previously described. laying in an FPL are contained in appendix G.
(2) Elevation. The gunner selects an aiming point on 61003. Rates of Fire on the Final
the ground and near the break in the uniform slope, and Protective Line
with a sight setting of the range to the selected point,
lays the gun on that point and elevates it 2 mils by When the signal to fire the FPL is received, the gun-
means of the elevating hand wheel. See figure 6-37. ner immediately begins firing on the FPL at the rapid
Figure 6-37. Method of Laying When There is a Break in the Uniform Slope
(For Ranges Less Than 600 Meters).
Figure 6-38. Dead Space.

___________________________________________________________________
rate for 2 minutes. From the 2-minute mark until the 61101. Orientation
signal to cease fire is given, the gunner fires at the
sustained rate of fire, unless otherwise directed. A dot is drawn to signify the position of the gun. In
order that higher headquarters can determine where
the gun is located on the ground, the sketch is oriented
61004. Laying the Gun for a Principal (see figures 6-39 and 6-40). The gun position can be
Direction of Fire positively located by an 8-digit grid coordinate.
To engage a PDF, you are allowed to traverse and Finally, the range card is signed by writing down the
search over the entire dangerous avenue of approach, gun number, unit designation, and date. For security
so the PDF is generally in the center of the sector. reasons, no higher unit designation than the company
Lay the gun on the near end of the PDF and take the is shown. A separate range card is made for an alter-
direction reading. Laying for elevation is accom- nate position. The cards are clearly marked, indicat-
plished by firing the PDF and adjusting the center of ing either primary or alternate position.
impact onto the near end of the avenue of approach.
The gun is then fired employing traverse and search
to cover the entire target. The number of mils of 61102. Recording Information
traverse and search necessary to cover the target
As the firing data is obtained, using any combination
should be recorded on the range card and a firing
of the methods previously described, it is recorded on
sequence established.
the range card. Particular attention is paid to the final
protective fires, either the FPL or the PDF, whichever
Section 11 is assigned. This is the single most important piece of
Range Cards information of concern to superiors. Figure 6-39
shows a range card with an FPL and firing data
recorded using the T&E method only. Figure 6-40
A range card is a rough sketch or drawing which serves depicts a range card with a PDF and data recorded
as both a record of firing data and a document for using a combination of traversing and elevating and
defensive fire planning. Each gun makes a range card field expedient methods (stakes).
in duplicate using the available Standard Range Card
form (DA Form 5517-R). See figure 6-39. In the event ● An FPL is drawn as a heavy line, shaded to signify
that a gun crew does not have this standard form, the grazing fire (see figure 6-39). Gaps are left in the
range card should be drawn on any material available. heavy line to indicate dead space. The range is
One copy remains at the gun position as a record of fir- recorded to the near and far ends of the dead space
ing data. The gunner uses the card to recall the data to and to the maximum extent of graze along the FPL.
fire on predetermined targets and as an aid in estimat- The firing data needed to engage this target and the
ing ranges to other targets during good visibility. The magnetic azimuth (measured with a compass) is
other copy is sent to the next higher headquarters (usu- written on the range card. Although the range cards
ally the company), who use it to organize the defense are not required to be drawn to scale, the magnetic
and prepare a fire plan sketch. Regardless of the length azimuth will aid the higher headquarters to do so if
of time the gun crew expects to occupy a position, necessary.
preparation of a range card begins immediately. Revi- ● The PDF is drawn as a solid line with an arrow, and
sions and improvements are made later as necessary. the range is recorded to the near end of the avenue
To construct a range card, the sketch first must be ori- of approach. The firing data and a magnetic azi-
ented, then the data obtained must be recorded. muth are also written in. See figure 6-40.
6-50 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 6-39. Standard Range Card Form.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-39. Standard Range Card Form—Continued.

6-52 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 6-40. Range Card With a Principal Direction of Fire.

___________________________________________________________________
● Sector limits are designated by dashed lines and position. A defilade position is one in which the gun
named either the right or left sector limit. The firing and crew are hidden from enemy observation by an
data is recorded. The elevation reading from the intervening land mass called a mask. A position offers
T&E is recorded when using the T&E method. It is partial defilade when the mask offers some protection
shown in figure 6-34. The elevation data for the against direct fire but the gunner can engage targets
field expedient method is based on the placement using direct lay. Partial defilade positions are desir-
of the stakes and is not recorded on the card. The able when the mission cannot be accomplished from a
sector limits in this example are also based on the defilade position. See figure 6-41.
limiting stakes.
● Other targets of tactical significance are predeter- The physical factors that effect the ability to bring fire to
mined, then sketched and recorded on the range bear on a target from a defilade position are the range to
card. the target, the trajectory of the round, and the height of
● The targets are numbered consecutively from the the mask between the gun and target. The MK-19, with
FPL. The FPL is always target number 1. When a its relatively high trajectory, is the best-suited machine
principal direction of fire is assigned, targets are gun for employment from a defilade position.
numbered starting from either side.
To engage a target from defilade positions, the target
must be identified and the fire adjusted by an observer
Section 12 who sees the target. The gun crew must know direc-
Firing From Defilade Position tion, elevation, and mask clearance.
Firing from a defilade position is often most effective

To achieve maximum accuracy and effective fire, a in a defensive situation in which the gun or guns can
machine gun must be employed using direct lay. be carefully laid and fires registered on likely targets.
However, at times the tactical situation may make it In this manner, the MK-19 can be employed effec-
desirable to employ a machine gun from a defilade tively in a reverse-slope defense.
Figure 6-41. Minimum and Maximum Position Defilade, Partial Defilade, and Direct Lay Areas.
6-54 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
61201. Defilade Position 61203. Laying the Gun for Direction

a. Advantages. A defilade position offers the fol- a. Direct Alignment Method. The observer posts
lowing advantages: himself on the gun-target line and in a position where
he can see the target. He aligns the gun approxi-
● The gun and crew have cover and concealment. mately by having the gunner shift the tripod. The gun-
● The crew has some freedom of movement in and ner then loosens the traversing slide and, directed by
around the position. the observer, moves the gun right or left until it is
● Control and supply are facilitated. aligned on the target.
● The smoke and flash of the gun may be concealed. b. Use of an Aiming Point. A prominent land-
mark visible to the gunner through his sights is
b. Disadvantages. A defilade position has the fol- selected as an aiming point (see figure 6-42). An aim-
lowing disadvantages: ing point on the gun-target line and at an equal or
● Rapidly moving ground targets are not easily greater range than the target is desirable; however, an
engaged because adjustment of fire must be made aiming point on the mask can be used.
through an observer. When the aiming point is on the gun-target line, lay the
● Targets close to the mask often cannot be engaged. gun on the aiming point, thereby aligning it on the target.
When the aiming point is not on the gun-target line,
61202. Selecting a Firing Position measure the deflection by means of binocular or com-
pass. This measured deflection is laid off with the gun.
The platoon or section leader indicates the approxi- c. Aiming Stake Method. When no natural aim-
mate location of the gun. The squad leader selects the ing point is available, an aiming stake may be set out,
exact position. To select a position in minimum posi- and the gun aligned on the target as described in the
tion defilade, the squad leader, knowing the approxi- preceding paragraph.
mate height above the ground of the gunner’s eyes
when the gunner is in position behind the gun, moves d. Map and Compass Method. Locate the gun
up the slope until, sighting from that height, he has the position and target on a map and draw a line between
target in view above the mask. He then moves down the two points. Orient the map to the terrain and place
the slope, sighting from the same height, to the point the line of sight of the compass along the gun-target
at which the target is again masked. He marks this line drawn on the map. The magnetic azimuth indi-
point as the gun position. He may use a cleaning rod, cated by the compass index is announced to the guns
on which the correct sighting height has been noted, as the direction of lay (see figure 6-43). Employing
as an aid in selecting the position and to make the this method in conjunc-tion with the infantry plotting
selected position. board and terrain profiling techniques permits the
machine gun to be employed from maximum defilade
While the squad leader selects the position, the gun positions delivering indirect fire and allows the
crew examines equipment and mounts the gun under observer to move off the gun-target line. See appendi-
cover. Upon the squad leader’s signal, the crews move ces E and H and paragraph 61207 in this chapter for
the guns to the selected firing positions. detailed instructions.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-42. Aiming Point Method.
61204. Laying the Gun for Elevation read from the aiming point down to the base of the
target is 12 mils. The sight is set at 1,300 meters and
The gun can be laid for elevation using the aiming the gun is laid on the aiming point. The muzzle is then
point method or by using the appropriate firing tables, depressed 12 mils.
which includes the computed and measured quadrant
elevation methods. b. Using the Firing Tables
a. Aiming Point Method. An aiming point from (1) Angle of elevation (A&E). A straight line between
the gun position is selected, preferably at a point at a the chamber of the gun and the target is called the line
greater range and higher elevation than the target. The of sight (see figure 6-44). The bullet begins its flight
range to the target is determined. The leader, using in prolongation of the axis of the bore. However,
binoculars, measures the vertical angle in mils from because of the action of gravity and air resistance, it
the aiming point to the base of the target. He then lays falls in a gradual curve. As a result, it is necessary to
the gun on the aiming point with the sight setting to elevate the axis of the bore above the line of site to hit
hit the target, and directs the gunner to manipulate the a target at a given range. The vertical angle above the
gun through the number of mils measured. For exam- line of site through which the axis of the bore is raised
ple: The range to a target is 1,300 meters. The angle so that the bullet will carry to the target is called the
6-56 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
is aimed above the horizontal, and negative (minus)

whenever the gun is aimed below the horizontal. The
quadrant elevation is the algebraic sum of the angle of
elevation and angle of site; that is, if the angle of site
is positive, it is added to the angle of elevation; if the
angle of site is negative, it is subtracted from the
angle of elevation.
(a) Quadrant of Elevation When Gun and Target

are on the Same Horizontal Plane. The target is a
range of 1,000 meters and on the same horizontal
plane as the gun. Therefore, elevate the gun to form
an angle of 16 mils with the line of site (since +16
mils is the angle of elevation for a range of 1,000
meters). (See fig. 6-44 [1].) The angle of sight is 0,
because the line of site coincides with the horizontal;
therefore, the quadrant elevation is +16 mils (the alge-
braic sum of the angle of elevation [+16] and the
angle of site [0]).
Figure 6-43. Map and Compass Method.
(b) Quadrant of Elevation When the Target is
Higher Than the Gun. The target is at a range of 1,000
meters and at greater elevation than the gun (see fig-
angle of elevation. Thus, the angle of elevation is
ure 6-44 [2]). To hit the target, fire the gun at an angle
always positive (plus), is constant for any given range,
equal to the angle of elevation for the range (+ 16
and increases as the range increases. For example: to
mils) plus the angle of site. The angle of site is +5
hit a target at a range of 1,000 meters with the
mils; therefore, lay the gun with a quadrant elevation
M240G, elevate the gun so that the bore forms an
of +16 and +5, or a total of +21 mils.
angle of +17 mils with the line of site.
(c) Quadrant of Elevation When the Target is Lower
(2) When the gun and target are
Angle of site (AS).
Than the Gun. The target is at a range of 1,000 meters
not at the same elevation, an additional angle must be
but at a lesser elevation than the gun (see figure 6-44
taken into consideration. This angle is the vertical
[3]). To hit the target, fire the gun at an angle equal to
angle formed by the line of site and a horizontal line
the angle of elevation for the range (+ 16 mils) minus
through the chamber of the gun. It is called the angle
the angle of site. The angle of site is -5 mils; there-
of site. When the target is at a higher elevation than
fore, lay the gun with a quadrant elevation of +16 and
the gun, the angle of site is positive (plus). When the
-5, or a total of +11 mils. Figure 6-44 illustrates a case
target is lower than the gun, the angle of site is nega-
where the target is at a range of 1,000 meters and the
tive (minus). See figure 6-44.
angle of site is -20 mils. Since the angle of elevation
(3) Quadrant elevation (QE). The angle of quadrant is +16 mils, the quadrant elevation is the combination
elevation is the angle formed by the line extending of +16 mils and -20, or an algebraic sum of -4 mils.
through the axis of the bore toward the target and a Negative or minus angles of quadrant elevation are
horizontal line through the gun (see figure 6-44). The not common, but may be encountered on certain types
quadrant elevation is positive (plus) whenever the gun of terrain.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-44. Angles of Elevation, Angle of Site, and

Quadrant Elevation.
6-58 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
c. Computed Quadrant Elevation Method above the gun-mask line. Mask clearance can be
(Heavy Gun) checked after the gun has been laid on the target by
Determine the range to the target by the most accu- depressing the muzzle of the gun 2 mils and sighting
rate means available and obtain the corresponding along the lower edge of the barrel in line with the axis
angle of elevation from the firing tables. Determine of the bore. If the sight taken clears the mask, mask
the angle of site by use of the aiming circle or the bin- clearance exists.
ocular. When the binocular is used, determine the b. By Use of Firing Tables. The range to the mask
angle of site by measuring in mils the vertical interval is determined and the corresponding angle of eleva-
between the target and the estimated horizontal. tion for mask clearance is found in the firing tables.
In estimating the horizontal, assume the distant The range corresponding to this angle of elevation is
horizon to be at an angle of site of zero, or at the set on the gun sight. If the line of aim through the
same elevation as the gun position. Determine the sights clears the mask, mask clearance exists.
angle of quadrant elevation by algebraically adding
this data. Place the quadrant elevation on the gun 61206. Adjustment of Fire
with the M2 compass.
Under field conditions, even the most practical meth-
d. Measured Quadrant Elevation Method (Heavy ods of quickly laying the gun on the target will not
Gun) normally result in an initial burst on target. Rapid
adjustment of fire on target is essential. When possi-
NOTE
ble, the gun or guns are registered on one or more
These methods may also be used with the likely targets and the data from the T&E mechanism
medium and general purpose machine guns with recorded. In adjusting fires, the observer can shift
slight variation. from one of these known targets.
Locate the gun in partial defilade and lay it on the tar- By locating himself on or near the gun-target line, the
get by direct laying methods. Then measure the quad- observer simplifies adjustments. When not located on
rant elevation with the M2 compass. the gun-target line, the observer uses the visual
method, making all corrections as if he were on the
Move the gun into position defilade and place the gun-target line. The observer makes all corrections in
measured quadrant elevation on the gun. For each mils, using the WERM formula as necessary (see
meter difference in elevation between the position in paragraph 61302). Lateral adjustments for the gun are
partial defilade and the firing position, add 1 mil to simple, since one click on the T&E mechanism equals
the quadrant elevation when firing at a range of 1,000 1 mil of adjustment. Range adjustments for the guns
meters, 1/2 mil when firing at 2,000 meters, etc. are more difficult, requiring experience to know the
proper mil corrections.
61205. Determining Mask Clearance Adjustment of fire must be bold, aggressive, and con-
After the gun has been laid, it is necessary to deter- tinuous. Creeping fire should be avoided. The initial
mine whether or not the entire cone of fire will clear burst of fire should be long enough to ensure that the
the mask, if mask clearance is not obvious. observer sees it. When time permits, fires can be
adjusted using a plotting board and the firing tables
a. Visual Method. When the range to the mask is contained in appendices A, B, and C. See appendices
not more than 300 meters, mask clearance will exist E and F for more on the use of the M17 plotting board
when the axis of the bore is elevated 2 mils or more and its use for adjusting machine gun fire.
___________________________________________________________________
61207. Constructing a Terrain Profile structing a terrain profile will enable the gunner to
obtain that fixed, flanking enfilade, grazing fire. A
A profile or side view (cross section) of the ground terrain profile is also useful when employing
along a selected line or direction can be used to machine guns to deliver indirect fire on a target
determine where friendly and enemy forces can see (see figure 6-45). To construct a terrain profile,
each other. It can also be used to plan fires; i.e., first locate your position on the map, and deter-
where to place the guns to obtain grazing fire, mine the direction of fire, or profile line. See fig-
where dead space is located, etc. In short, con- ure 6-46.
Figure 6-45. Profile Example.
Figure 6-46. Profile Line (Map Contour Interval is 10 Feet).

6-60 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Place the edge of a lined piece of paper along the pro- manner. If a profile of the entire frontage is required,
file line (direction of fire). All points of known eleva- take several profile lines and apply the data to the map.
tion are tick marked on the edge of the paper; the
points of known elevation are the contour lines. (Any
paper with evenly spaced horizontal lines, such as Section 13
graph or notebook paper, may be used. The wider the Machine Gunner's Mathematics
spacing of the line the greater the vertical exaggera-
tion in the profile; however, this does not affect the
information.) See figure 6-47. 61301. The Mil (A Unit of Angular
Measure)
Draw perpendiculars down across the horizontal lines
for each marked point, and identify the high and low The machine gunner bases much of his work on the
points along the profile. See figure 6-47. measurement and application of angles. The width of
a target, for example, is measured by constructing an
The last step is to connect all the points with a smooth angle which has imaginary lines from the flanks of the
curve. See figure 6-48. target to the gunner’s position (observer’s position).
Based on the terrain profile in figure 6-49, it is possible Angles can be measured in degrees, mils, and other
to obtain fixed, flanking-enfilade, grazing fire out to units. In most cases, the mil is used for calculating fir-
maximum effective range by placing a machine gun ing data. The mil is a subdivision of a complete cir-
squad at about 80 meters of elevation. The rest of the cle. There are 6,400 mils in a circle or approximately
defense can now be laid in on this anchor point. Pro- 17.8 mils in 1 degree. Conversely, 1 mil equals
files for the other guns are con-structed in the same .05625 degrees.
Figure 6-47. Marking of Elevation.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-48. Terrain Profiling.

6-62 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
known. For example, in figure 6-50, the distance

from B to C measures 1 mil. If the range from A to
B and C is 1,000 units (meters, yards, feet, etc.),
the distance between B and C will be 1 unit
(meters, yards, feet, etc.).
While the mil is not an exact mathematical calcula-
tion, the degree of error involved, in angles less than
350 mils, is considered negligible. For example, if the
range to an enemy position is 1,000 meters and the
position measures 25 mils wide, it follows that the
enemy position is 25 meters wide.
It should be remembered that the number of mils in
an angle can be determined in several ways. As pre-
viously discussed in chapter 5, section 4, the gun-
ner may use binoculars, a compass, the traversing
and deviating mechanism, or by using the hand/fin-
ger method.
61302. The Mil Formula (WERM Formula)

Combining the above principles, a useful equation
called the WERM formula has been developed.
Width = Range x Mils
This may be expressed in several different ways math-
Figure 6-49. Sample Terrain Profile. ematically. The most useful are:
W=RxM
R= W/M
Because a constant mathematical relationship
where:
exists between angles and sides in a right-angled
triangle, the mil is particularly useful in determin- W = Width in meters
ing lateral distance when range is known and in R = Range in thousands of meters
determining range when the lateral distance is M = Mils
Figure 6-50. The Mil.

___________________________________________________________________
Any one of the elements of the formula can be deter- As stated previously, by knowing any two of the three
mined knowing the other two. For example, in fig- variables in the WERM formula, the third may be cal-
ure 6-51, an observer desires to know the distance culated. In figure 6-52, an object is on the line of fire
between two objects (A and B). He estimates the between the gun and the target. To determine if there
range to be 1,200 meters, and he reads the angle is mask clearance, the gunner would estimate the
AOB with his binocular to be 40 mils. We know the range to the obstacle, measure the height of the obsta-
following: cle in mils, and determine the height in meters by
using the formula W = R x M.
R = 1,200/1,000=1.2 (thousands of meters)
M = 40 mils;
In figure 6-53, an observer desires to determine the
W=?
range to a target without the use of a map. The target
Substituting in the formula: W = 1.2 x 40 or is an armored personnel carrier known to be 10 meters
W = 48 meters long. The gunner measures the width of the vehicle to
Figure 6-51. Estimating Distance Between Two Objects.
Figure 6-52. Estimating Mask Clearance.
Figure 6-53. Estimating Range Using Known Width.

6-64 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
be 4 mils and determines the range by using the for- Machine guns used to defend march columns should
mula, R = W/M. be interspersed in the convoy, with emphasis on the
lead and rear elements. See figure 6-54.
Section 14 Target selection and engagement control depend upon

Antiaircraft Gunnery visual means. The sites selected for the guns must
provide maximum observation and unobstructed sec-
tors of fire. Units furnished M2 .50 cals in sufficient
Individual M2 .50 cals can provide units with a self-
numbers should site them within mutual support dis-
defense capability against hostile low-flying, low-per-
tances of 90 to 360 meters. Each gun is assigned a pri-
formance aircraft. These guns are employed in the air
mary and secondary sector of fire. Weapon crews
defense role as part of the unit’s local defense. The
maintain constant vigilance in their primary sectors of
machine guns are not components of an integrated and
fire, regardless of the sector in which the guns are
coordinated air defense system. Normally, the follow-
actually engaged. For detailed coverage of aircraft
ing rules for engagement apply:
recognition and identification, see FM 44-80, Visual
● Attack aircraft identified as hostile. Aircraft Recognition.
● Attack aircraft committing a hostile act.
The M2 .50 cal is provided to forward area units on a
Unless otherwise directed, hostile aircraft within table of allowance basis. Issue is determined by tacti-
range of the gun (approximately 800 meters maxi- cal considerations and type of unit (artillery, armor,
mum effective range) should be engaged. Surveil- engineer, infantry) concerned.
lance, reconnaissance, and liaison aircraft; troop
carriers; helicopters and drones are typical targets. 61402. Target Course Definitions
a. General. See figure. 6-55.
61401. Employment
(1) Course line. The line along the course in which
Employment of machine guns used for air defense is
guided by the following defense design factors: the target is flying.
● The mission of air defense machine gun defense is (2) Midpoint. The point along the course of any tar-
to impose maximum attrition upon the attacking get at which the target is nearest the gun position.
enemy.
(3) Approaching leg. That part of the course in
● Machine gun defenses are designed to combat low-
which the target is flying toward midpoint.
flying, low-performance aircraft.
● Defense design should produce an equally balanced (4) Receding leg. That part of the course in which
defense that is effective in all directions, unless a the target is flying away from midpoint.
forced route of aircraft approach exists. Defense
design should weigh those routes of approach (5) Angle of approach. The angle formed by the gun,
which are likely to be used. present position of the target, and the course line. The
● Machine guns should be sited so that the maximum angle of approach at midpoint is always 1,600 mils.
number of targets can be engaged, continuous fire
can be delivered, and the most likely routes of b. Target Course Names. Aircraft may fly any of
approach are covered. the following types of courses (see figure 6-56):
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-54. March Column with Four M2 .50 Cals (Added).
Figure 6-55. Diagram Showing Midpoint, Approaching Leg, and Receding Leg.
6-66 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 6-56. Target Course Names.
(1) Level. In a level course, the target is flying at a 61403. Requirements for a Hit
constant altitude.
To engage enemy aircraft effectively, the gunner must
(2) Diving. In a diving course, the target is flying accurately estimate the future position of the target
with altitude decreasing. and point his gun in such a manner that the fired
(3) Climbing. In a climbing course, the target is fly- rounds and the aircraft will arrive at the estimated
ing with altitude increasing. point at the same time. The problem can be compared
to that of a machine gun firing up a hill. Laying the
(4) Incoming. An incoming course is one in which gun in elevation is accomplished by tracking the tar-
the target will fly directly over the gun. get. In figure 6-57, despite the fact that the vehicle is
(5) Outgoing. An outgoing course is one in which moving along the side of a hill, the machine gunner
the target is flying away from the gun. concerns himself with only a one-lead angle mea-
sured along the slope of the hill. If the vehicle is
(6) Crossing. A crossing course is any course not
replaced by air space (see figure 6-58), it is apparent
incoming or outgoing. that the gunner’s problem in figure 6-58 is identical to
(7) Directly at the gun. This type of course is one in that in figure 6-57. (There is a faster speed in the case
which the target is flying toward the pintle center of of the aircraft.) To hit the target, the gunner must ful-
the gun. fill two requirements–line and lead.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-57. Lead Angle, Moving Ground Target.
Figure 6-58. Lead Angle, Aerial Target.

6-68 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
a. Line Requirement for a Hit. The line require- Lead for specific midpoint ranges may be calculated
ment demands that the gunner cause the round to on the basis of target speed. For a midpoint range of
intersect the target course line. The vertical mass of 460 meters, the midpoint lead required is 60 mils or
the target affords the gunner a small angular (eleva- 27 meters for each 100 miles per hour of target speed.
tion) tolerance in fulfilling the line requirement. The The length of the target is a convenient unit of mea-
size of this angle varies directly with the diameter of sure in establishing initial leads. The estimated lead is
the fuselage and inversely with the range to the target. divided by the length of the target to determine the
number of apparent target lengths which the gunner
b. Lead Requirement for a Hit. The lead require- will lead the target. Midpoint leads expressed in
ment demands that the gunner cause the round to meters, mils, and apparent target lengths for selected
intersect the target. Angular tolerance in fulfilling the targets, target speeds, and midpoint ranges are con-
lead requirement is provided by the horizontal mass of tained in figure 6-59.
the target. The magnitude of this angle varies directly
with the length of the target fuselage and the sine of As the angle of approach increases up to midpoint, the
the angle of approach. It varies inversely with the amount of lead necessary also increases. When the
range to the target. target passes midpoint and continues on the receding
leg, the amount of lead decreases, while the angle of
61404. Lead approach continues to increase. The amount of lead
necessary at midpoint is called full lead. Figure 6-59
The gunner has no sighting devices for setting initial is based on targets at or near midpoint.
leads on the M2 .50 cal on the M3 or vehicle mount.
The discussion in this paragraph presents the magni- Figure 6-60 gives the fraction of full lead necessary
tude of leads in antiaircraft firing. for various angles of approach.
Prior to opening fire, the gunner estimates the amount To simplify the lead problem, the following rules may
his gun will lead the target. This estimate is based be used as a guide in determining initial leads:
upon an understanding of the magnitude of the lead ● Crossing courses:
required under varying conditions of target speed, tar- P When the target is on the approaching or reced-
get range, and angle of approach. For example, a tar- ing leg, open fire with a three-fourths full esti-
get, traveling 600 miles per hour, flies a crossing mated lead.
course that causes it to pass at a midpoint range of 460 P When the target is at midpoint, open fire with a
meters from the gun position. To hit the aircraft at this full estimated lead.
midpoint, the gunner aims and fires his weapon at a ● Directly at the gun course: Open fire with no lead.
point on the target course line 165 meters ahead of the ● All courses: Observe tracers and make corrections
target. (The time of flight for a caliber .50 round for a accordingly.
range of 460 meters is 0.6 second. A speed of 600
miles per hour is approximately 275 meters per sec-
ond. During the time of flight of the projectile, the tar- 61405. Target Engagement
get will have traveled 0.6 x 275 or 165 meters.) Using a. Sequence of Events. The following are the
the mil relation rule, with a range of 460 meters and gunner’s actions to bring the target under fire:
165 meters as the distance traveled by the aircraft, the
lead required to hit the target at midpoint is 360 mils. ● Estimate the necessary lead.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-59. Midpoint Leads.
● Correct the lead until hits are obtained, using tracer

observation.
b. Techniques. The gunner fires continuously

throughout the engagement. Since the large amount of
smoke created by continuous fire tends to restrict visi-
bility, the gunner keeps his head and eyes high above
the gun to observe the tracers. When there is doubt as
to the tracers positions, he increases his lead. It is
important that the gunner initially opens fire with an
adequate lead, and once established, his tracking is
Figure 6-60. Amount of Lead Necessary for
Various Angles of Approach. not reversed. If his initial lead is too great, the track-
ing rate is slowed and he allows the target to catch up
with his tracers.
The dispersion cone is excessive when the gun is fired
● Elevate the weapon until the axis of the bore is as a free weapon. To offset this, the gunner seizes the
aligned with the target-course line and apply the grips firmly with both hands and braces the gun with
estimated lead. his body. When firing from the vehicle mount, the
● Open fire and observe only the tracers in the vicin- gunner stands erect and makes changes in elevation
ity of the target. by moving his hands and arms up and down. For a
● Elevate or depress the gun until line shots are change in azimuth, he shifts his feet and moves
obtained. around the mount.
6-70 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 6-61. Superimposition.
61406. Tracer Observation called the illusion of curvature. Once a round is fired, it
moves in a straight line directly away from the gun.
To make adjustments during firing, the gunner must Gravity causes the trajectory to curve down toward the
know the location of the round with respect to the tar- earth; but under no conditions, other than wind or drift,
get. Tracer ammunition provides this information. does the round move to the left or right. The illusion of
However, the gunner must be trained to observe tracers curvature occurs because the gunner is concentrating
correctly to produce a hit. Where target courses and tar- upon a moving reference point, the target. As the tracer
get speeds can be fixed, valid lead data is obtained from moves along its path, the distance between the target and
a tracer observer located down course from the gun the tracer is reduced to the point that the eye relates the
(see FM 44-2, Air Defense Artillery Employment two separate motions. The illusion of curvature then
Automatic Weapons M42/M55). Under normal condi- takes place. The point of maximum apparent curvature is
tions, valid sensings are obtained only if the tracer referred to as the tracer hump. Here, the tracer path
observer is stationed as close to the gun as possible. appears to curve sharply into a direction opposite from
a. Principles that in which the target is moving. The gunner must
focus his attention on the immediate vicinity of the tar-
(1) Superimposition. In observing tracers, the gunner get, just as if he were looking through a telescope with a
utilizes the principle of superimposition. By aligning restricted field of view (see figure 6-63). The gunner’s
the tracer with the target, the gunner compares the (observer’s) vision must be localized to the immediate
range from his eye to the target and from his eye to vicinity of the target.
the tracer. In figure 6-60, it can be seen that regardless
of the range to the target, he can compare the range to
the tracer and the range to the target as long as the two
are superimposed. Lead can be judged on the basis of
these comparisons. Because of the common tendency
of gunners to attempt to judge lead when tracers are
not aligned with the target, the first basic principle of
tracer observation must be stressed. Fulfill the line
requirement before attempting to judge lead.
(2) Localized vision. In figure 6-61, the tracer is shown
as a single spot in the sky, moving directly away from
the gunner’s eye. In actual practice, the tracer does not
appear as a fixed spot, but rather as a curved path (see
figure 6-62). This apparent curvature of the tracer path is Figure 6-62. Illusion of Curvature.
___________________________________________________________________
(3) Read nose-to-tail. In certain types of target

courses, particularly incoming and outgoing, the
tracer may intersect the gunner’s line of vision to the
target in two places. Here, the gunner first sees the
tracer passing the target in a tail-to-nose direction.
Lead information, based upon a sensing of a tracer
that appears to pass the target in this direction, is
invalid. The target actually crosses the tracer path
only once, entering the path nose first and leaving tail
last. Because of the illusion of curvature, the gunner
sees this passage when the tracer appears to float by
the target in a nose-to-tail direction. Lead when the
tracer passes the target nose-to-tail.
b. Line Information
(1) Level and nonlevel crossing courses
Figure 6-63. Localized Vision. (a) High. When the tracer is above the target course
line. See figure 6-64A.
Figure 6-64. Line and Lead Information, Based on Tracer Sensings.

6-72 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
(b) Low. When the tracer is below the target course (2) Astern. If the tracer passes between the gunner’s
line. See figure 6-64B. eye and the target, the sensing is astern or too little
lead. See figure 6-64D.
(c) Line. When the tracer intersects a line from the
gunner’s eyes, through the target to infinity. This line (3) Hit. If the tracer path terminates in the target
might be described as the gunner’s line of vision itself, the sensing is lead correct, a hit. See figure 6-66.
through the target to infinity (see figures 6-64C and 6-
64D). In referring to a tracer that is aligned with the
target, the term line is omitted, and only the lead sens- Section 15
ing is mentioned. (The tracer must be aligned with the Firing Positions
target before a lead sensing can be made.)
(2) Other Courses.For incoming, outgoing, directly As time permits, machine gun crews prepare primary,
at the gun, and very steep diving courses, off-line alternate, and supplementary firing positions that pro-
sensings change from high or low to left and right. vide cover and concealment without restricting effec-
See figure 6-65. tive fire.
c. Lead Information In any of the positions described in this section, the

gun is lowered by digging firing platforms where the
(1) Ahead. If the tracer intersects the gunner’s line gun will be placed. The platforms must not be so low
of vision beyond the target; i.e., if a portion of the that the gun cannot be traversed across its sectors of
tracer’s path is hidden by the target the round is fire. Lowering the gun reduces the height of frontal
ahead, the lead is too great. See figure 6-64C. cover needed.
Figure 6-65. Off-Line Tracer Sensings for Incoming, Outgoing,

Directly at the Gun, and Very Steep Diving Course.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure 6-67. T-Shaped Position;

Firing Primary Sector.
Figure 6-66. A Hit.
In a 3-man crew, the ammunition bearer digs a 1-man

fighting position to the flank where he can provide
security for the gun, observe and fire into the crew’s
primary and alternate sectors of fire, and also see the
Figure 6-68. Firing Secondary Sector.
gunner and assistant gunner. The ammunition bearer’s
position must be close enough to the gun position to
allow him to bring ammunition or replace one of the
gunners. When possible, the two positions are con-
nected by a crawl trench.
61501. T-Shaped Position

The T-shaped position is the preferred type of firing
position. This position provides primary and alternate
sectors of fire and cover to the front. The primary sec-
tor of fire is usually to the oblique so the gun can fire
lengthwise across the unit’s front. See figures 6-67, 6-
68, and 6-69.
With the M240G, the tripod is used on the side that
covers the primary sector of fire and the bipod legs
are used on the side that covers the secondary sector
of fire. When changing from primary to secondary
sectors, the machine gun is moved but the tripod stays Figure 6-69. Digging T-Shaped Position.
in place.
6-74 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Figure 6-70. No Secondary Section

(L-Shaped Position). Figure 6-72. Two-Hole Machine Gun Position.
The hole is dug about armpit deep. When frontal

cover is high and thick enough, the spoilage is used to
build flank and rear cover. Grenade sumps should be
located at the end of each leg of the position. When
only one sector of fire is assigned, only half the posi-
tion is dug. See figure 6-70.
61502. Horseshoe-Shaped Position

The open end of the horseshoe is toward the enemy.
This type of position allows for easy 180-degree
traverse across the front but provides less frontal
cover than the T-shaped position and less protection
against indirect fire than the 2-hole position. The fir-
ing platform is located within the horseshoe. Spoilage
is used to provide cover all around the position. See
figure 6-71.
61503. Two-Hole Position

This position uses two one-man fighting holes at 90-
degree angles. This position provides excellent pro-
tection for the gunner and assistant gunner but allows
Figure 6-71. Horseshoe-Shaped for only limited traverse of the gun. Each hole is dug
Machine Gun Position.
as a standard one-man hole. When switching from the
primary to the alternate sector of fire, the gunner and
the assistant gunner switch roles. See figure 6-72.
___________________________________________________________________
Section 16
Wire Communication
In the defense, wire communication is preferred over

the use of radios in controlling defensive fires because
it is more secure and less vulnerable to the problems
associated with the electro-magnetic spectrum such as
interruption or degradation as a result of weather con-
ditions. Machine gun positions, as key elements in the
defense, should be connected to leaders in the chain of
command, especially with the individual with author-
ity to order the firing of the final protective fires. Figure 6-73. Installation of the Wire Loop.
While wiremen and/or other communications person-
nel may be available to assist in wiring the gun posi- ● Keep the wire behind the individual positions.
tions, machine gunners should know how to conduct ● Tie the wire to a fixed object, or stake, near each
this task on their own. Once the defense has been set position and leave enough slack in the wire for con-
and the guns positioned, the gun section should be nections.
wired in immediately. ● Connect the two-wire tactical telephone at position
A to the wire loop. First, strip 1/2 inch of insulation
61601. Equipment off the two wires at each end of the wire loop.
Then, connect one of the wires from each end of
The following is a list of the gear and equipment nor- the wire loop to one binding post of this telephone
mally required to do this: and the other wire from each end of the loop to the
● WD-1/TT or WD-1A on reel, one each. other binding post. See figure 6-74.
● Operational 2-wire tactical field telephone, four
each.
● Tool equipment, TE-33.
● Site where field wire can be laid.
● Reel unit (RL-31E or CE-11), one each (as
required).
● Tag, four each, pre-prepared.
● Stake, four each (as required).
● Hammer, one each (as required).
61602. Installing a Field Wire Loop

Perform the following steps to install a field wire
loop:
● Lay out the field wire from position A to each posi-
tion in turn, until all positions are connected; com-
plete the loop by returning to position A. See figure Figure 6-74. Connection of the Wire Loop.
6-73.
6-76 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
● Connect the other telephones to the wire loop. Go and be heard, the wire loop is installed correctly. If
to each position and pick up the wire. Cut the insu- any position does not then the connections need to
lation on one conductor without cutting the wire be checked and the line tried again.
strands. Use the TL-13-A pliers or TL-29 knife.
Grasp the insulation on either side of the cut and
pull the insulation apart to expose 1/2 inch of wire
strands on each conductor. See figure. 6-75.
● Repeat these steps on the other conductor. Slide an
exposed 1/2 inch section of one conductor into one
binding post of the telephone. Slide the exposed 1/2
inch section of the other conductor into the other
binding post of the telephone. Repeat these steps
until each telephone is connected in the wire loop.
● Conduct a communications check. Use any tele-
phone connected to the wire loop to ring down the Figure 6-75. Connection of Other Telephones
circuit. If all positions ring, and are able to answer to the Wire Loop.
Appendix A
M60E3/M240G Firing Tables
Table I
Angles of Elevation, Dimension of Cone and Beaten Zone,

Angles of Fall, Time of Flight, and Drift—How to Use
The angle of elevation required to engage a target on For ranges not in even hundreds and for ranges not
flat or uniformly sloping ground is listed for the indi- tabulated, the desired information must be deter-
cated ranges. mined by interpolation.
The mil difference between two successive angles of Example: the range to the target is 1,000 meters. The
elevation has been calculated to permit subsequent angle of elevation is 16.2 mils. The difference between
changes in the quadrant elevation without recalculation. the AE of 900 meters and 1,000 meters is 3.1 mils. The
vertical 100 percent cone is 3.3 mils or 3.2 meters. The
The vertical 100 percent cone, effective 82 percent effective 82 percent beaten zone is 2 mils and 2 meters
beaten zone, angle of fall, and time of flight are listed wide as well as 50 meters long. The angle of fall is 33
to assist in determining effect on target. mils and the time of flight to the target is 2.11 seconds.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
A-2 MCWP 3-15.1
Table I

Cartridge, Ball, M59 FT 7.62-A-2
Effective 82% Beaten Zone

Vertical Angle Time
Angle of 100% of of
Range Elevation Difference Cone Width Length Fall Flight
m mil mil mil m mil m m mil sec
100 0.7 2.7 0.3 1 0.13
200 1.6 0.9 2.4 0.5 2 0.27
300 2.6 1.0 2.1 0.6 3 0.42
400 3.7 1.1 2.4 0.9 5 0.58
500 5.0 1.3 2.4 1.2 2 1 86 7 0.76
600 6.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 10 0.97
700 8.3 1.8 2.7 1.8 14 1.21
800 10.5 2.2 2.8 2.2 19 1.48
900 13.1 2.6 3.1 2.7 26 1.78
1000 16.2 3.1 3.3 3.2 2 2 50 33 2.11
1100 19.9 3.7 3.6 3.9 42 2.46
1200 24.1 4.2 3.8 4.5 51 2.83
1300 288 4.7 4.1 5.2 61 3.22
1400 34.0 5.2 4.4 6.0 72 3.63
1500 39.7 5.7 4.7 6.9 2 3 42 84 4.06
1600 45.9 6.2 5.1 7.9 97 4.51
1700 52.6 6.7 5.4 9.1 111 4.98
1800 59.9 7.3 5.9 10.5 128 5.37
1900 67.8 7.9 6.4 12.0 146 5.99
2000 76.4 8.6 7.0 13.8 2 4 42 166 6.54
2100 85.8 9.4 7.6 15.7 188 7.12
2200 96.1 10.3 8.4 18.0 213 7.73
2300 107.3 11.2 9.0 20.4 240 8.38
2400 119.4 12.1 10.0 23.4 271 9.06
2500 132.5 13.1 10.8 26.5 3 6 43 304 9.78
2600 146.8 14.3 11.9 30.3 341 10.54
2700 162.5 15.7 13.0 34.5 381 11.35
2800 179.9 17.4 14.4 39.4 425 12.25
2900 199.2 19.3 15.9 45.3 475 13.15
3000 220.6 21.4 17.6 51.8 3 9 46 527 14.15
3100 244.4 23.8 19.8 60.2 585 15.23
3200 271.1 26.7 22.1 69.4 648 16.41
3300 301.7 30.6 25.1 81.3 716 17.72
3400 337.7 36.0 28.5 95.1 790 19.20
3500 381.2 43.5 33.1 113.9 3 12 50 871 20.91
3600 437.4 56.2 39.1 138.2 962 23.04
3700 532.7 95.3 1088 26.42
3725 608.5 75.8 1167 28.96
____________________________________________________________________
Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery A-3
Table II
Overhead Fire—How to Use

Troop distance in column 1 is the distance in meters the heads of troops at the given troop distance. Mini-
from the gun to the friendly troops over whose heads mum angles of elevation are listed in column 2.
it is desired to fire.
Corresponding range in column 3 is the minimum
The quadrant elevation required to strike the ground range expressed in graduations on the rear sight that
upon which the troops stand, plus a definite angle of will give the required clearance. Both the exact and
safety gives the minimum quadrant elevation which even figures to the nearest 25 meters above are given.
can be fired, without danger, over the troops. When troops to be fired over are visible, the safety
angle can be measured by setting the corresponding
The safety angle varies with the range. The minimum range (even figures should be used).
quadrant elevation which can be fired with safety over
the heads of friendly troops comprises the following Example: Friendly troops are visible and at a distance
factors: of 700 meters from the gun. The gun is laid to hit the
target. Without disturbing the lay of the gun, the rear
● Safety angle (corresponding to troop distance). sight is set at 1,225 meters. In order that it be safe to
● Angle of elevation (corresponding to troop distance). fire, the line of aim must clear the troops.
● Angle of site.
Note: The current sight only displays a range up to
The safety angle plus the angle of elevation constitutes 1,800 meters. For ranges beyond 1,800 meters, the
the minimum angle of elevation which can be fired over procedures outlined in appendix F should be utilized.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
A-4 MCWP 3-15.1
Table II

1 2 3
Correspondence Range
Minimum
Troop Angle of Even Figure (To Nearest 25
Distance Elevation Difference Exact Figure Above)
meters mils mils meters meters
100 77.0 2006 2025
200 40.6 -36.4 1515 1525
300 29.5 -11.1 1314 1325
400 25.1 -4.4 1222 1225
500 23.3 -1.8 1182 1200
600 23.2 -0.1 1178 1200
700 25.0 1.8 1220 1225
800 27.9 2.9 1280 1300
900 31.5 3.6 1351 1375
1000 35.8 4.3 1432 1450
1100 41.2 5.4 1524 1525
1200 47.1 5.9 1618 1625
1300 53.9 6.8 1718 1725
1400 61.6 7.7 1821 1825
1500 70.0 8.4 1926 1950
1600 79.6 9.6 2034 2050
1700 90.0 10.4 2141 2150
1800 101.9 11.9 2252 2275
1900 114.7 12.8 2361 2375
2000 128.8 14.1 2472 2475
2100 144.2 15.4 2582 2600
2200 161.6 17.4 2694 2700
2300 181.3 19.7 2807 2825
2400 203.7 22.4 2921 2925
2500 228.5 24.8 3033 3050
2600 256.9 28.4 3147 3150
2700 289.2 32.3 3259 3275
2800 328.0 38.8 3373 3375
2900 375.5 47.5 3487 3500
3000 438.4 62.9 3601 3625
____________________________________________________________________
Table III
Mask Clearance—How to Use

Mask distance in column 1 is the distance in meters equals or exceeds the minimum quadrant eleva-
from the gun to the highest point of the mask. The tion, clearance exists.
minimum quadrant elevation which will clear a mask
is such that the lowest shot in the cone will just graze Corresponding range in column 3 is the mil angle of
the highest point on the mask. Such a quadrant eleva- required mask clearance expressed in graduations on
tion comprises the following factors: the rear sight. When the mask is visible, the required
mask clearance can be measured by setting the corre-
● Angle of clearance (corresponding to mask distance). sponding range on the rear sight.
● Angle of elevation (corresponding to mask distance).
● Angle of site to mask. Example: The mask is visible and is at a distance of
700 meters from the gun. The gun is laid to hit the tar-
The angle of clearance is based on the lower one-half get; without disturbing the lay of the gun, the rear
of the verticle dimension of the cone. The angle of sight is set at 810. If the line of aim clears the mask, it
clearance plus the angle of elevation constitute the is practicable to fire.
minimum angle of elevation which will afford clear-
ance at any given mask distance. Note: The current sight only displays a range up to
1,800 meters. A new sight is currently under develop-
Minimum angles of elevation are listed in col- ment. For ranges beyond 1,800 meters, the proce-
umn 2. If the quadrant elevation to the target dures outlined in appendix F should be utilized.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
A-6 MCWP 3-15.1
Table III
Mask Clearance
1 2 3
Minimum
Mask Angle of
Distance Elevation Difference Correspondence Range
Round UP
Meters Exact Figure Mils Mils Meters Nearest 10 Meters
100 2.41 3 1 289 290
200 3.37 4 1 370 370
300 4.47 5 1 454 460
400 5.57 6 1 538 540
500 6.7 7 1 625 630
600 8.67 8 1 717 720
700 8.56 9 1 810 810
800 12.94 13 4 896 900
900 15.76 16 3 986 990
1000 19.23 20 4 1082 1090
1100 22.71 23 3 1176 1180
1200 27.57 28 5 1274 1280
1300 32.44 33 5 1370 1370
1400 37.7 38 5 1465 1470
1500 43.54 44 6 1562 1570
1600 49.78 50 6 1658 1660
1700 56.68 57 7 1756 1760
1800 64.08 65 8 1853 1860
1900 72.35 73 8 1953 1960
2000 81.47 82 9 2054 2060
2100 91.56 92 10 2156 2160
2200 102.8 103 11 2260 2260
2300 114.80 115 12 2362 2370
2400 127.91 128 13 2465 2470
2500 142.36 143 15 2569 2570
2600 158.41 159 16 2674 2680
2700 176.44 177 18 2779 2780
2800 196.11 197 20 2884 2890
2900 218.46 219 22 2990 2990
3000 242.49 243 24 3092 3100
____________________________________________________________________
Table IVa
Target Above Gun—How to Use

This table combines the angle of sight with the angle of Example: The range to the target is 1200 meters. The
elevation when the target is above the gun and gives VI is +30 meters. In the column headed 1200, look
directly the quadrant elevation in mils. For ranges not in opposite the number 30 in the column headed VI. The
even hundreds, and for vertical intervals (VI’s) not tabu- quadrant elevation is 50.4 mils.
lated, the elevation must be determined by interpolation
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
A-8 MCWP 3-15.1
Table IVa
Quadrant Elevation in Mils, Knowing Range, and Vertical

Interval in Meters—Target Above Gun
VI in Meters Horizontal Distance From the Gun in Meters
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500
100 800.7 473.9 330.4 253.4 206.4 175.2 153.5 138.2 127.2 119.5 114.2 110.9 109.2 108.9 109.8
95 774.6 453.3 315.0 241.4 196.5 166.9 146.4 131.9 121.6 114.4 109.5 106.6 105.2 105.2 106.3
90 747.2 432.3 299.5 229.3 186.7 158.6 139.2 125.6 115.9 109.3 104.9 102.3 101.3 101.5 102.9
85 718.3 411.0 283.9 217.1 176.8 150.3 132.0 119.3 110.3 104.2 100.2 98.0 97.3 97.8 99.4
80 688.0 389.2 268.1 204.9 166.9 141.9 124.8 112.9 104.6 99.0 95.5 93.7 93.3 94.1 95.9
75 656.2 367.1 252.2 192.6 156.9 133.6 117.6 106.6 99.0 93.9 90.9 89.4 89.3 90.3 92.4
70 622.8 344.6 236.1 180.3 146.9 125.2 110.4 100.2 93.3 88.8 86.2 85.1 85.3 86.6 88.9
65 587.8 321.7 220.0 167.9 136.9 116.8 103.1 93.9 87.6 83.7 81.5 80.8 81.3 82.9 85.4
60 551.2 298.5 203.7 155.5 126.8 108.3 95.9 87.5 81.9 78.5 76.8 76.4 77.3 79.1 81.9
55 512.9 275.0 187.3 143.0 116.8 99.9 88.6 81.1 76.2 73.4 72.1 72.1 73.3 75.4 78.4
50 473.0 251.1 170.8 130.5 106.7 91.5 81.4 74.7 70.5 68.2 67.4 67.8 69.2 71.6 74.9
45 431.4 227.0 154.3 117.9 96.6 83.0 74.1 68.3 64.8 63.0 62.7 63.4 65.2 67.9 71.4
40 388.3 202.7 137.6 105.3 86.5 74.5 66.8 62.0 69.1 57.9 57.9 59.1 61.2 64.1 67.8
35 343.7 178.1 120.9 92.7 76.3 66.1 59.5 55.5 53.4 52.7 53.2 54.7 57.1 60.3 64.3
30 297.6 153.3 104.1 80.0 66.1 57.6 52.2 49.1 47.6 47.5 48.5 50.4 53.1 56.6 60.8
25 250.3 128.3 87.3 67.3 56.0 49.1 44.9 42.7 41.9 42.3 43.7 46.0 49.0 52.8 57.2
20 201.8 103.1 70.4 54.6 45.8 40.5 37.6 36.2 36.1 37.1 39.0 41.6 45.0 49.0 53.7
15 152.4 77.8 53.5 41.9 35.6 32.0 30.2 29.8 30.4 31.9 34.2 37.2 40.9 45.2 50.1
10 102.2 52.5 36.5 29.1 25.4 23.5 22.9 23.3 24.6 26.7 29.4 22.8 36.8 41.4 46.5
05 51.6 27.0 19.5 16.4 15.2 15.0 15.6 16.8 18.8 21.5 24.7 28.4 32.7 37.6 43.0
____________________________________________________________________
Table IVb
Target Below Gun—How to Use
This table combines the angle of site with the angle of Example: The range to the target is 1200 meters.
elevation when the target is below the gun and gives The VI is –30 meters (target below gun). In the col-
directly the quadrant elevation in mils. For ranges not umn headed 1200, look opposite the number 30 in
in even hundreds for VI’s not tabulated, the elevation the column headed VI. The quadrant elevation is –
must be determined by interpolation. 2.6 mils.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
A-10 MCWP 3-15.1
Table IVb

Interval in Meters—Target Below Gun
VI in Meters Horizontal Distance From the Gun in Meters
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500
-5 -50.1 -23.8 -14.4 -9.0 -5.2 -2.0 .9 3.9 7.3 11.0 15.1 19.6 24.6 30.0 35.8
-10 -100.8 -49.2 -31.3 -21.7 -15.4 -10.5 -6.3 -2.4 1.5 5.7 10.3 15.2 20.4 26.1 32.2
-15 -150.9 -74.6 -48.3 -34.7 -25.5 -19.0 -13.6 -8.8 -4.2 .4 5.4 10.7 16.3 22.3 28.6
-20 -200.3 -99.9 -65.2 -47.2 -35.7 -27.5 -20.9 -15.2 -9.9 -4.7 .6 6.3 12.2 18.4 25.0
-25 -248.8 -125.0 -82.1 -59.9 -45.9 -35.9 -28.1 -21.5 -15.5 -9.8 -4.1 18 8.0 14.5 21.4
-30 -296.1 -150.0 -98.9 -72.5 -56.0 -44.4 -35.4 -27.9 -21.2 -14.9 -8.7 -2.6 3.9 10.6 17.7
-35 -342.2 -174.8 -115.7 -85.2 -66.2 -52.9 -42.7 -34.2 -26.8 -19.9 -13.3 -6.8 -.3 6.7 14.1
-40 -386.8 -199.4 -132.4 -97.8 -76.3 -61.3 -49.9 -40.6 -32.5 -25.0 -17.9 -11.0 -4.2 2.8 10.4
-45 -429.9 -223.8 -149.0 -110.4 -86.5 -69.8 -57.2 -46.9 -38.1 -30.1 -22.5 -15.3 -8.1 -1.0 6.7
-50 -471.5 -247.9 -165.6 -122.9 -96.5 -78.2 -64.4 -53.3 -43.8 -35.2 -27.2 -19.5 -12.1 -4.7 3.0
-55 -511.4 -271.7 -182.1 -135.5 -106.6 -86.6 -71.6 -59.6 -49.4 -40.3 -31.8 -23.7 -16.0 -8.3 -.7
-60 -549.7 -295.2 -198.4 -147.9 -116.6 -95.0 -78.9 -65.9 -55.0 -45.3 -36.4 -28.0 -19.9 -11.9 -4.0
-65 -586.3 -318.4 -214.7 -160.3 -126.7 -103.4 -86.1 -72.3 -60.7 -50.4 -41.0 -32.2 -23.8 -15.5 -7.4
-70 -621.3 -341.3 -230.9 -172.7 -136.7 -111.8 -93.3 -78.6 -66.3 -55.5 -45.6 -36.4 -27.7 -19.2 -10.8
-75 -654.7 -363.8 -246.9 -185.1 -146.6 -120.2 -100.5 -84.9 -71.9 -60.5 -50.2 -40.6 -31.6 -22.8 -14.2
-80 -686.5 -385.9 -262.8 -197.3 -156.6 -128.5 -107.6 -91.2 -77.5 -65.6 -54.8 -44.9 -35.5 -26.4 -17.6
-85 -716.8 -407.0 -278.6 -209.5 -166.5 -136.8 -114.8 -97.5 -83.2 -70.6 -59.4 -49.1 -39.4 -30.0 -20.9
-90 -745.6 -429.0 -294.2 -221.7 -176.4 -145.1 -122.0 -103.8 -88.7 -75.7 -64.0 -53.3 -43.2 -33.6 -24.3
-95 -773.1 -450.0 -309.8 -233.8 -186.2 -153.4 -129.1 -110.0 -94.3 -80.7 -68.6 -57.5 -47.1 -37.3 -27.7
-100 -799.0 -470.6 -325.1 -245.8 -196.0 -161.7 -136.3 -116.3 -99.9 -85.7 -73.2 -61.7 -51.0 -40.9 -31.1
__________________________________________________________________
Table V
Ordinates in Meters—How to Use

The figures indicate the height in meters of the center Example: At a range of 900 meters (column of fig-
of the cone above the line of site at any distance from ures at left) and at a distance of 700 meters from
the gun. The negative figures indicate the distance of the gun (line of figures under distance from the
the center of the cone below the line of site at any dis- gun), the center of the cone is 3 meters above the
tance from the gun. line of site.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
A-12 MCWP 3-15.1
Table V—Part 1
Ordinates in Meters
Horizontal Distance From the Gun — Meters
Range Meters 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
0 0 0 0 -1 -2 -4 -6 -9
100 0 0 0 -1 -2 -3 -5 -8
200 0 0 0 -1 -2 -3 -5 -7
300 0 0 0 0 -1 -2 -4 -6
400 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -3 -5
500 1 1 1 1 0 -1 -2 -4
600 1 1 1 1 1 0 -1 -3
700 1 2 2 2 2 1 0 -2
800 1 2 3 3 3 2 1 0
900 2 3 4 4 4 4 3 2
1000 2 4 5 6 6 6 5 4
1100 2 4 6 7 8 8 8 7
1200 3 5 7 9 10 11 11 10
1300 3 6 9 11 13 14 14 14
1400 4 7 10 13 15 17 18 18
1500 4 8 12 15 18 20 22 23
1600 5 10 14 18 21 24 26 28
1700 6 11 16 20 24 27 30 33
1800 6 12 18 23 27 31 35 38
1900 7 14 20 26 31 36 40 44
2000 8 16 23 29 35 40 45 50
2100 9 18 26 33 39 45 51 57
2200 10 20 29 37 44 51 58 65
2300 11 22 32 41 50 58 66 74
2400 12 24 35 46 56 66 75 84
2500 14 27 39 51 63 74 85 95
2600 15 30 44 57 70 83 95 106
2700 17 33 49 64 78 92 106 119
2800 18 36 54 71 87 103 118 133
2900 20 40 60 79 97 115 132 149
3000 22 44 66 87 108 128 147 166
3100 25 49 73 97 120 142 164 185
3200 28 55 82 108 134 159 183 207
3300 31 62 92 121 150 178 206 233
3400 35 70 104 137 169 201 233 264
3500 41 80 119 157 194 231 267 302
3600 48 94 139 184 228 271 313 354
3700 57 115 172 228 284 339 393 446
__________________________________________________________________
Table V—Part 1
Ordinates in Meters (Continued)

Horizontal Distance From the Gun — Meters

Range
900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 Meters
-12 -16 -21 -27 -35 -44 -54 -66 0
-11 -15 -20 -26 -34 -43 -53 -65 100
-10 -14 -19 -25 -33 -42 -52 -64 200
-9 -13 -18 -24 -32 -41 -51 -63 300
-8 -12 -17 -23 -30 -39 -49 -61 400
-7 -11 -16 -22 -29 -38 -48 -60 500
-6 -9 -14 -20 -27 -36 -46 -58 600
-4 -7 -11 -17 -25 -34 -44 -55 700
-2 -5 -9 -15 -22 -31 -41 -52 800
0 -3 -7 -12 -19 -27 -37 -48 900
2 0 -4 -9 -15 -23 -32 -43 1000
5 3 0 -5 -11 -18 -27 -37 1100
9 7 4 0 -6 -13 -21 -31 1200
13 12 9 5 0 -7 -15 -25 1300
18 17 15 11 6 0 -8 -18 1400
24 23 21 18 13 7 0 -9 1500
29 29 28 25 21 16 9 0 1600
35 36 35 33 30 25 18 10 1700
41 42 42 41 39 35 29 21 1800
47 49 50 50 48 45 40 33 1900
54 57 59 60 59 56 52 46 2000
62 66 69 71 71 69 65 60 2100
71 76 80 83 84 83 80 76 2200
81 87 92 96 98 98 96 93 2300
92 99 105 110 113 114 113 111 2400
104 112 119 125 129 131 132 131 2500
117 126 134 141 147 151 153 153 2600
131 142 152 160 167 172 176 178 2700
147 160 171 181 189 196 201 205 2800
165 179 192 204 214 222 229 234 2900
184 200 215 229 241 251 260 267 3000
205 224 241 257 271 284 295 304 3100
230 251 271 289 306 322 336 347 3200
259 283 306 327 347 366 383 397 3300
293 321 348 373 397 419 439 457 3400
336 369 401 431 459 485 509 531 3500
394 433 471 507 541 573 602 628 3600
497 547 595 641 685 726 764 799 3700
Appendix B
M2 .50 Cal Firing Tables
Table I

The angle of elevation required to engage a target on For ranges not in even hundreds and for ranges not
flat or uniformly sloping ground is listed for the indi- tabulated, the desired information must be deter-
cated ranges. mined by interpolation.
The change in elevation and range for each 100 Example: The range to the target is 1,000 meters. The
meters in range has been calculated to permit sub- angle of elevation is 10.1 mils. The change in eleva-
sequent changes in the quadrant elevation with- tion between 900 meters and 1,000 meters is 1.5 mils.
out recalculation. At 1,000 meters, the change of elevation of 1 mil will
change the range 66 meters. The time of flight is 1.6
The time of flight, maximum ordinate, angle of fall, seconds and the maximum ordinate is 3 meters. The
remaining velocity and drift are listed to assist in angle of fall is 15 mils, the remaining velocity is 482
determining effect on target. meters per second, and the drift is 0.2 mils right.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
B-2 MCWP 3-15.1
Table 1

Angles of Fall, Time of Flight, and Drift
FT.50-H-2 3
Cartridge, AP, M2
Muzzle Velocity, 853.4 M/S Cartridge, Ball, M2
Change in
Range Elev Elev Range Time Maximum Angel of Remaining Drift
of Flight Ordinate Fall Velocity
for
100M 1 Mil
Change in
Range Elev
Meters Mils Mils Meters Sec Meters Mils M/S Mils
0 0.0 0.7 150 0.0 0 0 853 0.0
100 0.7 0.7 140 0.1 0 1 813 0.0
200 1.5 0.8 130 0.2 0 1 772 0.0
300 2.3 0.8 121 0.4 0 3 733 0.0
400 3.1 0.9 112 0.5 0 4 694 0.1
500 4.1 1.0 103 0.7 1 5 656 0.1
600 5.1 1.2 95 0.8 1 6 618 0.1
700 6.2 1.2 87 1.0 1 8 582 0.1
800 7.4 1.3 79 1.2 2 10 547 0.1
900 8.7 1.4 72 1.4 2 12 514 0.2
1000 10.1 1.5 66 1.6 3 15 482 0.2
1100 117 1.6 60 1.8 4 18 452 0.2
1200 13.4 1.8 55 2.0 5 21 424 0.2
1300 15.2 2.0 50 2.2 6 25 398 0.3
1400 17.3 2.2 46 2.5 8 30 374 0.3
1500 19.5 2.4 42 2.8 10 35 353 0.3
1600 22.0 2.6 39 3.1 12 41 335 0.4
1700 24.7 2.8 36 3.4 14 48 323 0.4
1800 27.7 3.0 33 3.7 17 15 313 0.4
1900 30.8 3.2 31 4.0 21 62 304 0.5
2000 24.2 3.5 29 4.3 25 70 297 0.5
2100 37.8 3.7 27 4.7 29 78 290 0.6
2200 41.6 4.0 25 5.0 34 86 284 0.7
2300 45.7 4.2 24 5.4 39 95 278 0.7
2400 49.9 4.4 23 5.8 45 104 272 0.8
2500 54.4 4.6 22 6.1 51 113 267 0.8
2600 59.0 4.8 21 6.5 58 123 262 0.9
2700 63.9 5.0 20 6.9 66 133 257 0.9
2800 68.9 5.2 19 7.3 74 143 252 1.0
2900 74.2 5.4 18 7.7 83 154 247 1.1
3000 79.7 5.6 18 8.1 92 166 242 1.2
3100 85.4 5.8 17 8.6 102 178 237 1.3
3200 91.3 6.0 17 9.0 113 190 233 1.4
3300 97.4 6.2 16 9.4 124 203 229 1.5
3400 103.8 6.4 16 9.9 137 216 224 1.6
3500 110.4 6.7 15 10.3 150 230 220 1.7
____________________________________________________________________
Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery B-3
Table II

Troop distance in column 1 is the distance in meters The safety angle plus the angle of elevation constitutes
from the gun to the friendly troops over whose heads the minimum angle of elevation which can be fired over
it is desired to fire. the heads of troops at the given troop distance. Mini-
mum angles of elevation are listed in column 2.
The quadrant elevation required to strike the ground Corresponding range in column 3 is the minimum
upon which the troops stand, plus a definite angle of range expressed in graduation on the rear sight that
safety given the minimum quadrant elevation which will give the required clearance. Both the exact and
can be fired, without danger, over the troops. even figures to the nearest 25 meters above are given.
When troops to be fired over are visible, the safety
The safety angle varies with the range. The minimum angle can be measured by setting the corresponding
quadrant elevation which can be fired with safety over the range (even figures should be used).
heads of friendly troops comprises the following factors:
Example: Friendly troops are visible and at a distance
of 700 meters from the gun. The gun is laid to hit the
● Safety angle (corresponding to troop distance).
target. Without disturbing the lay, ensure the rear
● Angle of elevation (corresponding to troop distance). sight is set at 1,580 meters. In order to ensure that it is
● Angle of site. safe to fire, the line of aim must clear the troops.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
B-4 MCWP 3-15.1
Table II
Overhead Fire
1 2 3
Corresponding Range
Troop Distance Minimum Angle of Elevation Even Figure (To
Difference Exact Figure Nearest 10 Meters)
Meters Mils (Exact Figure) Mils Meters Meters
100 77 (76.68) 2944 2950
200 41 (40.39) 36 2165 2170
300 33 (32.40) 8 1946 1950
400 24 (24.00) 9 1671 1680
500 22 (21.74) 2 1586 1590
600 22 (21.10) 0 1562 1570
700 22 (21.56) 0 1579 1580
800 23 (22.70) 1 1625 1630
900 25 (24.26) 2 1681 1690
1000 26 (26.00) 1 1743 1750
1100 29 (28.16) 3 1814 1820
1200 31 (30.48) 2 1887 1890
1300 33 (33.04) 2 1964 1970
1400 36 (35.84) 3 2044 2050
1500 39 (38.87) 3 2127 2130
1600 43 (42.19) 4 2314 2320
1700 46 (45.87) 3 2304 2310
1800 50 (49.90) 4 2400 2400
1900 55 (54.29) 5 2495 2500
2000 59 (58.95) 4 2595 2600
2100 64 (63.94) 5 2701 2710
2200 70 (69.31) 4 2808 2810
2300 75 (75.02) 5 2915 2920
2400 81 (81.00) 6 3022 3030
2500 88 (87.31) 7 3132 3140
2600 94 (93.90) 6 3274 3280
2700 101 (100.80) 7 3387 3390
2800 108 (108.00) 7 3500 3500
2900 116 (115.50) 8 3615 3620
3000 124 (123.40) 8 3730 3730
3100 132 (131.70) 8 3845 3850
3200 141 (140.30) 9 3960 3960
3300 150 (149.30) 9 4076 4080
3400 159 (158.80) 9 4192 4200
3500 169 (168.80) 10 4308 4410
____________________________________________________________________
Table II
Overhead Fire (Continued)

1 2 3
Corresponding Range
Troop Distance Minimum Angle of Elevation Even Figure (To
Difference Exact Figure Nearest 10 Meters)
Meters Mils (Exact Figure) Mils Meters Meters
3600 180 (179.40) 11 4424 4430
3700 191 (190.50) 11 4540 4540
3800 202 (202.00) 11 4656 4670
3900 214 (213.90) 12 4772 4780
4000 227 (226.40) 13 4888 4890
4100 240 (239.40) 13 5005 5010
4200 253 (253.00) 13 5122 5130
4300 268 (267.50) 15 5238 5240
4400 284 (283.10) 16 5353 5360
4500 300 (299.40) 16 5469 5470
4600 317 (316.90) 17 5585 5590
4700 336 (335.70) 19 5702 5710
4800 356 (355.80) 20 5818 5820
4900 378 (377.70) 22 5933 5940
5000 402 (40180) 24 6047 6050
5100 429 (428.40) 27 6161 6170
5200 459 (458.40) 30 6276 6280
5300 494 (493.50) 35 6391 6400
5400 540 (539.60) 46 6505 6510
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
B-6 MCWP 3-15.1
Table III
Mask Clearance—How to Use

Mask distance in column 1 is the distance in meters Minimum angles of elevation are listed in column 2.
from the gun to the highest point of the mask. The If the quadrant elevation to the target equals or
minimum quadrant elevation which will clear a mask exceeds the minimum quadrant elevation, clear-
is such that the lowest shot in the cone will just graze ance exists.
the highest point on the mask. Such a quadrant eleva-
tion comprises the following factors: Corresponding range in column 3 is the mil angle of
required mask clearance expressed in graduations on
● Angle of clearance (corresponding to mask distance). the rear sight. When the mask is visible, the required
● Angle of elevation (corresponding to mask distance). mask clearance can be measured by setting the corre-
● Angle of site to mask. sponding range on the rear sight.
The angle of clearance is based on the lower one-half Example: The mask is visible and is at a distance
of the vertical dimension of the cone. The angle of of 700 meters from the gun. The gun is laid to
clearance plus the angle of elevation constitute the hit the target; without disturbing the lay, the rear
minimum angle of elevation which will afford clear- sight is set at 890. If the line of aim clears the
ance at any given mask distance. mask, it is practicable to fire.
____________________________________________________________________
Table III
Mask Clearance
1 2 3
Mask Distance Minimum Angle of Elevation Difference Corresponding Range

Round UP
Meters Exact Figure Mils Mils Meters Meters
100 3.0 0 388 390
200 3.6 4 4 450 450
300 4.4 5 1 530 530
400 5.3 6 1 618 620
500 6.3 7 1 708 710
600 7.4 8 1 800 800
700 8.5 9 1 885 890
800 9.7 10 1 971 980
900 11.0 11 1 1057 1060
1000 12.4 13 2 1141 1150
1100 13.9 14 1 1228 1230
1200 15.6 16 2 1319 1320
1300 17.5 18 2 1409 1410
1400 19.5 20 2 1500 1500
1500 21.6 22 2 1584 1590
1600 24.0 24 2 1674 1680
1700 26.7 27 3 1767 1770
1800 29.6 30 3 1861 1870
1900 32.8 33 3 1959 1960
2000 36.1 37 4 2052 2060
2100 39.7 40 3 2150 2150
2200 43.5 44 4 2246 2250
2300 47.6 48 4 2345 2350
2400 51.9 52 4 2444 2450
2500 56.5 57 5 2547 2550
2600 61.2 62 5 2668 2670
2700 66.1 67 5 2768 2770
2800 71.1 72 5 2868 2870
2900 76.4 77 5 2968 2970
3000 81.9 82 5 3069 3070
3100 87.7 88 6 3171 3180
3200 93.6 94 6 3273 3280
3300 99.7 100 6 3376 3380
3400 106.2 107 7 3478 3480
3500 113.0 114 7 3580 3580
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
B-8 MCWP 3-15.1
Table III
Mask Clearance (Continued)

1 2 3
Mask Distance Minimum Angle of Elevation Difference Corresponding Range

Round UP
Meters Exact Figure Mils Mils Meters Meters
3600 120.0 120 6 3682 3690
3700 127.3 128 8 3784 3790
3800 135.0 135 7 3886 3890
3900 142.8 143 8 3988 3990
4000 151.1 152 9 4089 4090
4100 159.5 160 8 4190 4190
4200 168.2 169 9 4291 4300
4300 177.2 178 9 4392 4400
4400 186.4 187 9 4493 4500
4500 195.9 196 9 4594 4600
4600 205.7 206 10 4695 4700
4700 216.1 217 11 4796 4800
4800 226.9 227 10 4897 4900
4900 238.3 239 12 4998 5000
5000 250.2 251 12 5098 5100
5100 262.5 263 12 5198 5200
5200 275.3 276 13 5297 5300
5300 288.7 289 13 5396 5400
5400 302.8 303 14 5494 5500
5500 317.8 318 15 5592 5600
5600 333.6 334 16 5690 5700
5700 350.3 351 17 5788 5790
5800 368.1 369 18 5884 5890
5900 387.2 388 19 5980 5980
6000 407.7 408 20 6076 6080
6100 430.0 430 22 6171 6180
6200 454.7 455 25 6265 6270
6300 482.7 483 28 6359 6360
6400 514.9 515 32 6452 6460
____________________________________________________________________
Table IVa

This table combines the angle of sight with the angle of Example: The range to the target is 1200 meters. The
directly the quadrant elevation in mils. For ranges not opposite the number 30 in the column headed VI. The
in even hundreds, and for VI’s not tabulated, the eleva- quadrant elevation is 39.0 mils.
tion must be determined by interpolation.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
B-10 MCWP 3-15.1
Table IVa

VI Horiz ontal Distance From the Gun in Meters
in
Meters 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500
5 52 27 19 16 14 14 13 14 14 15 16 18 19 21 23 25 28 30 33 37 40 44 48 52 56
10 102 52 36 29 24 22 21 20 20 20 21 22 23 25 26 28 31 33 36 39 43 46 50 54 58
15 152 78 53 41 35 31 28 26 26 25 25 26 27 28 30 32 34 36 39 42 45 49 52 56 60
20 202 103 70 54 45 39 35 33 31 30 30 30 31 32 33 35 37 39 41 44 47 51 54 58 62
25 250 128 87 67 55 47 43 39 37 36 35 35 35 35 36 38 40 42 44 47 50 53 57 60 64
30 298 153 104 79 65 56 50 46 43 41 39 39 39 39 40 41 43 45 47 49 52 55 59 63 67
35 344 178 121 92 75 64 57 52 48 46 44 43 43 43 43 44 46 47 50 52 55 58 61 65 69
40 388 202 137 105 85 73 64 58 54 51 49 47 47 46 47 47 49 50 52 55 57 60 63 67 71
45 431 227 154 117 95 81 72 65 60 56 53 51 50 50 50 51 52 53 55 57 60 62 66 69 73
50 473 251 170 130 106 90 79 71 65 61 58 56 54 54 53 54 55 56 58 60 62 65 68 71 75
55 513 275 187 142 116 98 86 77 71 66 63 60 58 57 57 57 58 59 60 62 64 67 70 73 77
60 551 298 203 155 126 107 93 84 76 71 67 64 62 61 60 60 61 62 63 65 67 69 72 75 79
65 588 321 220 167 136 115 100 90 82 76 72 68 66 65 64 63 64 64 66 67 69 72 74 77 81
70 623 344 236 180 146 123 108 96 88 81 76 73 70 68 67 67 67 67 68 70 72 74 77 80 83
75 656 367 252 192 156 132 115 103 93 86 81 77 74 72 70 70 70 70 71 72 74 76 79 82 85
80 688 389 268 204 166 140 122 109 99 91 86 81 78 75 74 73 73 73 74 75 77 79 81 84 87
85 718 411 283 216 176 148 129 115 105 96 90 85 82 79 77 76 76 76 76 77 79 81 83 86 90
90 747 432 299 229 185 157 136 121 110 102 95 90 86 83 81 79 79 79 79 80 81 83 85 88 91
95 775 453 315 241 195 165 144 128 116 107 99 94 90 86 84 82 82 81 82 83 84 86 88 90 93
100 801 474 330 253 205 173 151 134 121 112 104 98 93 90 87 86 85 84 84 85 86 88 90 92 95
__________________________________________________________________
Table IVb

This table combines the angle of site with the angle of Example: The range to the target is 1200 meters.
elevation when the target is below the gun and gives The VI is –30 meters (target below gun). In the col-
directly the quadrant elevation in mils. For ranges not umn headed 1200, look opposite the number 30 in
in even hundreds, and for VI’s that are not tabulated, the column headed VI. The quadrant elevation is –
the elevation must be determined by interpolation. 12.0 mils.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
B-12 MCWP 3-15.1
Table IVb

in
Meters 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500
5 -50 -24 -15 -10 -6 -3 -1 +1 3 5 7 9 11 14 16 19 22 25 28 32 35 39 43 48 52
10 -101 -49 -32 -22 -16 -12 -8 -5 -3 0 +2 5 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 29 33 37 41 46 50
15 -151 -75 -49 -35 -26 -20 -16 -12 -8 -5 -2 +1 3 6 9 12 16 19 23 27 31 35 39 43 48
20 -200 -100 -65 -48 -37 -29 -23 -18 -14 -10 -7 -4 0 +3 6 9 13 16 20 24 28 32 37 41 46
25 -249 -125 -82 -60 -47 -37 -30 -24 -20 -15 -11 -8 -4 -1 +3 6 10 13 17 21 26 30 35 39 44
30 -296 -150 -99 -73 -57 -46 -37 -31 -25 -20 -16 -12 -8 -4 -1 +3 7 11 15 19 23 28 32 37 42
35 -342 -175 -116 -86 -67 -54 -45 -37 -31 -25 -21 -16 -12 -8 -4 0 +4 8 12 16 21 25 30 35 40
40 -387 -200 -133 -98 -77 -63 -52 -43 -36 -31 -25 -21 -16 -12 -8 -3 +1 5 9 14 18 23 28 33 38
45 -430 -224 -149 -111 -87 -71 -59 -50 -42 -36 -30 -25 -20 -15 -11 -7 -2 +2 7 11 16 21 26 31 36
50 -472 -248 -166 -123 -97 -80 -66 -56 -48 -41 -35 -29 -24 -19 -14 -10 -5 -1 +4 9 14 18 24 29 34
55 -511 -272 -182 -136 -107 -88 -74 -62 -53 -46 -39 -33 -28 -23 -18 -13 -8 -3 +1 6 11 16 21 27 32
60 -550 -295 -199 -148 -118 -96 -81 -69 -59 -51 -44 -37 -32 -26 -21 -16 -11 -6 -1 +4 9 14 19 24 30
65 -586 -319 -215 -161 -128 -105 -88 -75 -65 -56 -48 -42 -36 -30 -24 -19 -14 -9 -4 +1 6 12 17 22 28
70 -621 -341 -231 -73 -138 -113 -95 -81 -70 -61 -53 -46 -39 -34 -28 -22 -17 -12 -7 -1 +4 9 15 20 26
75 -655 -364 -247 -186 -148 -122 -102 -88 -76 -66 -58 -50 -43 -37 -31 -26 -20 -15 -9 -4 +1 7 12 18 24
80 -687 -386 -263 -198 -157 -130 -110 -94 -82 -71 -62 -54 -47 -41 -35 -29 -23 -17 -12 -6 -1 +5 10 16 22
85 -717 -408 -279 -210 -167 -138 -117 -100 -87 -76 -67 -59 -51 -44 -38 -32 -26 -20 -15 -10 -3 +2 8 14 20
90 -746 -429 -295 -222 -177 -146 -124 -107 -93 -81 -71 -63 -55 -48 -41 -35 -29 -23 -17 -11 -6 0 +6 12 18
95 -773 -450 -310 -234 -187 -155 -131 -113 -98 -86 -76 -67 -59 -52 -45 -38 -32 -26 -20 -14 -8 -2 +4 10 16
100 -799 -471 -325 -246 -197 -163 -138 -119 -104 -91 -81 -71 -63 -55 -48 -41 -35 -29 -23 -17 -11 -5 +1 7 14
__________________________________________________________________
Table V
Ordinates—How to Use
The figures indicate the height in meters of the center of umn of figures at left) and at a distance of 700 meters
the cone above the line of site at any distance from the from the gun (line of figures under distance from the
gun. The negative figures indicate the distance of the gun), the center of the cone is 2 meters above the line of
center of the cone below the line of site any distance site. At a distance of 2100 meters from the gun, the cen-
from the gun. Example: At a range of 900 meters (col- ter of the cone is –59 meters below the line of site.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
B-14 MCWP 3-15.1
Table V—Part 1
Ordinates in Meters
Caliber .50 M2
Horizontal Distance (Meters)
Range (Meters) 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
100 0 0 -1 -1 -1 -2 -3 -5 -7 -9
200 0 0 0 0 -1 -2 -3 -5 -7 -9
300 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -3 -4 -6 -8
400 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -2 -3 -5 -7
500 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -6
600 0 1 1 1 0 0 -1 -2 -3 -5
700 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 -1 -2 -4
800 0 1 2 2 2 2 1 0 -1 -2
900 0 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 0 -1
1000 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 0
1100 1 2 3 3 4 4 4 3 3 2
1200 1 2 3 4 5 5 5 4 4 3
1300 1 3 4 5 6 6 6 6 6 5
1400 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8 7
1500 2 3 5 6 7 9 9 10 10 9
1600 2 4 6 7 9 10 11 12 12 12
1700 2 5 7 9 10 11 13 14 14 14
1800 3 5 8 10 11 13 15 16 16 17
1900 3 6 9 11 13 15 17 18 19 20
2000 3 6 10 12 15 17 19 21 22 23
2100 4 7 10 13 16 19 21 23 25 26
2200 4 8 11 15 18 21 24 26 28 30
2300 4 8 12 16 20 24 27 29 32 34
2400 5 9 14 18 22 26 30 32 35 38
2500 5 10 15 20 24 28 33 36 39 43
2600 5 11 16 22 26 31 36 39 43 47
2700 6 12 18 24 29 34 39 43 47 52
2800 7 13 19 25 31 37 43 47 52 57
2900 7 14 21 27 34 40 46 52 57 62
3000 8 15 22 29 36 43 49 56 61 67
3100 8 16 24 32 39 46 53 60 66 72
3200 8 17 26 34 42 50 57 64 71 78
3300 9 18 27 36 45 53 61 69 76 83
3400 9 19 29 39 48 56 65 74 82 89
3500 10 20 31 42 51 61 70 79 88 96
3600 11 22 33 44 55 65 75 85 94 102
3700 12 23 35 47 58 69 80 91 100 110
3800 13 25 38 50 62 74 85 96 107 117
3900 14 27 40 53 66 78 90 102 113 125
4000 14 28 42 56 69 82 95 107 120 133
4100 15 30 45 59 73 87 101 114 128 141
4200 16 32 48 63 77 92 107 121 135 149
4300 16 33 50 66 82 98 113 128 143 158
4400 17 35 52 69 86 103 119 135 151 166
4500 18 37 55 73 91 108 126 143 159 176
__________________________________________________________________
Table V—Part 2
Ordinates in Meters
Caliber .50 M2
Range (Meters) 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000
100 -12 -15 -18 -22 -28 -34 -40 -47 -55 -64
200 -11 -14 -17 -21 -26 -32 -38 -45 -53 -62
300 -10 -13 -16 -20 -25 -31 -37 -44 -52 -61
400 -9 -12 -15 -19 -24 -30 -36 -43 -51 -60
500 -8 -11 -14 -18 -23 -28 -34 -41 -49 -58
600 -7 -9 -13 -17 -21 -26 -32 -39 -47 -56
700 -6 -8 -11 -15 -20 -25 -30 -37 -45 -54
800 -4 -6 -9 -13 -18 -23 -28 -35 -43 -52
900 -3 -5 -8 -11 -16 -20 -26 -33 -41 -50
1000 -2 -4 -6 -9 -13 -18 -23 -31 -39 -48
1100 0 -2 -4 -7 -11 -16 -21 -28 -36 -45
1200 2 0 -2 -5 -9 -13 -18 -25 -33 -41
1300 4 2 1 -3 -6 -10 -15 -22 -29 -37
1400 6 5 3 1 -3 -7 -12 -18 -25 -33
1500 8 7 5 3 2 -4 -9 -14 -21 -29
1600 11 10 9 6 3 2 -5 -10 -17 -24
1700 14 13 12 10 7 4 2 -6 -12 -19
1800 17 16 15 14 11 8 5 2 -6 -13
1900 20 20 19 18 16 13 10 5 2 -7
2000 23 24 24 23 21 19 15 11 6 1
2100 27 28 29 28 27 24 21 17 13 7
2200 31 32 33 33 32 30 27 24 20 15
2300 36 37 38 38 38 37 34 31 27 23
2400 40 42 44 44 44 43 41 38 35 30
2500 45 47 49 50 50 50 49 46 43 38
2600 51 53 55 56 57 57 57 54 51 47
2700 56 59 61 63 65 65 65 63 60 56
2800 61 65 68 70 72 73 73 71 69 66
2900 66 70 74 77 79 81 81 80 79 76
3000 72 76 81 84 87 89 90 90 89 87
3100 78 83 88 92 95 98 99 100 100 98
3200 84 89 95 100 103 106 108 109 110 110
3300 90 96 102 108 112 116 118 120 121 122
3400 97 104 110 116 121 125 129 131 133 133
3500 104 112 118 125 130 136 140 143 145 145
3600 111 120 127 134 140 146 151 155 158 159
3700 119 128 136 144 151 157 162 167 171 173
3800 127 136 145 154 162 169 175 180 184 187
3900 135 145 155 164 172 180 187 193 198 201
4000 144 155 165 175 184 192 199 206 212 217
4100 153 164 175 186 196 205 213 220 227 232
4200 162 174 186 198 209 218 227 235 242 248
4300 172 185 197 209 221 232 241 250 258 266
4400 182 196 209 222 235 246 257 267 276 284
4500 192 207 221 235 249 262 273 284 294 303
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
B-16 MCWP 3-15.1
Table V—Part 3
Ordinates in Meters
Caliber .50 M2
Range (Meters) 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 3000
100 -74 -86 -100 -114 -129 -147 -165 -185 -206 -229
200 -73 -85 -98 -112 -128 -145 -163 -183 -204 -227
300 -71 -83 -97 -111 -126 -143 -161 -181 -202 -225
400 -69 -81 -95 -109 -124 -140 -158 -178 -199 -222
500 -67 -79 -92 -106 -122 -138 -156 -176 -196 -219
600 -65 -77 -90 -104 -119 -135 -153 -173 -193 -216
700 -63 -75 -88 -101 -116 -132 -150 -170 -190 -212
800 -61 -72 -85 -98 -113 -129 -147 -166 -187 -208
900 -59 -70 -82 -95 -110 -126 -144 -162 -183 -204
1000 -57 -67 -79 -92 -106 -122 -140 -158 -179 -200
1100 -54 -64 -75 -88 -102 -118 -136 -154 -175 -196
1200 -50 -60 -71 -83 -98 -114 -132 -150 -170 -191
1300 -46 -56 -67 -79 -93 -109 -126 -145 -165 -186
1400 -42 -51 -62 -75 -88 -104 -120 -139 -159 -180
1500 -37 -46 -57 -69 -83 -98 -115 -133 -152 -174
1600 -32 -41 -51 -63 -77 -92 -108 -126 -145 -166
1700 -27 -36 -46 -57 -71 -85 -101 -119 -138 -158
1800 -20 -29 -39 -51 -64 -78 -94 -111 -130 -150
1900 -14 -23 -33 -44 -57 -71 -86 -103 -121 -140
2000 -7 -16 -26 -37 -49 -62 -77 -93 -111 -130
2100 0 -8 -18 -29 -41 -53 -67 -83 -101 -120
2200 8 1 -9 -19 -31 -43 -58 -73 -91 -109
2300 16 9 2 -10 -21 -33 -47 -62 -80 -98
2400 24 18 10 4 -11 -23 -36 -51 -68 -86
2500 33 27 20 11 5 -12 -25 -39 -55 -72
2600 43 37 30 21 11 6 -13 -27 -42 -58
2700 52 47 41 33 23 12 6 -13 -28 -44
2800 62 58 52 44 35 25 13 6 -14 -30
2900 73 69 64 56 48 38 27 14 5 -16
3000 84 81 76 69 61 51 41 28 15 4
3100 96 93 89 82 75 65 55 43 30 16
3200 108 105 101 95 88 80 70 59 46 33
3300 120 117 114 109 102 95 86 75 64 51
3400 132 130 127 123 117 110 102 92 82 69
3500 145 144 141 138 133 127 119 110 100 88
3600 160 159 156 153 149 144 137 128 119 107
3700 175 174 172 169 166 162 156 148 138 127
3800 190 190 189 186 184 180 175 167 159 148
3900 205 206 206 204 202 199 194 188 180 170
4000 220 222 223 223 222 219 214 208 202 193
4100 236 239 242 242 241 239 235 231 224 216
4200 253 257 260 261 262 260 258 254 248 240
4300 272 276 279 282 283 283 281 277 273 266
4400 291 296 300 303 305 305 303 301 297 292
4500 310 316 321 325 328 328 328 327 324 219
__________________________________________________________________
Table V—Part 4
Ordinates in Meters
Caliber .50 M2
Range (Meters) 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800 3900 4000
100 -254 -280 -308 -338 -371 -405 -442 -481 -523 -567
200 -252 -278 -306 -336 -369 -403 -440 -488 -526 -564
300 -249 -275 -303 -334 -366 -401 -437 -512 -540 -560
400 -246 -272 -300 -331 -363 -397 -433 -472 -513 -557
500 -243 -269 -297 -327 -360 -393 -429 -468 -509 -553
600 -240 -265 -293 -323 -255 -289 -425 -464 -505 -549
700 -236 -262 -289 -318 -351 -385 -421 -459 -500 -544
800 -232 -258 -285 -314 -347 -381 -416 -454 -495 -539
900 -228 -254 -281 -310 -342 -376 -411 -449 -490 -534
1000 -224 -250 -277 -305 -336 -370 -406 -444 -405 -529
1100 -219 -245 -272 -300 -331 -365 -401 -439 -480 -523
1200 -214 -239 -266 -295 -326 -359 -395 -433 -473 -516
1300 -209 -234 -260 -289 -320 -353 -388 -426 -466 -509
1400 -203 -228 -254 -283 -313 -346 -381 -418 -458 -500
1500 -197 -221 -247 -276 -306 -339 -373 -409 -449 -491
1600 -189 -214 -240 -268 -298 -331 -365 -401 -439 -481
1700 -181 -205 -231 -258 -289 -321 -355 -391 -429 -471
1800 -172 -196 -221 -248 -278 -310 -344 -380 -418 -460
1900 -162 -185 -210 -237 -267 -298 -332 -368 -407 -448
2000 -151 -174 -199 -226 -256 -287 -319 -355 -394 -435
2100 -140 -163 -188 -215 -244 -274 -307 -342 -380 -421
2200 -130 -152 -176 -202 -231 -261 -293 -328 -365 -405
2300 -118 -140 -163 -188 -216 -246 -279 -313 -350 -389
2400 -106 -127 -149 -174 -201 -231 -264 -298 -334 -372
2500 -92 -113 -136 -160 -187 -216 -248 -281 -317 -355
2600 -77 -98 -121 -146 -172 -200 -231 -263 -299 -236
2700 -63 -83 -106 -130 -156 -183 -213 -245 280 -318
2800 -48 -68 -90 -113 -138 -166 -195 -227 -261 -298
2900 -33 -52 -73 -96 -120 -147 -177 -209 -242 -278
3000 -17 -35 -55 -78 -102 -129 -158 -189 -221 -257
3100 3 -18 -37 -59 -83 -110 -138 -168 -200 -235
3200 17 0 -19 -40 -64 -90 -117 -146 -178 -212
3300 36 19 3 -21 -44 -68 -95 -124 -155 -189
3400 55 39 20 6 -22 -47 -73 -101 -132 -165
3500 75 59 41 21 8 -24 -49 -77 -107 -140
3600 94 79 62 43 42 10 -25 -52 -82 -114
3700 114 100 84 65 45 24 11 -26 -55 -87
3800 136 122 106 89 69 48 26 12 -28 -59
3900 159 146 131 113 95 75 53 28 12 -30
4000 182 170 156 139 121 102 80 56 29 11
4100 206 195 181 166 149 130 108 84 59 31
4200 231 221 208 194 177 159 138 115 90 62
4300 257 248 236 222 207 189 169 147 122 96
4400 284 276 265 252 237 221 202 181 157 131
4500 313 305 295 283 269 253 235 216 193 167
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
B-18 MCWP 3-15.1
Table V—Part 5
Ordinates in Meters
Caliber .50 M2
Range (Meters) 4100 4200 4300 4400 4500 4600 4700 4800 4900 5000
100 -614 -663 -716 -772 -832 -895 -961 -1031 -1105 -1185
200 -610 -660 -713 -769 -829 -892 -958 -1058 -1102 -1182
300 -607 -656 -709 -765 -825 -887 -854 -1024 -1098 -1177
400 -603 -653 -706 -761 -820 -882 -949 -1019 -1093 -1172
500 -599 -649 -701 -757 -815 -877 -944 -1014 -1088 -1167
600 -595 -644 -696 -752 -810 -872 -939 -1009 -1083 -1162
700 -591 -639 -691 -747 -805 -867 -933 -1004 -1078 -1156
800 -585 -634 -686 -741 -799 -861 -927 -997 -1071 -1150
900 -579 -628 -680 -735 -794 -855 -921 -990 -1064 -1143
1000 -574 -623 -675 -729 -787 -849 -914 -983 -1057 -1157
1100 -568 -617 -668 -722 -780 -842 -907 -976 -1049 -1127
1200 -561 -609 -660 -714 -773 -834 -899 -968 -1041 -1119
1300 -553 -601 -652 -706 -765 -826 -890 -959 -1031 -1109
1400 -545 -592 -643 -698 -756 -817 -881 -949 -1021 -1098
1500 -536 -583 -634 -688 -746 -807 -870 -938 -1010 -1086
1600 -526 -573 -623 -677 -735 -796 -859 -926 -997 -1074
1700 -515 -562 -612 -665 -722 -782 -846 -912 -983 -1060
1800 -502 -550 -600 -653 -709 -768 -832 -898 -969 -1045
1900 -492 -537 -586 -639 -694 -753 -816 -883 -954 -1030
2000 -478 -524 -572 -624 -679 -738 -800 -867 -937 -1012
2100 -463 -509 -557 -608 -663 -721 -783 -849 -919 -913
2200 -447 -492 -540 -591 -646 -703 -765 -831 -900 -974
2300 -430 -475 -523 -573 -627 -684 -746 -811 -880 -953
2400 -413 -457 -504 -555 -608 -665 -726 -791 -859 -932
2500 -395 -439 -485 -535 -588 -645 -705 -769 -837 -909
2600 -377 -420 -466 -515 -567 -623 -683 -747 -814 -885
2700 -357 -400 -445 -494 -546 -601 -661 -724 -790 -861
2800 -337 -379 -424 -473 -524 -578 -637 -699 -766 -836
2900 -316 -358 -403 -450 -501 -555 -613 -674 -740 -809
3000 -295 -336 -380 -427 -478 -531 -587 -648 -712 -781
3100 -273 -313 -357 -403 -453 -506 -562 -621 -685 -753
3200 -250 -289 -332 -378 -428 -480 -535 -595 -658 -725
3300 -226 -265 -307 -352 -401 -453 -508 -566 -630 -696
3400 -201 -239 -281 -325 -373 -424 -478 -537 -600 -665
3500 -175 -213 -254 -298 -344 -394 -448 -506 -568 -633
3600 -148 -186 -226 -269 -315 -364 -418 -475 -535 -599
3700 -121 -157 -197 -239 -284 -333 -386 -442 -502 -565
3800 -92 -128 -166 -208 -253 -300 -352 -408 -467 -530
3900 -62 -97 -136 -176 -220 -267 -318 -373 -431 -493
4000 -32 -66 -103 -143 -186 -232 -283 -337 -394 -455
4100 8 -34 -70 -109 -152 -197 -247 -300 -357 -417
4200 33 4 -36 -74 -116 -161 -209 -262 -317 -377
4300 67 35 2 -38 -79 -123 -170 -222 -277 -336
4400 102 71 37 7 -40 -83 -130 -181 -236 -293
4500 139 108 75 39 13 -42 -88 -138 -192 -248
__________________________________________________________________
Table V—Part 6
Ordinates in Meters
Caliber .50 M2
Range (Meters) 5100 5200 5300 5400
100 -1270 -1360 -1456 -1557
200 -1266 -1356 -1451 -1552
300 -1262 -1351 -1446 -1547
400 -1257 -1346 -1440 -1541
500 -1251 -1340 -1435 -1535
600 -1246 -1335 -1429 -1529
700 -1240 -1328 -1423 -1523
800 -1233 -1321 -1416 -1516
900 -1226 -1314 -1408 -1508
1000 -1218 -1306 -1400 -1499
1100 -1209 -1297 -1391 -1490
1200 -1201 -1288 -1381 -1480
1300 -1190 -1277 -1370 -1469
1400 -1179 -1266 -1359 -1457
1500 -1168 -1255 -1347 -1447
1600 -1155 -1241 -1333 -1431
1700 -1141 -1227 -1318 -1415
1800 -1125 -1211 -1301 -1397
1900 -1109 -1193 -1283 -1379
2000 -1091 -1174 -1264 -1360
2100 -1071 -1154 -1244 -1339
2200 -1051 -1134 -1223 -1317
2300 -1030 -1113 -1201 -1294
2400 -1008 -1090 -1177 -1269
2500 -985 -1066 -1152 -1244
2600 -961 -1041 -1127 -1219
2700 -936 -1016 -1100 -1191
2800 -910 -989 -1073 -1163
2900 -883 -962 -1046 -1135
3000 -855 -934 -1017 -1105
3100 -827 -905 -987 -1074
3200 -797 -874 -955 -1043
3300 -767 -843 -923 -1009
3400 -735 -810 -889 -974
3500 -702 -776 -855 -939
3600 -668 -741 -820 -904
3700 -633 -705 -783 -866
3800 -596 -668 -745 -827
3900 -559 -629 -705 -786
4000 -520 -590 -665 -745
4100 -481 -551 -624 -703
4200 -441 -509 -582 -660
4300 -398 -465 -537 -614
4400 -354 -420 -491 -567
4500 -309 -374 -444 -519
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
B-20 MCWP 3-15.1
Table VI
Searching Reverse Slopes—How to Use

To find a position to search a reverse slope, compute able position is found. Often a movement to the right
from the map the average drop in meters in 100 or left will secure the proper VI.
meters of slope to be searched. In the column headed
by this gradient, note the range opposite a VI of zero. Example: It is desired to search a slope with an aver-
This is the range to search the slope when the gun and age drop of 10 meters in 100 meters. In the column
target are on the same level. On the map, measure under that gradient, and opposite a VI of zero, is
back this range from the target and find the VI of this found the range 2862. Measure back on the map 2862
point. Below or above the zero line in the same col- meters from the target. Suppose the target is 30 meters
umn, depending upon whether the target is below or below the position found. In the same column, oppo-
above this point, find the range opposite the VI. Move site a VI of 30 meters below the gun is found the
forward or back to this range, and if the VI is not range 2756. Move forward to a point 2756 meters
materially changed, the position is suitable. If the VI from the target and determine the QE for that range.
is materially changed, repeat the operation until a suit- Set the QE on the gun and engage the target.
__________________________________________________________________
Table VI
Searching Reverse Slopes
Caliber .50 M2
Number of Meters Drop
Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
90 2225 2321 2417 2513 2609 2702 2789 2876 2959 3041 3124 3201 3279 3352 3422 3490
80 2179 2280 2377 2475 2571 2667 2758 2846 2933 3015 3097 3176 3254 3328 3402 3470
VI 70 2129 2235 2336 2436 2534 2630 2723 2814 2903 2987 3069 3151 3229 3307 3380 3450
60 2079 2188 2291 2393 2494 2592 2688 2781 2873 2960 3042 3124 3204 3282 3357 3430
Above 50 2026 2138 2246 2353 2454 2555 2653 2749 2840 2930 3015 3097 3179 3257 3335 3410
40 1968 2085 2198 2311 2411 2515 1615 2711 2805 2897 2987 3072 3154 3232 3310 3387
Gun 30 1905 2027 2145 2259 2366 2475 2575 2674 2774 2865 2957 3044 3136 3207 3288 3362
20 1836 1963 2090 2208 2321 2431 2535 2639 2740 2835 2927 3014 3100 3182 3264 3341
10 1758 1898 2031 2154 2272 2386 2495 2600 2701 2801 2892 2994 3070 3157 3239 3317
0 1673 1824 1966 2094 2217 2336 2451 2560 2665 2766 2862 2954 3045 3127 3214 3292
10 1565 1738 1891 2033 2162 2286 2401 2515 2625 2726 2827 2923 3015 3102 3185 3267
20 1410 1634 1809 1961 2101 2230 2351 2470 2581 2691 2792 2888 2980 3072 3159 3242
VI 30 1491 1712 1879 2034 2170 2299 2424 2540 2649 2756 2853 2949 3042 3130 3217
40 1582 1787 1957 2107 2243 2342 2493 2606 2716 2818 2916 3012 3103 3190
Below 50 1675 1870 2034 2180 2317 2443 2564 2676 2783 2884 2982 3073 3160
60 1473 1763 1954 2113 2257 2390 2516 2633 2746 2849 2949 3043 3133
Gun 70 1610 1854 2037 2192 2332 2463 2585 2703 2811 2914 3010 3105
80 1731 1947 2124 2272 2408 2539 2661 2774 2879 2979 3075
90 1836 2042 2208 2353 2490 2617 2735 2844 2945 3045
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
B-22 MCWP 3-15.1
Table II
M2 .50 Cal Trajectory Chart—How to Use

To determine the quadrant elevation to a target at a This point lies 0.9 of the distance from the curve for
given range and VI, with the trajectory chart, find the an elevation of 20 mils to that for 30 mils. Multiply
point of intersection of the vertical line corresponding 0.9X10=9. The quadrant elevation to the target is
to the given range and the horizontal line corresponding 20+9=29 mils.
to the given VI (plus, if the target is above the gun;
minus, if below). If this point lies on a black trajectory If it is required to clear a mask at a given range and VI,
curve, the elevation in mils may be read directly from plot the mask in the same way as the target. At the
the curve, either at the right or left. If the point lies same range, locate the position of the trajectory to the
between two curves, multiply the proportion of the dis- target. Above these points, at the top of the chart, is
tance from the lower curve to the upper by 10 and add given the distance of the lowest shot below the center
this to the elevation shown on the lower curve. of the cone. Measure off this distance below the trajec-
tory and plot the position of the lowest shot. If this is
Example: The range to the target is 1600 meters; VI, above the mask it will be cleared. If it falls only a small
10 meters. Plot the target directly above the range of distance below the mask, it may still be practical to fire,
1600 meters and to the right of the VI of 10 meters. as the majority of shots may clear the mask.
Appendix C
MK-19 MOD 3 Firing Table
Table I
Angles of Elevation, Dimensions of Cone and Beaten Zone,

The quadrant elevation required to engage a target on flat or Example: The range to the target is 1,000 meters. The
uniformly sloping ground is listed for the indicated ranges. quadrant elevation on flat or uniformly sloping
ground is 123.4 mils. The time of flight is 5.36 sec-
The time of flight, drift, angle of fall, and the velocity at onds, the drift is 6.2 mils right, the angle of fall is
impact are listed to assist in determining effect on target. 168.5 mils, and the velocity at impact is 150.8 meters
For ranges not in even hundred s and for ranges not per second.
tabulated, the desired information must be deter-
mined by interpolation.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
C-2 MCWP 3-15.1
Table I

Angles of Fall, Time of Flight, and Drift
Projectile, 40mm: HE, M384

Quadrant
Range Elevation Time of Flight Drift Angle of Fall Impact Velocity
Meters Mils Sec Mils Mils M/Sec
100 8.9 .42 .4 9.2 229.2
200 18.5 .87 .8 19.7 218.7
300 28.6 1.34 1.3 31.6 208.6
400 39.5 1.83 1.8 44.9 199.0
500 51.2 2.35 2.3 60.0 189.9
600 63.6 2.89 2.9 77.0 181.2
700 77.0 3.46 3.6 96.1 173.0
800 91.3 4.06 4.4 117.5 165.1
900 106.7 4.69 5.2 141.5 157.2
1000 123.4 5.36 6.2 168.2 150.8
1100 141.3 6.06 7.3 198.7 144.2
1200 160.8 6.80 8.5 232.6 138.1
1300 182.0 7.59 10.0 270.4 132.3
1400 205.2 8.44 11.6 312.9 127.0
1500 230.7 9.34 13.5 360.3 122.2
1600 259.0 10.31 15.7 413.3 117.8
1700 290.6 11.36 18.3 472.4 114.0
1800 326.9 12.52 21.4 539.3 110.7
1900 369.0 13.83 25.3 614.8 108.1
2000 420.2 15.35 30.3 701.9 106.2
2100 487.9 17.27 37.6 807.7 105.3
2200 613.2 20.55 53.1 973.3 106.7
____________________________________________________________________
Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery C-3
Table II

Column 1 is the range in meters from the gun to the Column 6 is the distance the round travels with a tra-
target. jectory of more than 5 meters. It is in this dead space
that overhead fire of friendly troops is safe. For exam-
Column 2 is the elevation in mils when using the triple, when firing at a target 1300 meters down range,
pod and T&E. column 6 shows that from 27 to 1283 meters down
Column 3 is the time of flight in seconds from the range the round’s trajectory will be more than 5
gun to the target. This is especially important when meters above level ground and it will be safe to move
coordinating target suppression and troop movement. friendly troops under this trajectory.
While the round takes on .9 seconds to arrive on target
when fired from 200 meters out, it takes 21.5 seconds Column 7 is the distance from the gun at which the
to impact when fired 2057 meters. trajectory of the round goes below the 5 meter safety
height. This target danger area is in relationship to the
Column 4 shows the maximum ordinate of the round. trajectory of the M430 round and is not based on the
fragmentation pattern of the exploding round. How-
Column 5 is the distance the round travels from the ever, when integrating target suppression and troop
gun until it reaches a height of 5 meters. For example, movement, the 15 meter effective casualty radius of
when the MK19 M430 round is fired at a target 700 the bursting M430 round must be considered.
meters away, the initial danger area extends from the
gun down range 75 meters before its trajectory will For ranges less than 600 meters, overhead fire with
rise more than 5 meters above the ground. For the pur- MK19 in the direct fire mode is not recommended.
pose of this table, 5 meters is used as a safety height.
The safety height comprises the following factors: the The provisional data in this table is computer gener-
height of a standing man (1.8 meters) + 3.2 meters for ated. When necessary the numbers have been rounded
round, weather, and terrain variation. up to ensure troop safety.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
C-4 MCWP 3-15.1
Table II
MK-19 MOD 3 Direct Fire Table (Provisional Data)

Quadrant Time of Flight Initial Danger Target Danger
Range to Target Elevation (Mils) (Seconds) Max Ord Space Dead Space Space
100 9.0 .4 .2 0-100
200 19 .9 .9 0-200
300 30 1.4 2.2 0-300
400 40 1.9 4.2 0-400
500 52 2.4 7.0 0-500
600 66 3.0 10.7 0-93 93-525 525-600
700 80 3.5 15.5 0-75 75-639 639-700
800 95 4.2 21.5 0-58 58-754 754-800
900 112 4.9 29.0 0-50 50-862 862-900
1000 130 5.6 38.2 0-42 42-970 970-1000
1100 150 6.3 49.4 0-36 36-1075 1075-1100
1200 171 7.1 63 0-30 30-1180 1180-1200
1300 195 8.0 79.6 0-27 27-1283 1283-1300
1400 222 9.0 99.6 0-23 23-1386 1386-1400*
1500 252 10.0 124 0-21 21-1488 1488-1500*
1600 287 11.1 154 0-18 18-1590 1590-1600*
1700 327 12.4 191 0-16 16-1689 1689-1700*
1800 375 13.8 239 0-13 13-1787 1787-1800*
1900 435 15.6 304 0-11 11-1891 1891-1900*
2000 525 18.0 407 0-9 9-1995 1995-2000*
2057 667 21.5 578 0-7 7-2054 2054-2057*
* Target danger area is stated in terms of trajectory of the M430 round in relationship to the 5 meter safety height. It is not based on the effective casualty
radius (ECR) of the bursting round. However, the commander must consider the 15 meter ECR when integrating target suppression and troop movement.
____________________________________________________________________
Table III
Indirect Overhead—How to Use

Column 1 is the range in meters from the gun to the Column 7 is the distance from the gun at which the
target. trajectory of the round goes below the 5 meter safety
height. This target danger area is in relationship to the
Column 2 is the elevation in mils when using the tri- trajectory of the M430 round and is not based on the
pod and T&E. fragmentation pattern of the exploding round. How-
Column 3 is the time of flight in seconds from the ever, when integrating target suppression and troop
gun to the target. This is especially important when movement, the 15 meter effective casualty radius
coordinating target suppression and troop movement. must be considered.
The delay of 30.7 to 33.1 seconds must be considered The provisional data in this table was computer gener-
when planning target suppression. ated. The quadrant elevations are based on a maxi-
mum safe elevation of 70.5 degrees. At quadrant
Column 4 shows the maximum ordinate of the round.
elevations in excess of 70.5 degrees, the M430 round
Column 5 is the distance the round travels from the becomes unstable and begins to tumble points over
gun until it reaches a height of 5 meters. For example, tail. Current tripod and T&E allows maximum eleva-
when the MK19 M430 round is fired at a target 1500 tion of approximately 65 degrees.
meters down range, the initial danger area extends from
After the gun has been laid, it must be determined
the gun down range 2 meters before its trajectory will
whether or not the entire cone of fire will clear the
rise more than 5 meters above the ground. For the pur-
mask. When the range to the mask is not more than
pose of this table, 5 meters is used as a safety height.
450 meters, mask clearance exits when the axis of the
The safety height comprises the following factors:
bore is elevated 7 mils or more above the gun-mask
The height of a standing man (1.8 meters) + 3.2 line. After the gun has been laid on the target, the gun-
meters for round, weather, and terrain variation. mask clearance can be checked by depressing the
muzzle of the gun 2 mils and sighting along the bot-
Column 6 is the distance the round travels with a tra- tom of the receiver and the barrel support. If this line
jectory of more than 5 meters. It is in this dead space of sight clears the mask, mask clearance exists for the
that overhead fire of friendly troops is safe. For exam- cone of fire. Do not forget to return the 2 mils of ele-
ple, when firing at a target 1300 meters down, col- vation to the gun before firing.
umn 6 shows that from 2 to 1299 meters down range
When the range to the mask is more than 450 meters,
the round’s trajectory will be more than 5 meters
see Table V, appendix C or appendix H for guidance.
above level ground and it will be safe to move
friendly troops under this trajectory.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
C-6 MCWP 3-15.1
Table III
MK-19 MOD 3 M430 Indirect Fire Table (Provisional Data)

Quadrant Time of Flight Initial Danger Target Danger
Range to Target Elevation (Mils) (Seconds) Max Ord Space Dead Space Space
900 1253 33.1 1201.8 0-2 2-899 899-900*
1000 1230 32.9 1188.2 0-2 2-998 998-1000*
1100 1210 32.9 1175.6 0-2 2-1098 1098-1100*
1200 1189 32.8 1161.3 0-2 2-1199 1199-1200*
1300 1170 32.8 1147.5 0-2 2-1299 1299-1300*
1400 1147 32.8 1130.2 0-2 2-1399 1399-1400*
1500 1124 32.8 1111.2 0-2 2-1499 1499-1500*
1600 1097 32.7 1088.2 0-3 3-1598 1598-1600*
1700 1063 32.5 1056.9 0-3 3-1698 1698-1700*
1800 1024 32.1 1018.0 0-3 3-1798 1798-1800*
1900 980 31.5 970.3 0-3 3-1898 1898-1900*
2000 928 30.7 910.9 0-4 4-1998 1998-2000*
* Target danger area is stated in terms of trajectory of the M430 round in relationship to the 5 meter safety height. It is not based on the effective casualty
radius (ECR) of the bursting round. However, the commander must consider the 15 meter ECR when integrating target suppression and troop movement.
____________________________________________________________________
Table IVa

This table combines the angle of site with the angle of Example The range to the target is 1200 meters. The
directly the quadrant elevation in mils. For ranges not opposite the number 30 in the column headed VI. The
in even hundreds, and for VI’s not tabulated, the ele- quadrant elevation is 187.0 mils.
vation must be determined by interpolation.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
C-8 MCWP 3-15.1
Table IVa

Horiz ontal Distance From the Gun in Meters
VI
in Meters 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200
100 809.1 491.1 356.8 289.2 252.4 232.0 222.6 219.2 220.8 226.9 235.9 248.3 263.5 282.0 303.5 329.1 358.3 393.5 434.4 490.8 570.2
95 782.9 470.5 341.4 277.1 242.6 223.7 215.4 212.9 215.1 221.7 231.2 243.9 259.4 278.1 299.9 325.4 354.9 390.2 430.9 487.1 565.6
90 755.5 449.5 325.9 265.0 232.7 215.4 208.2 206.5 209.4 216.6 226.5 239.5 255.4 274.3 296.2 321.9 351.5 386.8 427.5 483.5 561.1
85 726.7 428.1 310.2 252.9 222.7 207.0 201.0 200.1 203.7 211.4 221.8 235.1 251.3 270.4 292.5 318.4 348.0 383.4 424.1 480.4 556.7
80 696.3 406.3 294.4 240.6 212.8 198.6 193.8 193.8 198.0 206.3 217.0 230.8 247.2 266.6 288.9 314.9 344.6 380.0 420.7 476.2 552.3
75 664.5 384.1 278.5 228.3 202.9 190.2 186.5 187.3 192.3 201.0 212.3 226.4 243.1 262.7 285.2 311.4 341.2 376.7 417.3 472.6 547.9
70 631.1 361.6 262.4 215.9 192.8 181.8 179.2 181.0 186.6 195.9 207.6 222.0 239.0 258.9 281.6 307.8 337.8 373.3 413.9 468.9 543.6
65 596.1 338.7 246.2 203.5 182.7 173.4 171.9 174.6 180.9 190.7 202.9 217.6 234.9 255.0 277.9 304.3 334.4 370.0 410.5 465.4 539.4
60 559.5 315.5 229.9 191.1 172.7 165.0 164.7 168.2 175.3 185.6 198.1 213.2 230.8 251.2 274.3 300.9 331.0 366.6 407.1 461.8 535.2 720.5
55 521.2 292.0 213.5 178.5 162.6 156.5 157.4 161.8 169.5 180.4 193.4 208.9 226.8 247.3 270.6 297.4 327.6 363.3 403.7 458.3 531.1 700.4
50 481.3 268.1 197.0 166.0 152.5 148.0 151.1 155.4 163.8 175.2 188.6 204.5 222.7 243.5 267.0 293.8 324.2 359.9 400.4 454.7 527.0 687.4
45 439.7 244.1 180.4 153.4 142.4 139.5 142.8 149.0 158.0 170.0 183.9 200.1 218.6 239.7 263.3 290.4 320.9 356.6 398.0 451.2 522.9 676.8
40 396.5 219.7 163.8 140.8 132.3 131.0 135.5 142.5 152.3 164.9 179.1 195.8 214.5 235.8 259.7 286.9 317.5 355.3 393.7 447.6 518.9 667.6
35 351.9 195.1 147.0 128.2 122.1 122.6 128.3 136.1 146.5 159.7 174.4 191.4 210.4 232.0 256.1 283.4 314.1 350.0 390.4 444.2 514.9 659.2
30 305.9 170.2 130.2 115.5 111.9 114.0 120.9 129.8 140.9 154.5 169.7 187.0 206.4 228.1 252.4 279.9 310.7 347.6 387.0 440.8 510.9 651.5
25 258.5 145.2 113.4 102.8 101.7 105.6 113.6 123.3 135.1 149.3 164.9 182.6 202.3 224.3 248.8 276.4 307.4 343.3 383.7 437.3 507.0 644.3
20 210.0 120.1 96.5 90.1 91.5 97.0 106.3 116.9 129.4 144.1 160.2 178.2 198.2 220.5 245.2 272.9 304.0 340.0 380.4 433.9 503.1 637.6
15 160.6 94.8 79.6 77.4 81.3 88.5 99.0 110.5 123.7 139.0 155.5 173.9 194.1 216.7 241.5 269.4 300.6 336.7 377.1 430.4 499.2 631.1
10 110.4 69.4 62.6 64.6 71.1 80.0 91.7 104.1 117.9 133.8 150.7 169.5 190.1 212.8 237.9 266.4 297.3 333.4 373.8 427.0 495.4 624.9
5 59.9 44.0 45.6 58.9 60.9 71.4 84.3 97.7 112.2 128.6 146.1 165.1 186.0 209.0 234.3 262.5 293.9 230.2 370.5 423.6 491.6 618.9
____________________________________________________________________
Table IV b

This table combines the angle of site with the angle of Example The range to the target is 1200 meters. The VI
elevation when the target is below the gun and gives is -30 meters (target below gun). In the column headed
directly the quadrant elevation in mils. For ranges and 1200, look opposite the number 30 in the column headed
VI’s that are not tabulated, the elevation must be VI. The quadrant elevation is 134.6 mils (negative).
determined by interpolation.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________
C-10 MCWP 3-15.1
Table IVb

in
Meters 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200
-5 -41..9 -7.2 11.6 26.4 40.5 54.4 69.7 84.8 100.7 118.3 136.6 156.4 177.9 201.4 227.0 255.6 287.2 323.6 365.6 416.9 484.1 607.6
-10 -92.6 -32.2 -5.5 13.6 30.3 45.9 62.4 78.4 95.0 113.0 130.8 152.0 173.8 197.5 223.4 252.1 283.9 320.3 362.4 413.5 480.3 602.2
-15 -142.8 -58.0 -22.5 .9 20.1 37.4 55.1 71.9 89.3 107.9 127.0 147.7 169.7 193.7 219.8 248.7 280.6 317.1 359.1 410.1 476.6 596.9
-20 -192.2 -83.3 -39.4 -11.4 9.8 28.9 47.8 65.5 83.6 102.7 122.4 143.3 165.7 189.9 216.2 245.2 277.2 313.8 355.9 407.1 473.0 591.8
-25 -240.6 -108.4 -56.3 -24.1 0.0 20.4 40.4 59.1 77.9 97.6 117.7 138.9 161.6 186.1 212.6 241.7 273.9 310.6 352.6 403.4 469.3 586.7
-30 -288.0 -133.4 -73.1 -36.8 -10.1 11.9 33.1 52.7 72.2 92.5 112.9 134.6 157.3 182.3 209.0 238.3 270.6 307.3 349.4 400.1 465.7 581.8
-35 -344.0 -158.2 -89.9 -49.4 -20.2 3.4 25.8 46.3 66.5 87.3 108.2 130.4 153.3 178.5 205.4 234.8 267.3 304.1 346.2 396.8 462.1 577.0
-40 -378.7 -182.8 -106.6 -62.1 -30.4 -4.4 18.5 39.9 60.8 82.0 103.5 125.9 149.2 174.7 201.8 231.4 263.9 300.8 342.9 393.5 458.5 572.2
-45 -421.8 -207.2 -123.3 -74.7 -40.5 -13.0 11.3 33.5 55.1 76.9 98.8 121.5 145.2 170.9 198.2 227.9 260.6 297.6 339.7 390.2 454.9 567.6
-50 -463.4 -231.3 -139.9 -87.3 -50.6 -21.4 4.0 27.2 49.3 71.8 94.0 117.2 141.2 167.1 194.6 224.5 257.3 294.3 336.5 386.9 451.4 563.0
-55 -503.3 -255.1 -156.4 -100.0 -60.7 -29.9 -3.3 20.8 44.7 66.6 89.4 113.0 137.3 163.3 191.0 221.1 254.0 291.1 333.3 383.7 447.8 558.5
-60 -541.6 -278.6 -172.7 -112.2 -70.7 -38.2 -10.7 14.4 38.0 61.5 84.7 108.5 133.3 159.5 187.4 217.7 250.7 287.9 330.1 380.4 444.3 554.1
-65 -578.2 -301.8 -189.0 -124.7 -80.8 -46.7 -17.8 8.0 32.3 56.3 79.9 104.2 129.2 155.7 183.8 214.2 247.4 284.7 326.9 377.1 440.8 549.7
-70 -613.2 -324.7 -205.1 -137.1 -90.8 -55.1 -25.0 .8 26.6 51.2 75.3 99.8 125.2 151.9 180.3 210.8 244.1 281.5 323.7 373.9 437.4 545.4
-75 -646.5 -347.2 -221.2 -149.4 -100.8 -63.5 -32.2 -4.7 20.9 46.0 70.6 95.5 121.2 148.2 176.7 207.4 240.8 278.3 320.6 370.7 433.9 541.1
-80 -678.4 -369.3 -237.1 -161.7 -110.8 -71.9 -39.5 -11.0 15.3 41.0 65.9 91.2 117.2 144.4 173.1 204.0 237.6 275.1 317.4 367.4 430.0 536.9
-85 -708.6 -391.1 -252.9 -173.9 -120.7 -80.2 -46.7 -17.4 9.6 35.9 61.2 85.9 113.1 140.6 169.5 200.6 234.3 271.9 314.2 364.2 427.0 532.8
-90 -737.5 -412.4 -268.6 -186.0 -130.6 -88.5 -53.8 -23.7 4.0 39.7 56.6 82.6 109.1 136.8 166.0 197.2 231.0 268.7 311.1 361.0 423.6 528.7
-95 -764.9 -433.4 -284.1 -198.2 -140.5 -96.9 -61.0 -30.0 -1.7 25.1 51.9 78.2 105.1 133.1 162.4 193.8 227.7 265.5 307.9 357.8 420.3 524.6
-100 -791.0 -453.9 -299.4 -210.2 -150.3 -105.1 -68.2 -36.3 -7.2 20.5 47.2 73.9 101.1 129.3 158.8 190.4 224.5 262.3 304.8 354.6 416.9 520.6
__________________________________________________________________
Table V
Trajectory Chart—How to Use

To determine the quadrant elevation to a target at a the lowest show below the center of the cone. Mea-
given range and VI, with the trajectory chart, find the sure off this distance below the trajectory and plot the
point of intersection of the vertical line corresponding position of the lowest shot. If this is above the mask,
to the given range and the horizontal line correspond- it will be cleared. If it falls only a small distance
ing to the given VI (plus, if the target is above the below the mask, it may still be practical to fire, as the
gun; minus, if below). If this point lies on a black tra- majority of shots may clear the mask.
jectory curve, the elevation in mils may be read
directly from the curve. If the point lies between two Example: The range to the target is 1500 meters;
curves, multiply the proportion of the distance from VI, 15 meters. Plot the target directly above the
the lower curve to the upper by 10 and add this to the range of 1500 meters and to the right of the VI
elevation shown on the lower curve. If it is required to of 0 meters. This point lies 0.8 of the distance
clear a mask at a given range and VI, plot the mask in from the curve for an elevation of 200 mils to
the same way as the target. At the same range, locate that for 250 mils. Multiply 0.8X50=240 mils.
the position of the trajectory to the target. Above these The quadrant elevation to the target is
points, at the top of the chart, is given the distance of 200+40=240 mils.
Appendix D
Destruction of Machine Guns
1. General striking it with the barrel at the sideplate corners near-

est the feedway. Smash the extractor.
The decision to destroy the gun to prevent its capture
and use by the enemy is a command decision and will (2) M240G. Disassemble as completely as time per-
be ordered and carried out only on authority delegated mits. Using the barrel or some other heavy equipment,
by the major unit (battalion and above) commander. smash the cover, feedtray, receiver group, operating
group, buffer, stock, and gas cylinder.
The machine gun and mount are destroyed only when
they are subject to capture or abandonment. Destruc- (3) MK-19. Disassemble as completely as time per-
tion must be as complete as circumstances permit. mits. Remove the bolt and backplate assembly and
smash it against the receiver assembly, disfiguring the
Lacking time for complete destruction, only those bolt and backplate assembly to a point where it will
parts essential to operation of the gun are destroyed, no longer fit into the receiver assembly. Smash the top
beginning with those parts most difficult for the cover assembly using the bolt and backplate assem-
enemy to duplicate. The same parts of each gun are bly or some other heavy object.
destroyed to prevent the reconstruction of a complete
gun from several damaged guns. (4) Disposal of parts. Bury the disassembled weapon
in suitable holes or dump parts into streams, mud,
2. Methods of Destruction snow, sumps, or latrines.
a. Disassembly and Smashing

(5) Mounts and traversing mechanism. The mount and
traversing and elevating mechanism can be destroyed
(1) M2. Disassemble as completely as time permits. by smashing them with the machine gun barrel or
Use the barrel as a sledge. Raise the cover and smash other heavy objects. Bend the tripod legs.
the cover forward and down, toward the barrel sup-
port. Smash the backplate group. Remove the firing b. Thermite Grenade. By placing a thermite grenade
pin from the bolt; place the striker in the hole in the on the cover assembly, cover group, or top cover, as
face of the bolt and bend it until broken. Remove the appropriate, with the gun material on the tripod, the gun
barrel buffer tube lock assembly from the barrel and mount will be destroyed. Component parts should
buffer body group and bend and deform it. Smash and be placed near the grenade to ensure their destruction.
bend the breech lock depressors. Place the barrel c. Demolitions. Composition 4 (C4) molded inside
extension in the rear of the receiver. With the barrel the receiver and around the mount, when exploded,
extension shank protruding, knock off the shank by will render the machine gun inoperable.
Appendix E
Infantry Plotting Board M17
1. Description played on the bottom right of the base is in meters on

the M17 and in yards on the M10. Both the M17 and
The M17 plotting board is a fire-control instrument M10 plotting boards can be used in executing the pro-
designed to help the operator in computing and plot- cedures outlined in this appendix and in appendix F.
ting firing data. It consists of a transparent, rotatable
plotting disk attached to a flat base. (See figure E-1.) a. Base. The base (see figure E-2) is square on one
It is sturdy, simple to operate, accurate, and easily side and semicircular on the other. Printed on the base
adaptable to use in the field. It is carried in a durable and directly under the disk is a circular area marked
canvas case. In addition to the M17 plotting board, with a rectangular grid printed in red. Note the red
there are still many M10 infantry plotting boards in base index line with the arrow. The index line is grad-
use. The M10 and the M17 are almost identical; the uated outward from the center (pivot point) from 0 to
only difference being that the triple map scale dis- 20 in hundreds of meters. These numbers are spaced
Figure E-1. M17 Plotting Board.

____________________________________________________________________________________________________
E-2 MCWP 3-15.1
Figure E-2. Base.
at every second horizontal fine line. Each small grid the location of the observation post, or of a firing
square is, therefore, 50 meters on a side. To the left of position, as desired.
the index line are figures giving double values for the
grid squares. At this scale, each small grid scale is 100 Besides the grid scales, there are printed on the base
meters on a side. However, any value may be assigned three scales for measuring and a vernier scale for
to the small grid square which best suits the problem greater accuracy in using the mil scale on the disk.
at hand. These scales are:
● At the bottom of the base is a triple map scale in
The red arrow of the base index line points to a red meters (yards with the M10) with its legend above
“0” and a fine red line which extends to the edge of it, with representative fractions of 1/50,000; 1/
the plotting board (through the center of the vernier 25,000; and 1/5,000. These representative fractions
scale). This fine red line is the index mark on the refer respectively to the top, middle, and lower
base at which all deflections or azimuths are read. scales. Use these scales to transfer data to or from a
The base is oriented when the red arrow of the index map or firing chart which has one of these scales.
line is at the top (pointing away from the operator) ● At the right side is a scale of inches in 10ths, num-
and the square side is to the operator’s right. The bered from 0 to 7 inches and having an extension
pivot point, designated by the letters OP, represents divided into 20ths.
____________________________________________________________________
Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery E-3
Figure E-3. Example of Use of Vernier Scale.
● At the top is a scale in centimeters, divided into and rotate the top disk until the two lines coincide.
millimeters, and numbered from 1 to 9. The desired azimuth is now directly opposite the
● Opposite the red arrow of the index line is a vernier point of the index line as shown in figure E-3B.
scale for use with the mil scale on the disk. By
means of this scale, it is possible to lay off an azi- b. Plotting Disk. The plotting disk (see figure E-4) is
muth reading with great accuracy by using the made of a plastic material that is roughened on the
method illustrated below. For example, to lay off upper surface to receive pencil marks. Four scales and
an azimuth of 6,263 mils: a fine black line are printed on the disk.
❍ Set the graduation on the mil scale which repre-
sents 6,260 mils opposite the 0 line of the ver- A complete mil scale (referred to later as the mil
nier scale. (See figure E-3A.) scale) in printed in black, running around the outer
❍ To add the final 3 mils, count, on the vernier edge in a clockwise direction to conform to the com-
scale, three lines to the left from the 0 line. pass for plotting azimuth angles. This scale is divided
❍ Note the line on the mil scale which lies next in 10-mil increments and numbered in hundreds of
inside it (toward the 0 line of the vernier scale), mils from 0 to 6400.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
E-4 MCWP 3-15.1
Figure E-4. Rotatable Plotting Disk.
A supplementary scale (the middle scale) is printed in operator. The plotting board is used to plot accurately
red, running counterclockwise from 0 to 3200 and the relative positions of the machine guns, registra-
3200 to 500. This middle scale is numbered in hun- tion points, and targets, and to determine the direc-
dreds of mils. It is used in computing angles of site for tion and distance between these points. Since the size
weapons other than mortars. of the dots placed on the board affects the accuracy of
the data determined, dots must be made as small as
A second supplementary mil scale (the inner scale) is possible. To make it easier to locate these small dots,
printed in black and runs clockwise. The 0 of this they may be encircled. In computing the data, be care-
scale appears under the 3200 on the mil scale. This ful to use the dot and not the circle.
scale is numbered in hundreds of mils from 0 to 3200.
It is used in computing angles of site for weapons Any arbitrary point on the disk may be selected as the
other than mortars. machine gun position or the OP. Whenever possible,
2. Operations With Plotting Board the center (pivot point) of the board is used to repre-
sent the machine gun position.
a. General. The theory of operation of the plotting
board is basically simple, and the accuracy of the To plot a point with a given azimuth and distance
results obtained is limited by the exactness of the from another point, proceed as follows:
____________________________________________________________________
● Use the pivot as the first point. b. Sample Problem One. This problem determines
● Rotate the disk until the stated azimuth is indicated the azimuth and range from a new machine gun firing
over the index line. position to the target:
● To determine the distance on the plotting board
from the first point to the second point, divide the (1) Given. Machine gun position at the center (pivot
stated distance by 50 or 100, depending on which point) of the disk.
scale on the base is used. The result is the number ● Machine gun position to new position: Azimuth
of squares on the base between the two points. 4,150 mils; distance 550 meters.
Count off the number of squares or fractions of ● Machine gun position to target: Azimuth 5,750
squares thus determining from the first point toward mils; distance 1,500 meters.
the top of the plotting board, and plot the second
point. The second point may be plotted also by (2) Procedure. To determine the azimuth and range
measuring off the stated distance from the first from the new machine gun position to the target,
point toward the top of the plotting board using the using the range scale along the index line (where the
range scales on the base. smallest grid graduation represents 50 meters), pro-
ceed as follows:
When two or more points have been placed on the
plotting board in this manner, it is possible to deter- ● Rotate the disk until 4150 mils is read over the
mine the distance between any two given points and index on the base. Mark the disk with a pencil dot
the azimuth from one point to the other. over the index line at the 550-meter graduation.
This dot represents the location of the new mortar
To determine the azimuth between two plotted points, position.
the operator must remember that all parallel lines have ● Rotate the disk until 5750 mils is read over the
the same azimuth. Therefore, when a particular azi- index on the base. Mark the disk with a pencil dot
muth is rotated over the index, every vertical line on over the index line at the 1500-meter graduation.
the grid is pointing along the same azimuth. This This dot represents the location of the target.
means also that the azimuth of any of the vertical lines
● Rotate the disk until an imaginary line connecting
of the grid is read at the index mark. To find the azi-
the two pencil dots becomes parallel with the index
muth of a given point with respect to another, rotate
line. Rotate it in such a direction that the dot repre-
the disk until the two pencil dots lie along one of the
senting the location of the target (TGT) is toward
vertical lines on the grid base or until they are the
the top of the board.
same distance from the same vertical line with the
given dot (target) toward the top of the plotting board. ● The azimuth GUN-TGT is then read at the index
The azimuth may then be read on the mil scale at the mark on the base as 6110 mils. The total number of
index on the base. meters between the pencil dots when in the parallel
position (1,400 meters above the horizontal grid
Determine the range between the dots in meters by line passing through the pivot plus 200 meters
counting the number of small grid graduations separating below) is the range GUN-TGT: 1,600 meters.
them when in this position and multiplying this number
by 50 or 100, depending on which scale on the base is
used. The range can also be determined by measuring the c. Sample Problem Two. This problem involves
distance, using one of the range scales on the base. the solving of survey notes:
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
E-6 MCWP 3-15.1
(1) Given. A machine gun squad is placed in position 3. Plotting Board Used as an Observed
by team, each team in a different location. The first Firing Chart
team is plotted at the pivot point of the plotting board. The plotting board is used as an observed firing chart
The second team is located (surveyed) with reference on which the locations of the registration points are
to the first team by compass and pacing. A traverse of plotted in relation to the firing position from data
two legs is made to the second team from the first obtained by registration firing (fire adjustment).
team as follows:
The pivot point of the plotting board is arbitrarily
● First leg: Azimuth 4,800; distance 200 meters. selected as the location of the base machine gun (usu-
● Second leg: Azimuth 5,400, distance 250 meters. ally left flank gun) in the firing position. The registra-
tion data (GUN-TGT range and corrected magnetic
(2) Procedure. To plot the location of the second team azimuth) determined by adjusting on the registration
with reference to the first team, proceed as follows: point are then used to plot the location of the registra-
● Use the range scale along the index line. tion point with respect the firing position. New tar-
● Rotate the disk until azimuth 4800 is at the index. gets reported by OPs are plotted on the firing chart
Count up 200 meters along the red index line and with respect to the registration points or other refer-
make a pencil dot. ence points (such as targets previously adjusted upon,
● Rotate the disk until azimuth 5400 is at the index. or OP locations) whose chart locations are known. An
From the pencil dot just plotted, count up to 250 observed firing chart permits accurate firing at night
meters and make a pencil dot. This is the location or under conditions of poor visibility on any target
of the second team. The same procedure would be whose chart location is known.
used to locate the other machine gun teams of the The observed firing chart is used to:
section.
● To determine the azimuth and direction from the ● Plot the location of the registration point with
first team to the second team, rotate the disk until respect to the firing position (base machine gun).
the plotted location of the second team is toward the ● Plot the location of OPs when their location is
top of the plotting board and is on the same vertical known or desired.
line or the same distance from the same vertical line ● Plot new targets reported by OPs with respect to
as the first team plot (in this case on the red index reference points (such as reference points, or previ-
line). The azimuth is 5,120 mils and the distance is ously fired targets) whose chart locations are
425 meters. known.
● Plot new targets by polar coordinates when the
d. Other Uses for Plotting Board. In addition to observer’s location is known.
the examples illustrated above, the plotting board can ● Plot new targets by grid coordinates when the
be used to compare angles of size, to make simple observer has a map.
sketches which require azimuths and pacing, to follow
● Determine the GUN-TGT range and direction.
azimuths for various paced distances, to indicate the
friendly frontline, and as a firing chart to compute fir- ● Determine special corrections for each machine
ing data for one or more indirect fire weapons. gun to fit a target of special shape.
____________________________________________________________________
● Mass fires of the section on any target whose chart If a new target is reported with reference to a previ-
location is known. ous target whose chart location is known and whose
● Plot the location of friendly forward elements (front plot has been removed from the plotting board, the
line troops). latter target (reference point) is replotted on the plot-
ting board for this particular fire mission. The data for
Frequently the observer requesting indirect machine replotting this target (reference point) on the plotting
gun fire support does not have a map to determine board is obtained from the target data worksheet.
coordinates. His target designation is usually made with
Maps and photomaps may be used to plot targets on
reference to a point whose chart location is known.
the firing chart which are located and reported by map
When a new target is reported with reference to a tar-
or photomap coordinates.
get previously fired upon and plotted on the firing
chart, the firing data (range and direction) is determined Firing data (range and deflection) is determined on the
with the plotting board. When the fire mission is com- plotting board with respect to the previously plotted
pleted, the target is replotted using the adjusted fire data point. A protractor and ruler or a compass are used in
(data for replot). However, if too many targets are plot- determining initial firing data from a map.
ted on the plotting board, the chart (plotting board)
becomes so cluttered with detail that it hampers the
4. Plotting Board Used for Indirect Fire
conduct of subsequent fire adjustments. Therefore, it is
desirable to plot on the plotting board only those targets For detailed information concerning utilization of the
that are likely to be used by observers as reference infantry plotting board in computing data for indirect
points for reporting the location of new targets. fire, see appendix F.
Appendix F
Adjustment of Indirect Machine Gun Fire
1. General c. Map Method. Plot accurately on the map the

positions of single guns or of the flank guns of a bat-
a. Accuracy. Since indirect machine gun fire is tery, target flanks, friendly troops, and the initial aim-
very difficult to adjust, it is imperative that firing data ing point (IAP). Draw lines connecting the gun
be obtained and computed accurately. To do this positions with the appropriate target and from the sin-
requires a knowledge of the characteristics of fire, gle gun or base gun of the squad or section to the IAP.
machine gun drill, control instruments, mil formula, Locate the probable mask by inspection or as
and firing tables. The computation of firing data described in chapter 6, section XII. Obtain ranges by
demands exactness and close attention to detail. Profi- applying the map scale and vertical intervals (VIs) by
ciency in this is acquired by practice in solving indi- means of the map contour lines. Quadrant elevation
rect laying problems. (QE) for target, clearance, and safety are extracted
b. Source of Firing Data. These data are obtained from the appropriate table IVa or IVb. The section
from a map, terrain measurement, or by the terrain- leader/fire direction noncommissioned officer (NCO)
observer-gun (TOG) method. The TOG method is the computes direction changes from the plotting board
more accurate but is more complex to compute. It is and then conducts a map inspection. This technique is
explained in greater detail in paragraph 2. The map further explained in paragraph 3b.
method is more practical and is more applicable to
rapid field utilization. The map method is also 3. Technique
explained in paragraph 2.
a. General. Adjustment of indirect machine gun
fire can be accommodated by a combination of data
2. Fundamentals from both the M10/M17 plotting board and informa-
a. Essential Factors of Indirect Laying. Four tion extracted from the appropriate firing tables con-
essential factors must be considered in indirect lay- tained herein.
ing. These are direction, elevation, mask clearance, The plotting board will usually be maintained by the
and troop safety. machine gun section leader (fire direction NCO) or
b. TOG Method. The observer occupies an obser- other personnel as designated by the weapons com-
vation post (OP) from which he can see the gun posi- pany commander. The fire direction NCO should be
tion (if possible), the mask, friendly troops if present, located at the gun position and have positive commu-
and the targets. The observer draws a diagram to scale nications (radio or wire) with the observer.
of these various positions in relation to the OP, using b. Procedure
a compass to determine their magnetic azimuths and a
map to determine their distance from the OP. He also (1) Adjustment or Correction to Machine Gun Indi-
measures the angle of site to targets, guns, and mask. rect Fire. Adjustment or correction to machine gun
The data obtained are recorded. The M17 plotting indirect fire is a factor of both deflection or direction
board provides a rapid and convenient means of cal- (traverse right or left) and elevation (range). The
culating and plotting TOG data. adjustment or correction for deflection is taken from
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
F-2 MCWP 3-15.1
the plotting board, regardless of machine gun type.

Corrections or adjustment to range are dependent
upon the specific ballistics characteristics of the type
round and must be extracted from the appropriate fir-
ing table.
(2) Use of Plotting Board. The pivot point of the
plotting board becomes the location of the base gun.
The base gun (all guns) are laid on the gun-target
(GUN-TGT) azimuth. All guns set zero deflection to
correspond to the GUN-TGT azimuth. (Machine guns
are normally positioned 50 meters apart.) The beaten
zone for four machine guns, each laid on the GUN-
TGT line with a range to target of 1,400 meters, is as
depicted in figure F-1.
The fire direction NCO rotates the disk until the azi-
muth read over the index on the base is the same as
the azimuth on which the guns are laid. A mark (?1) is Figure F-1. Parallel Sheaf.
then made on this line, The GUN-TGT line at the
appropriate range. Figure F-3 shows a GUN-TGT
direction of 1400 mils at a range of 1,400 meters.
____________________________________________________________________
Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery F-3
Figure F-3. GUN-TGT Azimuth

(GUN-TGT Azimuth of 1400 Mils; Range 1,400 Meters).
As soon as the observer reports the observer-target along the index line or one of the grid lines parallel to
(O-T) direction, the fire direction NCO marks with an it. Figure F-4 shows the plot of the observer’s subse-
OP symbol (D) the graduation on the mil scale of the quent correction of: RIGHT TWO HUNDRED, ADD
plotting board which corresponds to the O-T direc- TWO HUNDRED. Subsequent corrections through-
tion reported by the observer. Figure F-3 shows an O- out an adjustment are plotted in a similar manner for
T direction of 950 mils. each volley fired, moving from the location of the pre-
viously plotted point (target location).
After orienting the plotting board on the O-T direction,
the machine gun section leader alerts the observer that After plotting the forward observer’s corrections, the
they are prepared to fire an initial burst. A 40- to 50- fire direction NCO rotates the disk of the plotting
round burst is fired by gun #1 and the observer is board until the pencil dot representing the last correc-
informed that the rounds are on the way. The fire direction from the observer is directly over the index line
tion NCO plots subsequent cor-rections reported by the on the base. The direction is then read on the base,
forward observer (FO) by moving right or left as and a deflection correction announced to the guns.
directed by the observer from the previous plot along a The range at which the next volley is fired is deter-
grid line perpendicular to the index line on the base mined by referring to the range scale along the index
and adding or dropping as directed by the observer line. (See figure F-5.)
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
F-4 MCWP 3-15.1
Figure F-4. Observer’s Corrections.
After the deflection change is given, the correction in ● Mask clearance (may not be a factor). Mask is any
elevation to account for the new range must be deter- terrain feature or object that screens the target from
mined. Evaluation or target distance data is computed the gun.
in accordance with the instructions contained in the ● Overhead fire (troop safety; may not be a factor).
following paragraphs.
(4) Elevation Data. To obtain the quadrant elevation of
(3) Correction for Range. The correction for range is
the guns to the target, it is necessary to know ranges
dependent upon the specific weapon system and must be
and the vertical interval (relative vertical location of the
extracted from the various tables contained in appendix
target in relation to the gun; i.e., target located above or
A (M240G), appendix B (M2 .50 cal), or appendix C
below gun location) of the guns to the target. By means
(MK-19). Regardless of the weapon, three requirements
of a map, plot the locations of both the guns and target.
must be considered. These requirements include:
Determine the elevation of both and the distance
● Quadrant elevation (always required). (height) the target is above or below the guns. Once
____________________________________________________________________
Figure F-5. Deflection Correction.
height relationship of the gun to target has been estab- or lower the gun using the elevation hand wheel on the
lished, table IVa or table IVb (in appropriate appendix traversing and elevating mechanism.
A, B, or C) is used to determine QE. For example, the
target is located on an elevation that is 10 meters higher (5) Mask Clearance and Troop Safety. Once the QE to
than the gun, and the range to target is 1,200 meters. target is determined, requirements for the rounds
The weapon being utilized is the caliber .50 machine clearing any terrain elevation (mask) between the
gun. Table IVa (target above gun), appendix B (M2 .50 guns and target and friendly troop safety must be con-
cal Firing Tables) is used. The table is entered at the sidered and calculations made to determine if the cur-
appropriate VI, in this case 10, and is read across until rent QE will provide sufficient height to
the horizontal distance corresponds to target range. The accommodate mask clearance and troop safety. The
resulting figure is the QE in mils. The correct QE for QE’s for mask and/or troop safety may be obtained by
the above example is 22 mils. (See figure F-6). The ele- determining VI and range to mask and/or troops from
vation is placed on the machine gun by utilizing the cli- a map, and using the appropriate table IVa or IVb,
nometer contained in the M2 compass. Set the substituting range to mask and/or troops for range to
announced elevation on the clinometer; place the M2 target, and moving across until the corresponding QE
compass on a flat surface on the feed cover; then raise is obtained. (See figure F-6.)
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
F-6 MCWP 3-15.1
Figure F-6. Quadrant Elevation, Table IVa, Target Above Gun.
The QE gun to target, minus the QE gun to mask and/ ● Lay the gun to hit the target. Without moving
or troops, equals the angle of mask or troop clear- the piece, set the sight at the corresponding
ance. Obtain required mask clearance for the range range for troop safety or mask clearance as
(gun to mask) from the appropriate table III (mask given in tables II and III. If the line of sighting
clearance), and the required safety angle for the range thus established clears the mask (or troops), it is
gun to troop from the appropriate table II (overhead practicable to fire.
fire). If the angles of mask or troop clearance equal or
exceed the required mask clearance or troop safety, If no tables are available, the procedure is as fol-
respectively, the mask will be cleared and the troops lows: If the range to the mask is less than 500
will be safe. meters, set the sight at the range to the mask plus
425. If the line of sighting thus established clears the
The following examples of the map method are pro-
mask, the cone of fire will clear. If the range to mask
vided as sample problems and offer opportunity to
is 500 meters or greater, set the sight at the range to
gain proficiency in working with the various tables.
mask plus 300, and see if this line of sighting clears
Each example (figures F-7 through F-15) contains a
the mask. If there are friendly troops, the procedure
schematic of the problem to include type weapon,
is similar. The sight is set at the range to the troops
VI’s to target, mask, and troops; appropriate ranges;
plus 650, or at 1,525, whichever is the greater. This
and a worksheet explaining data computation.
gives results which are sufficiently accurate for all
For shorter ranges, and when the troops and/or mask practical purposes.
can easily be identified, clearance can be determined
by use of the rear sight as explained as follows:
____________________________________________________________________
Figure F-7. Example 1.

____________________________________________________________________________________________________
F-8 MCWP 3-15.1

____________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________________
F-10 MCWP 3-15.1

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________________
F-12 MCWP 3-15.1

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________________
F-14 MCWP 3-15.1

__________________________________________________________________

Appendix G
Final Protective Lines
1. General
Machine gun final protective lines (FPLs) are usually
fired at a rapid rate for the first 2 minutes and a sus-
tained rate thereafter. In order to keep the enemy
beyond hand grenade range, these fires should be
located at least 50 meters forward of the battle position.
2. Characteristics
Effective FPLs are characterized by three major features:
● Flanking fire
● Interlocking fire
Figure G-1. Example of the Increased Effect
● Grazing fire
of Flanking Fire.
FPLs should provide as much flanking fire as possi-
ble (see figure G-1). Flanking, enfilade fire is highly
desirable for the FPL. Terrain and obstacles should be
used to force enemy formations into positions where
the fires of the FPL will be flanking and enfilade. For
example, every attempt should be made to position
guns toward the flank of the defense and align FPLs
along the enemy side of tactical wire (see figure G-2).
When the attacking enemy encounters the wire and
slows or stops to negotiate it, flanking, enfilade fire
from machine guns effectively engages them.
FPLs should also be interlocking (see figure G-3).
This adds to the effectiveness of the fire plan by elim-
inating gaps in the FPLs and maximizing the coverage
by fire across as much of the frontage as possible.
Additionally, it provides mutual support between
adjacent units.
Figure G-2. Using Obstacles to Enhance the

Effectiveness of the FPL.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-2 MCWP 3-15.1
FPLs should also be located to obtain maximum grazing of the gap on the FPL. This is important in determin-
fire (see figure G-4). The concept of grazing fire is to ing the type of weapon that will be used to cover the
place a wall of bullets, in the form of the cone of fire, dead space.
between an advancing enemy and friendly positions.
This is done by sighting the weapon on the farthest range It should be noted that the effectiveness of a machine
possible where the center of the cone of fire will remain gun’s fire may not be completely cancelled by sec-
approximately 1 meter above the ground. This ensures tions of dead space. First, continuous firing of the
that the lower bound of the cone of fire is as close to the FPL will keep the enemy confined to the areas of dead
ground as possible to minimize the enemy’s opportunity space, impede his movement, and allow other weap-
to move underneath it without being hit. Six hundred ons systems time to engage him. Secondly, it must be
meters is the maximum range whereby grazing fire can remembered that while we lay the gun for 600 meters,
be maintained with the M240G. with grazing fire in mind, another consideration is that
a danger space exists along that entire distance. Dan-
Identification of gaps in the FPL, called dead space, is ger space takes the entire cone of fire into consider-
critical. Dead space indicates areas on the FPL that ation, not just the center as with grazing fire. Danger
cannot be adequately engaged by the machine gun’s space is essentially a measure of the entire “kill zone”
fires, and it requires the assignment of other weapons created by the cone of fire which will hit a standing
systems to cover the space. In perfect conditions, on man at a prescribed range. The M240G’s cone of fire
uniformly sloping ground, and with the gun sighted at does not rise above the height of a standing man (1.8
600 meters, the maximum dead space on an FPL meters) out to a range of 700 meters. At this range, on
would be .8 meters (31 inches) (it would occur at uniformly sloping ground, the maximum dead space
approximately 300 meters). See figure G-5. This would be 1.4 meters (55 inches) and would occur at
space would be difficult to move under without resort- half of that range (350 meters). Although this dead
ing to a low crawl, which would seriously impede the space could allow the enemy to move under the FPL,
enemy’s momentum in the attack. Since terrain is sel- enemy personnel who try to advance standing upright
dom uniformly sloping, any depressions in the ground could still be hit at any point along the 700 meter long
along the FPL will aid the enemy in moving under- line of fire. The grazing fire measurement of 600
neath it more quickly. This is why dead space in the meters is used as the maximum range for a FPL
FPL must be identified and marked. The FPL is indi- instead of the 700 meter measurement of effective
cated on maps, fire plan sketches, or overlays by danger space since the 31 inch maximum dead space
drawing a wide black line to indicate grazing fire and encountered when sighted at 600 meters is far more
effective danger space. A thin line is drawn whenever restrictive to enemy movement than the 55 inch maxi-
grazing fire is lost, the danger space is diminished, mum dead space encountered when sighted at 700
and dead space occurs (see figure G-6). Sections of meters. Finally, although the FPL is a “fixed” firing
dead space are drawn to scale showing the exact width mission, two clicks of elevation (either up or down) of
searching manipulation with the traversing and elevat-
ing mechanism is permitted and encouraged during
firing. This technique maintains a fixed line of fire
Figure G-3. Interlocking Machine Gun Fires. Figure G-4. Grazing Fire Plotted to Scale.
___________________________________________________________________
Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery G-3
Figure G-5. Considerations in Measuring Dead Space.
while continually changing the height of the cone of gun is positioned correctly and locked into place on
fire and the location of the beaten zone, better cover- the tripod as it will be when firing the FPL. He then
ing the area along the line, including any sections of gets into a good firing position behind the gun, sets
dead space. 600 meters on the rear sight, and aims in on a point
3. Walking the FPL

Once the machine gun unit leader has ensured that
positions are occupied properly, machine guns are
immediately set in firing positions to cover assigned
sectors of fire and principal direction of fire (PDF) or
FPLs. The squad leader points out definitive terrain
features to each machine gun team when prescribing
sectors of fire, PDFs and FPLs. When a FPL is
assigned, it should be walked whenever practicable.
Walking the FPL allows the team to determine the
extent of the grazing fire and danger space available,
and to locate and mark any dead space in the FPL.
Prior to walking the FPL, the gunner ensures that the Figure G-6. Dead Space in FPL.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-4 MCWP 3-15.1
along the FPL that he estimates to be 600 meters machine gun fire. If both teams of the squad are posi-
away. The team leader or ammunition bearer then tioned properly, approximately 35 to 50 meters apart,
walks out along the FPL using a standard pace. (For both team range cards will be similar, but not exactly
accuracy the length of the individual’s pace must be alike. One copy of the range card, along with the pace
measured.) When the gunner can no longer observe card, is given to the squad leader who, from the infor-
the walker below the center mass of his chest, he mation provided, determines the amount of dead
shouts out MARK. The person walking the FPL then space within each team FPL. The squad leader, in
records the number of paces that he took to that point conjunction with the section leader, determines the
on a pace card. The individual then continues to walk number and position of mortar barrages required to
the FPL. Once the gunner sees the walker’s body cover the dead space in the squad FPL.
below the center mass of his chest, he shouts out
MARK again. The walker once again records the
number of paces that he took to reach that spot. This 5. Positioning of Mortar Barrages
procedure is continued until the walker reaches the Each rifle company contains three 60mm mortars,
limits of grazing fire (600 meters). Pace counts each of which can fire one barrage. The infantry bat-
recorded in this manner show how far away each sec- talion weapons company contains eight 81mm mor-
tion of dead space is from the gun position and how tars, each of which can fire one barrage. Each 81mm
wide the dead space is from near side to far side (see and 60mm mortar barrage covers an area 50 meters
figure G-7). wide by 50 meters deep. Within the infantry battal-
NOTE ion, there is the capability to fire nine 60mm and eight
81mm mortar barrages for a total of 17 barrages. A
Using the center mass of the chest as the point rifle company will be allocated 81mm mortar barrages
where dead space begins to take into by the battalion commander. The number allocated
consideration the measure of grazing fire, depends on the terrain in front of each company, the
danger space, maximum ordinate, and enemy avenues of approach into each company’s bat-
maximum dead space. Using the gunner’s view tle position, and the number of companies assigned
of a person’s waist (an approximate measure of forward battle positions. Normally, a rifle company is
the 1 meter height of grazing fire) as the point allocated two to three 81mm mortar barrages; thus,
at which dead space begins is too limiting as a when added to its three organic 60mm mortar bar-
tactical measurement of fire over actual terrain rages, a company normally has five to six mortar bar-
and disregards the effective danger space rages at its disposal.
created by the lower portion of the cone of fire.
If, however, dead space is not marked until Barrages should only be positioned where they are
only a person’s head is visible to the gunner, required to fill in gaps in the FPL of the machine gun
then a significant amount of dead space would squad. The squad FPL is the combined effect of both
have been overlooked and unmarked prior to machine gun teams. In positioning the barrages, the
that point (based on the measure of maximum maximum effect must be obtained from all weapons
dead space at 600 meters). The use of the of the rifle company to fill in gaps on the FPL. In
center mass of the chest as the measuring point some instances, it may be impractical to use a bar-
for dead space is a compromise between these rage to cover dead space. In figure G-7, there are
two considerations. three areas of dead space in the FPL; MARK 1 to
MARK 2 equals 38 meters; MARK 3 to MARK 4
equals 76 meters; MARK 5 to MARK 6 equals 84
4. Preparation of Range Cards
meters. These areas of dead space are shown in fig-
Each team leader prepares two range cards containing ure G-8 as A, B, and C of the first team, first squad’s
information on the extent of dead space and grazing FPL, respectively. To cover these three areas with
fire along the FPL and location of likely targets (see 50-meter by 50-meter barrages would take five bar-
figure 6-39). Both teams of the machine gun squad rages (A=1 barrage; B=2 barrages; C=2 barrages).
normally are assigned the same sector of fire, and they This would use all or most of the barrages at the
fire the same FPL. Thus, each FPL is a double band of company’s disposal.
___________________________________________________________________
Figure G-7. Walking the FPL.

___________________________________________________________________________________________________
G-6 MCWP 3-15.1
In discussing the mortar barrage requirements with the first squad’s FPL barrage recommendation to the
the first squad leader, the section leader sees that dead company commander for approval.
space area C is covered by the FPL of the second
squad (see figure G-9), reducing the first squad’s mor-
tar barrage requirement to two. The section leader
then discusses the barrage requirements of all three
squads with the platoon commander who, after
reviewing the first squad’s range and pace cards,
decides that dead space A, because of the coverage
provided by the second team of the first squad, its
proximity to friendly troops, and its relatively small
size, can be covered adequately by a fire team sector
of fire with the automatic rifle PDF firing into the
dead space. (See figure G-10). The coverage of dead
space area B by the second team, first squad is better
than that provided by the first squad. This dead space,
although also covered by an automatic rifle PDF, is
wide enough (76 meters) to warrant coverage by two Figure G-8. Determining Dead Space.
mortar barrages. The platoon commander will submit
Figure G-9. Dead Space Covered by Direct Fire.

___________________________________________________________________
Figure G-10. Positioning of Mortar Barrages.

Appendix H
Acronyms and Abbreviations
AE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .angle of elevation m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meter

AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . angle of site mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . millimeter
MMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . medium machine gun
BFA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank firing adapter mph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . miles per hour
BZO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . battlesight zero
NATO . . . . . . North Atlantic Treaty Organization
CAAT . . . . . . . . . . . . .combined antiarmor teams NBC . . . . . . . . .nuclear, biological, and chemical
cal.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .caliber NCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .noncommissioned officer
CLP . . . . . . . . cleaner, lubricant, and preservative NVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .night vision equipment
cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .centimeter NVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .night vision goggle
C4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .composition 4
DODAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . Department of Defense OP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . observation post

Ammunition Code OT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . observer-target
FEBA . . . . . . . . . .forward edge of the battle area PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . principal direction of fire
FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . forward observer
FPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . final protective line
QE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . quadrant of elevation
GUN-TGT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gun-target
RBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rifle bore cleaner
HE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high explosive
HEDP . . . . . . . . . . . .high explosive dual purpose SAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . squad automatic weapon
HMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . heavy machine gun SLAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . sabot light armor penetrator
HMMWV . . . . . . . . .high mobility, multipurpose SLAP-T. . . . . .sabot light armor penetrator-tracer
wheeled vehicle
IAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . infrared aim light T&E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . traversing and elevating

IAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .initial aiming point TGT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target
ISWS . . . . . . . . . . individual served weapon sight TOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .terrain-observer-gun
LMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .light machine gun VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vertical interval

LSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . liquid solvent agent
LSA . . . . . . . . . lubricant oil, weapons, semi-fluid WERM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . width equals range
LSA-T . . . . . .liquid solvent agent with TeflonTM times mils
LAW . . . . . . . . . . . lubricating oil arctic weapons
Appendix I
References and Related Publications
Field Manuals (FMs)

23-14 M249 Light Machine Gun in the Automatic Rifle Role.
23-27 MK19, 40-MM Grenade Machine Gun MOD 3
23-65 Browning Machine Gun, Caliber .50 HB, M2
3-5 NBC Decontamination
44-2 Air Defense Artillery Employment Automatic Weapons M42/M55
44-80 Visual Aircraft Recognition
Technical Manuals (TMs)

08521A-10/1A Machine Gun 40mm MK19 MOD 3
08670A-10/1A M240 Machine Gun 7.62 mm (with change 1-3)
08670B-23&P/2 M240G Machine Gun 7.62mm (1005-01-359-2714)
Supplement _1
08686A-13&P/1 Machine Gun Mount MK64
9-1005-201-10 Operator's Manual for Machine Gun, 5.56MM, M249 W/Equipment
(NSN 1005-01-127-7510) (EIC: 4BG) (TM-08671A-10/1)
9-1005-213-10 Operator's Manual for Machine Guns, Caliber .50; Browning, M2, Heavy Barrel
Flexible, W/E (NSN 1005-00-322-9715) (EIC: 4AG) M48 Turret Type
(1005-00-957-3893) (EIC: 4BB) Soft Mount (1005-LL-H11-5877) (Navy)
Fixed Type Right Hand Feed (1005-00-122-9339) (Navy) Fixed Type Left Hand
Feed (1005-00-122-9368) (Navy) Mounts, Machine Gun, Caliber .50, M3 Tripod
W/E (1005-00-322-9716) (EIC: 4EA) M63 Antiaircraft W/E (1005-00-673-3246)
(EIC: 4EC) (TM 02498A-10/1; TO 11W2-6-3-161; SW361-AB-MMO-010)
9-1005-245-14 Operator, Organizational, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance
Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists (Including Depot
Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools) Various Machine Gun Mounts and
Combinations Used on Tactical and Armored Vehicle Mounts, Machine Gun
1005-774-6861, 1005-854-4463 (M142), 1005-704-6650, 1005-836-7286,
1005-706-8880, 1005-654-0733, 1005-659-0045, Mounts, Machine Gun M48
Tank Cupola 1005-736-4875, 1005-834-6119; Pedestal, Gun Mounts
1005-419-7041 (m4), 1005-736-0400 (M31A1), 1005-706-9767 (M31C);
Mounts, Gun Ring Machine Gun 1005-317-2425 (M36), 1005-317-2427
(M36A1), 1005-317-2428 (M66), 1005-702-8676 (M68), 1005-797-6451
(M68E1), 1005-797-6450 (M68E1 w/supports), 1005-219-8135 (M81),
1005-783-5494 (M548 Carrier), 1005-774-6836 (M548 Carrier) (Reprinted
w/Basic Incl C1)
I-2 _____________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1
Technical Manuals (TMs) (Continued)

9-1010-231-13&P (O) Operator's, Organization and Intermediate Maintenance with Repair Parts
List and Components List Mount, Machine Gun, MK 64; MOD 4
(NSN 1010-01-128-4934); MOD 5 (1010-01-126-9063); MOD 6
(1010-01-179-7616); MOD 7 (1010-01-179-7616); MOD 8 (1010-01-179-7615);
Used with Machine Gun, MK19 MOD 3, 40MM Machine Gun, M2, Caliber .50
Machine Gun, M60, 7.62MM Machine Gun, M60E3 7.62MM (TO 11W2-8-32-4;
SW 363-D4-MMM-010/MK 64 TM 08686A-13&P1)
11-5855-214-10 Operator's Manual for Night Vision Sight, Crew Served Weapon,
AN/TVS-5 (NSN 5855-00-629-5327)
11-5855-238-10 Operator's Manual for Night Vision Goggles Ground Use: AN/PVS-5 and
AN/PVS-5A (NSN 5855-00-150-1820) (EIC: IPD) AN/PVS-5B
(5855-01-228-0938) (EIC: IPV) AN/PVS-5C (5855-01-288-0936) (EIC: IPU)
Aviation Use
Fleet Marine Force Reference Publications (FMFRPs)

12-2 Infantry in Battle
12-6 Infantry Operations and Weapons Usage in Korea, Winter of 1950-51
12-34-I History of the U.S. Marine Corps Operations in Word War II: Pearl Harbor to
Guadalcanal, Volume I
12-34-III History of the U.S. Marine Corps Operations in Word War II: Pearl Harbor to
Guadalcanal, Volume III
Miscellaneous
Berry, Henry, Hey Mac, Where Ya Been? Living Memories of the U.S. Marines in the Korean War, St. Martin's
Press, New York, 1988
Heinl, Robert Debs, Jr., Victory at High Tide: The Inchon-Seoul Campagin, J.B. Lippincott Company, Philadel-
phia and New York, 1968
Shaw, Henry I., First Offensive: The Marine Campaign for Guadalcanal, Marines in World War II Commemora-
tive Series, Marine Corps Historical Center, Washington D.C., 1992
kç íÉ ë
1. FMFRP 12-2, Infantry In Battle, p. 249.
2. Ibid, p. 239.
3. Ibid, p. 239.
4. Ibid, p. 239.
5. Ibid, p. 248.
6. Henry Berry, Hey Mac, Where Ya Been? Living Memories of the U.S. Marines in the
Korean War, (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1988), pp. 319–320.
7. Henry I. Shaw, First Offensive: The Marine Campaign for Guadalcanal, Marines in World
War II Commemorative Series (Washington D.C.: U.S. Marine Corps Historical Center, 1992)
pp. 37 and 38.
8. FMFRP 12-34-III, History of the U.S. Marine Corps Operations in World War II: Central
Pacific Drive, p.390.
9. Robert Debs Heinl, Jr., Victory At High Tide: The Inchon-Seoul Campaign (Washington
D.C.: The Nautical & Aviation Publishing Company of America, 1984) p. 130.
10. FMFRP 12-34-I, History of the U.S. Marine Corps Operations in World War II: Pearl Har-
bor to Guadalcanal, p. 144.

Usmc MCWP 3-15-1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Usmc MCWP 3-15-1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Usmc MCWP 3-15-1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

How are machine guns maintained and employed by the U.S. Marine Corps?

How are machine guns maintained and employed by the U.S. Marine Corps?

What are the principles and techniques provided for engaging and destroying enemy targets?

What are the principles and techniques provided for engaging and destroying enemy targets?

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com on 2011-05-19T4:03:20.

Machine Guns and Machine

U.S. Marine Corps

PCN 143 000014 00

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY

PAUL K. VAN RIPER

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

Chapter 1. Introduction to Machine Guns

Chapter 2. Machine Gun, Light, Squad Automatic Weapon, M249

Chapter 3. Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240G

Chapter 4. Machine Gun, Caliber .50, Browning, M2HB

Chapter 5. Machine Gun, 40mm, MK-19 MOD 3

Chapter 6. Employment and Gunnery

INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE GUNS

—FMFRP 12-2, Infantry In Battle1

—FMFRP 12-2, Infantry In Battle2

Desert Storm, Kuwait

Introduction to Machine Guns

1001. History “The machine gun acts by fire alone; move-

Figure 1-1. Marine Automatic Rifleman, Operation Desert Shield.

1003. Machine Gun Employment 1004. Principles of Machine Gun

MACHINE GUN, LIGHT, SQUAD AUTOMATIC WEAPON, M249

Korea, South Bank of the Soyang Gang River

2-29 Folding of Bipod Under the Handguard 2-47 Loading a Magazine

MACHINE GUN, LIGHT, SQUAD AUTOMATIC WEAPON, M249

Figure 2-1. The SAW (Left and Right Sides).

ordnance personnel. Each automatic rifleman and 2102. Sights

Figure 2-2. Front and Rear Sights.

Figure 2-3. Safety.

2201. General Disassembly CAUTION

Raise the cover and feed mechanism assembly and

Figure 2-4. Five Main Groups (General Assembly).

2-10 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1

Figure 2-5. Clearing Procedures.

Figure 2-5. Clearing Procedures—Continued.

2-12 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1

Figure 2-6. Removing the Operating Group.

c. Removing the Barrel Group. The barrel group

Figure 2-8. Removing the Buttstock and

e. Removing the Trigger Group. To separate the

To remove the barrel from the receiver, close the

d. Removing the Buttstock and Buffer Group.

2-14 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1

Figure 2-9. Removing the Trigger Group

Figure 2-11. Replacing the Buttstock and

Figure 2-12. Replacing the Barrel Group.

e. Conducting a Function Check. A function

2-16 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1

Figure 2-14. Separating the Operating Group.

Figure 2-15. Operating Group, Detailed Disassembled.

Figure 2-16. Removing the Heat Shield.

2-18 ___________________________________________________________________________________________________ MCWP 3-15.1

Figure 2-17. Removing the Collar.

Replace the heat shield by placing the hook end of

(1) Detailed disassembly